septa concourse improvements

SEPTA Concourse Improvements

Stage 2 Phase 1

Technical Specifications BID Package

October 16, 2015 PREPARED FOR

Southeastern Pennsylvania Transportation Authority

PREPARED BY

HNTB Corporation 1650 Arch Street Suite 1700 Philadelphia, PA 19103

SEPTA Concourse Improvements Stage 2 Phase 1

Bid Package Technical Specifications

SOUTHEASTERN PENNSYLVANIA TRANSPORTATION AUTHORITY CONCOURSE IMPROVEMENTS - STAGE 2 PHASE 1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Table of Contents

Section Description

01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

01011 SUMMARY OF PROJECT

01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS

01041 PROJECT COORDINATION

01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING

01050 FIELD ENGINEERING

01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND SAFETY

01066 SUBWAY/ELEVATED SAFETY REQUIRMENTS

01069 LIGHT RAIL TUNNEL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

01100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES

01111 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

01112 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

01200 PROJECT PROGRESS MEETINGS

01300 SUBMITTALS

01305 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOGRAPHS

01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01410 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

01420 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

01505 MOBILIZATION

01510 MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT AND RESTORATION OF EXISITNG UTILITY FACILITIES

01520 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

01570 MAINTENANCE/PROTECTION OF VEHICLES, PEDESTRICANS AND PASSENGERS

October 16, 2015 Page 1



Section Description

01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE

01590 SEPTA FIELD OFFICE

01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

01710 FINAL CLEANING

01720 PROJECT AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS

01810 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS

01830 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02086 HANDLING AND DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED SOILS

02160 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

02200 EARTHWORK

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03350 CONCRETE FINISHING

03930 CONCRETE REHABILITATION

04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

04815 GLASS BLOCK ASSEMBLIES

05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

05550 STAIR TREADS AND NOSING

05580 COLUMN COVERS

05900 METAL RESTORATION AND CLEANING

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

07420 METAL WALL PANELS

07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

07840 FIRE STOPPING




Section Description

07841 JOINT FIRE STOPPING

07900 JOINT SEALERS

08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08310 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08700 HARDWARE

08873 DECORATIVE FILMS

09100 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

09290 GYPSUM BOARD

09300 TILE

09410 TERRAZZO RESTORATION

09545 SPECIAL CEILING SURFACES

09705 EPOXY RESIN FLOORING

09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09902 HOT DIP GALVANIZED AND PAINTED STEEL

10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES

13280 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

13285 LEAD PAINT ABATEMENT AND APPENDIX A

15060 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS

15070 VIBRATION ISOLATION

15083 PIPE INSULATION

15084 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15205 PIPING SYSTEMS

15431 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15432 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

16075 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16110 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS




Section Description

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

16130 WIRING DEVICES

16140 WIRE CONNECTION ACCESSORIES

16410 CIRCUIT BREAKERS, PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS

16420 GROUNDING AND BONDING

16500 LIGHTING


October 16, 2015 Concourse Improvements – Stage 2 – Phase 1 Bid Package

v.15-04 Summary Of Work 01010-1

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This specification covers work related for the Concourse Improvements Project – Stage 2 Phase 1 Project. The work will be executed through multiple prime contracts representing significant elements of work for each Contractor. The Work shall be performed concurrently and in close coordination with the respective Prime Contractors listed in these construction documents, and possibly other trades working at the site. The Contractors for this project include:

1. Contract or for General Construction Work (to be known as "General

Contractor" - GC).

2. Contract or for Mechanical Construction Work (to be known as "Mechanical Contractor" - MC).

3. Contract or for Electrical Construction Work (to be known as "Electrical

Contractor" - EC). 4. The General Contractor shall be designated the coordinating contractor.

1.02 RELATED WORK:

Agreement

Section 01011: Summary of Project

Section 01025: Measurement and Payment

Section 01041: Project Coordination

Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety

Section 01066: Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements

Section 01400: Quality Requirements

Section 01410: Testing and Inspection Services



1.03 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Each prime contractor will assume responsibility for executing a quality control and quality assurance program. This program’s basic form will be specified in the Quality Control Plan as submitted under Section 01400 and will include the tests & inspections called for in the technical sections of the specifications. Each prime contractor shall be responsible for requiring all subcontractors and suppliers to adhere to the quality assurance program and participate in quality assurance activities.

B. If a project is governed by “Buy America” requirements, SEPTA will require documentation to confirm the country of origin of all applicable products and materials. Each prime contractor is responsible for communicating Buy America requirements to the subcontractors and suppliers. The lack of sufficient documentation may be grounds for rejecting a product or material.

C. Quality activities will be documented by the contractor. SEPTA may audit the contractor’s quality assurance and quality control activities. Each prime contractor will make his and his subcontractor’s, applicable documentation available to SEPTA.

D. Each prime contractor, and their subcontractors, is required to cooperate fully with testing and inspection activities carried out by SEPTA and its agents. The contractor will provide the SEPTA PM with adequate (as determined by the SEPTA PM) notification, for all activities which require testing and/or inspection. For all inspections and testing required by code, work may not proceed until this testing and inspection has been completed.

E. Once a product or material has been accepted through the Submittal process, no substitution of this material or product will be allowed without resubmitting it following the provisions of Section 01300. SEPTA reserves the right to require removal of any non-reviewed material and product.

1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, supervision, administration and transportation, and perform all labor and services necessary to furnish, deliver, construct, install, connect and/or to interconnect and test as required to complete all work described in the Specifications and indicated in the Contract Drawings.

Each contractor shall be aware of, and be familiar with, the responsibilities and work of the other contractors especially with regard to the sections of Division 1, which pertain to all contracts. In addition to the responsibilities shared by each prime contractor, the coordinating contractor shall have additional responsibilities as specified in the contract documents.



B. Each contractor is responsible for securing and paying for all necessary permits and approvals required to complete the work. No work may commence on site without securing and paying for the necessary approvals including but not limited to:

1. Permits 2. Governmental Fees 3. Licenses

C. SEPTA Notification

1. Give written notices necessary for, and incidental to, the due and lawful prosecution of the Work.

2. Provide 5 days notification to SEPTA for all construction work which requires observation and/or testing.

3. Notify the Project Manager at least 14 days in advance of the date the individual construction stages and/or major elements will be fully complete and ready for inspection.

4. Notify the Project Manager at least 14 days in advance of the date the entire work will be substantially complete and ready for inspection.

5. Notify the Project Manager at least 14 days in advance of the date the entire work will be complete and ready for final acceptance inspection

D. Utility Notification

Known existing utilities may be indicated on the Contract Drawings but the contractor may not interpret this information as either complete or accurate. Regardless of those shown on the drawings, the contractor must identify and verify the location of all existing utilities prior to working by following applicable regulations and procedures, such as contacting the PA One Call system and asking SEPTA personnel to identify utilities at the site.

The contractor shall determine ownership of all utilities and notify utility owners prior to intended start work date. Deliver a copy of this notice to the Project Manager within 72 hours of the submittal of the notification.

The following Serial Numbers have been assigned to this project:

20152292503-000 NEW XCAV DSGN 20152292502-000 NEW XCAV DSGN

Design Contact Information

COMPANY: CROWN CASTLE

ADDRESS: 2000 CORPORATE DR

CANONSBURG, PA 15317



CONTACT: BRYANT LOWE

EMAIL: [email protected]

COMPANY: AT&T ATLANTA

ADDRESS: 2315 SALEM RD F11

CONYERS, GA 30013

CONTACT: NANCY SPENCE


COMPANY: COMCAST CABLEVISION

ADDRESS: 4400 WAYNE AVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19140

CONTACT: BOB HARVEY


COMPANY: AT&T LOCAL SERVICES

ADDRESS: 2315 SALEM RD F11

CONYERS, GA 30013

CONTACT: NANCY SPENCE


COMPANY: BRIDGEPORT BOROUGH OF

ADDRESS: 4TH AND MILL ST

PO BOX 148

BRIDGEPORT, PA 19405

CONTACT: DON CURLEY

COMPANY: USIC

ADDRESS: 450 S HENDERSON RD SUITE B

KING OF PRUSSIA, PA 19406

CONTACT: NIKKIA SIMPKINS


COMPANY: LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS LLC

ADDRESS: 1025 ELDORADO BLVD BLDG

BROOMFIELD, CO 80021

CONTACT: LEVEL 3 OPERATOR PERSONNEL


COMPANY: VERIZON BUSINESS FORMERLY MCI



ADDRESS: 2400 N GLENVILLE

RICHARDSON, TX 75082

CONTACT: DEAN BOYERS


COMPANY: PHILADELPHIA CITY WATER DEPARTMENT

ADDRESS: 1101 MARKET STREET

2ND FLOOR ARA TOWER


CONTACT: ERIC PONERT


COMPANY: ZAYO BANDWIDTH FORMERLY PPL TELCOM LLC

ADDRESS: 1060 HARDEES DR

UNIT H

ABERDEEN, MD 21001

CONTACT: GEORGE HUSS


COMPANY: PHILADELPHIA CITY DEPARTMENT OF STREETS

ADDRESS: 1401 JFK BLVD ROOM 940 MSB


CONTACT: JOSEPH KISIEL


COMPANY: PHILADELPHIA GAS WORKS

ADDRESS: 800 W MONTGOMERY AVE


CONTACT: JAMES BOCHANSKI

COMPANY: CENTURYLINK FORMERLY EMBARQ

ADDRESS: 700 W MINERAL AVE

GRID NO: UT00-D27.34

LITTLETON, CO 80120

CONTACT: GEORGE MCELVAIN


COMPANY: RCN TELECOM SERVICES INC

ADDRESS: 5508 NOR-BATH BLVD



NORTHAMPTON, PA 18067

CONTACT: KEVIN COCHRAN


COMPANY: COMCAST CABLEVISION

ADDRESS: 4400 WAYNE AVE


CONTACT: BOB HARVEY


COMPANY: SOUTHEASTERN PA TRANSPORTATION AUTHORITY

ADDRESS: 1234 MARKET ST 12TH FL


CONTACT: DAVID MONTVYDAS


COMPANY: VEOLIA ENERGY PHILADELPHIA, INC.

ADDRESS: 2600 CHRISTIAN STREET


CONTACT: WILLIAM LINDQUIST


COMPANY: VERIZON PENNSYLVANIA LLC

ADDRESS: 15 MONTGOMERY AVE, FLOOR 2

PITTSBURGH, PA 15212

CONTACT: DEBORAH BARUM


E. Protection and Repair of the Work and Adjacent Property

1. Prior to the commencement of Work, the contractor and the SEPTA Project Manager shall examine the site and document the condition of all areas not intended to be changed by the project. Depending on the scope of work, this may include features such as sidewalks, driveways, roadways, stairways, ramps, adjoining corridors and adjacent facilities.

2. The contractor must repair any damage to property caused, directly or indirectly, by the actions of the contractor to the satisfaction of the SEPTA PM (and property owner if the damage is to property not owned by SEPTA) and at no cost to SEPTA.

3. Until Final Acceptance of the Work by SEPTA, the Contractor(s) shall be responsible for maintaining the executed work in its finished condition as



determined by the SEPTA PM. All work shall be restored to its finished condition prior to final acceptance at no expense to SEPTA.

F. Support of Existing Structures & Right of Way

1. Existing structures, adjacent to the project work area, must be supported adequately utilizing underpinning, shoring and other temporary stabilization measures. A plan to execute this temporary support and stabilization must be approved by the SEPTA PM prior to any excavation and selective demolition commencing. At the discretion of the SEPTA PM, the contractor may be required to have this plan prepared and sealed by a licensed engineer in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

2. Under no circumstances excavate in the vicinity of track, embankment and right-of way without the prior approval of the SEPTA PM.

G. Contractor’s Field Staff

1. The Superintendent shall have demonstrated competency in Work with below grade structures and transit systems.

2. Safety Officer: The Contractor shall assign a designated on-site Safety Officer. The Superintendent may perform the duties of the Safety Officer in addition to their own. The presence of the Safety Officer at the site is mandatory while work is being performed.

3. Quality Manager: The Contractor shall assign a Quality Manager for the duration of the work. The Superintendent may not perform the duties of the Quality Manager in addition to their own. For a definition of the responsibilities of this position see section 01400.

4. Staff Qualifications

The work of this contract requires specified experience in description of the specialized work of the contract. The positions referenced above are considered key personnel and the review of their resumes and experience is a responsibility requirement under paragraph 4d 6) of the Instructions to Bidders. The lowest bidder shall furnish SEPTA with the resumes for the people who will hold the above positions within five (5) days of receipt of SEPTA’s written request. If, in the course of the work, these individuals are proposed to be replaced by the Contractor and/or SEPTA deems that their work is no longer satisfactory, the terms of the Paragraph VIII K of the Agreement will be invoked.

H. SEPTA Construction Sustainability Policies



SEPTA has adopted a series of sustainability policies which it expects its contractors to follow. In addition to items identified in Specification Section 01112 – Sustainable Design Requirements sustainability strategies include the following:

a. Building Site Waste Management - Within 10 days of Notice To Proceed, and before any site work begins, the contractor shall submit a building site waste management plan. The plan shall specify which site debris shall be recycled, reused or otherwise diverted. The goal of this plan shall be to reuse or salvage 75% of the land clearing debris including rock, trees, stumps and associated vegetation and 100% of excavated soils. Any materials which are disposed of off-site must meet all applicable regulations and be specifically approved by the SEPTA project manager. For material which is disposed of off-site, the contractor will be responsible for chain of custody documentation.

b. Material and Waste Management – Within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and before any site work begins, the contractor shall submit a construction material and waste management plan. The plan shall specify which construction and demolition materials shall be recycled, reused or otherwise diverted. The goal of this plan shall be to divert 50% of nonhazardous materials and waste (measured by weight or volume) from landfills unless the local municipality has designated a greater amount.

c. Sustainability documentation – All sustainability strategies which are fulfilled by the contractor’s actions must be documented to the satisfaction of the SEPTA project manager.

1.05 SEPTA RESPONSIBILITIES

A. SEPTA shall, furnish free of charge to the Contractor, 1 electronic and 3 complete sets of the Contract Documents including full size Contract Drawings, Specifications and Addenda, and/or conformed Contract Documents. Additional copies are available from Project Manager at cost of reproduction.

B. SEPTA Force Account C. SEPTA Equipment

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF WORKSITE

A. Site availability and access to worksite



1. The Contractor(s) shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, and permits.

2. Unless areas are closed as part of the phased work, keep existing driveways, entrances and exits serving the site, and facilities on the site, clear and available at all times.

3. Material must remain in preapproved storage areas. The contractor shall not interfere with SEPTA or public circulation by the storage or staging of equipment or material in unapproved areas. Even for approved areas, SEPTA reserves the right to require the contractor to relocate equipment or material immediately and at any time even if the current location has been previously approved.

4. Keep the predefined portions of the worksite available for the SEPTA's operations during the construction period as noted in the construction phasing plan and other submittals. SEPTA reserves the right to take control and occupancy of any part of the work at any time without prior notice.

B. Storage of materials and equipment and deterring vandalism

1. Consider the safety of the Work, and that of people and property on and adjacent to the worksite, when determining amount, location, movement, installation, and use of materials and equipment on worksite. All storage and staging areas must be approved by the SEPTA PM.

2. Do not load finished Work with equipment and products that would endanger the integrity of the finished Work.

3. Move stored products as often as necessary if it interferes with foreseeable operations of SEPTA, public and private utilities, and other Contractors at no additional expense to SEPTA. Security of stored materials shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility. Secure additional storage and work areas if needed for construction operations at no additional expense to SEPTA.

4. The contractor shall take precautions to prevent vandals from placing loose construction debris, supplies and equipment into positions that might foul the track or otherwise interfere with the operation of SEPTA vehicles. These steps shall include, but not be limited to, securing movable items, like construction fencing and scaffolding, and storing debris and material in fenced & locked enclosures.

5. Failure to take adequate steps may result in the contractor having to go to the job site and secure these materials during non-construction hours, at no cost to SEPTA. SEPTA will hold the contractor responsible for any damage or injury caused, or contributed to, by failure to take these precautions effectively.

C. Protection of the public & SEPTA



1. Protection of the general public and SEPTA operations from construction-related activities shall always have the highest priority. Any work on streets or access ways which could affect traffic or pedestrian access must receive prior approval by SEPTA and other agencies as required by law. Conduct work on streets and access ways on SEPTA property in a manner, which will ensure that pedestrian and vehicular traffic will not be obstructed to the least possible degree. Employ appropriately trained and authorized flagmen where required by ordinance or to create a safe job site.

D. Construction operations requiring SEPTA service interruptions and/or utility

interruptions must meet the following requirements:

1. Should any temporary disruption of SEPTA's operations and/or use of the electric, water or telephone utilities at such site be necessary, it will be undertaken only pursuant to reasonable notices (not less than 21 days) given to the Project Manager and shall not continue beyond the previously agreed-upon period, without further written concurrence from SEPTA.

1.07 SEPTA OPERATIONAL CONSTRAINTS

A. Holiday Service - SEPTA will prohibit service shut downs, and diversions on certain Holidays and Holiday weekends. Holidays include Memorial Day weekend, the Welcome America Celebration one week before the Fourth of July weekend, the Fourth of July (and the Fourth of July weekend, if applicable), and Labor Day weekend. Outages, shutdowns and diversions shall not be permitted during the “Holiday Season” which is defined as the period starting 5:01 am on the Wednesday before Thanksgiving Day until January 2, inclusive.

B. SEPTA reserves the right to return any track to service without prior notification at any time and make other adjustments as needed to facilitate operations.

1.08 WORK SEQUENCE AND CONSTRUCTION PHASING

A. The work sequence for the project is as follows:

1. Section 1: includes Center Square Corridor, Oculus and South Penn (West) Corridor.

2. Section 2: includes a portion of South Broad and Juniper Corridor. 3. Section 3: includes a portion of Juniper Corridor, Wanamaker Node and

Market Street East (South) Corridor. 4. Section 4: includes Structural repairs at 12th and Market at Concourse



level.

B. The actual construction activities shall not begin until:

1. The Contractor provides a written plan (site specific work plan) to SEPTA indicating impact to passenger flow and SEPTA operations. Such plan shall include remedial solutions acceptable to SEPTA.

2. The plan is approved in writing by SEPTA. Contractor shall be

responsible for revision and resubmittal of the plan until it is approved by SEPTA.

C. If the plan calls for the contractor to gain access to track or facilities,

operational constraints may delay actual occupancy, or require the contractor to give up occupancy early, for a period usually not exceeding one hour.

Before starting work on a construction phase, the Contractor may submit a written request to SEPTA to amend or adjust the phasing plan.

1.09 SEPTA OCCUPANCY AND USE A. Portions of the Work may be placed in operation by SEPTA in advance of the

completion of all Work. Occupancy and/or utilization of parts of the Work by SEPTA will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper integrated completion of all parts of the Work, nor shall it act to relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under the Contract Documents for warranty of the Work.

1.10 CONCURRENT OR FUTURE WORK

A. Contractor shall coordinate with SEPTA PM for other concurrent or future work that may impact construction, sequencing, and other item affecting SEPTA maintenance and operation. Below is a list of some notable project in or adjacent to project site.

1. SEPTA security enhancements

i. Emergency Call Box Installation ii. Surveillance Upgrades

2. 15th Street Station Project

3. City Hall Station Project

1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS



A. The existing conditions represented in the Contract Drawings are based on

the best available information obtained from one or any combination of the following sources: field survey, as-built documents, reference drawings, and/or visual investigation.

B. The contractor is responsible for verifying the conditions presented. If verified conditions are close to those represented on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall, in addition to reporting the verification to the Project Manager, proceed with the Work at no additional cost to SEPTA. If conditions are significantly different to those presented on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall, in addition to reporting the verification to the Project Manager, submit a detailed scheme and associated cost for completing the required work for review and comment. The Contractor shall allow 14 days for review and comment.

C. The Contract Documents establish specific criteria and standards of

performance. The Contractor shall use its discretion to determine means of compliance and is responsible for coordinating with other Contractors at the site in order to achieve compliance.

END OF SECTION

v.15-04 Summary Of Project 01011-1

SECTION 01011 - SUMMARY OF PROJECT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work Included:

1. General Contractor (GC):

a. As defined within the Contract Documents, the GC is responsible for the demolition and removal of the select flooring, wall and ceiling finishes; construction, assembly and installation of the architectural and structural components of the Project.

b. The GC is designated as the Coordinating Contractor and will be responsible to ensure the all work will be closely coordinated with the work of the MC, EC and SEPTA forces.

2. Mechanical Contractor (MC):

a. As defined within the Contract Documents, the MC is responsible for work including, but not limited to: drain relocation and associative plumbing work to complete the system, and the installation of new supply water line

3. Electrical Contractor (EC):

a. As defined within the Contract Documents, the EC is responsible for the work including, but not limited to: removal of existing lighting and power conduit/wiring back to source and the installation of new lighting and power receptacles.

b. EC will be responsible for the coordination with the SEPTA PM the removal of all communication systems, conduits and wiring which run along the project. EC will be responsible for the installation of empty conduits as defined in the Contract Documents for future installation by SEPTA forces. Final location of devices and junctions boxes will need to be fully coordinated between SEPTA PM, the Coordinating Contractor and the EC.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Section 01010: Summary of Work Section 01041: Project Coordination Division 15: For Basic Mechanical Requirements Division 16: For Basic Electrical Requirements 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE AND PROCEDURAL SECTIONS (applicable to all

contractors)

Agreement and Exhibit III scheduling requirements.


Section 01025: Measurement and Payments

Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Related Safety

Section 01066: Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements

Section 01300: Submittals

Section 01400: Quality Requirements

Section 01410: Testing and Inspection Services

Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls

Section 01600: Material and Equipment

Section 01700: Contract Close Out

1.05 GENERAL CONTRACTOR (GC)

A. Refer specific responsibilities of the GC as defined in Division 1, such as, but not limited to:

Section 01050: Field Engineering Section 01111: Construction Waste Management & Disposal Section 01112: Sustainable Design Requirements Section 01510: Maintenance, Support and Restoration of Existing Utilities

Facilities

Section 01550: Site Access Section 01560: Temporary Controls, e.g. Daily Cleaning and Pest Control

Section 01570: Maintenance and Protection of Vehicles, Pedestrians, and

Passengers

B. The Work Section 02070: Selective Demolition Section 02086: Handling and Disposal of Contaminated Soils Section 02160: Excavation Support and Protection Section 02200: Earthwork Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03350: Concrete Finishing Section 03930: Concrete Rehabilitation


Section 04220: Concrete Masonry Units Section 04815: Glass Block Assemblies Section 05400: Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 05500: Metal Fabrications Section 05520: Handrails and Railings Section 05550: Stair Trends and Nosing Section 05580: Column Covers Section 05900: Metal Restoration and Cleaning Section 06100: Rough Carpentry Section 07420: Metal Wall Panels Section 07600: Flashing & Sheet Metal Section 07840: Fire Stopping Section 07841: Joint Firestopping Section 07900: Joint Sealers Section 08100: Metal Doors and Frames Section 08310: Access Doors and Frames Section 08700: Hardware Section 08800: Glazing Section 08873: Decorative Films Section 09100: Metal Support Assemblies Section 09300: Tile Section 09410: Terrazzo Restoration Section 09545: Special Ceiling Surfaces Section 09705: Epoxy Resin Flooring Section 09900: Paints and Coating Section 09902: Hot Dip Galvanized and Painted Steel Section 09965: Graffiti Resistance Coatings


Section 10400: Identifying Devices Section 13280: Asbestos Abatement Section 13285: Lead Paint Abatement

C. Maintenance

As directed by SEPTA

1.06 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR (MC)



Facilities


Section 01570: Maintenance and Protection of Vehicles, Pedestrians, and

Passengers

B. The Work Section 02070: Selective Demolition Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 13280: Asbestos Abatement Section 13285: Lead Paint Abatement Section 15060: Hangers and Supports Section 15070: Vibration Isolation Section 15083: Pipe Insulation Section 15084: Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping Section 15205: Piping Systems


Section 15431: Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Section 15432: Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

C. Maintenance


1.07 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (EC)



Facilities


Section 01570: Maintenance and Protection of Vehicles, Pedestrians, and Passengers

B. The Work

Section 02070: Selective Demolition Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 13280: Asbestos Abatement Section 13285: Lead Paint Abatement Section 15084: Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping Section 16050: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 16075: Identification of Electrical Systems Section 16110: Raceway, Boxes, and Cabinets Section 16120: Conductors and Cables Section 16130: Wiring and Control Devices


Section 16140: Wire Connection Accessories Section 16410: Circuit Breakers, Panel Boards, and Load Centers Section 16420: Grounding and Bonding Section 16500: Lighting

C. Maintenance


END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Measurement and Payments 01025-1

SECTION 01025 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies general requirements for measurement of quantities and schedule of values required to process payment applications according to the provisions set forth in the Agreement.

B. Provide a detailed breakdown of the Contract Sum showing values allocated

to each of the various parts of the Work, as specified herein, and as required by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK: Exhibit III of the Agreement 1.03 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES

The Work performed under the Contract will not be measured, except to establish percentage of completion for each value line payment item.

1.04 SCOPE OF PAYMENT

Payment for work performed under the Contract will be paid in accordance with the agreement, for the:

Concourse Improvements – Stage 2 Phase 1 Complete in place and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.06 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS

Submit a schedule of values in accordance with the requirements specified in the Agreement.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Measurement and Payments 01025-2

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


v.15-04 Project Coordination 01041-1

SECTION 01041 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This specification covers project coordination responsibilities of each separate Contractor for this Project.

1. Throughout the progress of the Work, perform coordination

responsibilities as defined herein and as noted in related sections of the Specification.

2. Coordinate the Work of its own employees and subcontractor(s).

3. Coordinate the work with the Work of other Contractor(s).

4. Expedite coordination process to assure compliance with the project

schedule. 1.02 RELATED WORK:

A. Agreement and Exhibit III B. Division 1:

1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work

2. Section 01011 - Summary of Project

3. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching

4. Section 01060 - Regulatory Requirements and Safety

5. Section 01066 – Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements

6. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements

7. Section 01410 – Testing and Inspection Services

C. Technical Section

Division 15: For Basic Mechanical Requirements Division 16: For Basic Electrical Requirements 1.03 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

A. The Coordinating Contractor, as designated under Exhibit III of the Agreement and Section 01011, is hereby assigned the full responsibility



to ensure that the work to be performed by other Separate Contractors under this Project is coordinated in a manner to eliminate any negative impact to the schedule and any installation sequencing conflicts.

B. The Coordinating Contractor shall conduct regular construction

coordination meetings and prepare written memoranda regarding coordination activities. These memoranda shall include such items as required notices, resolution of conflicting activities reports and attendance at meetings. The coordinating contractor shall distribute these memoranda to each Contractor performing Work at the site and provide copies to SEPTA's Project Manager within 2days of the meeting date. In addition to other responsibilities noted elsewhere in this specification, the Coordinating Contractor shall:

1. Establish administrative procedures and distribute these procedures

to each Contractor within 2days from the date of the notice to proceed.

2. Arrange and conduct pre-installation meetings affecting all

Contractors at site, as may be required for quality control, access and sequencing.

3. Resolve schedule and installation conflicts among Separate

Contractors (see Section 1.04 below). 4. Establish control for the use of site, maintenance of traffic, and

Quality Control (QC) monitoring during construction.

5. Monitor and enforce general discipline among the contractors at site concerning safety, site protection and cleaning. The Coordinating Contractor is responsible for coordinating and monitoring activities among the Separate Contractors to secure, protect and waterproof unfinished and exposed work.

6. Inform SEPTA’s PM of the time and place of each construction

coordination and pre-installation meeting. SEPTA may elect to have a PM’s representative present.

1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS AMONG CONTRACTORS

A. All Contractors are alerted to the importance of coordination and cooperation among themselves. It is essential to the expeditious and accurate completion of this project that the Contractors meet at an early stage in the work for the purpose of allocating their construction space requirements.

B. In such areas where their installations are in close proximity, or are likely to be in conflict or interfere with one another, it is mandatory that the Coordinating Contractor set up regular meetings as shop drawings are developed. The meetings shall be for the purpose of modifying work schedules to adjust for conflicts and to arrive at an orderly sequence of operations agreeable to all Contractors so delays may be avoided. The meetings are also intended to determine the need to prepare coordination drawings for the use and guidance of each Contractor.



C. The meetings will be arranged through and managed by, the Coordinating Contractor, and shall be separate from, and in addition to, the regular job progress meetings. If it is desired that the Architect/Engineer be present at such meetings, a request to this effect should be directed to SEPTA’s Project Manager with at least 3 day’s notice. Unless specifically excused by the Coordinating Contractor, attendance by all of the separate contractors and their subcontractors/vendors (as needed) is mandatory. The Contractors’ representatives at the meetings shall have the competence and authority to make any necessary decisions and their statements shall commit the Contractors to the agreed procedures, sequence of operations and time schedules.

1.05 FIELD COORDINATION AMONG CONTRACTORS

A. In deciding construction conflicts in the field, the following is the order of priority for construction space (Note – Finished ceiling heights to be maintained as indicated on the contract documents):

1st - Ductwork

2nd - Fire Protection Piping

3rd - Other Piping

4th - Electrical Conduit

B. If a structure and/or enclosure is to be constructed over equipment, the Contractor shall deliver, set and protect equipment and materials before erection of confining enclosures. All equipment and materials so confined shall be inspected and tested prior to delivery. Should equipment or materials fail to meet the requirements of the specifications, the Contractor who did not provide the specified testing shall replace equipment or materials and pay all costs, including costs for modifications of completed areas that are required to provide passage.

C. Failure to be represented at any of these meetings shall subject the absent Contractor to liability for any and all damages, delays, costs of alterations, etc., which result from the fact that its representative was not present to coordinate its work with the other contractors.

D. If a conflict develops as a result of coordination failure of any Contractor, SEPTA will determine which Work shall be relocated or replaced, regardless of which was installed first, and the cost shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor(s) who failed to properly coordinate.

1.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination drawings must be prepared using field verified dimensions including clear dimensions, elevations, and locations relative to the building lines and/or baselines, and other adjacent structures. The Coordinating Contractor shall prepare the coordination drawings (in appropriate scale) of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. to be installed at site, and submit drawings to all other Contractors for review, comments, coordination and approval before any contractor begins work.

B. The Coordinating Contractor must insure that coordination drawings and



related shop drawings are submitted for SEPTA’s review after the drawings have been reviewed and approved by the other Separate Contractors. Coordinate work with architectural and structural drawings for exact space conditions; where not readily discernable, request information from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

C. Where procedures have been agreed upon and coordination drawings accepted by all Contractors concerned, the coordination drawing(s) must be transmitted to the SEPTA PM as a formal shop drawing, and it shall become binding upon all Contractors to follow the coordination drawings and procedures. A responsible supervisor from the staff of each Contractor shall supervise the work of his contract

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. The Coordinating Contractor is responsible to coordinate the Work of all separate Contractors at the site to eliminate any scheduling conflicts in the installation of each unit of work.

B. Each Contractor shall schedule and conduct pre-installation meetings with its

own subcontractors, suppliers, manufactures, fabricators and other affected trades for each unit of work affecting the quality or proper sequencing of Work, prior to the construction coordination meeting with the Coordinating Contractor.

C. Each contractor will provide SEPTA with 3 days notice for all pre-installation meetings so that SEPTA may participate if it chooses.

D. The pre-installation meetings must at least include following topics of

discussions:

1. Requirements of the Contract Documents and the approved shop drawings, product data and quality (see 1.04 above) control samples.

2. Coordination with other contractors. Possible installation conflicts and

resolutions with existing and new work not resolved during the construction coordination meetings.

3. Delivery Schedule and Site Access

4. Weather limitation

5. Space and access limitations

6. Regulatory requirements

7. Safety during installation

1.08 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AT SITE

A. There may be other active contracts (refer to Section 01010, Article 1.08) on



the project site engaged in activities not directly associated with the Work of this project. The Coordinating Contractor (CC) will consider these other contracts when developing the project schedule. SEPTA's PM and/or Architect/Engineer will be responsible for the day-to-day coordination of the Work of the other contractors as required.

B. SEPTA will not consider any time extension or monetary compensation for delays or damages as a result of the Coordinating Contractor’s failure to adequately document or communicate the other Contractor’s activities in the integrated schedule or the separate Contractor(s)’ failure to act on the information furnished by the CC. SEPTA may only consider a time extension to the Contract if it is documented by the CC, to the satisfaction of SEPTA that the Contractor has responsibly complied with these coordination requirements.

C. If the damage to the project's Work occurs as a result of the other contractor’s activities, the Contractor shall promptly settle the matter with the other Contractor to avoid impacting the schedule and warranty provisions of this Contract.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Cutting and Patching 01045-1

SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: This section covers general requirements pertaining to cutting, fitting, and patching of the work required to:

1. Make the installation fit properly in an existing or new structure;

2. Uncover work to inspect hidden conditions and then patch.

3. Remove and replace non-conforming or otherwise defective work.

4. Repair holes and cracks caused by removal of existing or new but

misplaced accessories and equipment.

B. Responsibilities: Each separate Contractor shall be responsible for performing

its own cutting, fitting and patching work except where otherwise specifically noted in the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section: 01010: Summary of Work

B. Section: 01011: Summary of Project

C. Section: 01041: Project Coordination

D. Section: 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety

E. Section: 01300: Submittals

F. Section: 01400: Quality Requirements

G. Section: 01410: Testing and Inspection Services

H. Section: 01600: Material and Equipment

I. Section: 02070: Selective Demolition

J. Section: 02086: Handling and Disposal of Contaminated Soils

K. Section: 02160: Excavation Support and Protection

L. Section: 02200: Earthwork

M. Section: 03930: Concrete Rehabilitation

1.03 SUBMITTALS



A. Prior to cutting or modifying any element, submit written a request to the SEPTA Project Manager for permission to proceed with any demolition, cutting or patching.

B. The SEPTA PM may require the contractor to submit a detailed plan, at least 10 business days in advance of the desired date of the work, with any or all of the following information:

1. Explanation of why this work is needed.

2. Extent of work and how adjacent work will be protected and blended in at the work’s conclusion.

3. Modifications to existing structural components including stamped calculations and drawings by a licensed engineer in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

4. Products and methods to be used in the work.

5. Schedule of when the work is to be done.

6. Utilities (both SEPTA and non-SEPTA) affected by the work.

7. At historical locations, specific procedures which will mitigate the impact of the cutting and patching on the historical integrity of the structure.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

B. Provide a plan for the inspecting/testing of all modified structural components to ensure structural integrity is maintained. This plan shall be stamped by a structural engineer and submitted to the SEPTA PM.

C. The SEPTA PM reserves the right to require an approved mock-up for any cutting and patching work prior to execution of the entire work.

1.05 RESTRICTIONS

A. Structural elements shall not be cut or patched in a manner that would reduce the load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. All processes which affect structural members must be sealed by a licensed engineer in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and submitted to SEPTA for review before work begins.

B. Operating elements or safety related components shall not be cut or patched

in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces shall not be cut

or patched in a manner that would, in the opinion of the SEPTA Project Manager, reduce the building elements’ aesthetic qualities, or result in visual



evidence of cutting and patching. The responsible Contractor shall remove and replace work cut and patched in a manner deemed to be visually unsatisfactory by the SEPTA Project Manager.

D. Dispose of all waste in a legal manner following all local codes and

regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Except as otherwise indicated in the contract documents or approved by the SEPTA Project Manager, provide materials for cutting and patching which will result in equal or better work than work being cut-and-patched, in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable.

B. Use materials identical with original materials where feasible and satisfactory results can be produced subject to review by the SEPTA PM. If original materials are unavailable, use materials which match appearance and match or exceed performance of the original material as interpreted by the SEPTA PM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.

B. Provide temporary support before uncovering any hidden conditions. See 3.02 below.

C. After uncovering existing conditions, inspect conditions affecting installation of

new work, including the suitability of all substrates to receive new material. 3.02 HAZARDOUS AND DANGEROUS CONDITIONS

A. If, during the preliminary inspection and/or the cutting and patching procedure, material of a suspicious nature is discovered, the contractor shall stop work in the vicinity immediately, abandon, isolate and mark the area, erect signs saying Do Not Enter and alert the SEPTA PM immediately.

B. If, during the preliminary inspection and/or the cutting and patching procedure, the safety of the structure appears to be endangered, or there appears to be movement in structural elements, the contractor shall stop work immediately, install bracing, and mark the area, erect signs saying Do Not Enter and alert the SEPTA PM immediately.

3.03 DISCREPANCIES

A. If uncovered conditions are inconsistent with the construction documents,



immediately notify the SEPTA Project Manager and secure needed direction.

B. Do not proceed until undocumented conditions are resolved and the SEPTA PM gives direction.

3.04 TEMPORARY SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

A. Provide adequate temporary support to prevent instability of Work to be cut. Do not endanger adjacent Work.

B. Provide adequate protection of the work, including adjacent areas during cutting and patching, to prevent damage, and to protect from adverse weather exposure.

C. Where services and utilities are to be affected by cutting and patching work, attempt to bypass to avoid interruption or obtain prior approval for this work.

3.05 PERFORMANCE

A. Perform required excavation and backfilling in accordance with the pertinent sections of the Specification and in conformance with all safety regulations and requirements.

B. Cut work in a matter which avoids damage to work to be retained and adjoining work. Where physical cutting is required, cut Work with sawing and grinding tools maintaining a neat straight finished edge. Core drill openings through concrete and masonry work. Cut from exposed finishes through to unexposed material

C. Obtain prior approval for all equipment to be used and all demolition procedures. Do not cut with hammer and chipping tools. Use water and adequate ventilation to control dust.

D. Do not cut mechanical or electrical equipment or conduit without determining status of equipment with certainty and consulting with the appropriate contractor. Never assume equipment or conduit is abandoned without establishing its status. Cap or seal piping, ductwork and conduit to prevent moisture from entering.

E. Patch seams to be durable and invisible to the satisfaction of the SEPTA PM. Restore exposed finished or patched areas in a manner to eliminate evidence of patching.

F. Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner intended, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or decreased safety.

G. Where new or enlarged doorways or openings are shown in existing construction, take the necessary precaution to support the walls above the openings and install new steel lintels above the openings. Where the wall finish is plaster or CMU, reinforced precast block lintels may be used where approved by the SEPTA Project Manager. New wall materials shall be toothed into existing wall materials. New metal frames shall be anchored and grouted identically to what is required for all new work.

H. If existing utilities, pipes, and/or conduits must be relocated by any contractor; the affected contractor shall install by-pass services of quality



equal to the existing system prior to beginning the work subject to the approval of the SEPTA PM

I. When painting patched areas, continue painted area to a visual barrier such as an expansion joint, edge of material, corner or other joint. Obtain approval for paint color matches on a mock-up which, if approved by the SEPTA PM, may become part of the work.

J. At exterior locations, test all patches to determine if they create a water tight condition.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Before an area is turned back to SEPTA for use, thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work has been performed or used as access to work.

B. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar fixtures before painting or other finishing is applied.

C. Restore items suffering incidental damaged, such as pipe covering and miscellaneous finishes, to their original condition.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Field Engineering 01050-1

SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: This Section of the Specifications covers field engineering

services as necessary to correctly complete the Work including, but not limited to:

1. Establishing and maintaining lines, levels and other survey controls as

dictated by the specific project parameters.

2. Structural design of sheeting, shoring, formwork, temporary supports/falsework and other similar items provided by the Contractor as needed for the execution of the work.

B. Responsibilities: The coordinating contractor is responsible to perform field

engineering and surveying work. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01300: Submittals B. Section 01700: Contract Closeout C. Section 01720: Project As-Built Documents

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.

B. Contractor in all cases shall submit:

1. Documentation demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field engineering and survey services.

2. Documentation detailing the methods that the Contractor proposes

to use to achieve and verify required survey accuracy. 3. All survey-related submittals shall be accompanied by a

certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, stating that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or nonconformance with the requirements of the Contract documents.

4. Provide shop drawings and design calculations sealed by an

engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania for all falsework and temporary or interim supports including sheeting, shoring, excavation supports, cofferdams, concrete forming systems and steel erection devices among others.




A. Use adequate numbers of skilled professionals and technicians who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary areas and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.

B. A Professional Land Surveyor (PLS) Licensed to Practice in the

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania) shall perform the survey work for the Contractor. The PLS shall be on the Work site whenever survey activities are taking place.

C. Temporary support/excavation support shop drawings and calculations shall

be prepared, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

1.05 ENGINEERING PROCEDURES

A. The contractor’s engineer shall design all construction related structures to the satisfaction of SEPTA. All designs must be submitted at least 21 days before construction to allow sufficient time for review. SEPTA will not be responsible for delays caused by resubmittals if required.

1.05 SURVEYING PROCEDURES

A. In addition to procedures executed by the Contractor, and his subcontractors for proper performance of the Work, the Contractor shall:

1. Locate and protect control points before starting work on the site.

2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work.

3. Not change or relocate reference points or items of the Work without

specific approval from SEPTA.

4. Promptly advise SEPTA when a reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of other changes in the Work.

a. Upon direction of SEPTA, require the Contractor's surveyor to

replace reference stakes or markers.

b. Locate such replacements according to the original survey control.

B. Before proceeding with the layout of actual work, the each Contractor shall

verify the layout information shown on the drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. As the work proceeds, the surveyor shall check every major element for line, level and plumb. A surveyor's log or record book of such checks shall be maintained current at all times. Make this log or record book available for SEPTA or SEPTA's Architect and/or Engineer's reference. The surveyor shall record deviations



from the required lines and levels, and shall, upon detection, promptly advise SEPTA of deviations exceeding recognized tolerances. The Contractor shall update final survey information on as-built drawings.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stakeout of all property lines and

corners required to establish the location of fences and other items of work, of which location is referenced thereto.

D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for dimensions and elevations

taken from benchmarks and baselines and for the setting of lines and grades. E. The Contractor shall provide SEPTA with any assistance required for

checking lines, grades, and measurements as may be requested by SEPTA. 1.06 PROJECT SURVEY RECORDS

A. On completion of any major structural element of the Work such as foundations, abutments, piers or other significant site improvement, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of the final construction and site work.

B. The Contractor shall preserve all field books and stakeout data until Final

Acceptance of the Work at which time they will be signed and sealed by the licensed Surveyor (PLS) and turned over to SEPTA. The Contractor shall comply with any requests by SEPTA to review field books and stakeout data at any time during the course of Work. Submit field books and stakeout data to SEPTA as part of Project Closeout. The field books and stakeout data will become the property of SEPTA.

1.07 SURVEY CREWS

A. The Contractor shall employ a survey crew. The minimum required crew shall be onsite at all times during construction phases where their work is required, to perform all survey related tasks as necessary to properly execute the Work in accordance with these specifications and the Contract Drawings.

B. In addition, the members of the survey crew must be located in such proximity to the Work site that mobilization is possible within four hours of notification by SEPTA when an unanticipated need for their services occurs.

END OF SECTION

v.15-04 Regulatory Requirements and Safety 01060-1

SECTION 01060 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND SAFETY

Use System Safety controlled document. Contact Avi Lebovic [email protected]

v.15-04 Regulatory Requirements and Safety 01060-2


07/14 Regulatory Safety Requirements 01060-1

SECTION 01060

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND SAFETY

Valid from 07/01/14 PART 1 - SAFETY 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies the safety & environmental requirements for

contractor personnel involved in construction, maintenance, and rehabilitation projects on SEPTA property. The Contractor is required to assure that all employees, subcontractors, and suppliers/vendors, while on the Work site comply with the provisions of this Section.

B. At those facilities to remain in operation during construction, or are

adjacent to SEPTA right or way, the Contractor shall take every precaution necessary to assure the safe access and egress of all SEPTA customers and employees, the safe and continuous operation of all SEPTA vehicles, ensure the appropriate protection of the environment as well as the safety and general welfare of the public at large. Depending on the configuration of the project, the contractor may be responsible for providing temporary pedestrian access including access which is accessible to those with disabilities. Under no circumstances is the contractor to block or restrict public or SEPTA entrances or the SEPTA vehicle right of way without prior written approval of the SEPTA Project Manager.

1.02 RELATED WORK Include all applicable sections

Section 01010 Summary of Work Section 01041 Project Coordination

Section 01063 NHSL Safety Requirements Section 01065 Railroad Division Safety Requirements Section 01066 Subway/Elevated Division Safety Requirements Section 01067 Media/ Sharon Hill Safety Requirements Section 01068 Maintenance Facilities Safety Requirements Section 01069 Light Rail Tunnel Division Safety Standards Section 01090 References

Section 01100 Special Project Procedures Section 01103A Amtrak Special Project Procedures


Section 01141A Amtrak Safety and Protection of Railroad Traffic and Property

Section 01300 Submittals Section 01351 Health and Safety Plan Requirements

Section 01400 Quality Requirements Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Section 01520A Amtrak Temporary Protective Shields Section 01570 Maintenance and Protection of Vehicles, Pedestrian

and Passengers 1.03 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the Contractor’s project/site specific safety plan (and corporate program if referenced) and protocols to the Project Manager within 30 days from receipt of the Notice to Proceed. The SEPTA Project Manager may prohibit and/or restrict any work on site until this plan has been received and approved. If these specifications call for certification or licenses from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, it is understood that certification or licensure shall be from the state where the work is occurring and in the case of work in multiple states, then licensure from multiple states may be required.


A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the regulations of all applicable occupational safety and health statutes and regulations of all of the applicable political jurisdictions where the work is being performed including those relating to the U.S. Department of Labor, FRA, FTA, and Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards. The Contractor shall conduct daily monitoring and document the compliance and performance of the requirements set forth in this document and those required by applicable governmental agencies. This documentation will be based on the applicable code requirements and shall be made available upon request of the SEPTA PM.

B. SEPTA Project Managers (SEPTA PM), Authority employees, and

SEPTA’s third party consultant staff will monitor compliance with all applicable internal safety and environmental regulations and environmental contract specifications.

C. The Contractor’s employee safety program, which must be site specific, shall include but not be limited to the following (as


applicable):

1) Work Site Orientation

a. Safety and health hazards present in the work assignment and

the general work area.

2) OSHA - written programs applicable to scope of work.

3) Required training, licensing or certification, and documentation of

same

4) Workers’ Compensation Reporting

5) Fall Protection equipment and requirements

6) Personal Protective Equipment

7) Confined Space Procedures

8) Hazardous Materials Handling and Disposal

9) Trenching and Excavation including shoring and sheeting

10) Cranes

11) Electrical Protection

12) Drug and Alcohol prohibitions and testing

13) Public, SEPTA Employee, and Passenger Protection

14) Site Emergency Procedures and Contact Information

a. Emergency contact numbers

b. Emergency escape routes and evacuation meeting place.

15) Nearest hospital including directions from the site with route maps

D. The Contractor shall provide a designated qualified safety officer who shall be responsible for all safety-related activities until the completion of the Work. The Contractor is also responsible for all safety related activities for all their subcontractors and suppliers working at the work site.

E. The safety officer shall report all on-the-job injuries at once to the SEPTA Project Manager and submit all paperwork pertaining to such injuries, within 24 hours or as required by the SEPTA PM.

F. The Contractor's safety officer shall, as a minimum hold weekly (tool

box) safety meetings with all of the Contractor’s personnel. Subjects, time, and location may be set at the Contractor's convenience. At


least three (3) days prior to each meeting, SEPTA requires an agenda be submitted to the SEPTA Project Manager, including the time and location of each meeting. Copies of signed attendance sheets and the meeting minutes shall be submitted to the Project Manager at each regularly-scheduled project coordination meeting.

G. The Contractor is required, by Agreement, to maintain an alcohol and

drug free environment. The Contractor shall describe in their employee safety program on how this contract stipulation is to be accomplished and maintained. Please note that SEPTA reserves the right to restrict access to its property, because of the inherent safety hazard to its employees and general public. Any person shall be immediately removed and barred from SEPTA property if in the opinion of SEPTA’s Project Manager, and/or other appropriate SEPTA representative, that person constitutes a safety risk.

1.05 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall supply and furnish all required personal

protective equipment (PPE) for their employees. The Contractor is also responsible for ensuring that PPE is worn correctly by all employees while on the work site. The Contractor’s employees shall wear compliant safety equipment including, but not limited to, hard hats, work shoes/boots, safety vests, safety glasses, and fully body cover clothing, including flame retardant (FR) clothing where and when it is required.

1. The minimum PPE standards must be met as outlined below:

a. Hard hats shall be ANSI-Z89.1 2003, Class E. Hard hats shall be worn at all times while on the work site.

b. Work shoes (ASTM 2413-11 C75 / I75) shall have non-slip

soles. Permanent metal plates or cleats on the sole or heel of shoes are prohibited. Shoelaces are to be kept short so they do not pose a tripping hazard. Athletic shoes, sandals, open-toed shoes, moccasins and/or shoes with heels higher than 1” are not permitted.

c. Contractor personnel shall wear eye protection at all times

on the work site. Eye protection shall be safety glasses with rigid side shields that comply with ANSI Z-87.1. Prescription eyewear shall also meet the same requirements as described above, or the individual shall wear equivalent eye protection over their prescription glasses or contact lenses.


d. The safety vest shall be ANSI 107, Class 2 high-visibility

with a yellow-green background and 2-inch retro-reflective striping for work on SEPTA owned property within any public right-of-way, where exposed to vehicular traffic, or otherwise required by rules or regulations. Work in Amtrak territory requires the use of an orange vest subject to approval by Amtrak.

e. The Contractor’s personnel shall wear long pants (without

cuffs) and, at a minimum, short sleeve shirts. Sleeveless shirts are prohibited.

f. Approved hearing protection shall be worn in all designated areas identified by signs or when operating high noise level equipment. The contractor is responsible for providing acceptable hearing protection for their employees as outlined in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.95.

g. The Contractor is responsible for providing acceptable respiratory protection for their employees as outlined in OSHA 29 CFR 1926.103.

h. Gloves shall be worn where hand injuries are likely to occur based on the hazard present.

B. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions and provide

protective measures to prevent injury to the public and damage to property of others. To prevent unauthorized access to the work zone and storage areas, the Contractor shall furnish and erect construction fencing or barricades and signage, as specified in the contract documents or as directed by the SEPTA PM, for the safeguarding of the public against accident or damage before commencing operations. The Contractor shall maintain the protective measures and/or construction fencing in good condition as evaluated by the SEPTA PM, until removal.

C. The Contractor shall dismantle, remove and/or relocate construction

fencing and barricades when directed by the SEPTA Project Manager.

D. The Contractor must ensure personnel, including subcontractors and vendors, receive the required SEPTA (and Amtrak or other railroad if applicable) Safety Training for the affected mode(s) before starting work. This covers the rules and procedures for personnel and equipment including but not limited to, working in or about stations, yards, tunnels, or adjacent to the track right-of-way. All personnel


who are present at the job site at any time must have this training. All personnel are required to wear / display their safety training card.

E. The Contractor is required to comply with OSHA’s Noise Standard 29 CFR 1910.95 and any local noise ordinances.

F. Where it is permitted to store materials on streets, the Contractor shall place such materials in a secured place in accordance with local jurisdictions so as to cause minimum obstruction to traffic and public safety. The Contractor shall not place materials within 15 feet of fire hydrants nor obstruct drainage gutters and inlets. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits relative to materials storage.

G. Material stored on site must be secured to prevent vandals from

placing debris or material on the right-of-way. Material placed on the right of way must be removed by the contractor immediately upon notification, at any time, at no cost to SEPTA. At no time shall any merchandise, material, or other articles be permitted to remain piled or assembled on the ground or on platforms adjacent to any track at a distance of less than ten feet, (10'-0") from the center line of such track.

H. Copies of Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and the quantity of each chemical must be provided to the SEPTA Project Manager for review and approval before chemicals can be brought to any SEPTA property. The SDS will be reviewed by SEPTA’s System Safety and Risk Management Department for approval.

I. All SDS must comply with OSHA’s Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200. In addition, all Contractors must be trained per the Hazard Communication Standard. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all SDS used at the work site.

J. The storage of hazardous and flammable materials on SEPTA property is restricted and permission for each material must be granted by the SEPTA Project Manager. When storing flammable and hazardous materials and hazardous waste, they must be stored in compliance with all applicable regulations. Flammable materials shall not be stored in confined spaces or other similar areas such as tunnels, underground rooms and building basements.

K. If hazardous substances are present, such as wastes, or if the potential for a hazardous release exists, the Contractor is responsible for


following their Site Safety Plan covering policies and procedures to protect workers and the public from the potential hazards.

L. Firearms or any items classified as concealed weapons will not be brought onto SEPTA’s property.

M. All tobacco use is prohibited within the construction project and all areas subject to restrictions by SEPTA or by local, state and federal law. Smoking within SEPTA indoor facilities is prohibited.

N. The Contractor may not block or obstruct access to emergency equipment such as first aid kits, AED units, eyewash stations, fire extinguishing equipment, fire hydrants, transformers, or emergency generators. Emergency equipment must not be disconnected or relocated by the Contractor without permission from SEPTA’s Project Manager.

O. All electronic devices must be turned OFF or placed in airplane mode

when working within the fouling envelope of the right of way. If an individual must make a phone call, they must first step outside the fouling envelope of the right of way to make or receive the call or otherwise use an electronic device. The contractor and his personnel are libel for all fines assessed by the Federal and/or state regulators for a violation of this regulation. Violation of this regulation can result in the individual being prohibited from working on the project.

P. The use of head phones, ear buds, etc. are prohibited while in a

construction area.

1.06 ACCIDENT AND INJURY REPORTING

A. The Contractor is responsible for reporting and investigating all work related accidents and incidents. This shall be completed in a timely manner with recommendations for corrective actions to prevent similar accidents or incidents. Accidents and incidents include:

a. Personal Injury b. Property Damage c. Near Misses d. Actual or potential exposure to toxic substances e. Hazardous material spills and releases f. Fires


B. The Contractor must notify the SEPTA Project Manager for all accidents and incidents that occur on SEPTA property immediately.

C. SEPTA reserves the right to conduct an independent investigation of

all accidents and incidents that occur on the work site with the full cooperation of the contractor, subcontractor and employees.

D. At accident locations where conditions are immediately dangerous to life and health, work shall be suspended until corrective actions are taken to the satisfaction of the appropriate SEPTA representative.

1.07 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall set up emergency procedures and prepare

written guidelines discussing such procedures for the following categories:

1. Fire 2. Injury to contractor’s and/or SEPTA employees 3. Injury to general public 4. Property damage, including property of utilities, i.e., gas, water,

sewage, electrical, telephone or pedestrian and vehicle routes.

5. Hazardous/toxic material spill, discharges and/or exposure.

6. Site evacuation.

B. Copies of all guidelines for emergency procedures shall be written and posted prior to the initiation of actual construction. Posting shall include emergency telephone numbers and directions to and from the nearest hospital. The Contractor shall have standing arrangements for the transportation and hospital treatment of any employees who may be injured, are exposed to hazardous material, or who may become ill. These guidelines shall be included in the Contractor's written safety program and shall be submitted to SEPTA.

C. The Contractor shall provide a fully equipped first aid kit at the site.

This kit will be made available to the SEPTA PM for their inspection and approval at any time.

D. The Contractor must discuss site emergency procedures at the

beginning of the project, with the addition of a new worker to the site,


and at least monthly with all personnel at tool box safety meetings. Any changes to the work site emergency procedures must be documented and employees, vendors and the SEPTA Project Manager notified.

E. SEPTA operational emergencies will be handled by the senior SEPTA Operations personnel present. This individual, designated “The Incident Commander” is responsible for summoning the number of persons required by the situation and assignment of all recommended procedures.

1.08 PROTECTION OF SEPTA FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be cognizant of and bound by SEPTA's safety

rules and regulations specified herein and conduct operations in strict accordance with same.

B. SEPTA shall be the sole judge of protection necessary for the safe

operation of its facilities. SEPTA reserves the right to alter this protection at any time.

C. SEPTA’s Facilities and/or Structures shall not be utilized by the

Contractor for temporary scaffolding and/or support for the construction effort without permission. A Contractor may request SEPTA’s consideration for such action. The Contractor shall provide a detailed plan to utilize SEPTA’s Facilities and/or Structures. The plans will be submitted for SEPTA’s review and approval prior to the initiation of any work. SEPTA also reserves the right to have the drawings and supporting calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, or appropriate jurisdiction, at no cost to SEPTA.

D. Before any work is done in the vicinity of an existing structure, SEPTA

must be notified and may require a plan for stabilizing and underpinning the structure prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in Pennsylvania, or appropriate jurisdiction, at no expense to SEPTA.

1.09 CRANE, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND ERECTION SAFETY

A. The Contractor shall take care to prevent any structure from being loaded with a weight, for any duration, which will endanger its stability, or the safety of persons.


B. The contractor shall adhere to all Local, State, and Federal laws pertaining to crane operations.

C. All cranes must be inspected annually as well as monthly. The most

recent reports shall be submitted to SEPTA prior to the use of the cranes on any work site. SEPTA’s Project Manager must ensure that daily safety inspections are completed. The monthly reports for the crane must be submitted to the SEPTA Project Manager on a pre-determined schedule as long as the crane is operating on the project.

D. The Contractor shall ensure all crane operators and riggers are trained

and competent in the use of such equipment. The Contractor shall provide a competent person to oversee and/or perform lifting operations as required by OSHA. Personnel qualifications will be made available to SEPTA upon request.

E. The Contractor shall submit for review to the Project Manager,

sketches defining the operations of all cranes, material handling equipment, and erection activities used in support of construction during periods of train operations. The Contractor shall submit, at the Project Manager's request, similar information for cranes or other equipment in use and capable of encroachment.

1. These sketches shall include planned locations and movements of

the equipment, calculations demonstrating the adequacy of the capacity of the crane for the loads, the interface between the footprint of the equipment the movement of the boom and loads relative to the existing structure and surrounding buildings, the support grillages and the protection of existing utilities and facilities, and any other pertinent details required by the Project Manager.

2. The following data shall be required for all hoisting operations

adjacent to active SEPTA operations and facilities and shall be prepared by and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in Pennsylvania.

a Plans and sections showing locations of cranes, horizontally

and vertically, operating radii, with delivery of disposal locations shown. The location of the SEPTA Right of Way and all active facilities shall also be shown.

b Crane rating sheets showing cranes to be adequate for

150% of the actual weight being lifted. A complete set of crane charts, including crane, counterweight, and boom nomenclature is to be submitted.


c A location plan showing all obstructions such as wires,

poles, adjacent structures, etc., and that the proposed lifts are clear of these obstructions.

d A data sheet shall be prepared listing the type, size, and

arrangements of slings, shackles, or other connecting equipment, all to be designed for 150% of the actual weight being lifted. Copies of a catalog or information sheets for specialized equipment shall be included.

e A complete procedure is to be included, indicating the

location and order of lifts and any repositioning or re-hitching of the crane or cranes.

f Temporary support of any components or intermediate

stages is to be shown and detailed.

g A time schedule of the various stages must be shown as well as a schedule for the entire lifting procedure.

F. Specialty slings and hooks shall not be used to set steel or move

materials over workers. All sling and crane load line hooks shall have safety latches installed or shall be moused, except for specialty slings and hooks such as sorting or shake out slings or self-adjusting pipe slings.

G. The Contractor shall not leave suspended loads unattended. When

moving loads, the operator shall ensure a clear path free of personnel or other barriers.

H. The Contractor shall establish a restricted work area using barricades

and other appropriate controls to minimize the hazards to personnel, customers, and equipment from swinging or falling objects.

1.10 SNOW REMOVAL

A. The Contractor shall remove all snow and ice within the project site as required for the proper protection and prosecution of the Work, and to protect SEPTA employees and the public. The Contractor shall at all times provide and maintain adequate protection against weather so as to preserve all Work, materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures free from damage.

B. The Contractor shall not use sodium chloride (or any chloride) on any

facilities adjacent to SEPTA electric rail lines where the possibility


exists that melting mixture may leach onto the contact rail within the Right of Way.

1.11 WELDING, CUTTING AND OTHER HOT WORK

Gas or electric cutting, burning, or welding shall be done in accordance with the guidelines of NFPA 51 B, the International Fire Code, federal, state, and local rules and regulations, or the provisions below, whichever is more restrictive.

A. If hot work is to be executed at a job site, the prime contractor’s safety officer must have a copy of the current version of NFPA 51B at the job site.

B. The prime contractor’s safety officer shall act as a Permit Authorizing Individual (PAI) and complete the checklist to fulfill the requirements of by 51 B for all torch work. The contractor shall obtain the current copy of SEPTA’s “Hot Work Checklist” for this purpose.

C. The SEPTA PM shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of any hot work on site. A copy of each checklist completed for that period shall be delivered to the SEPTA PM at the next job progress meeting.

D. Spark shields and a fire watch must be posted when executing hot work and for a period of at least four hours after all activity has been completed. The SEPTA PM reserves the right to extend the duration of the fire watch in special circumstances. A supply of water and an approved fire extinguisher shall be readily available to the location where the work was done.

E. All oxygen/acetylene bottles must be removed and stored outside of all tunnels, underground stations and other confined spaces at the end of the workday. While in use in a tunnel, underground station or other confined space, they shall be attended at all times. At no times when not in use shall oxygen and acetylene bottles be stored together.

E. Anti-flashback devices must be installed on the fuel side of all gas and oxygen cutting torches

1.12 GAS CYLINDERS

A. Compressed gas cylinders shall be handled and properly supported and secured in an upright position away from heat or flame sources.


Cylinders that are not being transported must have their caps in place. B. Regulators, hoses, and torch assemblies must be in working order

and checked for leaks prior to initial use or installation. If a leak is discovered, the cylinder must be removed to a safe location.

C. Cylinders must be labeled and stored according to compatibility with

signs posted. D. Oxygen and acetylene cylinders, empty or full, shall not be stored

together. Full oxygen cylinders must be separated from acetylene cylinders or other fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials a minimum distance of 20 feet or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.

E. All cylinder valves must be closed when cylinders are not in use and

the hose pressure bled down. F. All cylinders must be removed from confined spaces at the end of

each work day. 1.13 UTILITIES

A. Before any excavation begins, the Contractor must determine the location of all utility installations such as but not limited to sewer lines, telephone lines, fuel lines, underground electric lines, water lines, or any other underground installations that may be present during excavations.

B. As per 73 P.S., § 176, et seq., the Contractor is required to notify

utilities prior to all excavations. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage done to any utility in the prosecution of the Work. The Contractor shall exercise any precautions necessary to prevent damage in working underneath or adjacent to any underground structure. If it becomes necessary for a utility company, through emergency procedures or because of unforeseen conditions, to repair, reconstruct, relay or relocate utilities within the contract area, after work has commenced by the Contractor, then the said utility company and the Contractor shall make suitable arrangements to overcome such interference. All work shall be accomplished at no extra cost or charge to SEPTA. No compensation shall be allowed the Contractor for the disruption to his work. A no-cost time extension may be granted in accordance with the Contract to the Contractor by SEPTA for the delay that has occurred.

1.14 HOUSEKEEPING


A. The Contractor shall maintain their work area in an orderly manner. B. The Contractor shall provide containers for trash and scrap metal

unless prearranged with the SEPTA Project Manager before the start of the project.

C. The Contractor is responsible for the proper disposal of hazardous,

flammable, trash, and/or excess waste material. All waste must be removed or secured on site daily. See SEPTA’s Contractor Environmental Safety Requirements for more information on hazardous waste.

D. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all disposal records,

including chain of custody records for hazardous or untested material, and providing copies to the SEPTA Project Manager where applicable.

E. No on site burning or burying of waste or material is permitted.

1.15 ELECTRICAL

A. The Contractor directly involved with electrical work, or work adjacent to electrical hazards shall do so only after details of the work has been planned and approved by SEPTA.

B. All electrical work shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.400

(Electrical Standard), OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 (Lockout/Tagout), The National Electric Code (NEC), NFPA 70E (latest editions), and any SEPTA standards.

C. All equipment and cords must be free from damage. Frayed or cut

electrical cords, or cords with damaged plugs or missing ground plugs shall immediately be removed from service, rendered unusable, and removed from the work site.

D. All electrical tools and equipment must be grounded. E. Before working on a de-energized circuit, it must be electrically tested

to ensure it is de-energized. F. The Contractor must complete lockout/tagout procedures for all

machines, equipment, and systems that require service or maintenance as required by 29 CFR 1910.147.


1. A lock or tag can only be removed by the individual or their designee.

G. After the Contractor performs repairs, maintenance or installations,

and before SEPTA employees attempt to re-energize the electrical equipment, verification shall be performed in the presence of the SEPTA PM to ensure that the electrical equipment components are operationally intact and that no electrical hazard is present up on re-energizing.

1.16 CONFINED SPACE

A. The Contractor shall be required to have competent and trained personnel for restricted or confined space entry work.

B. All confined spaces at SEPTA are permit required spaces and the

Contractor is required to utilize SEPTA’s confined space permit. C. Confined spaces refer to a space which by design has limited

openings for entry and exit but large enough to enter to perform work, the potential for toxic atmosphere or one that can produce a toxic atmosphere, and is not designed for continuous occupancy. Confined spaces at SEPTA can include, but not limited to, storage tanks, boilers, trenches, manholes, lift stations, and valve pits.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate and obtain approval from the SEPTA

Project Manager for all confined and restricted space activities. E. The Contractor must provide emergency rescue based on the work

being conducted. Documentation on the rescue procedures, authorized rescuers, training and equipment must approved by SEPTA and be available on site prior to conducting confined space entries.

1.17 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHES

A. The Contractor shall provide training to all personnel required for safe trenching and excavation projects on SEPTA property and comply with OSHA Excavation Standard 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P.

B. Prior to any excavations or trenching, the Contractor shall be

responsible for utility marking to ensure the area impacted is free from underground hazards.

C. Excavations and trenches over 4-feet must have appropriate


protective systems such as but not limited to sloping, trench shields, and shoring, if soil conditions are unstable excavations less than 4 feet must have protection. This requirement is in addition to any other regulatory requirements including OSHA requirements.

D. Daily inspections of excavations, adjacent areas, and protective

systems must be made by the Contractor to ensure safety systems are functional and effective.

E. The Contractor shall place warning signage and barricades or fencing

to prevent unauthorized or accidental access to the site. F. The Contractor shall cease work immediately and contact the SEPTA

Project Manager if suspect material such as strong odors, discolored soils, pipes, pipe covering or other material indicating the potential presence of asbestos, or other hazardous materials is encountered.

1.18 LADDER SAFETY

A. All ladders and their use must comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1053 and ANSI specifications.

B. Metal or other conductive ladders are prohibited. C. Ladders must be inspected before use and must be in good condition

and free of any broken or defective parts. Defective ladders must be removed from service.

D. The Contractor must provide training to all employees using ladders in

their proper use, how to recognize ladder hazards and how to correct identified safety hazards.

E. Job fabricated ladders are prohibited.

1.19 FALL PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall provide fall protection and proper training for its employees, as required by 29 CFR 1926.500. Fall protection is required in areas where the fall hazard is 6 feet or greater from the worker’s foot level.

B. The Contractor shall isolate work areas to protect persons from falling

objects and to prevent unauthorized access to the work site.


C. The Contractor shall perform documented inspections of their fall protection equipment before each use.

D. Work being conducted within six feet of a floor opening (skylight, hole,

open hatch, etc.) requires the appropriate fall protection. E. Work being conducted on a roof within six feet of the edge requires

the appropriate fall protection. The Contractor shall not work on or access roofs without prior approval from SEPTA Project Manager.

1.20 SCAFFOLDS

A. All scaffolding, staging, and work platforms must satisfy OSHA 29 CFR 1926.450 and the manufacturer’s requirements.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that scaffolding be erected and inspected

by trained personnel. C. The Contractor shall perform documented pre-use inspections for

erected scaffolding.

1.21 POWERED EQUIPMENT/WORK PLATFORMS

A. The Contractor shall not use SEPTA owned or leased powered equipment or aerial work platforms unless approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.

B. The Contractor shall ensure only trained an authorized personnel

operate any powered equipment such as but not limited to forklifts, extendable boom lift, scissor lifts, and cranes.

C. The Contractor shall perform documented inspections of equipment

prior to each day’s use to ensure safe operating condition. Defective equipment must be segregated and not be used on the work site.

D. The Contractor must ensure all its employees and subcontractors

have had appropriate and effective training in compliance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.178 (Powered Industrial Vehicles) and 29 CFR 1926.453 (Aerial Lifts) and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.22 FIRE SAFETY

A. The Contractor’s personnel should be familiar with the location of fire


alarm pull stations, portable fire extinguishers and exit routes from the work area. The Contractor shall not obstruct access to exits, exit routes, or fire equipment or prop-open stair well doors.

B. Fires shall be reported by activating the nearest fire alarm station and

calling 911. C. The Contractor’s personnel shall be trained in the proper use of a

portable fire extinguisher in the event fire watch duties are required. D. Flammable and combustible materials at a minimum must be labeled,

properly stored, and disposed of. Please see the Contractor Environmental Requirements.

E. The Contractor must follow requirements listed in the “Welding,

Cutting and Other Hot Work” section of this document, if welding, torch cutting, soldering or other forms of “hot work” will be performed.

F. The Contractor must take precautions to prevent damage to fire

protection systems. All damage must be reported immediately to the SEPTA Project Manager.

G. The Contractor must not disable a fire protection system (sprinklers,

fire alarm system components, etc.) unless prior approval has been provided by the SEPTA Project Manager and local fire department. If a system is disabled, fire watch personnel must be present until that system is reconnected or other arrangements have been made and approved by the SEPTA PM.

H. Materials or equipment must not be temporarily or permanently

suspended on sprinkler pipes, valves, or supports. 1.23 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WATER AND SEWER LINES

A. When the equipment axle load exceeds 15 tons, the Contractor shall provide and work from timber mats placed over existing underground water lines and sewer lines.

B. SEPTA reserves the right to require additional protection and/or protection plans sealed by a professional engineer.

PART 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL 2.01 SUBMITTALS


A. The Contractor shall furnish for review by SEPTA the Contractor’s

Environmental and/or Waste Management Program within thirty (30) days from receipt of the Notice to Proceed (see Section 2.04.B).

B. Prior to the start of work, Contractor shall furnish for review by SEPTA a Means and Methods Plan describing the day-to-day activities the contractor will employ to complete construction in accordance with the specification requirements. The Means and Methods Plan shall include the following:

1. A detailed, stepwise description of the construction process

organized sequentially; 2. A description of any specialized equipment to be utilized to

complete the work; 3. Identification of potential hazards in the construction process; and 4. A description of the construction mitigation measures that the

contractor will implement to mitigate identified hazards. C. Prior to the start of work, Contractor shall furnish for review by SEPTA

a copy of asbestos and lead survey findings/reports. If asbestos abatement or lead removal is conducted, Contractor shall further furnish to SEPTA prior to the start of those activities, all relevant submittals including but not limited to notifications, work plans, and health and safety plans. Within thirty [30] days of completion of work, waste disposal records documenting disposal at a SEPTA-approved facility shall also be submitted to SEPTA (see Section 2.07.H).


A. The Contractor shall daily monitor and document the compliance and performance of the requirements set forth in this Section consistent with appropriate SEPTA Work rules and Federal, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and Local rules and regulations. The Contractor shall document the Contractor's compliance with applicable codes and regulations.

B. The Contractor’s Environmental and/or Waste Management Program,

as a minimum, shall include but not be limited to the following as applicable to the Work:

1. Sustainability and Recycling


2. Waste Management and Disposal

3. Hazardous Materials

4. Soils Management

5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control

6. Noise Control (if applicable)

C. The Contractor shall provide a qualified environmental safety officer

who shall be responsible for all environmental safety-related activities until the completion of the Work. The environmental safety officer shall report all on-the-job environmental incidents at once to the Project Manager and submit all paperwork pertaining to such incidents as required.

2.03 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall set up emergency procedures and prepare

written guidelines discussing response and notification actions related to hazardous/toxic material spills, discharges, or releases. Such guidelines shall be incorporated into one or more Contractor’s required site-specific plan submittals, such as the Health and Safety Plan, Work Plan, Contingency Plan, or Environmental/Waste Management Program.

2.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

A. Materials Handling:

1. All scrap material of any kind, type, or nature shall be placed into designated confined areas or containers specifically supplied for this purpose. Containers shall be removed from the job site when full.

2. The Contractor shall assure that all chemicals, paints, solvents,

and cleaners are maintained per OSHA's hazard standards. Discarded chemicals shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection (PaDEP) and/or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements. Copies of all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), OSHA Form 20, and the Product Use sheets shall be given to SEPTA's Project Manager before or at the


time of material delivery. All training shall be done in accordance with OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard.

3. Materials handling shall be conducted in accordance with the

Contractor’s Environmental / Waste Management Program (see Section 2.04).

2.05 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Environmental protection considerations consist of, but are not limited to, the following factors:

1. Natural resources, including air, water, and land. 2. Solid Waste disposal. 3. Noise. 4. Control of toxic substances, hazardous materials, and radiation. 5. The presence of chemical, physical, and biological elements and

agents that adversely affect and alter ecological balances. 6. Degradation of the aesthetic use of the environment. 7. Historical, archaeological, and cultural resources.

B. General Requirements:

1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain environmental

protection as defined herein or as required by regulation, whichever is more restrictive.

2. The Contractor's operation shall comply with all applicable Federal,

Commonwealth and Local laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

3. Compliance of subcontractors and suppliers with the provisions of

this and all other sections of these Specifications shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

4. The Contractor shall not use equipment from which factory-

installed antipollution and noise control devices have been removed, altered or rendered ineffective intentionally or through lack of proper maintenance.


5. Unless the Contractor has tested and established the safety of

existing paints and coverings, he shall provide adequate pollution controls for painting and surface preparation in compliance with the PaDEP Regulations.

C. Protection of Natural Resources: 1. General

a. It is intended that the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent Work performed shall be preserved in their existing condition or be restored to an equivalent of the existing condition, as approved by the Project Manager upon completion of the Work. The Contractor shall confine its on-site construction activities to areas defined by the Contract Drawings and Specifications or as directed by the Project Manager.

2. Protection of Project Site and Existing Roadways:

a. Debris or rubbish of any kind shall not be dumped onto the site or roadways. This shall include paint splatters, cleaning, stripping and surface preparation chemicals and spillage during painting operations. Care shall be taken to prevent damage and injury to personnel, vessels, and vehicles using roadways, or areas accessible to pedestrians. Devices shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor as required to prevent such occurrences. Material or items falling onto roadways shall be promptly removed at the Contractor's expense. All damage to third party property shall be restored by the contractor to the owner’s satisfaction at no cost to SEPTA.

b. The operator shall remove from the site, recycle, or dispose of all building materials and wastes in accordance with the PaDEP solid waste management regulations at 25 pa code 260.1 et seq., 271.1 et seq. The contractor shall not illegally bury, dump, or discharge any building material or wastes at this site.

3. Land Resources:

a. Except in areas indicated to be cleared or excavated, the Contractor shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees, shrubs, or vegetation. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing nearby trees for anchorage unless specifically permitted by the Project Manager. Where such use is permitted, the Contractor shall


be responsible for any resulting damage. b. The use of pesticides or herbicides is not permitted unless

approved in writing by the SEPTA PM. c. The Contractor shall submit a plan for protecting existing

trees and vegetation that are to remain and that may be injured, bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Rocks that are displaced into uncleared areas shall be removed. Monuments, markers, and works of art shall be protected prior to the start of the operations. A preconstruction survey, including photographs, shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the SEPTA PM, and a written report of the survey shall be furnished to SEPTA within five (5) days of its request by the Project Manager.

d. Repair and Restoration: All trees, vegetation and other man

made or natural landscape features that are to remain and become scarred or damaged by the Contractor's equipment or operations shall be repaired and restored to their original condition at the Contractor's expense. The Project Manager shall approve the repair and restoration program prior to its initiation and after completion.

4. Water Resources: At all times, measures shall be taken to prevent

oil, gasoline and other hazardous substances and pollutants from entering the ground, drainage areas, sewers, streams, and other local bodies of water.

5. Wildlife Resources: The Contractor shall not disturb native habitat

adjacent to the project construction area. D. Erosion and Sediment Controls: 1. Site burning of any kind, including ground vegetation, is not

permitted. 2. The Contractor shall conform to all applicable requirements of the

PaDEP and the County with respect to erosion and sediment control measures to prevent discharge into storm water discharge systems and active waterways.

E. Toxic Substances:


1. The Contractor shall comply with the Toxic Substance Control Act, P.L. 94-469 (TSCA).

a. No toxic chemical substance, mixture, equipment, container,

sealant, coating, or dust-control agent shall be used except in accordance with all provisions of the TSCA as interpreted by the rules and regulations of 40 CFR 761.

b. Any toxic chemical substance, mixture, equipment,

container, sealant, coating, or dust-control agent found stored within the project area shall be immediately reported to the Project Manager in writing and work shall be stopped in the area. The Project Manager shall make arrangements for the removal of the toxic materials, will ensure that the area is safe for the Contractor to continue work in the area.

F. Control and Disposal of Chemical and Sanitary Wastes: 1. Trash shall be picked up and placed in containers that shall be

emptied on a regular schedule. Handling and disposal shall be so conducted as to prevent contamination of the site and other areas, and shall not be disposed of in wetlands or burned on the right-of-way. On completion, the area shall be left clean and in natural condition.

2. Disposal of rubbish and debris shall be as follows: The Contractor

shall transport all waste, including excess excavated material, off the site and dispose of it in a manner that complies with the Federal, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and Local requirements. The Contractor shall secure a permit or license prior to transporting any material off the site. Waste materials shall not be burned on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of waste material to a pickup point or disposal area.

4. Chemical waste shall be stored in corrosion-resistant containers,

removed from the project site, and disposed of as necessary, as but not less frequently as monthly. Disposal of chemical waste shall be in accordance with standard established practices as approved by the Project Manager. Fueling and lubricating of equipment and motor vehicles on the site shall be conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spills and evaporation. Lubricants to be discarded, including burned oil, shall be disposed of in accordance with approved procedures meeting Federal, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and Local regulations. For oil and hazardous material spills that may violate Federal, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, or Local regulations, the Project


Manager shall be notified immediately. G. Dust Control:

1. Airborne dust shall be minimized at all times, including non-Working hours, weekends, and holidays. Soil at the site, station platforms, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by the Contractor's operations and materials stockpiled for the project shall be treated with dust suppressors or covered to control dust. Dry power brooming shall not be permitted. Vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming shall be used instead. Air blowing shall be permitted only for cleaning off non-particle debris, such as that from reinforcing bars. Sandblasting shall not be permitted except as otherwise specified elsewhere. Only wet cutting of concrete block, concrete, and asphalt shall be permitted.

2. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the

National Emission Standards (40 CFR 61).

3. The Contractor shall inspect all vehicles for dirt prior to their leaving the construction site. Dirt, soil, and rubble likely to be dislodged during transit shall be removed from the trucks and other vehicles prior to leaving the site.

4. The Contractor shall ensure that equipment transporting material

to and from the site that may become airborne is covered. 5. The Contractor shall not cause or permit fugitive particulate matter

to be emitted into the outdoor atmosphere from any source such that emissions are visible beyond the project property line.

G. Noise Control:

1. The Contractor shall research and determine the applicable jurisdiction requirements for noise control in the project area. In the event a project site lies in two or more jurisdictional areas and the requirements conflict, the strictest will govern. City of Philadelphia Air Management regulations govern for any work within Philadelphia. In absence of specific jurisdictional instructions regarding noise control, OSHA 29 CFR §1910 will apply.

H. Asbestos and Lead Containing Materials

1. Prior to the commencement to work, Contractor shall coordinate


performance of a survey of the project area for asbestos containing materials and lead-based paint by asbestos and lead inspectors/investigators properly licensed and certified to perform such work in Pennsylvania (and the City of Philadelphia where applicable). Contractor shall submit to the SEPTA Project Manager with a copy of the findings/report (see Section 2.03.C). Given the age of many SEPTA properties it is always possible to encounter suspicious material.

2. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, Commonwealth, and Local laws including but not limited to the City of Philadelphia Asbestos Control Regulations, 29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR 763 Subpart E, 29 CFR 1910.120, 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1910.1200, 29 CFR 1926.62, 29 CFR 1910.1025, 40 CFR 745, 40 CFR 262.11 and 25 Pa Code 261.

3. All asbestos abatements shall be conducted by licensed

abatement Workers and Supervisors and air monitoring shall be conducted by third party licensed Building Inspector and/or Asbestos Project Inspector (depending on location as determined by System Safety) and the specification shall be written by a licensed Asbestos Project Designer.

4. All submittals including but not limited to notifications, work plans,

and health and safety plans shall be submitted to SEPTA for review prior to the commencement of work. Within thirty [30] days of completion of work, waste disposal records documenting disposal at a SEPTA-approved facility shall also be submitted to SEPTA (see Section 2.03.C).

5. All newly installed materials shall be asbestos and lead free.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements 01066-1

SECTION 01066 - SUBWAY/ELEVATED SAFETY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This Section specifies the general requirements and safety regulations governing the Contractor's activities when its work impacts an active Subway/Elevated Line.

1.02 RELATED WORK

Section 01041 Project Coordination Section 01060 Regulatory Requirements and Safety Section 01100 Special Project Procedures Section 01400 Quality Requirements

Section 01410 Testing and Inspection Services Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Section 01060 - 1.04 1.04 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

The information contained in this Section is intended to provide guidance and safety precautions to the Contractor when working on a live rail line. The Contractor is advised that SEPTA shall operate trains over this location during the performance of Work under the Contract, except as specified otherwise. The Contractor shall comply with all parts of this Section, as well as with the general intent of this Section.

B. Responsibility:

The Work covered by the Contract shall involve safety of persons and property on a live electrified rail line. Therefore, relevant skill and experience is required of the Contractor to do its work safely. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of its construction operations. The Contractor shall, therefore, be expected to post adequate watchpersons and/or protective devices to protect its work crews, equipment and the work site. Pertinent safety rules, which shall be followed, are listed in, but not limited, to



Paragraphs F, G, and H of this section. The Contractor shall exercise proper care at all times.

C. Operations:

When work is being performed under active SEPTA train operations the safety and continuity of train operation shall be of the first importance. Train operation shall, at all times, be protected and the Contractor shall arrange Work accordingly. Whenever the Work may affect the safety or movement of trains, the method of doing such Work, together with the proposed sequence of operations and time schedules for same, shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval.

1. No work shall be performed until such approval has been obtained.

However, such approval of the Project Manager or a duly authorized representative shall not be considered as a release of the Contractor from responsibility for any damage to SEPTA by the acts of the Contractor, its employees, and/or its subcontractor's employees.

2. In the event of an unplanned discontinuation of train service due to the

Contractor's operations, the Contractor is not only liable for any injury or damage that might occur, but also for the full cost of any detour of train traffic, shuttle bus service and any associated costs.

D. SEPTA Personnel:

1. Flagperson: SEPTA Flagpersons are responsible for the safety and

continuity of operations. The SEPTA Flagperson shall have authority to direct the stoppage of trains. Any sharing of protective duties between SEPTA and the Contractor within the work site can be considered coincidental.

2. Pilots: If the Contractor wishes to occupy live or operating tracks with on-track equipment, the Contractor shall request a SEPTA pilot who will obtain exclusive track occupancy on the live track. All SEPTA pilots shall be requested from the Project Manager a minimum of 1 week in advance of the required starting time.

3. Project Manager: The Project Manager or a duly authorized representative shall have complete authority in matters related to the safety of SEPTA's operations and facilities.

4. Qualified Protection Employee (QPE): A SEPTA employee qualified on

operating rules, physical characteristics, and on-track protection procedures and is responsible for establishing on-track protection and safety. The QPE is responsible for conducting Job Briefings relative to on-



track protection, and works with the Contractor’s PAR to ensure proper oversight of activities.

E. Contractor's Personnel:

1. Protection Assurance Representative (PAR): The Contractor’s Protection Assurance Representative may be the Superintendent, Safety Officer or responsible foreperson. The representative shall be present at all times when the Contractor’s employees are working within the SEPTA operating envelope and under the requirements of this Section. In general the PAR shall be responsible for day to day oversight of the Contractor’s watchperson and employees so that they are working safely, according to all parts of this Section, to coordinate construction activities with SEPTA’s Flagging personnel.

2. Watchperson: The role of the Contractor’s watchperson is solely for the

safety for the Contractor’s employees when external influences, i.e. rail traffic, shall expose the workers to a safety hazard. The watchperson must be on site with each work crew at all times. If it becomes necessary for the watchperson to leave the site, work shall be suspended until he/she returns or is replaced by another qualified watchperson.

F. Right of Way Restrictions:

1. SEPTA shall protect its service from the Contractor's operations in the Contractor’s work area by establishing SEPTA Work Zones. Within a SEPTA Work Zone are one or more SEPTA Work Areas. A SEPTA Work Zone is the pre-arranged limits of a work project along the right-of-way, which is then defined for operational safety purposes in bulletin information disseminated to SEPTA personnel. A SEPTA Work Area is the actual working limits within the pre-defined boundaries of the SEPTA Work Zone. The SEPTA Work Area is more clearly defined visually in the field by the erection in place of specific SEPTA Work Area signage.

a. A SEPTA Work Zone will be established by SEPTA for fouling type

work on or about the operating tracks as follows:

1) For Maintenance or work that is unable to normally clear 15 seconds before train arrival.

2) For Contractor's work which extends off the edge of a station

platform that is unable to normally clear 15 seconds before train arrival.



3) For Contractor's work which is outside of the above limits that may foul.

4) For track(s) adjacent and accessible to tracks placed out of

service for work. 5) For Contractor's employee(s) requiring protection when working

on or about operating tracks.

b. Contractors Work Area

1) Fouling is defined as any type of work that may strike or interfere with the safe passage of trains.

2) The limits of the SEPTA Work Area, in accordance with SEPTA

operating rules, is visually identified in the field by a Stop Sign (or substitution of a Work Area Speed Limit Sign by the Flag person) AND a Work Area Resume Speed Sign. The approach to the Work Area is visually identified in the field by an Approach Sign.

2. The SEPTA Work Zones established by SEPTA for the control of train

operations are defined by applicable Work Area signs or portable signals, set at prescribed distances from the Contractor's actual work area. The spacing of the SEPTA Work Areas and positioning of SEPTA Flagperson are prescribed based on safe stopping distances or emergency situations. The Contractor's employees shall confine themselves to stay within the limits of their SEPTA Work Area at all times. Movement out of the SEPTA Work Area into another SEPTA Work Area or another SEPTA Work Zone with personnel, equipment and/or material shall not be permitted and shall be considered a violation of the safety regulations.

Note that a SEPTA Work Zone is not required when the Contractor’s work is two (2) feet or less from the trackside edge of a station platform, and not fouling. The Contractor however is responsible for placing workers portable warning signals at the entrance to the platforms in accordance with SEPTA’s safety rules.

3. The Contractor shall insure that the Contractor's equipment will not foul

any track until proper protection has been afforded. While trains or cars are passing on an adjacent track, any work that has the potential to foul shall be stopped.

4. The Project Manager shall have the right to restrict the operations of

fouling or on-track equipment when, in the Project Manager's opinion, the equipment is not in satisfactory condition to be safely operated or where operation will adversely affect the track structure. The Project Manager shall also have the right to prohibit the operation of any fouling or on-track



equipment by any Contractor-employed operator who is, in the Project Manager's opinion, not qualified or able to operate said equipment in a safe manner.

5. When the Contractor is working outside of an area as defined in 1.04 F.1.

above, where fouling is not possible or if working in de-energized tracks of the Market Frankford Subway/Elevated (MFSE) or a de-energized track which can be physically separated from an adjacent Broad Street Subway (BSS) or (MFSE) track provisions, of 1.04 G3 are revised as follows: The Contractors non-certified employees are allowed to work in such areas. The Contractor's supervisors and foreperson shall attend the track safety seminar and obtain certification in accordance with 1.04 G3 below.

6. When any excavation extends below the bottom of the crossties, or

where the stability of the railroad embankment and/or structure many be affected by excavation, such excavation shall be adequately braced by the Contractor. Prior to starting any such excavation, detailed drawings of the proposed bracing method shall be prepared and submitted to the Project Manager for approval. When deemed appropriate by SEPTA’s Project Manager, the shop drawings shall be accompanied by structural calculations. Both the shop drawings and calculation shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

G. General Safety Rules:

The following safety rules of SEPTA are applicable to all of the Contractor's employees and those of its subcontractors in regard to conduct while on or close to the track area:

1. At all times while working on or adjacent to operating tracks, the Contractor,

its subcontractors, and all of their employees, shall closely observe the applicable flagging rules and regulations of SEPTA.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that all of its employees and

the employees of its subcontractors are familiar with the safety rules, safety instructions and safe performance of work. These employees shall so conduct themselves so as not to violate any of such flagging or safety rules.

3. Prior to the start of construction, all of the Contractor's employees scheduled

to work on or near trackage shall attend a safety seminar on track safety rules conducted by SEPTA. If these individuals are replaced, during the course of the Project, the replacements and any other new employees shall also be required to attend this seminar, before being able to work. The attendance certification is logged into SEPTA’s database. Re-certification is required on an annual basis.

4. Before permitting workperson on the track, the Contractor shall hold a Job

Briefing conducted by the contractor-employed Protection Assurance



Representative and/or SEPTA QPE (as prescribed by SEPTA’s Rail Construction Safety Plan) and verify and document that the foreperson and watchperson have an understanding with all employees as to the location they will go when necessary to clear for trains. The Contractor’s PAR shall make certain that the SEPTA QPE responsible for track safety explains the track safety methods being utilized during the work. These Job Briefings will be documented by the Contractor at the time of the briefing(s). The record of “Job Briefings” shall be maintained by the Contractor for inspection by SEPTA.

5. The Contractor's watchperson must give their entire attention to watching for

trains and warning the employees and are prohibited from performing any other duties. They must not leave their posts until instructed by SEPTA that the protection is unnecessary or other watchperson have been assigned and are in position and watching in the direction of an approaching train.

6. The Contractor's Protection Assurance Representative shall be responsible to

insure the safety of all personnel. The Contractor shall furnish and equip its foreperson or watchperson with audible and visible warning devices to warn personnel of the approach of trains.

7. The Contractor’s Protection Assurance Representative shall, before

permitting employees on or close to the track, ensure that:

a. All employees shall have an understanding as to where they shall go when necessary to clear for trains.

b All employees performing work on or about operating energized tracks

may use worker’s portable warning signal if deemed necessary in accordance, with SEPTA's Operating Rules. The warning signal can be a Starlight Lantern, Model 215-TL or approved equal. Contractor shall have to replace with a "Amber" lens cover to be in conformance with these regulations.

8. The Contractor’s job forepersons presence at the work site is mandatory

while the work is being performed on or close to the track area.

9. A maximum of five non-certified contractor's employees who are not performing work may enter track areas where third rail power is energized accompanied by a certified employee, (SEPTA or Contractor's) with the approval of the Train Dispatcher or a duly authorized representative.

10. While working with scaffolding or non-conductive ladders on the platform, the

Contractor’s employees shall secure scaffolding/ladder to eliminate rolling or falling.



11. When small hand tools or construction equipment are used in electrified territory, the Contractor shall exercise due care including the clearance requirements to safeguard persons and property in the area. If the required clearance cannot be maintained or any hazards are involved, prior guidance from SEPTA's Project Manager shall be requested.

12. The Contractor's employees shall consider all tracks as operating tracks and

be on the alert for trains operating in either direction at all times. When it is necessary to walk in the track area, it is the Site Superintendent and/or Foreperson/Watchpersons responsibility to let the train operator’s know where the employees are. To do this, first notify and gain approval of the Train Dispatcher, protect the employees by displaying a lighted lantern, flashlight, and/or flags at all times. At first indication of an approaching train, get off the track promptly, and conceal light from train operator’s view.

13. Any employee leaving the work area for any reason shall receive permission

from the on-site safety supervisor and protect himself with a lighted lantern or flashlight. He shall follow route to and from the work location designated by the foreperson in order to avoid crossing of track insofar as possible.

14. When standing in the track area, the Contractor's employees shall allow

sufficient room for the car and third rail shoes, which extend beyond the car body to clear body, clothing, or any object they may have in their hands. This includes keeping their coats buttoned up so that they cannot catch on any part of a moving car.

15. The Contractor's employees shall not step on track behind stopped trains,

particularly those that have just arrived at stations, due to possibility of train having overrun the platform and being reversed to place doors properly for opening.

16. The Contractor's employees shall carry hand held flashlights at all times when working at night, in the tunnel area or when visibility is restricted.

17. Contractor's employees provided with a flag person, when hearing flag persons whistle and/or watchpersons horn warning of the approach of a train, shall place tools and material clear of the track and depart the track area immediately to the nearest platform or place of safety without interfering with the pathway of passengers.

18. Contractor's employees shall avoid track switches by walking around them.

19. Contractor's employees shall observe and acknowledge whistle signals as required. A warning whistle from vehicle operator must always be acknowledged by a proper hand, lighted lantern or flashlight signal to proceed when you are in the clear except when you are working under protection of



flag person. If carrying a light, it must be concealed after proceed signal is given.

H. THIRD RAIL SAFETY: 1. Contractor shall require each employee to:

a. Not stand on, walk on, sit on, or use the third rail or protection board/cover as a step.

b. Not come in contact with the third rail unless specifically required in the performance of duty. When working directly on the third rail, it shall be de-energized by SEPTA.

c. Not carry metal objects when close to the third rail.

d. Keep as far as possible from the third rail during wet conditions.

e. Never assume that the third rail is dead. When directed by SEPTA

that it is de-energized, remain isolated from the circuit if it is necessary to work close to it. Avoid stepping on loose material piled close to the third rail.

f. Not come in contact with any third rail shoe of a car, as all third rail

shoes are energized if at least one shoe is in contact with the third rail.

g. Not walk between the running and third rail of any track.

h. Avoid additional tripping hazards and be aware of third rail anchors (braces) and cable feeds.

i. Not look at train collector shoes during movement, particularly at

tracks switches (turnouts) and third rail gaps.

j. Metal and/or electrically conductive ladders shall not be used.

2. EMERGENCY GUIDELINES

The following procedures shall be observed by the Contractor's personnel in the event of any emergency:

a. When an emergency occurs endangering life of a person that

requires the power off, contact the Train Dispatcher. Contact the Train Dispatcher by the fastest means available, either by radio, emergency call box located on platforms, or telephone (215) 580-



8555. Give the proper location requiring de-energizing by indicating the closest station, proper track number, and line.

b In such a case of electrical contact, personal judgment and initiative

has to be used: bearing in mind that the rescuer's safety should not be imperiled. Contact with a live third rail may prove fatal in a matter of seconds. The most important thing is to stop the flow of electricity through the victim's body and then apply mouth-to-mouth resuscitation (or CPR when necessary and if qualified to do so) until he or she recovers consciousness or trained help arrives. Once a victim is freed from the third rail, do not move him or her unless they can do so under their own power. Except for qualified rescuers, moving an injured person may result in further injury.

c. If a fire in the vicinity of the third rail can be readily extinguished, use

a dry chemical extinguisher, do not use water.

END SECTION



PAGE INTENTIONALLLY LEFT BLANK


v.15-04 Light Rail Tunnel Safety Requirements 01069-1

SECTION 01069 - LIGHT RAIL TUNNEL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This Section specifies the general requirements and safety regulations governing the Contractor's activities when its work impacts an active Light Rail Tunnel Line.

1.02 RELATED WORK

Section 01041 Project Coordination Section 01060 Regulatory Requirements and Safety Section 01100 Special Project Procedures Section 01400 Quality Requirements Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Section 01060 1.04 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

The information contained in this Section is intended to provide guidance and safety precautions to the Contractor when working on a live rail line. The Contractor is advised that SEPTA shall operate trains over this location during the performance of Work under the Contract, except as specified otherwise. The Contractor shall comply with all parts of this Section, as well as with the general intent of this Section.

B. Responsibility:

The Work covered by the Contract shall involve safety of persons and property on a live electrified rail line. Therefore, relevant skill and experience is required of the Contractor to do its work safely. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of its construction operations. The Contractor shall, therefore, be expected to post adequate watchperson(s) and/or protective devices to protect its work crews, equipment and the work site. Pertinent safety rules, which shall



be followed, are listed in, but not limited, to Paragraphs E, G, and H of this subsection. The Contractor shall exercise proper care at all times.

C. Operations:

When work is being performed under active SEPTA train operations the safety and continuity of train operation shall be of the first importance. Train operation shall, at all times, be protected and the Contractor shall arrange its work accordingly. Whenever the Work may affect the safety or movement of trains, the method of doing such Work, together with the proposed sequence of operations and time schedules for same, shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval.

1. No work shall be prosecuted until such approval has been obtained.

However, such approval of the Project Manager or a duly authorized representative shall not be considered as a release of the Contractor from responsibility for any damage to SEPTA by the acts of the Contractor, its employees, and/or its subcontractor's employees.

2. In the event of an unplanned discontinuation of train service due to the

Contractor's operations, the Contractor is not only liable for any injury or damage that might occur, but also for the full cost of any detour of train traffic, shuttle bus service and any associated costs.

D. SEPTA Personnel:

1. Flag person: SEPTA Flag persons are responsible for the safety and continuity of operations. The SEPTA Flag person shall have authority to direct the stoppage of trains. Any sharing of protective duties between SEPTA and the Contractor within the work site can be considered coincidental.

2. Pilots: If the Contractor wishes to occupy live or operating tracks with

on-track equipment, the Contractor shall request a SEPTA pilot who will obtain exclusive track occupancy on the live track. All SEPTA pilots shall be requested from the Project Manager a minimum of 1 week in advance of the required starting time.

3. Project Manager: The Project Manager or a duly authorized

representative shall have complete authority in matters related to the safety of SEPTA's operations and facilities.

4. Qualified Protection Employee (QPE): A SEPTA employee qualified

on operating rules, physical characteristics, and on-track protection procedures and is responsible for establishing on-track protection and safety. The QPE is responsible for conducting Job Briefings relative to



on-track protection, and works with the Contractor’s PAR to ensure proper oversight of activities.

E. Contractor's Personnel:

1. Protection Assurance Representative (PAR): The Contractor’s Protection Assurance Representative” (representative) may be the Superintendent, Safety Officer or responsible foreperson. The representative shall be present at all times when the Contractor’s are working within the SEPTA operating envelope and under the requirements of this Section. In general the PAR shall be responsible for day to day oversight of the Contractor’s gang watchperson and employees so that they are working safely according to all parts of this Section to coordinate construction activities with SEPTA’s Flagging personnel.

2. Gang Watchperson: The role of the Contractor's gang watchperson is

solely for the safety for the Contractor's employees when external influences, i.e. rail traffic, shall expose the workers to a safety hazard. The gang watchperson must be on site with each work crew at all times. If it becomes necessary for the gang watchperson to leave the site, Work shall be suspended until he/she returns or is replaced by another qualified gang watchperson.

F. Right of Way Restrictions:

1. Work Zones:

a. Fouling type work is defined as follows:

1) For Contractor's work at other than station platforms which is

four (4) feet or less from the near rail of operating track. 2) For Contractor's work which extends off the edge of a station

platform.

3) For Contractor's work which is outside of the above limits that may foul.

b. SEPTA will protect its service from the Contractor's operations in

the Contractor’s work areas by establishing SEPTA Work Zones. Within a SEPTA Work Zone are one or more SEPTA Work Areas. A SEPTA Work Zone is the pre-arranged limits of a work project along the right-of-way, which is then defined for operational safety purposes in bulletin information disseminated to SEPTA personnel. A SEPTA Work Area is the actual working limits within the pre-



defined boundaries of the SEPTA Work Zone. The SEPTA Work Area is more clearly defined visually in the field by the erection in place of specific SEPTA Work Area signage.

c. The Contractor’s work area is defined as a linear space in or

adjacent to the track area. The Contractor’s work area starts (in the direction of normal train movement) where the first worker is working or piece of equipment is set up and ends where the last worker is working or piece of equipment is set up. The Contractor’s work area shall remain within the SEPTA Work Area. The limits of the SEPTA Work Area, in accordance with SEPTA operating rules, is visually identified in the field by a Stop Sign (or substitution of a Work Area Speed Limit Sign by the Flagperson) AND a Work Area Resume Speed Sign. The approach to the Work Area is visually identified in the field by an Approach Sign.

1) A SEPTA Work Zone will be established by SEPTA for fouling

type work on or about the operating tracks. 2) SEPTA will determine if the SEPTA Work Zone requires single

tracking or slow speed operations.

d. Applicable SEPTA Work Area signage or portable signals at prescribed distances from the Contractors work area define the SEPTA Work Areas for the control of train operations. The Contractor's employees shall confine themselves to stay within the limits of their SEPTA Work Area at all times. Movement out of the SEPTA Work Area into another SEPTA Work Area or another SEPTA Work Zone with personnel, equipment and/or material shall not be permitted and shall be considered a violation of the safety regulations. SEPTA Flag persons are required when fouling type work is being performed. No work shall be done in the track area when visibility is poor.

2. Where fouling is not possible or if working in de-energized tracks or a de-energized track, which can be physical, separated from an active track, the above is revised as follows: The Contractors non-certified employees are allowed to work in such areas. The Contractor's supervisors, safety supervisor, and foreperson shall attend the track safety seminar and obtain certification.

Note that a Work Zone is not required when the Contractor’s work is two (2) feet or more from the trackside edge of a station platform, and not fouling. The Contractor is responsible for placing the portable warning signal at an appropriate distance in accordance with SEPTA’s Safely rules.



3. The Contractor shall insure that the Contractor's equipment will not

foul any track until proper protection has been afforded. While trains or cars are passing on an adjacent track, any work that has the potential to foul shall be stopped.

4. The Project Manager shall have the right to restrict the operations of fouling or On-Track equipment when, in the Project Manager's opinion, the equipment is not in satisfactory condition to be safely operated or where operation will adversely affect the track structure. The Project Manager shall also have the right to prohibit the operation of any fouling or On-Track equipment by any Contractor-employed operator who is, in the Project Manager's opinion, not qualified or able to operate said equipment in a safe manner.

5. When the Contractor is working outside of an area as defined in 1.04

F.1. above, where fouling is not possible or if working in de-energized Light Rail tracks or a de-energized light rail track which can be physically separated from an adjacent Market Frankford Subway/Elevated (MFSE) track provisions, of 1.04G3 are revised as follows: The Contractors non-certified employees are allowed to work in such areas. The Contractor's supervisors and foreperson shall attend the track safety seminar and obtain certification in accordance with 1.04G3 below.

G. General Safety Rules:

The following safety rules of SEPTA are applicable to all of the Contractor's employees and those of its subcontractors in regard to conduct while on or close to the track area:

1. At all times while working on or adjacent to operating tracks, the

Contractor, its subcontractors, and all of their employees, shall closely observe the applicable flagging rules and regulations of SEPTA.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that all of its

employees and the employees of its subcontractors are familiar with the safety rules, safety instructions and safe performance of work. These employees shall so conduct themselves so as not to violate any of such flagging or safety rules.

3. Prior to the start of construction, all of the Contractor's employees

scheduled to work on or near trackage shall attend a safety seminar on track safety rules conducted by SEPTA. If these individuals are replaced, during the course of the Project, the replacements and any other new employees shall also be required to attend this seminar, before being able to work. The attendance



certification is logged into SEPTA’s database. Re-certification is required on an annual basis

4. Before permitting work persons on the track, the Contractor shall

hold a Job Briefing conducted by the contractor-employed Protection Assurance Representative and/or SEPTA QPE (as prescribed by SEPTA’s Rail Construction Safety Plan) and verify and document that the foreperson and gang watchperson have an understanding with all employees as to the location they will go when necessary to clear for trains. The Contractor’s PAR shall make certain that the SEPTA QPE responsible for track safety explains the track safety methods being utilized during the work. These Job Briefings will be documented by the Contractor at the time of the briefings. The record of Job Briefings shall be maintained by the Contractor for inspection by SEPTA.

5. The Contractor's gang watchperson must give their entire attention

to watching for trains and warning the employees and are prohibited from performing any other duties. They must not leave their posts until instructed by SEPTA that the protection is unnecessary or other watchperson have been assigned and are in position and watching in the direction of an approaching train.

6. The Contractor's Protection Assurance Representative shall be

responsible to insure the safety of all personnel. The Contractor shall furnish and equip its foreperson or gang watchperson with audible and visible warning devices to warn personnel of the approach of trains.

7. The Contractor’s Protection Assurance shall, before permitting

employees on or close to the track, ensure that:

a. all employees shall have an understanding as to where they shall go when necessary to clear for trains.

b. All employees performing work on or about operating energized

tracks and not fouling shall carry and display a Worker's Portable Warning Signal in accordance, with SEPTA's Operating Rules. The warning signal can be a Starlight Lantern, Model 215-TL or approved equal. Note: That the Lantern may be furnished with a "Blue" lens cover. Contractor shall have to replace with an "Amber" lens cover to be in conformance with these regulations.

8. The Contractor’s job forepersons presence at the work site is

mandatory while the work is being performed on or close to the



track area. 9. A maximum of four non-certified contractor's employees who are

not performing work may enter track areas where third rail power is energized accompanied by a certified employee, (SEPTA or Contractor's) with the approval of the Train Dispatcher or any duly authorized representative.

10. While working on scaffolding or non-conductive ladders on the

platform, the Contractor's employees shall secure scaffolding/ladder to eliminate rolling or falling.

11. When small hand tools or construction equipment are used in electrified territory, the Contractor shall exercise due care including the clearance requirements to safeguard persons and property in the area. If the required clearance cannot be maintained or any hazards are involved, prior guidance from SEPTA's Project Manager shall be requested.

12. The Contractor's employees shall consider all tracks as operating

tracks and be on the alert for trains operating in either direction at all times. When it is necessary to walk in the track area, it is the site superintendent and/or foreperson gang watchpersons responsibility to let the vehicle operator know where the employees are. To do this, first notify and gain approval of the train dispatcher, protect the employees by displaying a lighted lantern or flashlight at all times. At first indication of an approaching train, get off the track promptly, and conceal light from vehicle operators.

13. Any employee leaving the work area for any reason shall receive

permission from the on-site safety supervisor and protect himself with a lighted lantern or flashlight. He shall follow route to and from the work location designated by the foreperson in order to avoid crossing of track insofar as possible.

14. The Contractor's employees shall not step on track behind stopped

trains, particularly those that have just arrived at stations, due to possibility of train having overrun the platform and being reversed to place doors properly for opening.

15. The Contractor's employees shall carry hand held flashlights at all

times when working at night or in the tunnel area.

16. Contractor's employees provided with a flagperson, when hearing flagpersons whistle and/or watchpersons horn warning of the approach of a train, shall place tools and material clear of the track



and depart the track area immediately to the nearest platform or place of safety without interfering with the pathway of passengers.

17. Contractor's employees shall avoid track switches by walking

around them.

18. Contractor's employees shall observe and acknowledge whistle signals as required. A warning whistle from vehicle operator must always be acknowledged by a proper hand, lighted lantern or flashlight signal to proceed when you are in the clear except when you are working under protection of flagperson. If carrying a light, it must be concealed after proceed signal is given.

H. Overhead Wires:

1. When equipment is used in electrified territory or in the vicinity of SEPTA electrical distribution cable as SEPTA overhead wires, the Contractor shall exercise special care to safeguard all persons in the area. Special attention shall be given in the vicinity of tunnel structures where the wires may be depressed.

a. All overhead wires, including catenary, transmission, and signal

lines in electrified zones, shall be considered live at all times. Insulating covering of wire shall not be depended upon for protection against shock.

b. Use of metal ladders is forbidden in the area of overhead wires.

2. Emergency Guidelines

a. When an emergency occurs endangering life of a person that

requires the power off, contact the Controller by the fastest means available, either by radio, emergency call box located on platforms, or telephone (215) 580-8565. Give the proper location requiring de-energizing by indicating the closest station, proper track number, and line.

b. In a case of electrical contact, personal judgement and initiative has

to be used; bearing in mind that the rescuer's safety should not be imperiled. Contact with a live overhead wire or third rail may prove fatal in a matter of seconds. The most important thing is to stop the flow of electricity through the victim's body and then apply mouth-to-mouth resuscitation (or CPR when necessary and if qualified to do so) until he or she recovers consciousness or trained help arrives. Once a victim is freed from the overhead wire, do not move him or her unless they can do so under their



own power. Except for qualified rescuers, moving an injured person may result in further injury.

c. If a fire in the vicinity of the overhead wire can be readily

extinguished use a dry chemical extinguisher, do not use water.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Special Project Procedures 01100-1

SECTION 01100 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section outlines the procedural requirements so the contractor may plan, and be granted concurrence, for Track outages, single tracking, service disruptions and/or diversions specified under this contract.

B. Work crews and equipment which SEPTA will make available to a

Contractor. C. The Contractor requesting approval to procure and operate track cars

and/or high rail vehicles shall conform to the procedures detailed below. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010: Summary of Work B. Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety C. Section 01066: Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Requests for service outages, shutdowns, diversions or other service disruptions and Site Specific Work Plans (SSWP) shall be submitted to the Project Manager (PM) by the Contractor for concurrence 21 calendar days prior to the above referenced operation. The PM will respond within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the submittal.

Once reviewed by SEPTA, any changes to the SSWP will be subject to a subsequent review by SEPTA. These submittals must be annotated and reissued weekly to reflect changes to the scope or schedule created during the 21 day period between the original issue and the date of operation. Not later than 21 days before planned outages, shutdowns, diversions or other service disruptions, a new revision of the submittal incorporating all changes and reflecting the final work plan, must be submitted to the PM.

B. Should the Contractor desire to cancel an approved above referenced

operation, the written cancellation request shall be received by the PM a



minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the operation date so that affected SEPTA operations can be rescheduled. Late cancellation requests shall result in the outage costs being assessed against the Contractor.

1.04 REQUEST FOR TRACK USAGE (Outages, shutdown, rail diversions and

single tracking)

A. The Request for Service (as defined above) shall be a time-scaled logic network. This network is to fully detail the extent of work proposed and the Contractor's plan and means for accomplishing same in the inclusive 21 day period. Specific separate operations and planned service disruptions should be highlighted in these submittals. 1. The SSWP shall provide a description of work; time scaled hourly

logic network, breakdown of labor force, materials and the type of equipment that will be utilized. The SSWP shall include Contractor's watchperson, required SEPTA flagging and support, construction methods, arrangements for emergency clearing and restoration of service, and sketches for defining the configuration of rail service and other operational elements at the end of the Contractor's outage.

2. All work by SEPTA Force Account Track, Signals, etc. or other

contracts that are defined in Section 01010 and subsequent reviews that has the potential of delaying either the work by this Contractor, or the restoration of service, must be identified clearly in terms of scope and schedule for coordination with others.

B. SEPTA will not grant usage (as referred above) until the Contractor's

SSWP has been reviewed by the Engineer and approved by SEPTA in writing.

The Contractor shall not perform any of the work requiring (as referred above) until written approval has been received from SEPTA.

1.05 REQUESTS FOR SURFACE DIVERSION (Bus, Light Rail) 1.06 REQUEST FOR SEPTA SUPPORT

A. Flagging

B. Signal



C. Power 1.08 REQUEST FOR SEPTA SERVICES

A. Work Crews

B. Professional

C. Equipment 1.09 TRACK CAR/HIGH RAIL VEHICLE (TC/HRV)

A. The contractor shall formally request by submittal, all track or hi-rail equipment proposed to be utilized for the work of this contract. The submittal shall be directed to the Project Manager for review and approval. This submittal shall include the equipment’s physical characteristics which include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Manufacturer’s Catalog cuts by showing all dimensions.

2. Any subsequent modifications noted and dimensioned.

3. Vehicle Identification Number, or serial number.

4. Must have a current Pennsylvania vehicle safety inspection sticker, if rubber tired.

5. If subway operation is planned, it must be diesel powered and equipped with either a catalytic converter or exhaust scrubber meeting U.S. Bureau of Mines Schedule 24 emissions.

7. The PM will provide a clearance diagram and attach to their section if available. The contractor shall also provide the following on-board equipment.

All powered vehicles will be equipped with a steering wheel lock.

Hydraulic outriggers will be equipped with locking pins.

Guards will be installed at all wheel pinch points.

All powered vehicles will have an ABC type fire extinguisher.

A tow bar and coupler adapter for rescue.

A clearance placard in the cab using the correct print.

Boom tie-down if applicable.



Wheel chocks to secure on rail if left unattended.

Railroad lighting package to provide marker lights for the end of consist.

Horn

8. Each vehicle shall have a unit number clearly marked on its exterior.

9. If operation of multiple consists is planned, each configuration shall

be submitted for review as “Arrangement A, B, C, etc.”. The traction and braking effort in comparison to the prime mover shall be calculated and provided.

10. A recovery plan shall also be provided for review detailing how the

contractor proposes to re-rail or recover disabled on-track equipment once it is operating on the rail.

B. Testing

SEPTA will inspect the equipment and grant approval if it meets safety standards or refuse operation of the equipment if it is not in safe condition, before any equipment may be placed on the rail. Any repairs or modifications found to be required will be done at no cost to SEPTA and a yard retest will be held. SEPTA will yard test equipment to determine actual performance in curves and crossover before granting permission for use. If the equipment is utilized to deliver materials the loading shall also be reviewed for clearance. All requested consists will be tested at this time. 1. If any modifications are made after the initial yard test, the Contractor

will notify the Project Manager in writing with details and receive approval before using it again on track.

2. If the approved vehicle or track car is taken off the project for another

job and then returned, the contractor must certify in writing that it is still in its original condition. If there is any question, a yard test and inspection will be scheduled at no additional cost to SEPTA.

C. Operation

1. A qualified SEPTA employee will assist the Contractor to place the equipment on the track. The SEPTA pilot must be on board when such equipment enters a siding or a point of access to the main rail. The SEPTA pilot as a minimum will ride the vehicle to and from the work zone.



2. The Contractor shall operate this equipment within the work zone specified in the Bulletin Order issued for that work. In addition, the following rules apply to the Contractor’s personnel when placing equipment on the rail after receiving authorization from a qualified SEPTA Employee.

a) The TC/HRV driver shall perform a visual inspection to see that

the track car and its consist is in a safe operating condition before being operated. Track Cars shall not be operated if found in an unsafe condition.

b) The TC/HRV shall display a white light to the front and red light to

the rear when visibility is restricted and at night. High Rail Vehicles shall have headlights on high beam when moving.

c) The TC/HRV shall not trail through spring switches or semi-

automatic switches unless switches are properly lined.

d) The maximum speed for the movement of any TC/HRV is governed by the appropriate Operating Rule Book.

e) The TC/HRV shall be operated at a speed, which will permit them

to stop short of any obstruction, improperly lined switch or broken rail.

3. The Contractor shall include training of track car/HRV drivers in the

appropriate part of their safety plan, and develop and maintain an updated log of these personnel.

4. The Recovery plan will be kept in each powered vehicle and updated

as changes are made.

D. All equipment shall comply with the appropriate requirements of 49 CFR part 214; Final Rule, Roadway Maintenance Machine Safety.

END OF SECTION



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

October 16, 2015 Concourse Improvements – Stage 2 – Phase 1 Final Bid Package

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 01111 - 1

SECTION 01111 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Special requirements for waste management during renovation construction operations.

1. Protect the environment, both on-site and off-site, during renovation and construction operations.

2. Prevent environmental pollution and damage. 3. Maximize source reduction, reuse and recycling of solid waste.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01112 – Sustainable Design Requirements

B. Section 02070 - Selection Demolition

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.


A. Maximize use of source reduction and recycling procedures.



1. Demolition Material and Waste Management: A minimum 50 percent by weight of total project solid waste to be diverted from landfill.

2. Construction Material and Waste Management: A minimum 50 percent by weight of total project solid waste to be diverted from landfill.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting with SEPTA Project Manager and Architect to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental protection.

1. Coordinate deconstruction with work of Section 02070 Selection Demolition.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Solid Waste Management Plan: Not less than 10 days before the Pre-construction meeting, prepare and submit a Solid Waste Management Plan including, but not limited to, the following:

1. List of the recycling facilities, reuse facilities, municipal solid waste landfills and other disposal area(s) to be used. Include:

a. Name, location, and phone number. b. Copy of permit or license for each facility.

2. Identify materials that cannot be recycled or reused. Provide explanation or justification. 3. Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the SEPTA Project Manager.

a. Approval of Contractor’s Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations.

B. Progress Documentation: Document solid waste disposal and diversion. Include the quantity by weight of waste generated; waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Identify landfills, recycling centers, waste processors, and other organizations that process or receive the solid waste.

1. Document on form in Appendix A of this Section, or similar form as approved by the SEPTA Project Manager

2. With each Application for Payment, submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the Project and waste material

C. Record Submittals: With Record Submittals as specified in Division 01, submit the following:

1. Summary of solid waste disposal and diversion. Submit on form in Appendix A of this Section, or similar form as approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

N/A

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Develop and implement a waste management program in accordance with ASTM E1609 and as specified herein.

B. Collection: Implement a recycling/reuse program that includes separate collection of waste materials of the following types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area:

1. Concrete and Masonry 2. Metal

a. Ferrous b. Non-ferrous

3. Wood, nails and staples allowed 4. Debris 5. Glass, colored glass allowed 6. Paper

a. Bond b. Newsprint c. Cardboard and paper packaging materials

7. Plastic

a. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE) b. Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) c. Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC) d. Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) e. Type 5: Polypropylene (PP) f. Type 6: Polystyrene (PS) g. Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made

with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination

8. Gypsum 9. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans 10. Flooring

a. Carpet b. Resilient Flooring

11. Insulation



12. Ceiling Tiles 13. Others as appropriate

C. Recycling/Reuse: Maximize recycling and reuse of materials

1. Recycling/Reuse off project site: The following is a partial list for Contractor's information only. For more information, contact the State Department of Environmental Protection and the local Integrated Solid Waste Management Office.

a. Habitat for Humanity, a non-profit housing organization that rehabilitates and builds housing for low-income families. Sites requiring donated materials vary. Contact the national hotline (800) HABITAT.

b. The Green Guys, 215-262-8063. Provides roll off containers for recyclable building materials at construction projects. The company takes these recyclable materials to companies that use these salvaged materials

c. Construction Waste Management, 215-333-5077. Accepts wallboard trimmings and clean wood wastes. Provide recyclable roll off service for new building construction projects.

d. Kevin Brooks Salvage, 215-848-5029.

D. Handling:

1. Clean materials that are contaminated prior to placing in collection containers. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to recycling process).

2. Arrange for collection by or delivery to the appropriate recycling or reuse facility 3. Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Materials: Handle in accordance with applicable

regulations. Coordinate with Section 13280 Asbestos Abatement and 13285 Lead Paint Abatement.

E. Composting: In accordance with State Extension Service recommendations and as follows:

1. Moisture content: Maintain between 35 percent and 60 percent. 2. Carbon to nitrogen (C/N) ratio: Maintain at approximately 30 to 1 by weight 3. Do not compost meat or dairy products on site 4. Where the proposed Waste Management Plan incorporates composting of plastics, assess

the potential effect of each type of plastic to be included on the composting process in accordance with ASTM D6002



Appendix A

SUMMARY OF SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND DIVERSION

Project Name: Project Number:

Contractor Name: License Number:

Contractor Address:

Solid Waste Material

Date Material Disposed/ Diverted

Amount Disposed/ Diverted (ton or cubic yard)

Municipal Solid Waste Facility (name, address, & phone number)

Recycling/ Reuse Facility (name, address, & phone number)

Comments (if disposed, state why not diverted)

Appliances

Asphalt

Cardboard

Carpet

Concrete

Gypsum Drywall

Land Clearing/Soil

Masonry

Metals: Ferrous

Metals: Non-ferrous

Mixed/Co-mingled Waste

Plastic

Roofing: Asphalt-based

Salvaged/Surplus Materials for Reuse

Wood: Landclearing Debris

Wood: Scrap Lumber

Ceiling Tiles

Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT)

Other:

Signature: Date:

END OF SECTION 01111


SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01112 - 1

SECTION 01112 – SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain International Green Construction Code (IgCC) requirements.

1. Other IgCC requirements depend on product selections and may not be specifically identified as IgCC requirements. Compliance with IgCC requirements will be used as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.

2. Specific IgCC requirements are also included in other Sections.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01111 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IgCC: International Green Construction Code.

1. Definitions that are a part of the IgCC apply to this Section.

B. Recycled Content Building Materials: Materials that contain not less than 50 percent combined recycled content (postconsumer and preconsumer) or contain not less than 25 percent combined recycled content and that comply with requirements for recyclable building materials and building components.

C. Recyclable Building Materials and Building Components: Materials and components that can be recycled into the same or another material with a recovery rate of not less than 30 percent or that are recyclable through an established, nationally available, closed-loop manufacturer's take-back program.

D. Bio-Based Materials: One of the following:

1. Materials with bio-based content of not less than 75 percent when tested according to ASTM D 6866.

2. Wood and wood products that are labeled in accordance with the American Forest & Paper Association's Sustainable Forestry Initiative.

3. Wood and wood products that are certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001 and FSC STD-40-004.

4. Wood and wood products that are certified and labeled in accordance with the standards of the Programme for Endorsement of Forest Certification.

5. Salvaged or reused wood products. 6. Materials that comply with 7 CFR 3202.



E. Indigenous Materials: Materials and products that are manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If materials are transported by rail or water, the distance transported by rail or water shall be multiplied by 0.25 to determine the distance to the Project site. If only a portion of a material or product complies with this requirement, only that portion shall be considered indigenous.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. International Energy Conservation Code 2009 Edition

B. International Green Construction Code 2015 Edition

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit additional sustainable design submittals required by other Specification Sections.

B. Sustainable design submittals are in addition to other submittals.

1. If submitted item is identical to that submitted to comply with other requirements, include an additional copy with other submittal as a record copy of compliance with indicated IgCC requirements instead of separate sustainable design submittal. Mark additional copy "Sustainable design submittal."

C. IgCC Documentation Submittals:

1. Material Selection: Product data for used, recycled, recyclable, bio-based, and indigenous materials showing compliance with requirements. Tabulate mass, volume, or cost for building materials used in the Project and indicate those that are used, recycled, recyclable, bio-based, or indigenous. Include summary of building materials tabulation, showing compliance with requirement and the following:

a. Receipts for used materials, indicating sources and mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

b. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers for recyclable materials. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

c. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers indicating percentage by weight of recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

d. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers for bio-based materials. Include chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. Include statement indicating mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

e. Product data for indigenous materials indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for raw materials. Include statement indicating distances from Project site, modes of transportation, and mass, volume, or cost as applicable.

2. Construction Waste Management: Comply with Section 01111 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."



3. Indoor-Air Quality (IAQ) During Construction:

a. Construction IAQ management plan. b. Product data for temporary filtration media. c. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.

4. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control: Product data for the following, indicating compliance with requirements.

a. Composite wood products. b. Adhesives and sealants. c. Paints and coatings. d. Flooring. e. Acoustical ceilings and wall systems. f. Insulation.

D. Action Plans: Submit the following action plans within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed, indicating how requirements will be met.

1. Material Selection Plan: List of proposed materials. Tabulate anticipated mass, volume, or cost for proposed building materials and indicate those that are used, recycled, recyclable, bio-based, or indigenous. Include summary of proposed building materials tabulation, showing compliance with requirement.

2. Waste management plan complying with Section 01111 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control Plan: List of proposed products. Indicate each product that complies with criteria, each product that does not, and anticipated quantities of each that will be used. Include calculations showing that percentage of noncompliant products will not exceed allowable limit.

4. Construction IAQ management plan.

E. Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction activities with action plans.

F. IAQ test report.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Provide products and procedures necessary to comply with requirements in this Section for material selection and for material emissions and pollutant control. Although other Sections may specify some requirements for material selection and for material emissions and pollutant control, the Contractor shall provide additional materials and procedures necessary to comply with requirements.



2.2 MATERIAL SELECTION

A. Provide not less than 55 percent of construction materials that comply with one of the following, excluding electrical, mechanical, plumbing, security, fire detection, fire alarm, controls, fire suppression, and elevators.

1. Used materials and components. 2. Recycled content building materials. 3. Recyclable building materials and building components. 4. Bio-based materials. 5. Indigenous materials.

2.3 MATERIAL EMISSIONS AND POLLUTANT CONTROL

A. Composite wood products shall have formaldehyde emission rates not greater than the following when tested according to ASTM D 6007 or ASTM E 1333.

1. Hardwood Plywood: 0.05 ppm. 2. Particleboard: 0.09 ppm. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard More Than 5/16 Inch Thick: 0.11 ppm. 4. Medium-Density Fiberboard 5/16 Inch or Less in Thickness: 0.13 ppm.

B. Adhesives and Sealants: Not less than 85 percent of field-applied adhesives and sealants that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the following:

1. VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.

2. VOC content shall not exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. d. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. e. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. f. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. g. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. h. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. i. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. j. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. k. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. l. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L. m. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. n. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. o. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. p. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. q. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. r. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. s. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.



t. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. u. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. v. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. w. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. x. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesives (Contact Adhesives That Are Used to Bond

Melamine-Covered Board, Metal, Unsupported Vinyl, Rubber, or Wood Veneer 1/16 Inch or Less in Thickness to Any Surface): 250 g/L.

y. Structural Wood Member Adhesives: 140 g/L.

C. Paints and Coatings: Not less than 85 percent of field-applied paints and coatings that are inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with either of the following:

1. VOC emissions shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less.

2. VOC content shall not exceed limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Flat Coatings: 50 g/L. b. Nonflat Coatings: 100 g/L. c. Nonflat - High Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L. d. Basement Special Coatings: 400 g/L. e. Bond Breakers: 350 g/L. f. Concrete Curing Compounds: 350 g/L. g. Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100 g/L. h. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. i. Faux Finishing Coatings: 350 g/L. j. Fire-Resistive Coatings: 350 g/L. k. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. l. Form-Release Compounds: 250 g/L. m. Graphic Arts Coatings (Sign Paints): 500 g/L. n. High-Temperature Coatings: 420 g/L. o. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L. p. Low Solids Coatings: 120 g/L. q. Magnesite Cement Coatings: 450 g/L. r. Mastic Texture Coatings: 100 g/L. s. Metallic Pigmented Coatings: 500 g/L. t. Multi-Color Coatings: 250 g/L. u. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. v. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. w. Reactive Penetrating Sealers: 350 g/L. x. Recycled Coatings: 250 g/L. y. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 250 g/L. z. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. aa. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. bb. Stains: 250 g/L. cc. Swimming Pool Coatings: 340 g/L. dd. Tub and Tile Refinish Coatings: 420 g/L. ee. Waterproof Membranes: 250 g/L. ff. Wood Coatings: 275 g/L. gg. Wood Preservatives: 350 g/L.



hh. Zinc-Rich Primers: 340 g/L.

D. Flooring: Not less than 85 percent of flooring materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less. Where postmanufactured coatings or applications have not been applied, concrete; ceramic and concrete tile; clay and concrete pavers; metal; and organic-free, mineral-based flooring shall be deemed to comply with this requirement.

E. Wall Systems: Not less than 85 percent of wall systems shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less. Where postmanufactured coatings or applications have not been applied, concrete, concrete masonry, clay masonry, gypsum plaster, ceramic and concrete tile, metal, and organic-free, mineral-based materials shall be deemed to comply with this requirement.

F. Insulation: 85 percent of insulation shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 micrograms/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less, except for insulation manufactured without formaldehyde.

G. Total VOC Limit: Not less than 50 percent of adhesives, sealants, paints, coatings, flooring, acoustical ceilings, wall systems, and insulation shall have a total VOC emission rate of not more than 500 micrograms/cu. m when determined according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NONSMOKING BUILDING

A. Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Comply with Section 01111 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

A. Cover or close openings in ducts and other related air-distribution component openings with tape, plastic, sheet metal, or other approved method before beginning dust-producing operations and maintain until dust-producing operations are complete.

B. Provide temporary ventilation during construction, using one or more of the following methods:



1. Natural ventilation complying with the IBC. 2. Fans that produce three air changes per hour. 3. Exhaust in work areas at not less than 0.05 cfm/sq. ft. and not less than 10 percent

greater than supply air to maintain a negative pressure.

C. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction period, as specified in Section 01500 "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls," install MERV 8 filter media according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.

1. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.

D. Air-Quality Testing: Engage testing agency to perform the following:

1. Conduct baseline IAQ testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using testing protocols in accordance with ASTM D 5197, ASTM D 5466, ASTM D 6196, ASTM D 6345, and ISO 7708. The number of sampling points shall not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft. or for each contiguous floor area.

2. Concentrations of the following shall not exceed:

a. Particulates (PM2.5): 35 micrograms/cu. m. (24 h) b. Particulates (PM10): 150 micrograms/cu. m. (24 h) c. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor levels. d. 1, 1, 1-Trichloroethane: 1000 micrograms/cu. m. e. 1, 3-Butadiene: 20 micrograms/cu. m. f. 1, 4-Dichlorobenzene: 800 micrograms/cu. m. g. 1, 4-Dioxane: 3000 micrograms/cu. m. h. 2-Propanol: 7000 micrograms/cu. m. i. Acetaldhyde: 140 micrograms/cu. m. j. Acrylonitrile: 5 micrograms/cu. m. k. Benzene: 60 micrograms/cu. m. l. t-Butyl Methyl Ether: 8000 micrograms/cu. m. m. Carbon Disulfide: 800 micrograms/cu. m. n. Carbon Tetrachloride: 40 micrograms/cu. m. o. Chlorobenzene: 1000 micrograms/cu. m. p. Chloroform: 300 micrograms/cu. m. q. Dichloromethene: 400 micrograms/cu. m. r. Ethybenzene: 2000 micrograms/cu. m. s. Ethylene Glycol: 400 micrograms/cu. m. t. Formaldehyde: 27 micrograms/cu. m. u. n-Hexane: 7000 micrograms/cu. m. v. Naphthalene: 9 micrograms/cu. m. w. Phenol: 200 micrograms/cu. m. x. Styrene: 900 micrograms/cu. m. y. Tetrachloroethane: 35 micrograms/cu. m. z. Toluene: 300 micrograms/cu. m. aa. Trichloroethane: 600 micrograms/cu. m. bb. Xylene Isomers: 700 micrograms/cu. m. cc. Total Volatile Organic Compounds: 500 micrograms/cu. m.

3. Where carpets and fabrics with styrene butadiene rubber latex backing are installed, concentrations of the following shall not exceed:



a. 1-Methyl-2-Pyrrolidinone: 160 micrograms/cu. m. b. 2-Ethylhexanoic Acid: 25 micrograms/cu. m. c. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 2.5 micrograms/cu. m. d. Caprolactam: 100 micrograms/cu. m. e. Nonanal: 13 micrograms/cu. m. f. Octanal: 7.2 micrograms/cu. m.

4. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When retesting noncomplying building areas, take samples from same locations as in the first test.



v.15-04 Project Progress Meetings 01200-1

SECTION 01200 - PROJECT PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: To enable the orderly review of the progress of the Work, and to provide for systematic discussion of problems, the SEPTA Project Manager, or a designee, will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period.

B. The progress meetings are in addition to the coordination, pre-construction and scheduling meetings noted elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Agreement and Division 1. B. The Contractor's relations with its subcontractors, and discussions

relative thereto, are the Contractor's responsibility and are not to be agenda items in the project progress meetings.

C. The discussions and minutes of meeting shall exclude any claims related

issues not directly impacting the progress of the Work, and other items for which SEPTA has provided clarifications/directives/ change order(s) or otherwise closed, but remain disputed by the Contractor.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Agenda items

1. To the maximum extent practicable, the Contractor shall advise the Project Manager at least 48 hours in advance of project meetings regarding items to be discussed during the meeting.

2. Technical questions or issues requiring a response from the designer of record shall be submitted as a formal RFI. Contractor must submit a request for designer of record to attend the meeting through SEPTA PM at least 7 days in advance.

B. Minutes: 1. The SEPTA Project Manager will compile minutes of each project

meeting, and will furnish one copy to the Contractor(s).



2. The Contractor may copy and distribute other copies as required. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MEETING SCHEDULE A. Project meetings will be held Bi-weekly unless SEPTA PM decides

otherwise. B. The Project Manager will coordinate with the contractor(s) to establish a

mutually acceptable meeting schedule. 3.02 MEETING LOCATION

The Project Manager will determine meeting location. To the maximum extent practicable, meetings will be held at the job site.

3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Attendance:

1. Contractor's Superintendent shall attend and participate in each project meeting and shall represent the Contractor consistent with Contract and commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon during the project meetings.

2. Subcontractors, and others may be invited to attend those project meetings in which their aspect of the Work is involved.

3. If notified of the need 7 days in advance, the SEPTA PM will request the attendance of the appropriate members of the design team to participate in technical discussions.

B. Minimum agenda for each meeting:

1. Review and revise, the minutes of previous meetings.

2. Safety including the presence of hazardous materials and other environmental issues.

3. Quality Control Issues including outstanding non-conformance reports/issues.



4. Review progress of the Work since last meeting, including status of submittals for approval.

5. Status of coordination and installation meetings with other prime and sub-contractors engaged in the work of the project.

6. Identify problems, which impede planned progress.

7. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule, if applicable.

8. The status of Requests for Information (RFI) and all Potential Change Orders (PCO) shall be discussed and updated. The Contractor’s PCO listing shall conform to SEPTA’s listing.

9. Contractor shall provide and discuss "30 day look ahead" activity schedule if the work is not progressing per the early start/finish activity dates as noted in the latest update of the approved schedule.

10. Discuss and review As-Built Drawings/Specification Status.

11. Complete other current business.

C. Revisions to minutes: 1. Unless published minutes are challenged in writing, within five (5)

working days of the distribution date they will be accepted as properly stating the activities and decisions made at the meeting.

2. Any individual challenging published minutes shall provide proper

supporting documentation acceptable to the Project Manager to verify that the challenged item was truly discussed during the subject meeting.

3. Challenge to minutes shall be settled as priority portion of "old

business" at the next regularly scheduled meeting. SEPTA's Project Manager decision’s concerning challenged item(s) shall be binding on the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Submittals 01300-1

SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section covers all submittals, including shop drawing submittals, samples, manufacturer’s cut sheets and “or equal” submittals. It complements the requirements of Paragraph VIII.N. of the Agreement.

B. Some products and procedures only require a submittal for information,

and may not require a response from SEPTA.

1. Products which match exactly something specified by manufacturer’s name and catalog model number.

2. Other items at the SEPTA Project Manager’s discretion including

but not limited to any of the following:

Products list Test Section Manufacturer's installation instructions Manufacturers' certificates Shop Drawing Manufacturer’s Samples Certifications Testing Warranties

C. SEPTA reserves the right to not formally respond to any submittal which is not required.

D. The Contractor may require subcontractors to provide drawings,

installation diagrams, and similar information to help coordinate the Work, but such data shall not be reviewed by SEPTA unless it is required by other pertinent sections of the Specifications.

E. With the SEPTA PM’s permission, the contractor may submit information in an electronic format for review.

F. In addition to any other documentation responsibility, the Contractor shall

provide copies of all approved and/or incorporated submittals in an electronic format as defined by the SEPTA PM to fulfill Contract closeout requirements

1.02 RELATED WORK:



A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work

B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements

C. Section 01410 – Testing and Inspection Services

C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout

1.03 SUBMITTAL PREPARATION

A. The Contractor, within two weeks of the receipt of the designer of record’s computerized listing of Contractor(s) submittals, shall review, revise and/or amend, if applicable, and resubmit the revised listing of submittals.

B. The contractor will assess material availability and all long lead items shall be identified.

C. After checking and verifying all field measurements and, after complying

with the applicable procedures of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings, catalog cuts, samples and substitution(s) for review and action.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination between the

Contractor/Fabricator/Detailer and SEPTA for each complex submittal requiring detailed coordination, including all structural items. This coordination may be executed in a meeting called at the request of the contractor or SEPTA. The purpose of the meeting(s) shall be to establish guidelines for details and information necessary to prepare the shop drawings.

E. All submittals will be sent directly to the SEPTA PM unless the PM

specifically directs the contractor to do otherwise. 1.04 SUBMITTAL REVIEW

A. The results of review of submittals will be designated as follows:

NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN

PROCEED AS NOTED; PROCEED AS NOTED; REVISE AND RESUBMIT

DO NOT PROCEED; REVISE AND RESUBMIT



REJECTED

NOT APPLICABLE

B. Submittals not in compliance with the Contract will be returned to the Contractor for revision. Any losses of time and additional costs associated with resubmittal(s) are the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Each submission and re-submission shall give specific written notice on

the transmittal of each variation that the shop drawings or samples may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each shop drawing submitted for review and approval of each such variation.

D. Each resubmission(s) shall clearly identify and make specific notation(s)

on each shop drawing concerning the:

1. Changes that are made as a result of comments on the previous submittal(s).

2. Changes that are not made, but commented on the previous

submittal(s). The Contractor shall provide detailed explanations and justifications as to why the comments are not addressed.

3. Changes that are solely made by the Contractor, but were not

commented on the previous submittal(s). The Contractor shall provide a detailed explanation and justification for such changes.

E. Submittals that are "Proceed as Noted" are for the purpose of expediting

procurement/fabrication/Installation of the intended work. If re-submittal is required, the Contractor shall incorporate all corrections and resubmit original drawings and required copies of drawings to SEPTA, within 30 days. If re-submittal is not required, then it is understood that the Contractor will proceed in accordance with the comments.

For “Proceed as Noted; Revise & Resubmit” items, payment for completed work that is related to these items will not be made until the corrected and final resubmittal is accepted in writing by SEPTA.


A. SEPTA reserves the right to require mock ups of any material and/or assembly, at any time during the construction process. Once approved, the mock-up will set a minimum standard of performance and/or appearance for the work. Mock-ups will be provided at no cost to



SEPTA. The approved mock-up may, at the discretion of the SEPTA project manager become part of the work.

B. Electronic Submittals

1. SEPTA uses software to track submittals. The Contractor’s forms, e.g. transmittal etc., will be submitted in a form compatible with this software.

2. For its records, SEPTA requires that all approved submittals be

converted to electronic format (at no additional cost to SEPTA) for SEPTA’s document retention purposes.

C. Coordination of Submittals:

1. Prior to making each submittal, the Contractor shall carefully review

and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. Shop drawings of systems containing closely related items and components must be submitted, as a single submission showing the interrelationship of the components required for that system.

2. The Contractor shall verify prior to submission that each shop

drawing is well prepared and that the submittal conforms in all respects with the specified requirements. The drawings shall provide complete information regarding proper fabrication and installation.

3. The Contractor shall sign each submittal or shop drawing original and

copies and affix a stamp with specific written indication that the Contractor has reviewed the submittal and is satisfied that it conforms to the requirements of the contract documents. For submittals which are substitutions see 1.06 below.

4. Shop drawings shall be tailored to the specific project need including

coordination of various trades and should include material descriptions, quantities, dimensions, design criteria and similar data to enable review information as required. The shop drawings must show clear and complete information for the fabrication and installation of materials.

5. Where feasible, orient the plan(s) on the shop drawing(s) in the same

manner as the plans on the Contract Drawings. 6. Shop drawings with reproduction(s) of the Contract Drawings will not

be accepted. 7. Structural fabrication and erection drawings shall be prepared,



checked, signed and sealed, by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania with proven qualifications and similar experience.

Unless the Contract Documents indicate specific steel connections, the Contractor shall design steel connections, stamped and sealed by an engineer licensed in the State of Pennsylvania, and provide sufficient details for the SEPTA’s review and approval.

D. Responsibility: The Contractor is solely responsible and accountable for:

1. Means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of

construction including fabrication, assembly, installation/erection, safety precautions and programs incidental to any submittal.

2. Accuracy of all submittals and shop drawings and final installation. 3. Arranging submittals and shop drawing standards review meetings

with SEPTA. 4. Converting all approved submittals to an agreed on electronic format

(PDF unless otherwise noted) and providing these files to SEPTA at no cost to SEPTA.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. "Or Equals" Substitutions:

1. Restricted Items (sole sourced items) - Where the contract documents specifically require the use of certain equipment and/or materials they will indicate that substitutions will not be allowed.

2. Equals Considered – Unless otherwise noted, whenever a material

or article required is specified or shown on the plans by using the name of the proprietary product or of a particular manufacturer or vendor, any material or article with matching characteristics, will be considered equal and satisfactory provided the material or article has equal properties and function in the opinion of SEPTA's Project Manager. It shall not be purchased or installed without SEPTA's Project Manager's written approval.

The Contractor shall document each request with complete data

substantiating compliance of the proposed Substitution with the Contract Documents. "Or Equal" requests will be considered only when substantiated by the Contractor's submittal of data



documenting the "or equal" nature of material or article within thirty-five (35) calendar days after the date of receipt of Notice to Proceed. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it

meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. b. Shall provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the

specified product.

c. Shall coordinate installation and make changes to other work, which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to SEPTA.

d. Shall waive claims for additional costs or time extension,

which may subsequently become apparent.

e. Shall reimburse SEPTA (if applicable) for review or redesign services associated with review and approval by SEPTA, if the substitution is rejected as not being equivalent.

B. OTHER SUBSTITUTIONS

1. For any reason, including a lack of availability of the original

material, the contractor may ask permission to substitute a material or assembly which is not fully equal to the one specified. This will be processed as a change order (a no cost change order only if there is no cost difference compared to the original specified material). All substitutions will be evaluated following Value Engineering principles. The results of SEPTA’s evaluation will be final, and SEPTA is has the right to make a final determination over which items are judged to be acceptable.

The Contractor shall document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it

meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product.

b. Shall provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.

c. Shall coordinate installation and make changes to other work,



which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to SEPTA.

d. Shall waive claims for additional costs or time extension,

which may subsequently become apparent.

2. The Contractor shall provide substitutions in a timely manner and in accordance with the construction contract, so as to not have a negative impact on the construction schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP (FABRICATION/INSTALLATION) DRAWINGS

A. Shop drawings shall be based on field dimensions and other information gathered by the contractor and his agents. When SEPTA or the designer of record takes no exceptions to the drawings or directs the contractor to proceed as noted, it is only claiming that there are no apparent deviations from the design intent of the contract documents.

B. Final fit and placement may be affected by fabrication and field installation

tolerances as well as other factors beyond the knowledge of SEPTA and the designer of record. Installation and final fit remains the sole responsibility of the contractor. Language placing this responsibility on SEPTA or the designer of record is strictly prohibited.

C. Scale and measurements: Shop drawings shall be made accurately to a

scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the Work. SEPTA reserves the right to demand additional detail and information to facilitate the submittal process.

D. Required Copies:

1. Shop drawings shall be submitted in the form of (#TBD) 3 copies of

each sheet in a media acceptable to the SEPTA Project Manager.

E. Review comments will be shown on one set which will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such copies as are required for its purposes.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE (INCLUDING CATALOG CUTS)

A. The Contractor shall submit the original printed literature and product data sheets available from the manufacturer(s) and 3copies. SEPTA will



keep the original copy of all items submitted

B. Where submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, the Contractor shall clearly show which portions of the contents are being submitted for review.

C. The Contractor shall submit the copy which is to be returned, plus 3

copies for SEPTA's use and distribution. 2.03 SAMPLES

A. The Contractor shall provide sample(s) identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. Identify as described under "Identification of submittals" below.

B. Number of samples required:

1. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit two

samples, one of which will be retained by SEPTA.

2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single sample may be submitted for review and, when approved, be installed in the Work at a location agreed upon by SEPTA.

2.04 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Unless waived in the specific section of the Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, the Contractor shall submit accurate color and pattern charts for selection.

B. SEPTA reserves the right to require samples and/or a mockup of any material, to determine actual appearance.

C. Unless waived elsewhere, two copies of each sign face in accurately color matched proofs of all permanent signage, at a scale specified by the SEPTA PM, will be submitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall assign a date and unique number to each submittal and an indication that the contractor has reviewed the submittal for



conformance to the contract documents. This information shall appear on each submittal original and copy.

1. Each submittal subject to approval must receive a separate number not shared by any other component, information or process. Only one approval/rejection will be given per submittal number.

2. Each submittal number must include the specification section that the submittal most applies to followed by a hyphen and a sequential number (the first submittal for Section 05500 would be 05500-1 and so on)

3. When a resubmittal is made for any reason, the Contractor shall transmit under a new letter of transmittal with a new submittal number in the form of the original number plus the letters a,b,c and so on for each subsequent resubmittal (05500-1a using the above example) and a new date for that resubmittal.

B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration

of the Work, showing current status of all submittals at all times. The Contractor shall make the submittal log available for review by SEPTA upon request.

3.02 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall make submittals in groups (with separate numbers) containing all associated items to assure that information is available for checking of each item when it is received.

B. Each grouping shall be accompanied by a dated transmittal letter which lists each transmittal by number and the number of copies submitted.

C. Partial, confusing and poorly prepared submittals will be rejected as not

complying with the requirements of the Contract. The Contractor will be liable for delays so occasioned.

3.03 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall make submittals consistent with early start dates shown on the approved baseline schedule, but sufficiently in advance of early scheduled dates for installation to provide the necessary time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery.

B. In scheduling, the Contractor shall allow 14 calendar days for review and

processing by SEPTA following its receipt of the submittal.



This review time will be increased for the submittal(s) that are so extensive that 14 days of turn around period is unreasonable as determined by SEPTA. This determination shall be binding on the Contractor.

C. Continued submission of material and repetitious submittals which

clearly fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents which may cause delays in the completion of the Contract and any such delays be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

3.04 SEPTA'S REVIEW

A. Review and Processing shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors, which may exist in the submitted data.

B. SEPTA does not confirm dimensions or make any representation that

parts will fit together properly if fabricated in the sizes shown on the shop drawings. SEPTA requires that the contractor take all necessary site measurements and that the shop drawings represent an accurate documentation of these dimensions.

C. The contractor assumes responsibility to exercise control over all

construction tolerances and ensure that these tolerances do not result in construction which violates regulations, codes or clearances.

D. Revisions:

1. The Contractor shall make required revisions as noted on initial the

submittal.

2. If the Contractor considers any required revision to be a change, it shall so notify SEPTA as provided for in the Agreement. Such notification shall be made no later than 10 calendar days from the date of return of such submittals by SEPTA to the Contractor.

3.05 SHOP DRAWING AND SUBMITTAL CONFLICTS WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Unless the Contractor submits data as a substitution as specified in

section 1.06 above, submitted information which departs from the contract documents will be understood to be contractor /subcontractor errors and have no effect on the contract, even if not identified by SEPTA during the review process.



3.06 FINAL ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION

A. As part of the Contractor’s Closeout Documentation requirements, the Contractor shall submit to the SEPTA PM All approved submittals and other documentation in an electronic format (PDF files unless otherwise approved by the SEPTA PM).

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Requests For Information 01305-1

SECTION 01305 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section stipulates procedural requirements for processing of Contractor Request(s) for Information (RFI) and complements the requirements of the Contract Agreement, Paragraphs V.B and VIII.B.

B. An RFI is a written communication originated by a construction

Contractor to request clarification of the intent of the Construction documents. It results in an exchange of information only. If the contractor believes the response triggers a change in the project scope he must submit a change order request. No response to an RFI may be interpreted as a change order request or approval.

1.02 RELATED WORK:

A. Agreement

B. Section 01010 – Summary of Work

C. Section 01300 - Submittals

D. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements

E. Section 01410 – Testing and Inspection Services

F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout

G. Section 01720 – Project As-Built Documents

H. Attachment - Request for Information Form

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 01300. B. The Contractor shall submit RFIs using the attached RFI form and shall

provide specific reference to the section of the Construction documents to which the RFI refers. RFIs that are incomplete, unsigned or otherwise not submitted in compliance with the Contract, will be returned to the Contractor.

C. Any losses of time and/or additional costs associated with frivolous RFI

submittals are the responsibility of the Contractor.




A. All RFIs will be signed by the Contractor's representative and submitted to SEPTA in "hard" copy.

B. The primary purpose of an RFI is to clarify the Contract Documents

1. The Contractor has the responsibility to be familiar with the

Contract documents. RFI’s that request clarification of items that in the judgment of the PM, are clearly evident in the Contract documents, shall be rejected by SEPTA.

2. The Contractor shall not use RFI’s for the following:

a. To facilitate construction coordination between contractors and subcontractors/vendors.

b. To initiate substitutions in material, methods and or systems.

c. To transfer their responsibility for reviewing Contract documents

to SEPTA and/or the Architect/Engineer.

3. RFI’s, which fail to reference the specific Contract documents in question, will be rejected. If the Contractor uses an RFI for the purposes described above in 1.04 B2 it will also be rejected. In these cases, the Contractor will be directed to meet the requirements specified in Section 01300 by the PM.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF REQUEST(s) FOR INFORMATION

The Contractor shall consecutively number all RFIs. For projects with separate contracts, each Contractor shall include a prefix (G, E, M etc.) in their numbering sequence to designate the submittal as originating from the "General", Electrical" or "Mechanical" Contractor. RFIs shall be submitted using the attached form. When an RFI must be resubmitted for any reason it shall be sent using a new RFI number with reference provided to the previous



RFI.

3.02 TIMING OF REQUEST(s) FOR INFORMATION

A. The Contractor shall submit RFIs sufficiently in advance of early construction schedule “Start” dates for fabrication and/or installation activities in order to provide the necessary time required for reviews, possible revisions and subsequent resubmittals.

B. For scheduling purposes, the Contractor shall allow 10 days for review

and response by the Architect/Engineer and/or SEPTA following their receipt of the RFI.

This review time will be increased for RFIs that are sufficiently extensive or complex that the above turnaround period is unreasonable as determined by the Architect/Engineer and SEPTA. This determination shall be binding on the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for delays in the completion of

the Contract that result from the submission of RFIs which clearly fail to meet the requirements of this Section.

3.03 SEPTA'S REVIEW

A. All RFI’s will be submitted to the SEPTA PM. The designer of record is responsible for reviewing Contractors' RFIs to provide clarifications and/or interpretations as they relate to design documents. The SEPTA PM is responsible to provide clarifications and/or interpretations to RFIs that are related to the Agreement or SEPTA operational issues and service. An answer to a RFI shall never be considered as an approval for extra work and/or a change in scope or any other directive which results in a change to the Construction Contract cost. All such changes must follow the change order process.

B. If the Contractor considers any clarifications to an RFI to be a change; it

shall so notify SEPTA in the manner provided for in the Agreement.

Such notification shall be made no later than 7 calendar days from the date of the return of such clarifications by the designer of record or SEPTA to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION



REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) PROJECT:

1. RFI Number

Responsible Contractor

Date

Description: Requested By (Signature): Due

Date

2. A/E Response, or SEPTA Comments(if applicable):

A/E (Signature):

Date

Contract Document Impact Yes No Revisions Attached Yes No

3. Transmitted to Contractor

4. PCO Yes No Impact

PCO Number:

CD&C PM (Signature): Date



Filling out the RFI Form 01: This section is to be completed by the Contractor. The SEPTA Project Manager

(PM) shall provide RFI Forms to the Contractor(s) at the Pre-construction Meeting.

02: This section is to be completed by the A/E. All technical inquiries are to be

responded to by the A/E. The section must be signed and dated within the contractual time frame. The SEPTA PM may use this space to add comments or directly respond to non-technical queries, involving contractual matters or SEPTA Operational issues.

03: This section is to be completed by SEPTA project staff to return the RFI to

Contractor. The distribution must include the Project File. 04: This section is to be completed by SEPTA project staff. The RFI response will be

reviewed for its potential to result in a Change Order. This box should be appropriately completed as a result of this review.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Construction Photographs 01380-1

SECTION 01380 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall provide professional quality construction record photographs periodically during course of the Work as determined by the SEPTA PM

B. In addition to photographs generally describing the progress of the work, the SEPTA PM will require specific components and processes be documented.

C. SEPTA reserves the right to require that an approved professional photographer be used if, in the opinion of the SEPTA PM the photographs submitted at any time are inadequate in quality or coverage.

D. The PM may wish to define period of specific coverage and/or required sequence of photographs, prior to construction and project closeout at minimum.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work B. Section 01011 - Summary of Project

C. Section 01720 - Project As-Built Documents

1.03 PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED

A. The Contractor shall provide SEPTA with the photographs taken. Photographs shall only be used for the purpose of fulfilling the requirements of this section. Other uses, without written permission from SEPTA's Project Manager, are prohibited. The contractor may not take photographs for any other purpose on SEPTA property without the written consent of SEPTA.

B. Views and Quantities Required:

1. As specified above, the Contractor shall photograph the project from a number of different views on a weekly basis, as directed by SEPTA.

2. The Contractor shall provide 2 prints of each view, enclosed In 2



separate binders with double faced plastic sleeves. D. Ownership of Electronic Files

1. The prints and electronic files shall be furnished to SEPTA at the Contractor’s expense and all images collected during the course of the contract shall become the sole property of SEPTA. The contractor shall turn over all copyright rights to SEPTA in a written document to be approved by SEPTA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRINTS

A. Prints shall be provided in glossy finish color. date encoded of sufficient quality to render detail in a satisfactory manner as determined by the SEPTA PM.

1. Size: 8 X 10 in. or as directed by the SEPTA PM.

B. The Contractor shall identify each print on back, listing:

1. Southeastern Pennsylvania Transportation Authority

2. FTA Project Number

3. SEPTA Project Number (if applicable)

4. Project Name

5. Bi-weekly progress photographs

6. Date: _______________________

7. Description/Key Plan

a. Orientation of view

b. Date and time of exposure

c. Key plan in lower right hand corner permanently affixed.

8. Name and address of photographer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUE



A. Paramount importance shall be given to factual detailed presentation with maximum depth of field, proper exposure with adequate shadow and highlight detail and minimum distortion.

B. The photographer will be required to use fill in electronic flash technique to adequately light high contrast scenes and assemblies. Electronic flash shall also be used at all interior locations and other locations where the available light is not adequate for recoding appropriate detail.

C. Camera capture (non-enhanced) must provide a minimum image size of

3500 x 2500 pixels unless otherwise determined by the SEPTA PM.

D. Take views as directed and in the presence of SEPTA's representative. 3.02 DELIVERY OF PRINTS AND FINAL DELIVERY OF ELECTRONIC FILES

A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of prints and JPG files of adequate quality as determined by the SEPTA PM with each Application for Payment.

B. At the conclusion of the project the, the contractor will provide a complete

set of all electronic files delivered in a medium as directed by the SEPTA PM.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Quality Requirements 01400-1

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Each Contractor shall establish and maintain a project specific Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) system documented by a program manual and supporting plans and/or procedures. These documents will address the methods to be used to control the quality related aspects of all materials, components and assemblies to be furnished and installed under the Contract Documents.

B. Each Prime Contractor shall have the primary responsibility for the quality

of all its work and shall ensure that the pertinent requirements for the achievement of quality are included and implemented in all relevant sub-contracts.

C. The QA/QC program shall include a description of the organization the

contractor will establish and shall identify the responsibilities and accountabilities of all personnel performing quality-affecting activities.

D. The QA/QC program and/or procedures shall include those checklists and

test & inspection forms the contractor will use to properly document the activities performed to achieve the quality of the Work. Each Prime contractor will be responsible for completing the checklists and activities called for in SEPTA’s Construction Inspection/ Monitoring Program as part of their Quality Control program.

E. Each Prime Contractor will cooperate fully with SEPTA’s QA/QC efforts including, but not limited to, providing requested information in a timely fashion when SEPTA executes quality audits of the project. All information generated during the project, of a non-confidential nature, including but not limited to the internal QA/QC audits executed by the contractor must be made available to SEPTA in a timely manner.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The Following definitions pertain to requirements of this section.

1. Quality Assurance (QA): QA is a program of planned and

systematic actions that provide adequate confidence that all activities affecting quality have been accomplished in accordance with governing codes, standards and contract requirements. QA



oversight of activities affecting quality is accomplished through field and manufacturing facility surveillance, audits or other documented measures conducted to verify that requirements have been met.

2. Quality Control (QC): Quality Control is the act of examining,

witnessing, inspecting, checking and/or testing of in-process or completed work to determine conformity with specified requirements and documenting the results.

3. QA Audit: A documented activity performed by written procedure or

checklist to verify that selected elements of the Quality Assurance/Quality Control Program have been developed, documented, and implemented in accordance with specified requirements.

4. Calibration: Comparison of two instruments or measuring devices,

one of which is of known accuracy traceable to national standards, to detect, correlate, report or eliminate by adjustment any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument or measuring device being compared with the standard.

5. Certification: The action of determining, verifying and attesting, in

writing, to the qualifications of personnel, materials, and/or equipment.

6. Inspection: A phase of Quality Control, which by means of

examination, observation, or measurement, determines the conformance of materials, components, parts, appurtenances, systems, processes, installations, or structures to predetermined quality requirements.

7. Source Inspection: Source inspection consists of the review,

monitoring, observation, and/or inspection, random or consistent, or at selected stages of manufacture or construction, of manufacturer or sub-manufacturer's personnel, material, equipment, processes, or tests.

8. Site Inspection: Site Inspection consists of reviewing, monitoring,

observing and inspecting the Work at the project site.

9. Surveillance: Term used to describe a review performed for the purpose of verifying that applicable quality requirements are properly accomplished.

1.03 RELATED WORK:



A. Requirements of the Agreement.

B. Section 1410: Testing and Inspection Services

C. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.

D. Specific requirements of Agreement Paragraph XVIII.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. SEPTA reserves the right to require mock-ups of any material and/or assembly, at any time during the construction process of a size determined by the SEPTA PM. Once approved, the mock-up will set a minimum standard of performance and/or appearance for the work. Mock-ups will be provided at no cost to SEPTA. The approved mock-up may, at the discretion of the SEPTA project manager, become part of the work.

B. The contractor will create a job specific Quality Assurance and Control Plan

(QACP) which clearly and comprehensively specifies the actions the contractor will take to achieve the quality required by the contract documents. This plan will be submitted no later than 15 days from the notice to proceed. No work may take place until the QACP has been accepted by SEPTA. The following areas will be addressed in this plan:

1. The Quality Assurance procedures shall define the organizational structure within which the programs are to be implemented, and delineate the responsibility and authority of the various personnel involved.

2. Shop Fabrication: The Contractor shall develop and submit inspection and test plans and procedures for all elements of the work that will be shop fabricated and tested. The inspection plans/procedures shall include source inspection and testing that will be performed, accept/reject criteria and the witness/hold points to be implemented to control the quality of work.

3. Site Construction/Installation: The Contractor shall develop and explain inspection and test plans and procedures for all elements of the Work that will be site constructed and installed, including the storage and installation of shop fabricated items. The installation plans and procedures shall include checklists, which outline the sequence of construction/installation activities and describe the verification checks for each step in the sequence, which must be found acceptable prior to proceeding. The plans and checklists shall be submitted to SEPTA for the identification of hold and/or witness points by SEPTA.

4. The Contractor shall develop and explain a Quality Assurance program and surveillance methods to verify that reviewed inspection, testing and



documentation activities have been performed to assure that shop fabricated and site construction/installation comply with the quality standards defined in the contract documents.

5. SEPTA's review of the QA/QC program shall not relieve the Contractor from its primary responsibility for the quality of the work.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. Engage an adequate number of skilled professionals who are thoroughly trained, experienced and familiar with the specific requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the Work.

B. Establish technical and administrative surveillance and/or audit methods

to ensure the highest degree of quality, and to correct potential problems without affecting the Contract schedule.

C. Verify that the required quality control inspection, testing and

documentation activities have been performed to assure that the equipment, materials and construction comply in all respect to the requirements of the contract documents.

D. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators,

products, services, site conditions, workmanship and installation to produce work of the quality required by the contract documents.

E. Take corrective actions in a timely manner to identify conditions adversely

affecting the quality of Work and the contract schedule.

F. All test results shall clearly include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to the contract requirements. Each report shall be conspicuously stamped on the cover sheet in large red letters a minimum of ½ inch high "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the Specifications as the case may be.

G. All test reports shall be signed by a testing laboratory's authorized person

and counter signed by the Contractor. The testing agency shall provide all tests, reports, certifications and other documentation sent directly to the SEPTA PM at the same time results are made available to the Contractor.

H. The quality assurance functions shall include, but not be limited to.

· Contract Review · Factory and Field Testing · Document Control · Handling and Storage · Procurement · Packaging and Shipping



· Shop Fabrication · Quality Records · Field Fabrication · Non Conformance Reporting · Field Installation · Corrective Action (s) · Field Assembly · QA Audits · Receiving Inspections · Training · Final Inspection · Control of In Process Activities · In process inspections · Identification and Traceability

I. The Contractor shall promptly reject work, which does not comply with the

requirements of the contract documents. If the contractor elects to propose that SEPTA accept work that is nonconforming, the contractor shall reimburse SEPTA for the costs associated with the review of the nonconforming work by the designer of record.

J. Develop quality assurance forms in a format acceptable to SEPTA for all

major elements of the Work including any additional elements. K. The Contractor shall perform audits periodically, no less than quarterly, to

maintain level of quality. The results of these audits must be documented and shown to SEPTA on request.

1.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR

A. Document that each material, manufactured product and fabricated item is produced and tested to comply with quality standards required by the contract documents. The Contractor shall perform audits periodically, no less than quarterly, to maintain level of quality.

B. Do not deliver material, manufactured product or fabricated item until

certified quality assurance documents are satisfactorily reviewed by SEPTA.

C. Do not schedule any factory tests/inspections by SEPTA until these

documents are satisfactorily reviewed by SEPTA. Twenty-one (21) day’s prior written notice is mandatory for (re) scheduling any factory tests or inspections by SEPTA.

D. SEPTA reserves the right to source inspect the material, manufactured

product or fabricated item after acceptance of the certified quality assurance documents. Any and all costs related to reinspection(s) by SEPTA shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.



E. The quality assurance documents shall identify any changes made to the material, manufactured product or fabricated item as compared to the Contract requirements and approved shop drawings. The Contractor shall describe as to how each change will affect the installation, space and subsequent operations.

F. SEPTA's review of quality assurance documents and inspections shall not

relieve the Contractor from its "primary" responsibility for the quality of work.

1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALITY MANAGER (QM)

A. The Contractor shall identify an individual (QM) within its organization at

the site of the Work, who shall be responsible for overall management of Contractor's Quality Assurance/ Quality Control (CQC) system. An individual who has no other duties shall fill the function of the QM.

1. The QM shall be experienced in the performance and supervision of the inspections and tests required by the specifications.

2. The QM shall be on the work site at all times that work is taking place and have complete authority to take any action necessary to ensure conformance with the Contract.

3. The QM will be the point-of-contact for all quality matters. The QM is expected to represent the Contractor with respect to all QA audit and review activities performed on the Contractor by outside parties.

4. The QM shall be appointed by letter and may not be replaced without written permission form SEPTA.

5. The QM may take daily direction from the Contractors Superintendent however unless prohibited by organizational size the QM shall independently report to an official within the Contractor's organization who is separate from direct responsibility for the outcome of the project.

6. The QM shall be responsible for the documented incoming inspection and determination of acceptability in conformance with Contract requirements of all material arriving at site.

7. Receiving inspection(s) shall include the review of associated documentation where necessary to verify the compliance of the item. Segregate and remove from the site, any nonconforming material.

1.08 SITE QUALITY CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR

A. Unless otherwise specially allowed elsewhere in the contract, do not



deliver reconditioned material to site. Protect all stenciled markings, labels and any other type of identification(s) to clearly identify the originality of the material.

B. As soon as the material arrives at site, (but before beginning installation)

provide to SEPTA the original Bill of Lading and Certification that the material complies with the requirements of the contract documents.

C. Installation shall comply with approved shop drawings. Do not begin

installation until relevant installation shop drawings have been appropriately reviewed by SEPTA. If for any reason the material or component cannot be installed according to the approved shop drawing and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer/fabricator the contractor is to alert the SEPTA immediately and not begin installation without concurrence from the SEPTA PM.

D. Perform necessary and specified tests and document the results. Replace

material that fails the tests at no cost to SEPTA.

E. Remove and replace material that is damaged in storage or in the performance of Work unless specifically accepted in writing by SEPTA's Project Manager.

F. No Work shall be performed at the site if the Contractor's Superintendent

or his authorized representative, as approved by SEPTA, is not present at the location where Work is being performed.

1.09 NON-CONFORMANCE REPORTS

A. A non-conformance report (NCR) shall be issued when any material or component does not meet the requirements of the contract documents in the opinion of the SEPTA Project Manager or other approved SEPTA personnel.

B. Once issued, the contractor has ten (10) days to challenge the NCR in a written response to the SEPTA PM.

C. Any NCR not withdrawn in writing by the SEPTA PM or other approved SEPTA personnel, must be corrected in a timely manner.

D. The contractor is obliged not to proceed with any work which would cover or reduce access to the non-conforming work.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION AND MONITORING PROGRAM

A. The contractor will be required to complete checklists, usually in the



presence of a member of the SEPTA project team, at specific critical points of the project’s execution to verify quality assurance procedures. SEPTA reserves the right to provide these checklists and require their completion in a timely manner without prior notification.

1.11 SUGGESTED CONTENTS OF A QA/QC PLAN

The contractor’s inspection and testing plan must be specific and not generic; tailored to the actual requirements of the project. Most plans will include many of the following items:

A. Organization & Responsibilities

1. Provide an organizational chart showing who has responsibility for quality control functions and how they interact with the rest of the project team. The QA/QC team must report directly to upper management and not to the project manager overseeing day to day activities of the project.

2. Supply brief resumes of key personnel 3. Document how the QA/QC personnel will oversee the QA/QC

activities subcontractors and fabricators.

B. Procedures and Documentation

1. Samples of logs and checklists to be used in QA/QC activities.

2. A schedule of tests, inspections and mock-ups required by the contract documents and governmental authorities

3. Procedures which guarantee that any material which must meet a specific test or other definition of quality is delivered to the job site accompanied by written verification that the material does meet these requirements. Included in this procedure is the process of gathering this information and retaining it by the contractor.

4. Procedures which insure that handling and storage instructions are obtained and followed for all material.

5. Procedures that insure that the contractor effectively controls documents at the job site. Included in this responsibility is a requirement that a copy of the most current construction documents is present at the job site at all times; including but not limited to drawings, specifications, addendum items, change orders and RFI’s.



C. Inspection and Testing Activities

1. List of inspection devices to be used by the contractor or a subcontractor which must be calibrated, the proposed frequency of calibration and who will calibrate them.

2. Procedures to ensure that testing and inspections will be done in a timely manner and will not negatively impact the progress of the work.

3. Procedures to insure that mock-ups and preinstallation conferences are done in a timely manner and give the SEPTA PM sufficient time to participate and review them without negatively impacting the schedule.

4. Procedures that insure that material which fail tests or inspections is identified and segregated.

D. Audit Activities

1. Define how and how often the QA/QC efforts for key construction activities will be audited and how the results of this audit will be presented to the job superintendent.

2. Define when anticipated audits may be implemented.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Testing And Inspection Services 01410-1

SECTION 01410 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART I GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall employ a testing and inspection agency fully licensed and competent in the field of testing and inspecting specific elements of the project. The Contractor shall submit all testing agencies and their qualifications for SEPTA's prior written approval before any testing begins.

B. The required testing and inspections shall include the tests commonly used in the construction industry including but not limited by those called for in the enclosed technical sections.

C. The Contractor shall pay for all necessary testing and inspection

services, except as noted in D below.

D. SEPTA provided services

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Agreement B. Section 01400

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing and inspection agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialists and/or registered Engineers and responsible officer.

B. Submit information on the agency’s participation in accreditation

program(s) such as those run by the Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Accreditation Program of the National Institute of Standards and Technology and AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory in the AASHTO Accreditation Program (AAP) in construction materials engineering and testing. Non-participation in appropriate third party accreditation programs may result in rejection.

C. Provide a schedule of agency’s activities commitment with the Contractor(s) schedule and work to be provided.



D. Other information and qualifications to allow SEPTA to determine their appropriateness for the tasks involved.

1. After each inspection and test, the testing agency must promptly

submit a copy of draft results directly to the SEPTA PM without contractor review.

2. Include:

a. Date issued, b. Project title and number c. Name of inspector, d. Date and time of sampling or inspection, e. Identification of product and specifications section, f. Location in the Project, g. Type of inspection or test, h. Date of test or inspection, i. Results of tests or inspection, j. A statement of Conformance or Non-Conformance with the

Contract Documents.

3. When requested by SEPTA, provide a written clarification and interpretation of test/inspection results.


A. The testing and inspection agency shall be approved by SEPTA.

B. The Laboratory shall comply with requirements of most current edition of ASTM E329 as well as otherwise specified in enclosed technical specifications.

C. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the Commonwealth of PA.

D. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to

review services.

E. Testing Equipment: All equipment must be calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants defined by industry standards.

F. Testing, when required, shall be the strictest of all pertinent codes and

regulations, including selected standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials.



G. All site testing and taking of specimens and samples shall be performed

in the presence of the Contractor's Superintendent and the SEPTA PM unless the PM waives the right to be present, in writing.

H. No testing required by the contract documents or common industry

practice may be waived or altered without the written permission of SEPTA’s Assistant General Manager of Engineering, Maintenance and Construction or SEPTA’s Chief Engineer.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. The Contractor shall comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall promptly process and submit required copies of

test reports and related instructions to assure necessary retesting and replacement of materials without any possible delay in the progress of the Work.

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Representatives of the testing and inspection agency shall have access to the Work at all times and at all site and off site locations, including manufacturing and fabrication facilities. The Contractor shall provide whatever support is required to enable the agency to perform its functions properly.

B. By advance discussion with the testing agency, the Contractor shall

determine the schedule required for the agency to perform its tests and inspections and to issue each of its findings. The contractor is solely responsible for any delays caused by testing and inspection services.

C. The Contractor shall provide all required testing and inspection time

within the approved construction schedule. D. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of

materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

E. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

1. to provide access to Work to be tested or inspected,

2. to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested,



3. to facilitate tests and inspections,

4. to provide storage and curing of test samples.

F. Notify the SEPTA PM, 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services.

G. When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the Contract

Documents, subsequent retesting occasioned by the non-compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency, at no additional cost to SEPTA.

H. Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's

convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Special Inspections and Testing 01420-1

SECTION 01420

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the sampling, testing and inspection work of the Independent Testing Agency to provide Special Inspections per Chapter 17 of the international Building Code. It notes the responsibilities of the Contractor to coordinate schedule, provide documents, samples and incidental labor for the Independent Testing Agency and is included in this Specification for the Contractor’s reference.

B. This section has been provided to inform the contractor of his responsibilities in supporting this Special Testing and Inspection Program, and is separate and distinct from the testing and inspections required by the contractor in Sections 01400, 01410 and the various technical specifications in Divisions 2 through 16.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01400: Quality Requirements 2. Section 01410: Testing and Inspection Services

1.3 PAYMENT OF TESTING AGENCY

A. The SEPTA will pay for the initial Independent Special Inspection and Testing Agency services for sampling, testing and inspection of materials and systems for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as indicated in this Specification Section 01420.

B. The Contractor will pay for the Contractor’s Testing Agency services for sampling, testing and inspection of materials and systems for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as indicated in each material technical specification.

C. The Contractor will pay for testing and retesting of materials that do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and all other items as specified in these Specifications such as but not limited to testing required to make substitutions, material quality assurance testing, certification of welders and preparation of welding procedure specifications.

D. The Contractor will pay for the making and testing of concrete cylinders for the purpose of evaluating strength at time of form stripping or the time spent evaluating the in situ strength of concrete using the Maturity Method.

E. The Contractor will pay for site-situated storage boxes for concrete cylinders.



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Independent Special Inspection and Testing Agency: An independent testing agency will be selected by SEPTA or his representative to inspect and test the materials and methods of construction as hereinafter specified for compliance with the specification requirements of the Contract Documents and to perform such other specialized technical services as may be required by the SEPTA PM or his representative.

B. Contractor's Testing Agency: The Contractor shall provide the services of an independent testing agency acceptable to the SEPTA PM to perform quality assurance and certification testing services. Inspections or testing performed as part of the Contractor's operations shall be included as part of the Work. Employment of a testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Quality: It is the intent of this specification to convey to the Contractor a minimum level of quality for materials to be used in the construction of the SEPTA Lansdale Parking Garage.

D. Service life: The number of years before the first repair of concrete spalls or delaminations, caused by corrosion of reinforcement in the concrete. The service life for the project to be achieved per the specification is 50 years.

E. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Independent Special inspection and Testing Laboratory: An independent testing laboratory will sample and test materials as they are being installed for compliance with acceptance criteria as specified and report and interpret the results. The laboratory shall monitor, inspect and report on the installation of constructed work and shall perform tests on the completed construction as required to indicate Contractor’s compliance with the various material specifications governing this work. The work to be performed by the Testing Agency shall be as specified in this Section of the Specification and as determined in meetings with the SEPTA PM, Architect, and Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall not engage the same testing laboratory for construction services as SEPTA has for quality assurance testing, unless agreed to by the SEPTA.

C. This specification and corresponding material specifications require that all fabricators and manufactures have a current quality assurance approval or certification from their industry institute as called for in the relevant material specification. Fabricators and manufacturers are also required to have their quality assurance and control procedures approved or certified by the local code authority which relieves them from special inspections as required by Chapter 17 of the IBC.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL MEETING

A. Construction Quality Control Conference: The Contractor shall conduct conference at the Project site prior to beginning any significant construction work.



1. Participants shall include representatives of the General Contractor, SEPTA PM, Architect, Engineers, Independent Special Inspection and Testing Agency, Contractor’s Testing Agency and applicable Sub-Contractors.

2. The meeting agenda shall be based on the agenda template included the Appendix located in the back of this specification.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and inspectors as indicated in Quality Assurance paragraph. The Testing Agency shall submit evidence of qualifications listed below to the SEPTA PM for written approval no less than [7] weeks prior to beginning any fabrication or construction. The contractor shall not proceed with any fabrication or construction until after the testing agency charged with inspection and testing of that work has been approved.

B. Testing and Inspection Program Outline: As indicated in Authorities and Duties of Testing Agency Paragraph.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 "Standard of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction"; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

B. Agencies providing Special Inspection shall be an Approved Agency by the Building Official of the city wherein the project is located to perform Special Inspections and other tests and inspections as outlined in the applicable building code. The special inspector shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the Building Official, for inspection of the particular type of construction or operation being inspected.

C. Testing machines shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

D. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements, and if not specified, in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or other recognized and accepted authorities in the field.

E. Earth Work and Drilled Pier Testing Agency Qualifications: The Soil Testing Agency shall have on staff and all testing work shall be supervised by a qualified Geotechnical Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

F. Concrete Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.



1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel conducting reinforcing inspection shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Construction Special Inspector or have comparable experience and education acceptable to the SEPTA PM.

G. Masonry Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093, “Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry”.

H. Qualifications of Welding Inspectors

1. Inspectors performing visual weld inspection shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1 Section 6.1.4. Welding inspection shall be supervised and the inspection reports signed by an inspector with current certification as an AWS Welding Inspector (WI) or Senior Welding Inspector (SWI).

2. Inspectors performing nondestructive examinations of welds other than visual inspection (MT, PT, UT, RT) shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, Section 6.14.6.

I. Sealant Testing: Independent testing agency shall follow practices of ASTM C 1021, “Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing Building Sealants”.

J. Publications: The testing and inspections shall comply with the latest edition of the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A435 Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates

ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A706 Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A898 Standard Specification for Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes

ASTM A1034 Standard Test Methods for Testing Mechanical Splices for Steel Reinforcing Bars.

ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C42 method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawn Beams of Concrete.

ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement

Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens) ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry



ASTM C1007 Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories

ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Concrete and Criteria for laboratory Evaluation

ASTM C1064 Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete

ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants ASTM C1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms ASTM D2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place

by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D2937 Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive-Cylinder

Method ASTM E94 Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination ASTM E164 Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments ASTM E165 Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or

Inspection of Materials Used in Construction ASTM E709 Standard Guide for magnetic Particle Examination ASTM E935 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing

Systems and Rails for Buildings AWS QC-1 Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors

1.9 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE AGENCY

A. Construction Documents, Shop Drawings, Product Information and Manufacturer’s Recommendations: The Independent Testing Agency shall obtain, review and become familiar with the project plans and specifications with the Architect and Engineer as soon as possible prior to the start of construction. The Independent Testing Agency shall obtain and review applicable and current shop drawings and submittals prior to inspection materials and systems. The Testing Agency shall be responsible for obtaining all product and material certifications from manufacturers and suppliers as specified in the Specifications. As applicable the Independent Testing Agency shall obtain product specific ICC-ES reports and become familiar with installation, inspection and testing requirements.

B. Attending Preconstruction Conferences: The Independent Testing Agency shall attend all preconstruction conferences with the Architect, Engineer, SEPTA PM, General Contractor, and Material Suppliers to coordinate inspection and testing requirements with the planned construction schedule. The Independent Testing Agency shall participate in such conferences throughout the course of the project.

C. Outline Testing and Inspection Program: The Independent Testing Agency shall be responsible for outlining a written detailed testing and inspection program conforming to the requirements as specified in the Contract Documents and in consultation with the SEPTA PM, Architect, and Engineer. The testing program shall contain an outline of inspections and tests to be performed with reference to applicable sections of the. Specifications or drawings and a list of personnel assigned to each portion of the work. Such testing and inspection program shall be submitted to the SEPTA PM, Architect and Engineer five weeks in advance of the start construction so as not to delay the start of construction.

D. Agency Contact: Prior to beginning work the Independent Testing Agency shall notify the SEPTA PM, Architect, Engineer and Contractor of their responsible person in charge of the project testing and inspection. They shall provide name, address, phone and e-mail address. If during the course of the project any of this information changes they shall notify all parties immediately.



E. Cooperation with Design Team: The Agency shall cooperate with the SEPTA PM and Contractor and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice.

F. The Agency shall perform the required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials as specified under each section and observe methods of construction for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

G. Notification of Deficiencies in the Work: When deficiencies are discovered while on site the Testing Agency shall notify the contractor immediately of these deficiencies. The Agency shall notify the SEPTA PM, Architect, Engineer, and Contractor, within 24 hours of discovery by telephone or e-mail and then in writing of observed irregularities and deficiencies of the work and other conditions not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Accounting: The Testing Agency shall be responsible for separating and billing costs attributed to SEPTA and costs attributed to the Contractor.

I. Limitations of Authority: The Testing Agency is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or release any requirements of the Specifications or to approve or accept any portion of the work or to perform any duties of the General Contractor and his Subcontractors.

1.10 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

A. Cooperation with Design Team: The Contractor shall cooperate with agency personnel; provide access to the work and to manufacturers operations.

B. Furnishing Samples: The Contractor shall provide to the agency representative, samples of materials proposed for use in the work in quantities sufficient for accurate testing as specified.

C. Furnish Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall furnish one copy of all approved shop drawings and submittals for all materials and construction to be inspected and/or tested.

D. Furnishing Casual Labor, Equipment and Facilities: The Contractor shall furnish casual labor, equipment, and facilities as required for sampling and testing by the agency and otherwise facilitate all required inspections and tests.

E. Advance Notice: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations, a minimum of 24 hours, to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

F. Deficiencies: When irregularities or deficiencies are discovered by the contractor or when the contractor is notified of such by the testing agency the contractor shall immediately stop deficient work. This includes, but is not limited to, non-compliant soil preparation, concrete, reinforcing steel placement, finishing procedures, steel erection and welding. The contactor shall immediately notify the SEPTA PM and provide a full description of the deficiency and the contractor’s proposed remedy. Proposed remedies shall include adequate drawings and calculations to clarify and justify his proposal. The contractor shall not proceed with the correction and repair of the defective work until the SEPTA PM has approved the contractor’s proposed remedy and corrective measures.

G. Notification of Source Change: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the SEPTA PM, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Agency when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made.



1.11 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. The Independent Testing Laboratory shall serve as a Special Inspector to provide Special Inspection services for the items listed below. The scope of such services for each item shall be as defined in The International Building Code – 2009 with Jurisdiction Amendments or as defined in the local building code of the jurisdiction wherein the project is located. These inspections are mandatory for conformance to the legal requirements of the building code and shall be in addition to the inspections and tests otherwise defined in this specification. For a detailed list of inspections and tests under each section noted below reference the General Structural Notes included in the Structural division of the Contract Drawings.

IBC Chapter 17 Paragraph

Verification and Inspection Reference

1704.3 Structural steel Table 1704.3

1704.4 Concrete construction Table 1704.4

1704.5 Masonry construction – Level 1 Table 1704.5.1

1704.7 Soils Table 1704.7

1704.9 Cast-in-place deep foundations Table 1704.9

B. Duties and Responsibilities of the Special Inspector.

1. Attend the preconstruction Construction Quality Control meeting initiated by the Contractor.

2. Review and be familiar with the approved plans and specifications and also the EOR reviewed shop drawings and submittals. As applicable the Special Inspection Agency shall obtain product specific ICC-ES reports and become familiar with installation, inspection and testing requirements.

3. The special inspector shall observe the work assigned to ascertain, to the best of his/her knowledge that it is in conformance with the approved design drawings and specifications.

4. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official, the Architect, the Engineer, and the SEPTA PM on a weekly basis. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect/Engineer, Contractor, and the SEPTA PM. A report that the corrected work has been inspected shall be sent to the Building Official, the Architect, the Engineer, and the SEPTA PM.

5. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector’s knowledge, in conformance to the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the building code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING REPORTS AND LOGS

A. Reports



1. Information on Reports: The Agency shall submit copies of all reports of inspections and tests promptly and directly to the parties named below. All reports shall contain at least the following information:

a. Project Name b. Date report issued c. Testing Agency name and address d. Name and signature of inspector e. Date of inspection and sampling f. Date of test g. Identification of product and Specification section h. Location in the project i. Identification of inspection or test j. Record of weather conditions and temperature (if applicable) k. Results of test regarding compliance with Contract Documents

2. Copies: The Agency shall send certified copies of test and inspection reports to the following parties:

a. 1 copy to the SEPTA PM b. 1 copy to the General Contractor c. 1 copy to the Architect d. 1 copy to the Engineer of responsibility e. 1 copy to the Supplier of the material tested

B. Test and Inspection Log: The Testing Agency shall maintain a “Test and Inspection Log” listing each observed incident of non-compliant construction and non-compliant test results. This log shall indicate all steps taken to bring the construction to compliance with the contract documents or approvals given of non-compliant construction. No non-compliant construction incident shall be noted as closed until it has been made to comply with the construction documents or until the testing agency has received written approval of the non-compliant construction as built by the SEPTA PM.

3.2 EARTHWORKS

A. Field Observations and Testing

1. Verify soil bearing material is adequate for design load of lightly loaded foundations bearing on soil.

2. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. 3. Prior to placement of controlled fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been

prepared properly. 4. Perform classification and testing of controlled fill materials. 5. Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement of

controlled fill. Test filled areas for compaction per the Earth Moving specification.

3.3 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Visual Inspection of Material: The Independent Special Inspection and Testing Agency shall inspect the shipment to determine the following:

1. The bars should be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman-like finish.



2. Deformations shall be of the proper sizes, shapes, and spacing as detailed in ASTM A-615.

3. The bars shall not have excessive rust and/or pelting. 4. The bars shall not have any unusual twists or bends. 5. Inspect the post tensioning strand sheathing for defects and damage. 6. Inspect the post-tensioning protections systems for defects and damage.

B. Visual Inspection of Mild Reinforcing: The Independent Special Inspection and Testing Agency shall inspect 100% of reinforcement before each concrete pour to verify the information noted below.

1. Inspect for proper mild steel reinforcing bar grade, size and location based on the contract documents. Verify that placement of reinforcing will provide appropriate concrete cover. Inspect for the following:

a. Longitudinal reinforcement has correct length and lap. b. Ties and stirrups are of correct size, spacing, and number and have the proper

termination-hook geometry. c. Proper hooks are provided at bar ends as detailed. d. Reinforcement is properly supported and braced to formwork to prevent movement

during concreting operation. e. Sufficient spacing between reinforcement for concrete placement. f. Dowel reinforcement is of proper size, at proper spacing, and has proper lap length

and embedment length. g. Welded wire reinforcement is composed of flat sheets, has proper wire gage and

spacing, is properly supported, and is properly lapped with a length of one square plus two inches.

h. Proper Construction/Control/Expansion joint spacing and reinforcement. i. Reinforcement around embedded items is erected according to details. j. Welded reinforcement has been done according to AWS requirements. Verify that

all steel to be welded is ASTM A706. k. Proper installation of flat-slab shear-head reinforcement.

C. The testing agency shall submit the following information in their regular inspection reports in addition to that listed in paragraph 3.1.A.

1. Fabricator’s name. 2. Inspection location within the structure. 3. Test Results from requirements listed above. 4. Observations of mild steel materials as required above.

D. Deficiencies: Observed deficiencies in placement of reinforcement shall be corrected prior to placement of concrete. Exposed reinforcing steel in finished work, indicating the bars are not properly located, will be sufficient cause for the rejection, removal and replacement of the concrete section.

3.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE

A. Deleted.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:



1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

b. Provide a minimum of one compressive-strength test for a maximum of every 5000 sq. ft. surface area of slabs or walls where this requirement will increase the frequency of tests.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. In addition, when air entrained concrete is used, the first batch of each day’s placement shall be tested for air content at the Project.

a. Sample fresh concrete immediately following placement and screeding at rate of one per every 5 truckloads of ready-mix, air-entrained concrete delivered to Project.

4. Core and test hardened concrete topping for air content per ASTM C457 at rate of one core per 20,000 Sq. Ft. of cast-in-place topping and slab on grade of parking garage concrete , unless directed otherwise by the SEPTA PM.

a. If concrete consistently meets requirements of this Specification and concrete mix design and placement procedures remain changed, the SEPTA PM may waive requirement for testing of hardened concrete.

b. Contractor shall patch holes resulting from concrete coring. Use patching materials which meet requirements of this Specification.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

a. Each cylinder shall be marked with job name, location of placement, date of placement, slump, mix number and strength of concrete specified. In addition, the air content shall be marked on the cylinder where an air-entraining admixture is specified. Specimens cured in the field shall be clearly indicated.

b. Maintain three cylinders at 60-80 deg F and protect from loss of moisture at the job site for a period not over 48 hours, then deliver to the laboratory for curing and testing. Place the fourth cylinder near the in-place concrete and cure completely at the job in the same manner as the in-place concrete. Deliver this cylinder to the laboratory for testing at 7 days.

c. For curing cylinders, Contractor shall provide covered box large enough to contain eight standard concrete cylinders. At temperatures below 60 deg F box shall be electrically heated to maintain inside temperatures of 60 deg to 80 deg F. Cylinders shall be placed in box immediately after molding and shall be covered with moist burlap until delivery to laboratory.



8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one field-cured specimen at 7 days and two laboratory-cured specimens at 28 days, and one specimen held in reserve for testing at 56 days, if required.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

C. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete Strength Tests:

1. Strength Test: A strength test shall be defined as the average strength of two cylinder breaks from each set of cylinders tested at the time indicated above.

2. Quality Control Charts and Logs: The Independent Testing Agency shall keep the following quality control logs and charts for each class of concrete containing more than 2,000 cubic yards. The records shall be kept for each batch plant and submitted on a weekly basis with cylinder test reports:

a. Number of 28 day strength tests made to date. b. 28 day strength test results containing the average of all strength tests to date, the

high test result, the low test result, the standard deviation, and the coefficient of variation.

c. Number of tests under specified 28 day strength. d. A histogram plotting the number of 28 day cylinders versus compressive strength. e. Quality control chart plotting compressive strength test results for each test. f. Quality control chart plotting moving average for strength where each point plotted

is the average strength of three previous test results. g. Quality control chart plotting moving average for range where each point plotted is

the average of 10 previous ranges.

3. Acceptance Criteria: The strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met:

a. The average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required f'c.

b. No individual strength test (average of two 28 day cylinder breaks) falls below the required f'c by more than 500 PSI.

4. If either of the above requirements is not met, the Testing Agency shall immediately notify the SEPTA PM by telephone. Steps shall immediately be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength tests.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to the SEPTA PM, Engineer/Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, concrete type and class compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.

E. SEPTA PM has the authority to order, for any concrete, an increase in cement content or mix redesign for remaining work if either:

1. Average 7-day strength of any two tests representing a particular design strength is less than 55% of specified strength; OR.

2. Average 28-day strength of any two tests representing particular design strength is less than 90% of specified strength.



F. Investigation of Low Strength Concrete Test Results:

1. Contractor Responsibility for Low Strength Concrete: If any strength test of Agency cured cylinders falls below the required f'c by more than 500 psi, the Contractor shall take steps immediately to assure that the load carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized.

2. Nondestructive Field Tests: The Independent Testing Agency shall under the direction of the SEPTA PM perform nondestructive field tests of the concrete in question using Swiss Hammer, Windsor Probe, or other appropriate methods as approved by the SEPTA PM and report the results in the same manner as for cylinder test reports. These tests will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

3. Core Tests: If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that the load carrying capacity of the structure has been significantly reduced, tests of cores by the Independent Testing Agency, drilled from the area in question under the direction of the SEPTA PM, will be required in accordance with ASTM C42 "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete". In such case, three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 PSI below required f'c. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperature 60° to 80°F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. The Contractor shall fill all holes made by drilling cores with an approved drypack concrete.

4. Acceptance Criteria for Core Tests: Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85% of f'c and if no single core is less than 75% of f'c. If approved by the SEPTA PM, locations of erratic core strengths may be retested to check testing accuracy.

5. Cost of Investigations for Low Strength Concrete: The costs of all investigations of low strength concrete shall be borne by the Contractor.

G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by the SEPTA PM. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by the SEPTA PM. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.

H. The Contractor may, at his own option and expense, prepare and test such additional cylinders he deems necessary to determine compressive strength of concrete to allow form removal.

I. Job Site Inspection: The scope of the work to be performed by the inspector on the jobsite shall be as follows:

1. Prior to concrete placement:

a. Verify that forms are true, straight and plumb and match the dimensions indicated on the contract documents.

b. Verify that earth trenches are true, straight and plumb and that element sizes are not less than indicated on the contract documents.

c. Verify that moisture retarder is provided where shown, is lapped, tapped, and is not torn or punctured.

d. Verify that there is no standing water or debris in forms or pour areas. e. Inspect reinforcement as per REINFORCING STEEL section. Observed

deficiencies in placement of reinforcement shall be corrected prior to placement of concrete.

f. Embeds: Inspect anchor rods, bolts and embed assemblies to verify correct type, size and location.



g. Verify that air temperatures at the point of placement in the structure are within acceptable limits defined in material specification prior to ordering of concrete by the Contractor.

2. On-Site Concrete Material Testing and Inspection:

a. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix number, type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at the proper location.

b. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper batching. Observe mix consistency and adding of water as required to achieve target slumps in mix designs. Record the amount of water added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The responsibility for adding water to trucks at the job site shall rest only with the Contractor's designated representative. The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents.

c. Obtain concrete test cylinders and perform tests as indicated above d. Record information for concrete test reports. e. Verify that all concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report concrete not

meeting the specified requirements and immediately notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Architect, Engineer, and SEPTA PM.

f. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day.

3. During concrete placing, provide continuous monitoring to:

a. Verify that the concrete is not over 90 minutes old at the time of placement. b. Verify that Hot-Weather or Cold-Weather techniques are being applied as required. c. Verify that concrete deposited is uniform and that vertical drop does not exceed six

feet and is not permitted to drop freely over reinforcement causing segregation. d. Verify that there are no cold joints. e. Verify that the concrete is properly vibrated. f. Verify that the finishing of the concrete surface is done according to specifications. g. Verify that the curing process is according to specifications and that any curing

compound used is applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. h. Verify that control joints on slab-on-grades are cut with a “soft cut” saw within 2

hours of casting. i. Verify that the formwork has remained stable during the concreting operation.

4. The job site inspector shall report any irregularities that occur in the concrete at the job site or test results to the Contractor, Architect, SEPTA PM, and Engineer.

J. Causes for Rejection of Wet Concrete: The Contractor is responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall reject all concrete delivered to the site for any of the following reasons:

1. Wrong class of concrete (incorrect mix design number). 2. Environmental Conditions: Environmental condition limits shall be as follows unless

appropriate provisions in concreting practices have been made for cold or hot weather:

a. Cold Weather: Air temperature must be 40°F and rising or the average daily temperature cannot have been lower than 40F for 3 consecutive days unless the temperature rose above 50F for at least one-half of any of those 24 hour periods.

b. Hot Weather: Environmental conditions must be such that cause an evaporation rate from the concrete surface of 0.2 lb./sq. ft./hr. or less as determined by Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R-91.



3. Concrete with temperatures exceeding 95°F may not be placed in the structure. 4. Air contents outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 5. Slumps outside the limits specified in the mix designs. 6. Excessive Age: Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes of plant departure or

before it begins to set if sooner than 90 minutes unless approved by the Agency job inspector or other duly appointed representative.

K. Defective Work: Concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense, without extension of time therefore. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from corrections to the concrete work.

L. Acceptance of Structure (ACI 301, 1.7.1):

1. Acceptance of completed concrete Work shall be according to provisions of ACI 301, 1.7.1.

2. Concrete rejected due to entrained air content below specified limit will be accepted if any of the following conditions are met:

a. ASTM C457: Three concrete specimens per 20,000 square feet of floor area tested in accordance with ASTM C457 meet air void parameters of specification 03300 Part 2 heading 2.14 “Concrete Mixes, General” Section D.4 “Air Content,” subpara “Haradened concrete.” (Spacing factor of 0.008 in. and specific surface area of 600 in.2 per cubic in. of air void volume.)

b. ASTM C666: Test 3 concrete specimens per 20,0000 square feet of floor area removed from structure. The resultant durability factor shall be 90 or higher.

M. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C 94. Each ticket shall also show the amount of water that may be added in the field for the entire batch that will not exceed the specified water cement ratio for the design mix. The Contractor and SEPTA's Testing Agency shall immediately notify the SEPTA PM, Architect and Engineer of tickets not meeting the criteria specified.

3.5 NON-SHRINK GROUT FOR BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES

A. Compressive Strength Tests by the Independent Testing Agency: Compressive strength of grout shall be determined by testing four cubes two inches in dimension according to the requirements of ASTM C109 "Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars". Each strength test shall be the average of two 28 day strengths. Test one cube at 7 days, 2 at 28 days, and one at 56 days only if either 28 day test is low.

B. Frequency of Testing: One set of cubes (4 cubes) shall be made for every ten base plates and bearing plates or fraction thereof but not less than one set for each day's operation. One set of cubes shall be made for each day's operation of grouting wall panels.

3.6 MASONRY

A. Inspection and testing of the masonry construction shall meet the requirements for Level 1:

B. Mortar Tests by the Independent Testing Agency:



1. Scope: Mortar cube tests shall be required only for loadbearing masonry construction (hollow or grouted) for the purpose of measuring uniformity of field batching.

2. Compressive Strength Test: Tests shall be run according to the requirements of ASTM C 780 "Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry". Each strength test shall be defined as the average of three cube specimens two inches in dimension tests at 28 days.

3. Frequency of Testing: One strength test shall be run for each 5,000 square feet of wall but not less than one strength test for each day's operation for each class of wall. An additional test should be run whenever there is a change in mix proportions.

C. Grout Tests by the Independent Testing Agency:

1. Scope: Grout prism tests shall be required for all grout used in masonry construction. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Specimens shall be 3 1/2" x 3 1/2" x 7" or 3" x 3" x 6" cast in

molds with a flat nonabsorbent base and masonry units having the same moisture condition as those being laid forming the sides of the specimens. Specimens shall be formed and tested according to ASTM C 1019. Each strength test shall be defined as the average of two 28 day prisms.

3. Frequency of Testing: Four grout prisms shall be made for each 30 cubic yards of grout but not less than one set for each day's operation. An additional set should be made whenever the grout mix is changed. One prism shall be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and one at 56 days only if either 28 day test is low.

D. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units by the Independent Testing Agency:

1. Scope: Hollow masonry units shall be tested only for loadbearing masonry construction. 2. Compressive Strength Test: Three units from each 10,000 units or fraction thereof shall

be tested according to the requirements of ASTM C140 "Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units". Compressive strengths shall meet the requirements of ASTM C90 as specified on the drawings.

E. Experience Requirement: Field inspection of masonry construction by the Independent Testing Agency as herein described shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of three years experience in masonry testing and inspection.

F. Field Inspection Requirements: The duties and responsibilities of the Structural Masonry Inspector in the field shall be as follows:

1. Review and become familiar with project drawings and specifications. 2. Review all masonry materials used in the field for conformance to project specifications.

This shall include masonry units, mortar, grout, portland cement, masonry cement, sand, lime, horizontal joint reinforcement, ties, masonry anchoring devices to the structure, and control joint strips.

3. Review proper horizontal joint reinforcement size and spacing. Review size and spacing of wall ties.

4. Review proper masonry construction practices for mortar including requirements for high and low lift grouting. Check conformance with hot and cold weather construction requirements.

5. Verify proper mortar batching proportions. 6. Confirm clean outs for high lift grouting. 7. Verify construction tolerances. 8. Review and confirm installation of reinforcing steel size, spacing, and splices in all walls,

lintels, pilasters, and columns. 9. Confirm number and size of dowels in the foundation to walls and columns. 10. Take mortar, grout, and prism samples as specified above.



3.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Contract Obligations:

1. Contractor Responsibility: Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all field connections shall be so identified so that the Independent Special inspection and Testing Agency inspector can refer back to the person or crew performing the work. The costs of all retesting of material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor. The Fabricator and Erector shall provide the Independent Testing Agency inspector with access to all places where work is being done. A minimum of 24 hours notification shall be given prior to commencement of work. The Contractor shall provide the Independent Testing Agency with the following:

a. A complete set of Architect/Engineer reviewed shop and erection drawings including all revisions and addenda.

b. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills and mill test reports. c. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops. d. Representative sample pieces requested for testing. e. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting facilities,

etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.

2. Independent Testing Agency Responsibility: a. Inspection of field work shall be completed promptly so that corrections can be

made without delaying the progress of the work. Inspections shall be performed by qualified technicians with a minimum of two years experience in structural steel testing and inspection. All inspection personnel shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC-1.

b. The Testing Agency shall provide test reports of all field inspections. All test reports shall indicate types and locations of all defects found during inspection, the measures required and performed to correct such defects, statements of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop and field connections, and other fabrication and erection data pertinent to the safe and proper welding and bolting of shop and field connections. In addition to the parties listed in this Specification the Fabricator and Erector shall receive copies of all test reports.

3. Rejection of Material or Workmanship: The SEPTA PM, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Agency reserve the right to reject any material or workmanship not in conformance with the Contract Documents at any time during the progress of the work. However, this provision does not allow waiving the obligation for timely, in sequence inspections.

B. Field Inspections and Tests: The Independent Special inspection and Testing Agency shall provide inspection in the field for a period of time as determined in consultation with the Architect, SEPTA PM, and Engineer prior to the start of erection in a timely manner so as to not delay the start of erection. The costs of repairing all defective welds and the costs of retesting by the Independent Testing Agency shall be borne by the Contractor. If removal of a backing strip is required by the Independent Testing Agency to investigate a suspected weld defect, such cost shall be borne by the Contractor. The Independent Testing Agency shall review material test reports and certifications, make inspections and perform nondestructive testing as defined in section 1704.3 of the IBC and Chapter M of AISC 360, “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”, for the “Quality Assurance Inspector” and as indicated below:

1. Obtain the planned erection procedure, and review with the Erectors supervisory personnel.

2. Check the installation of base plates for proper leveling, grout type, and grout application.



3. Check steel as received in the field for possible shipping damage, workmanship, and piece marking.

4. Verify that surveys are occurring as specified to check plumbness and frame alignment as erection progresses. Review the submitted survey report.

5. Check required camber of floor beams. 6. Conduct welding inspection and verification testing per detailed requirement of section

3.9C - Welding Inspection and Testing below. 7. Conduct high-strength bolting inspection per detailed requirements of Section 3.9D –

High-Strength Bolting and Testing below. 8. Periodically inspect the steel frame joint details such as bracing and stiffening, member

locations, and connection details for compliance with approved construction documents. 9. Inspect 100% of the column compression and base joints for verification that gaps in

contact bearing do not exceed 1/16 inch. Gaps greater than 1/16 inch but less than 1/4 inch shall be reported to the SEPTA PM and Engineer for assessment. All gaps greater than 1/4 inch shall be shimmed with non-tapered mild steel shims.

10. Guard rails shall be tested per ASTM E 935 and shown to meet the loading requirements of this specification and the IBC.

11. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer/SEPTA PM and the Contractor of any un-authorized work by the Contractor such as cutting, grinding, reaming, or making any other field modification to structural steel without the prior approval of the SEPTA PM. Report any noted unauthorized modifications to the SEPTA PM and Engineer

C. Weld Inspection and Testing: The Special Inspection and Independent Testing Agency shall review material test reports and certifications, make inspections and perform nondestructive testing as defined in section 1704.3 of the IBC and Chapter M of AISC 360, “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”, for the “Quality Assurance Inspector” and as indicated below. Welds performed in the fabricating shop may be inspected in the field unless continuous monitoring of the welding process is specified or if access in the field due to other work or shop finishes makes field inspection impractical:

1. Approve Welding Procedure Specifications submitted by the Contractor. Approve any changes submitted by the Contractor to any WPS that has already been approved. Obtain the Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR) for each successful WPS qualification.

2. Verify welder qualifications either by certification and/or by retesting. Obtain welder certificates.

3. Verify welding electrodes to be used and other welding consumables as the job progresses.

4. Periodically observe joint preparation, assembly practice, welding techniques including preheating and sequence, and the performance of welders with sufficient frequency to assure compliance with code and contract document requirements. Check preheating to assure conformance with AWS D1.1, Section 5.6. Verify procedure for control of distortion and shrinkage stresses.

5. Observe joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and runout plates for welded moment connections and column splices.

6. Periodically provide visual inspection of the root pass of partial and complete joint penetration welds.

7. Visually inspect 100 % of welds for proper size, length, location, and weld quality in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all welding shall be considered statically loaded nontubular connections.

8. Visually inspect 100% of the welding or other attachment method of steel deck to the structure.

9. Visually inspect 100% of completed shear connectors in each beam and perform bend tests as required according to inspection procedures outlined in AWS D1.1. In addition, perform field bend tests on an additional 2% of completed shear connectors in each beam but not less than one connector per beam



10. Visually inspect 100% of the welds of anchors to embedded plates that are to be cast into concrete elements.

11. In addition to the inspections above, perform the following:

a. Continuously monitor and observe joint preparation, assembly practice, welding techniques including preheating and sequence, and the performance of welders for 100% of complete and partial joint penetration welds, multipass fillet welds, and fillet welds. Check preheating to assure conformance with AWS D1.1, Section 5.6. Verify procedure for control of distortion and shrinkage stresses.

b. Periodically monitor welding of steel floor and roof decking. Visually inspect side lap connections.

c. Periodically monitor the welding of headed studs to floor beams.

12. Weld Verification Testing Scope:

a. Perform nondestructive examination services using a qualified technician with the necessary equipment to perform the following:

1) Nondestructive examination conducted in accordance with the specific requirements for the item being examined including radiographic (RT), ultrasonic (UT), magnetic particle (MT), or dye penetrant inspection (PT). Nondestructive inspection procedures shall conform to AWS D1.1.

2) Interpret, record, and report results of the nondestructive tests. 3) Mark for repair, any area not meeting Specification requirements.

Correction of rejected welds shall be made in accordance with AWS D1.1. 4) Re-examine repair areas and interpret, record, and report the results of

examinations of repair welds. 5) Verify that quality of welds meet the requirements of AWS D1.1.

b. Fillet welds. provide the following:

1) MT test a minimum of 15% of the length of each fillet weld exceeding 5/16". 2) MT test a minimum of 10% of the length of each fillet weld 5/16" and less. 3) Increase MT testing rate for welders having a high rejection rate as required

to ensure acceptable welds.

c. Partial joint penetration welds, including flare-bevel groove welds. provide the following:

1) MT test a minimum of 25% of the length of each PJP weld exceeding 5/16" effective throat.

2) Periodic MT testing of representative PJP welds 5/16” and less but need not exceed 10% of all such welds, except as provided in (3) below.

3) Increase MT testing rate for welders having a high rejection rate as required to ensure acceptable welds.

d. Complete joint penetration welds. provide the following:

1) All CJP welds exceeding 5/16" thickness shall be 100% UT tested per AWS D1.1 Chapter 6 Part F.

2) Periodic MT testing of representative CJP welds 5/16” and less not to exceed 10% of all such welds, except as provided in (3) below.

3) Increase MT testing rate for welders having a high rejection rate as required to ensure acceptable welds.



e. Acceptance Criteria:

1) Visual, MT, PT shall be per AWS D1.1 Table 6.1. 2) UT testing shall be per AWS D1.1 6.13.1 and Table 6.2.

f. Alternate UT procedures. The testing laboratory shall review the CJP joints to determine where geometry or accessibility precludes the use of standard scanning patterns per AWS D1.1 Chapter 6 Part F. At these locations the testing laboratory shall develop and submit for approval a written testing procedure in accordance with AWS D1.1 Annex K.

g. Base metal thicker than 1.5 inches, where subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shall be UT tested for discontinuities behind and adjacent to such welds. UT testing shall occur no sooner than 24 hours after the weld has cooled to ambient temperatures. Any material discontinuities shall be recorded on the basis of ASTM A435 or ASTM A898 (Level 1 criteria) and reported for SEPTA PM disposition.

h. Welds of Anchors to Embedded Plates:

1) Headed Studs: Perform field bend tests according to AWS D1.1 on 2% of the studs welded to plates, but not less than one stud per plate.

2) Deformed Bar Anchors: Perform MT testing on 10% of deformed bar anchors larger than #5 bar.

i. The costs of repairing defective welds and the costs of retesting by the Testing Laboratory providing services for SEPTA shall be borne by the Contractor. If removal of a backing strip is required by the Testing Laboratory to investigate a suspected weld defect, such cost shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. High-Strength Bolting Inspection and Testing: The Independent Special Inspection and Testing Agency shall review material test reports and certifications, make inspections and perform testing as defined in section 1704.3 of the IBC and Chapter M of AISC 360, “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”, for the “Quality Assurance Inspector” and as indicated below for connections joined with high-strength bolting. Bolting performed in the shop may be inspected in the field unless continuous monitoring of the bolting operation is specified:

1. Observe preinstallation verification testing of the pretensioning method to be used in accordance with the requirements of the “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts”. Daily check the calibration of impact wrenches used in field bolted connections.

2. Inspect bolt installation for 100% of high strength bolted connections according to inspection procedures outlined in the "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".

3. Perform Arbitration Testing and Inspection according to procedures outlined in the "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" when a disagreement exists between the Testing Laboratory and the Fabricator as to the minimum tension of installed bolts that have been inspected according to paragraph above.

4. Continuous Monitoring of Bolting Installation: The Independent Testing Agency shall be continuously present and monitor the bolting installation for compliance with the selected procedure for installation as specified in the “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts” for joints using high-strength bolts that are designated on the plans as Pretensioned (PT) or Slip-Critical (SC) type joints and that are being installed using the calibrated wrench method or the turn-of-nut without matchmarking method of installation.



3.8 POST INSTALLED ANCHORS

A. Special inspections of post installed anchors shall follow the requirements of the specific products ICC-ES report. These reports can be downloaded at: www.icc-es.org/Evaluation_Reports/.

B. Verify the initial installations of each type and size of anchor by construction personnel on site. Make period inspections during the anchor installation of the remaining anchors. Any change in the anchor product being installed or personnel performing the installation requires a new initial inspection.

C. Period inspections shall be not less than 10% of each anchor size and type and not less than one per day for periods where anchors are installed.

D. Make inspections during the anchor installation to verify anchor type, anchor dimensions, concrete type, anchor spacing, edge distances, concrete member thickness, hole dimensions, anchor embedment and adherence to manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

E. Tightening torque of expansion anchors shall be verified.

F. Adhesive identification and expiration date of adhesives shall be verified.

G. Hole cleaning procedures and moisture condition of holes for adhesive anchors and dowels shall be verified.

H. Certification of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be performed by personnel certified by an applicable certification program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program. Continuous special inspection is required for these anchors.

3.9 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01045 "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



v.15-04 Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls 01500-1

SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The General Contractor shall provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the performance of its Work (except otherwise noted), provide for public and employee safety and protect SEPTA property. This may include, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity, and telephone; 2. Field office for the Contractor's personnel and a separate facility

for SEPTA’s personnel use 3. Sanitary facilities 4. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades and canopies; 5. First-aid facilities (reference specific contractor responsibility) 6. Temporary fencing and other safety devices for pedestrian and

vehicular traffic as well as isolating the construction area. 7. Entry Control 8. Personnel Identification 9. Guard Service (if applicable)

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Agreement B. Section 01010: Summary of Work

C. Section 01011: Summary of Project

D. Section 01041: Project Coordination E. Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety

F. Section 01066: Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements

H. Section 01505: Mobilization I. Section 01510: Maintenance, Support and Restoration of Existing

Utility Facilities J. Section 01520: Temporary Construction



K. Section 01570: Maintenance and Protection of Vehicles, Pedestrian and Passengers

L. Section 01580: Project Identification Signs and Other Construction

Signage M. Section 01590: SEPTA Field Office

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall comply with pertinent provisions of section 01300.

B. If required by the SEPTA PM, the Contractor shall provide shop drawings (including sealed engineering drawings if requested) for any temporary facility.

1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING

The Contractor shall maintain and protect all temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the Work. For facilities visible to the public, the contractor will maintain them in an acceptable appearance and repair any vandalism within 24 hours or as requested by the SEPTA PM.

1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND SERVICES

A. Water

1. The Contractor shall provide drinking water from an approved source, so piped or transported as to keep it safe and fresh and served from single service containers or satisfactory types of drinking stands or fountains. All such facilities and services shall be furnished in strict accordance with existing governing health regulations.

2. Refer to the Agreement, Paragraph VIII.D. The Contractor shall protect

pipes from freezing during inclement weather and repair any vandalism.

B. Sanitary facilities:

1. Refer to the Agreement Paragraph VIII.D. 2. The contractor is prohibited from using existing toilet facilities – either

those intended for SEPTA personnel or those intended for the public at large.



3. The Contractor shall furnish for the work force on this project, the

necessary toilets, secluded from public observation. The toilets shall be kept in a clean, sanitary condition and shall comply with the requirements and regulations of the agencies having jurisdiction. The SEPTA PM must approve all toilet locations and may demand increased maintenance if he finds the level of maintenance unacceptable.

C. Power and Lighting:

1. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for all costs of

temporary electrical and lighting services required at the site for the proper performance and inspection of work. The level of lighting shall not be less than the existing. Lighting shall also be provided to all temporary public facilities at levels satisfactory to the SEPTA PM. Remove services and lighting after completion of work and repair of all damages.

2. The Contractor shall provide area distribution boxes so located that the

individual trades may furnish and use 100 ft. maximum length extension cords to obtain power and lighting at points where needed for work, inspection, and safety.

3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary items such as breakers,

transformers, panel boards, and cable required for the service. The Contractor shall provide a complete distribution system expanded as required during the construction including wiring devices, outlets, distribution panels, transformers, cable and other related work necessary to provide a temporary power system for use during construction.

4. The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the utility tie-ins,

physical plant, maintenance of system throughout construction, removal of same at project completion and any other items necessary in providing temporary power and light.

5. The temporary power and lighting system shall at all times conform to

the applicable codes and regulations of OSHA, NEMA, UL, and the local municipality.

D. Telephones: The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and

pay costs for installation, maintenance and operation of direct line (non-pay type) telephone services in SEPTA's field office at the site. Portable (cellular) may be provided to fulfill this requirement at the SEPTA PM discretion.



E. Heating: The Contractor shall provide and maintain heat necessary for

proper conduct of operations. 1.06 ACCESS, STORAGE AND PARKING AREAS

A. The General Contractor shall establish a construction compound The physical location of the compound will require written approval of SEPTA's Project Manager.

B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary security for this compound

area. The Contractor shall provide all necessary keys to SEPTA's Project Manager to provide access to the compound at any time.

C. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a plan layout of the

Compound within 5 days after Notice to Proceed (NTP).

D. The Contractor shall coordinate the provision of utility services for all trailers and be responsible for all installation charges, removal costs at Project completion, and any periodic or other charges incidental to the provision of those utility services.

E. Upon final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall clean up the

work areas and leave them in a neat and orderly condition. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all temporary fencing and barricades and other temporary items installed, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager. Repair damaged areas to their original condition.

1.07 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Contractor's Field Office:

1. Furnish and maintain a field office with a telephone at the site during the entire period of construction. The Contractor’s superintendent shall be present at said office at all times while its work is in progress. Keep readily accessible, at the field office, copies of both the Contract Documents and the latest approved shop and working drawings.

2. Submit for SEPTA's written acceptance, working drawings

showing proposed locations and size of offices and shops.

B. Field Office Security



The Contractor shall Guard against unauthorized or illegal entry and protect the field office against vandalism, theft and mischief. The Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement and/or compensation for any items owned by SEPTA or SEPTA employees, which are related to the subject work, which are removed or damaged as the result of vandalism, theft, mischief or illegal entry to the field office.

C. Upon project completion, the Contractor shall assume ownership of and

remove temporary field offices and appurtenances from the job site, except as otherwise noted.

D. Computer Requirements:

1. Broadband Internet service 6 MHz download speed:

The Contractor shall provide continuous Internet access through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) within the field office and bear all costs in connection therewith, for the duration of maintaining the SEPTA field office.

2. Desktop computers and accessories:

The Contractor shall provide four (4) each of the following computer and accessories or SEPTA approved equal. One set shall be installed for the Project Manager, one for the Project Engineer and two sets for the Field Engineers: Dell Dimension 4700 desktop PC, Dell UltraSharp 1905FP 19” Flat Panel Display, 1GB memory, minimum dual 80GB Serial ATA Hard Drives, video card, sound card, speakers, Dell Quietkey Keyboard, Microsoft Optical USB mouse with scroll button, Integrated 10/100 Ethernet and MS Windows XP Professional operating system. Compact Flash and Secure Digital card reader, Dual Optical drives consisting of 16x DVD-ROM Drive and 16x DVD+/-RW. McAfee Internet Security and AntiSpyware and with anti-virus subscription maintained. Four (4) 8GB USB 2.0 Flash memory stick/keys. A 50 pack of DVD +R discs, 100 pack CD-R, 100 standard size CD cases, Roxio Easy Media Creator, CD label kit with 100 laser compatible CD labels. Microsoft Office Professional Edition, Microsoft OneNote, and Adobe Acrobat Elements. For all software including operating systems, the latest edition shall be provided, the original CD-media and a hard copy manual. Provide an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with capacity to handle the desktop PC. Margaret-Orthodox Station Rehabilitation Conformed Set



3. Printer:

All-in-one laser network ready, color printer, copier, scanner, fax machine and ancillary items: Provide the following or SEPTA approved equal. All-in-One printer/copier/scanner/fax machine shall support a memory card slot, standard accessories including print cartridges, standard network interfaces, and standard paper sizes including 11x17. Printer/Copier/Scanner hardware shall also support PDF files (creating and saving to PDF). Users shall be able to import and export files/documents to PDF. Provide one, 10’ USB 2.0 cable. Provide a separate, sturdy table to support the printer, cable modem and switch / router as required. Include a multiple outlet strip with circuit breaker and surge suppression including for telephone line. Provide and maintain on hand one Provide and maintain on hand one spare print cartridge of each color. Provide heavy-duty three-hole punch on table.

4. Linksys BEFSR81 EtherFast Cable Router with 8-Port Switch and

CAT 5E cables: Install CAT 5E cabling, jacks and equipment and setup network. Connect Cable modem to router / switch. Connect router / switch with CAT 5E cables to desktop computer desks, to the network printer on printer table and to each Field Engineer’s office desk. Provide a jack at each point for termination. Provide ten foot patch cables, or longer cables if necessary, to enable connection of all devices. The Field Engineers patch cables shall reach any point on their office desks. All cables shall be installed in a professional manner including the avoidance of tripping hazards. Provide a multi-outlet surge protector for each computer desk, the all-in-one table and each of the Field Engineers’ office desks for power connections. Install hardware at each Field Engineer’s desk to enable a security cable to be connected and not easily removed.

1.08 TEMPORARY BARRICADES, ENCLOSURES AND FENCING

A. The Contractor shall provide all temporary barricades required by the phasing plans or otherwise necessary for the safe execution of the project, including but not limited to barricades for designated contractor work areas, contractor laydown areas, and public access for areas that must remain open during a phase.

1. Where barricades are required outside a designated work area for

the exclusive use of a Contractor, that Contractor shall provide them.



2. SEPTA reserves the right to require the contractor to provide all necessary barricades to insure the safety of SEPTA personnel and passengers as determined by the SEPTA PM, whose decision shall be final

B. Submit drawings of the proposed temporary barricades for SEPTA’s

review. Do not install barricades until the drawings for them have been reviewed by SEPTA. All barriers must be constructed to not contribute smoke to or support flame spread of a fire. To achieve this, such barriers shall be built of metal studs and Wonderboard style cement board.

C The temporary barricades shall meet the following criteria:

1. Barricades shall enclose and prevent entry into the work area and shall be full height and dustproof.

2. Barricades shall be constructed of materials suitable for location.

All barriers must be constructed to not contribute smoke to or support flame spread of a fire. To achieve this, such barriers shall be built of metal studs and Wonderboard style cement board.

3. Barricades shall be painted on all solid surfaces exposed to public

view.

4. Traffic cones, tape, stakes with ribbons or other insubstantial items shall not be used to differentiate construction areas in lieu of barricades. At his sole discretion, the SEPTA project manager may make exceptions for work of extremely short duration.

C. Temporary Doors: The temporary barricades shall have a reasonable

number of hollow metal doors and frames, with locksets, at locations acceptable to SEPTA. The locksets on the doors requiring SEPTA access for operational and safety reasons shall be keyed to SEPTA’s standard lock system.

D. On a daily basis, the Contractor shall maintain the temporary barricades

in a “like new” condition. The Contractor shall remove graffiti and restore surfaces on a continual maintenance basis. Maintenance shall continue until the barricades are removed.

E. The Contractor is required to enclose areas required by SEPTA for

access and maintenance. If these areas are in public areas they shall be secured with temporary barricades and doors in accordance to 1.08



C&D above. The Contractor shall take all means to alleviate any or all tripping and falling hazards both within the work site but also in public areas. Areas where the general public or passengers may fall shall be secure and covered.

1.09 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE (CONSTRUCTION)

A. The contractor must provide an adequate number of signs to direct the public around the construction site, as determined by the SEPTA PM. These signs must be professionally fabricated and maintained/replaced to keep an “as new” appearance.

B. The contractor must install project identification signs as defined in

These signs must be professionally fabricated and maintained/replaced to keep an “as new” appearance.

1.10 PROTECTION OF NEW WORK AND AREAS OUTSIDE OF THE PROJECT

A. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect new work (whether executed by him or others). All damage which does occur shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the SEPTA PM at no cost to SEPTA.

B. The contractor must avoid damaging all property and facilities not

included in the project scope. All damage which does occur shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the SEPTA PM at no cost to SEPTA. If non-SEPTA property is damaged it must be repaired to the written satisfaction of the owner and at no cost to SEPTA.

1.11 DUST CONTROL

A. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to eliminate dust and dirt created during the construction process from entering non-project areas and those areas not owned by SEPTA. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning affected areas and restoring then to their preconstruction condition to the satisfaction of the property owner and at no cost to SEPTA.

1.12 SECURITY

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate security measures to protect material, equipment, and work from incidental and intentional damage



or theft at project site locations, staging areas and fabrication yards.

B. The use of guard dogs and the possession of firearms on SEPTA property are prohibited.

END OF SECTION



THIS PAGE INTENIONALLY LEFT BLANK


v.15-04 Maintenance, Support And Restoration Of Existing Utility Facilities 01510-1

SECTION 01510 - MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING UTILITY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies the coordination, maintenance, support, protection and restoration requirements of existing public and private utilities affected by construction.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010: Summary of Work B. Section 01011: Summary of Project

C. Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety D Section 01066: Subway/Elevated Safety Requirements

E. Section 01300: Submittals

F. Section 02070: Selective Demolition

G. Section 02086: Handling and Disposal of Contaminated Soils

H. Section 02160: Excavation Support and Protection

G. Section 02200: Earthwork

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Working Drawings:

1. The Contractor shall submit working and shop drawings indicating its plan and schedule for performance of work to the appropriate Utility Company for review and approval. A copy of this submittal shall be furnished to SEPTA and or Architect/Engineer in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 by the Contractor.



2. The Contractor’s Work Drawings shall detail the actual location of

existing facilities, including aerial interference which these facilities present to new work, as well as proposed method of proceeding with actual construction and details of proposed support systems.

3. Do not commence work until written approval has been received

from the affected Utilities and the Project Manager.

B. Documentation:

1. Notice of commencement of work:

a. The Contractor shall provide to the Utility notice of (#TBD) days, or as otherwise required by the affected Utilities, prior to date of intended commencement of operations to parties having surface, subsurface or overhead structures in the construction area.

b. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of 73 P.S.

176 et seq., which sets forth PA's "One Call System".

c. Provide copies of notices to the Project Manager. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications:

1. (Codes and regulations of the specific jurisdictional authorities.)

2. (Published standards of specific owning utility agency.) 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (UTILIZE IF

APPLICABLE)

A. Coordinate with the specified utility companies who are furnishing materials for the work to determine availability, locations and required methods of storage and care of materials prior to incorporation into the work.

B. Transport, store and handle materials in accordance with the requirements

of the utilities. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS



A. Location of Facilities:

1. Prior to start of any Work, contact the Pennsylvania-One-Call

System in order to provide for locating and marking underground facilities.

2. Locations of existing facilities shown are plotted from available records; however, these locations are not guaranteed.

3. Verify locations of facilities by field investigation within and

adjacent to limits of the project which may be affected by construction operations. Avoid damage or disruption of facilities during operation.

4. Upon encountering an existing facility, which is not shown, or

upon ascertaining that a facility differs from that shown, determine ownership, use and disposition of such facility and proceed as follows:

a. If the facility is abandoned or is to be abandoned, perform

necessary work for either condition as shown or specified.

b. If facility is to remain in service, perform support and restoration work in accordance with these specifications.

B. Coordination with Utilities

C. Responsibilities of Contractor:

1. Maintain and protect facilities.

2. Give notice of commencement of Work as specified.

3. Notify the Project Manager and the Utility of damage to facilities

caused by construction operations. Repair or reimbursement for repair of such damage is the responsibility of the Contractor. Damaged electrical cables will be repaired or replaced as determined by the Utility with all costs borne by the Contractor.

4. Provide access for inspection of facilities and for emergencies

involving utility services.

5. Permit free and clear access to utility personnel for purposes of inspection, maintenance, providing additional service and construction of new facilities, if required.



6. When approved working drawing or shop drawings show a temporary facility provided for the Contractor's benefit, the Contractor shall supply necessary materials and perform this work, at no cost to SEPTA.

7. The Contractor is responsible for direct payment to the Utility for

work accomplished by the Utility at the request of the Contractor for the Contractor’s convenience or for preferred method and means of the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL

A. Backfill: In accordance with Section 02200.

B. (Utility Facilities: As specified in other Sections of these specifications and as required by the Utility owner.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall maintain complete in-place continuity of all utility service, and provide proper support and protect utility facilities in accordance with the Specifications of the Utility affected.

B. Support facilities so as not to expose them to undo vibrations. Support

and maintenance of these facilities will be subject to inspection by the Utility.

C. Repair or replace public utilities damaged during construction at no cost

to SEPTA, to the satisfaction of the Utility.

D. Assume the cost for repair or replacement of private utilities damaged during construction, which will be repaired or replaced, by the private Utility.

E. Conform to the specifications and standard practices of the affected

utility owners. Coordinate with utility owners, which work, shall be done by Contractor and which work shall be done by the Utility owner.

F. Provide, install, and maintain all temporary facilities required to provide

interim utility service when a utility facility is to be relocated and when a



utility facility to be replaced is abandoned prior to replacement. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING OF UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate and backfill utility trenches in accordance with Section 02200 and with the requirements of the affected utility.

B. Proceed with caution in areas of utility facilities; expose them by hand

excavation or other methods acceptable to facility owner. 3.03 PAVEMENTS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS AND OTHER

FEATURES A. In accordance with Section remove pavements, sidewalks, curbs and

gutters and other existing features where necessitated by utility trenches and those which interfere with the successful completion of the required work and may be directed to be removed by the Project Manager.

B. Replace pavements, sidewalks, curbs and gutters and other existing

features, required to be replaced or directed to be replaced by the Project Manager in accordance with other sections of these specifications.

C. Place temporary pavements where necessitated by sequence of

operation. 3.04 UNSAFE AND UNSUITABLE UTILITY STRUCTURES

A. General Requirements:

If, upon exposure, condition or location of facility to be supported in place is found to be unsafe for maintenance or support, contact utility for repair or reconstruction procedures.

B. Electric, Communication and Similar Type Facilities:

1. If structures containing electrical, communication and similar types of cables shown to be maintained complete in place are found upon exposure to be incapable of being maintained in place because of condition, location or both contact Utility for repair or reconstruction procedures.

2. When service box, manhole or conduit structure containing

electrical or communication cables is broken away, contact Utility



for repair or replacement procedures. 3. Exercise care when working in vicinity of telephone structures

containing coaxial cable or fiber optic cable which cannot withstand movement.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Temporary Construction 01520-1

SECTION 01520 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1.02 RELATED WORK Section 01300: Submittals Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

TBD- temporary structures must be stamped by a licensed engineer

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE This article may include referenced standards. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 2.02 Specific Articles as required , Removal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 3.02 Specific Articles as required

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Temporary Construction 01520-2



v.15-04 Maintenance And Protection Of Vehicles, 01570-1

Pedestrians And Passengers

SECTION 01570 - MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF VEHICLES, PEDESTRIANS AND PASSENGERS


A. The Work specified in this Section consists of furnishing, installing, maintaining, and subsequently removing temporary traffic control devices, and temporary traffic striping and markings; furnishing flagmen and police protection, as required by the local Jurisdiction (To be named). If the work does require flagging and affects a state highway, the flagman must receive state training and approval. The Work also includes controlling, warning, guiding, and protecting vehicles and pedestrian traffic on streets and sidewalks affected by construction of the Project, and adjacent to worksite; maintenance and control of SEPTA passengers on, or adjacent to, the worksite, ensuring unimpeded access to buildings and/or SEPTA Facilities adjacent to the worksite; and the closing of streets and sidewalks; all as specified and directed by the Contract Documents including Maintenance of Traffic and Construction Phasing Contract Drawings.

B. The Contract Drawings detail the approved vehicle traffic and pedestrian control plan required for the Work. The Contractor shall prepare working drawings showing proposed traffic control devices and shall apply to (local jurisdictional agency) for any permits necessary to work in the public right-of-way.

Any proposed changes to the indicated vehicle traffic control plan shall be

shown on working drawings prepared by the Contractor and shall be submitted to the (local jurisdictional agency) for approval. A copy of the revised and approved drawings shall be transmitted to the Project Manager. (The jurisdictional authority is to be listed on the Contract Drawing.)

C. The Contract Drawings detail the SEPTA approved passenger control plan

required for the Work. The Contractor(s) passenger control plan can be submitted with the work plan (Section 01010) and Site Specific Work Plan, if applicable.

Any proposed changes to passenger control plan shall be shown on working drawings prepared by the Contractor and shall be submitted to the Project Manager for SEPTA’s review.




1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010: Summary of Work

B. Section 01011: Summary of Project C. Section 01041: Project Coordination

D. Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety


F. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls

G. Section 01520: Temporary Construction

H. Section 01530: Barriers and Enclosures 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit a Traffic Control Plan (TCP) to PennDOT (and local Jurisdiction if required) for approval (copy to Project Manager) before starting Work; submit an updated TCP every time it becomes necessary to modify traffic operation or undertake construction in accordance with the requirements of PennDOT Publication No. 203, "Work Zone Traffic Control". The TCP shall show and describe proposed locations and time durations of the following:

1. Pedestrian and public vehicular traffic routing.

2. Traffic blockage and lane reductions anticipated to be caused by construction operations.

3. Allowable on-street parking within immediate vicinity of worksite.

4. Access to buildings immediately adjacent to worksite.

5. Driveways which will, and those which will not, be blocked by

construction operations.

6. Temporary traffic control devices required on streets and sidewalks affected by construction.

7. Temporary commercial and industrial loading and unloading




zones. 8. Police Traffic Protection (type, circumstances and requirement are

to be defined).

B. (Other Submittals Per Jurisdiction)

C. The Contractor shall submit a Passenger or Pedestrian Control Plan in accordance with the construction Phasing Drawings. All Passenger control signage shall be submitted to SEPTA for review prior to Fabrication.


A. Referenced Standards:

1. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Department of Transportation, PennDOT Standard Specifications, Publication 408, latest edition.

2. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Department of Transportation,

Publication No. 203, Work Zone Traffic Control, latest edition

B. A color proof of all graphics must be reviewed by SEPTA prior to fabrication and use.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. At various times during the construction period, as defined in 1.03A8 above and/or as required by the day to day work; the Contractor shall be required to provide uniformed police officers to maintain traffic control within the construction area. The Contractor shall include the costs for all police traffic protection activities associated with the work in the price as bid for the Work. No extra costs will be considered for police protection during the Work of this Contract. The Contractor shall enter into an Agreement with the (Municipality, Borough, Township as to be named) to be directly reimbursed for furnishing the required police protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. The Contractor shall conform to the latest Regulations for Official Traffic

Control Devices, 67 PA Code, Chapter 211; 67 PA Code, Chapter 203; and, if required, as follows:




1. PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 627.2, Temporary Concrete Barrier.

2. PennDOT Pub. 408, Section 962.2, Painting Traffic Lines and

Markings.

B. Signs:

(To Be Determined)

C. Warning lights and flares; Capable of alerting approaching traffic to hazards, unsafe conditions, and variances to normal traffic patterns.

D. High-rise warning flag unit: Have three flags mounted nine feet above

the base. 2.02 FLAGMEN SIGN

A. Twenty-four (24) inches, octagonal, and attached to a five-foot handle. One side of sign shall be a stop sign, and the other side of the sign shall be a slow sign.

B. Stop Sign shall have white reflectorized letters, not shorter than eight

inches, spelling STOP on a reflectorized, red, octagonal background.

C. Slow Sign shall have black letters, not shorter than eight inches, spelling SLOW on a reflectorized, orange, diamond background. The area between diamond and edge of flagmen sign shall be black.

2.03 STATION CONTROL DEVICES (To Be Determined)

A. All signs shall be of commercial quality and shall conform to SEPTA’s graphic design standards. Submit all signs for review by SEPTA at least ten (10) working days in advance of any work that will disrupt pedestrian movement, disrupt transit operations, or necessitate closing of stairways, entrances, etc. Do not perform the work until the signs are in place.

B. Expand type, and material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND DETOURS




3.02 FLAGMEN/POLICE PROTECTION 3.03 CONTROLLING VEHICULAR, PEDESTRIAN ACCESS AND FLOW

ADJACENT TO WORKSITE /AND/OR STATION

A. Fabricate and install passenger control signage and other devices according to the approved passenger control plan.

B. Maintain each sign throughout the project in a “like new” condition, free

of all unrelated signs, posters, painting, advertising and defacement of any kind. Replace signs as necessary to maintain them in the “like new” conditions.

C. Remove all signs from the site and repair damages when the temporary

condition no longer is necessary or within (#TBD) days of notice from SEPTA.

3.04 CONTROLLING PASSENGER FLOW ON OR ADJACENT TO WORKSITE/AND/OR STATION

3.05 STREET CLOSINGS

3.06 REMOVAL OF DEVICES

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Project Identification Signs and Other Construction Signage 01580 - 1

SECTION 01580 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The work specified in this Section consists of furnishing and installing project identification signs and temporary construction signs as described below and required by the Contract Documentation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01300: Submittals

B. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls

C. Section 01570: Maintenance and Protection of Vehicles, Pedestrian

and Passengers

D. Attachment: SEPTA Starburst Sign

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01300, submit the following:

1. Shop drawings of each sign scheduled to be utilized during construction. Indicate materials, size, location, fonts and colors proposed for use.

2. After consultation with the Project Manager, submit the following

sign information for review and approval by SEPTA.

a. Sketch and narrative description identifying the location, orientation and mounting height of each sign.

b. Total quantity of each sign to be utilized

c. Name, address, telephone number and key contact person

of the company responsible for the fabrication of the sign.

3. Hardware and mounting details for erection of each sign.



1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Signs shall be commercial quality and proofs shall be approved by SEPTA prior to fabrication.

1. Install Project Identification Signs within 20 calendar days after the

Notice to Proceed.

2. Provide temporary signage to redirect pedestrian traffic during phases where portions of the concourse become unavailable. For each phase, sign quantity and deployment witll be at the direction of the SEPTA Project manager.

3. The No Trespassing Sign is to be installed within the Contractor’s

Project compound and other areas to be determined by the Project Manager.

B. Non-project Signs:

Non project signs, such as business advertisements or labor union notices may be permitted subject to review by the SEPTA project Manager whose decision will be final.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN MATERIAL

A. Sign Material

Cut sign base from a single 4’ x 8’ x ¾” thick, waterproof exterior. A-B grade plywood with a smooth, finished surface. Round edges to a 1/8” radius. Joints will not be permitted.

B. Mounting Material:

1. General: Provide mounting frames and hardware of such quality to

be able to support the sign under all weather conditions for the duration of the project.

a. Unless surface mounted, support signs with frames

constructed with painted pressure treated dimension lumber, or other approved non-conductive material, of sufficient size to brace against weather conditions.



b. Secure surface mounted signs using anchoring devices approved by SEPTA.

2. Hardware:

a. Galvanized screws or bolts with galvanized nuts and

washers.

b. Paint all hardware, visible in the finished assembly, to match the adjoining surface of the sign or mounting.

3. Posts:

Pressure treated dimensional lumber or other non-conductive material acceptable to SEPTA.

C. Paint:

1. Paint sign surfaces, posts and mounting frames with one coat of primer sealer and two coats of white semi-gloss enamel on all sides and edges.

2. Use paint manufactured for exterior use by a manufacturer

acceptable to SEPTA.

D. Acceptable Fabricator: A company specializing in and having documented experience in the fabrication of graphic signs. Submit the fabricator’s credentials tot eh SEPTA Project Manager for approval before any fabrication.

E. SEPTA Project Sign:

1. Provide 2 SEPTA Project Signs. Sample SEPTA Project Sign is

shown on Sketch # SEPTA-1, attached at the end of this Section.

Size: 4’ x 6’

2. SEPTA will provide the Contractor with a proof copy of the information to be displayed on the SEPTA Project Sign at the Pre-Construction Meeting.

3. Obtain the services of a graphic sign company to transfer the

information contained on the SEPTA provided computer disk onto 0.1 mm pressure sensitive vinyl with Weather-All Fluorinated Polyurethane Coating, or approved equal film. The vinyl shall be mounted onto the sign surface.



4. Do not include information on the SEPTA Project Signs except that

contained on the computer disk provided by SEPTA.

5. The Contractor is responsible for advising the Project Manager of any problems that occur during the production of the SEPTA Project Sign.

2.02 TEMPORARY SIGNS

A. Temporary signs are considered to be any sign not included in Article 2.01 above that is required to be erected during the construction phase of the project and removed at the completion of the construction phase of the project. These signs include, but are not limited to, Pedestrian Wayfinding signs, Field Office Signs, and Safety and instructional signs for workers and visitors. This section does not include signs utilized and required for the purpose of identifying public street traffic closures and/or detours.

1. Pedestrian wayfinding signs

a. Each sign not to exceed 750 sq. in unless specifically required by the SEPTA Project Manager.

b. Signs shall be black Helvetica bold letters on white background with key information in red.

c. If vandalized, signs must be replaced at no cost to SEPTA.

d. All signs must meet accessibility guidelines.

e. Total sign count not to exceed 20 signs per phase (not including those needed to replace vandalized signs).

f. If in satisfactory condition, signs may be reused phase to phase with approval of the SEPTA PM.

B. Field Office Signs:

1. Size: 4’ x 5’ wide.

2. Letter with black enamel paint, using block letters at least 4” high,

with the Contract name. Contract number, and the words “CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OFFICE” or “SEPTA’S FIELD OFFICE” as appropriate with each word painted on a separate line.

3. Where the field offices to be identified are not readily visible from

the work site entrance, paint a directional arrow on the sign and



locate the sign near the entrance. In this case, provide additional signs of reduced size with the words “CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OFFICE” or “SEPTA’S FIELD OFFICE” as necessary to direct traffic to, and identify the field office location(s).

C. No Trespassing Sign

1. Sign base will be white baked enamel aluminum, 12” wide, 18” high and .062” thick. Additional prints of two colors will be used; fire red and black. 1” boarder on the top and both sides and ½ “ boarder on the bottom.

2. Sign Information

a. 1” down from the top is a 10” wide x 2.75” high fire red block

with reversed out white copy at 1.5” Helvetica. Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M that reads: WARNING centered in caps.

b. 5” down from the top is the baseline for 0.75” Helvetica.

Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M, black copy to read: NO TRESPASSING centered in caps.

c. 8.75” down from top is the center of a 6” fire red outlined

circle .5” thick with a diagonal 45 degree slash from the upper left to the lower right of the circle. Behind the circle and slash is a 4.5” pictograph of a walking pedestrian.

d. 13” down from the top is the baseline for 0.75” Helvetica.

Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M, in black copy to read: AUTHORIZED centered in caps.

e. 14.125” down from the top is the baseline for 0.75 Helvetica.

Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M, in black copy to read: PERSONNEL ONLY centered in caps.

f. 16.5” down from the top is the baseline for 0.375” Helvetica.

Med. Acct. A. K. Rev. M, broken down in 4 lines of black copy to read:

All Others Will Be Prosecuted In

Accordance With the Penalties Provided In Section 3503 OF The Pennsylvania

Crimes Code. Centered with initial caps.



g. 17.5” down from the top, flush right, is the base line for 0.5”

SEPTA logo in black.

3. Fasteners are not incorporated in the sign. Contractors can drill holes in the signs to mount them on fencing, walls, and barricades not to obstruct the message of the sign.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to erection, examine all signs to verify that the size, material and wording is in accordance with the approved shop drawings.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which the signs are to be located.

Prior to erection, notify the Project Manager of any conditions that may differ from the information identified on the sign submission.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and as directed by the Project Manager. Support all non-surface mounted signs on a minimum of two posts, anchored into the ground at a depth sufficient to provide rigid support of the sign during all weather conditions.

B. Provide Project Signs and SEPTA’s Field Office Signs at places

designated by SEPTA.

C. No Trespassing signs shall be posted on every side at 40’ spacing on all temporary fences and walls, barricades and compound fencing.

D. Temporary Signs (if required):

1. Field Office Signs: Provide one sign for the Contractor’s field

office to indicate the Contractor’s location.

2. Provide and install other temporary signs deemed necessary for the project by SEPTA.

E. Sign Maintenance: Maintain all signs throughout the course of

construction from installation until contract completion, keeping them clean, free from graffiti, in good repair and free of obstruction. Provide and maintain adequate protection against weather so as to preserve all work, materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. Maintain all signs free of all unrelated signs, posters, painting,



advertising and defacement of any kind. Within five days of notice, the Contractor shall clean, repair or replace signs as necessary to maintain them in a “like-new” condition.

F. Within five days of final acceptance of the project by SEPTA, remove and

dispose of all project identification and temporary signs. If any signs have disfigured a surface which is to become part of the final work, repair or replace the surface to the SEPTA Project Manager’s satisfaction. All costs for the removal and disposal of signs shall be borne by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Septa Field Office 01590-1

SECTION 01590 - SEPTA FIELD OFFICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. At a location approved by the SEPTA Project Manager and within (#TBD) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall provide and maintain until completion of the Work a temporary field office for the occupancy and use of SEPTA and its employees, with a minimum of (#TBD) square feet of usable area divided into two areas, and equipped as specified in this section. At the completion of the work the Contractor shall provide for the removal of the temporary field office.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010: Summary of Work

B. Section 01011: Summary of Project C. Section 01041: Project Coordination

D. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01300, submit within (#TBD) days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, a plan detailing SEPTA’s Office and associated spaces including parking and a bill of materials of all required office equipment and supplies for the review of the Project Manager.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. STANDARD EQUIPMENT

Answering Machine Armchairs Bookcases Chairs Coat Rack Coffee Maker Copying Machine Desks



Desk Lamps Drafting Table Stools Drafting Tables/Supplies Fax Machine File Cabinets (fire resistant and lockable) Fire Extinguishers First Aid Kit Folding Chairs Folding Office Table General Office Supplies (i.e. staplers, pencils) HVAC (Air Conditioner) Microwave Office Lighting Plan storage rack Refrigerator (Small) Sanitary Facilities Storage Cabinets Telephone (s) Thermometer (outdoor or ambient) Wastepaper Basket Water Cooler with appurtenances Work Tables Wall Clock Wall Board (Blackboard/s)

B. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Desktop Calculators Gang Boxes Lockers Microcassette Recorder/Tape Players Radio and Accessories Transits Chains Thermometer (Rail) Thermometer (Asphalt) Manuals (TBD)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 OFFICE

A. Weather tight, with barred windows and doors, each equipped with screens and adequate locking devices. Exterior doors shall be equipped with cylinder locks and dead bolts, both keyed alike with two



keys and also provided with burglar-proof bars and locks across the doors.

B. Insulated exterior wall, ceilings and floors.

C. Floor covered with resilient flooring material such as asphalt tile or

linoleum.

D. Restroom with lavatory, toilet, soap holder, toilet paper, holders, paper towel dispenser, wastepaper basket, mirror, and hot and cold water supply, or restroom facilities commensurate with Contractor's own on-site facilities.

E. Sufficient lighting to provide a minimum of 100-foot candles at desk light

uniformly in all areas.

F. Grounded duplex electrical receptacles around interior walls at approximately 10-foot spacing.

G. Automatically controlled heating and air-conditioning systems with

thermostats, capable of maintaining the office at an ambient temperature ranging between 64 and 78 degrees F. The Contractor shall provide fuel and bear all costs in connection therewith.

H. The Contractor shall provide water, sewer, and electrical utility service

as required.

I. The Contractor shall provide continuous telephone service within the field office and bear all costs in connection therewith, including long distance telephone charges until final completion and acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall provide as follows:

1. Project Manager: two separate phone lines on one unit.

2. One separate unit with two separate phone lines into the field

engineer's area.

3. One telephone answering machine connected to Project Manager's line.

4. (Computer communications requirements)

Broadband Internet service 6 MHz download speed: The Contractor shall provide continuous Internet access through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) within the field office and bear all costs in connection therewith, for the duration of maintaining



the SEPTA field office. Desktop computers and accessories: The Contractor shall provide four (4) each of the following computer and accessories or SEPTA approved equal. One set shall be installed for the Project Manager, one for the Project Engineer and two sets for the Field Engineers: Dell Dimension 4700 desktop PC, Dell UltraSharp 1905FP 19” Flat Panel Display, 1GB memory, minimum dual 80GB Serial ATA Hard Drives, video card, sound card, speakers, Dell Quietkey Keyboard, Microsoft Optical USB mouse with scroll button, Integrated 10/100 Ethernet and MS Windows XP Professional operating system. Compact Flash and Secure Digital card reader, Dual Optical drives consisting of 16x DVD-ROM Drive and 16x DVD+/-RW. McAfee Internet Security and AntiSpyware and with anti-virus subscription maintained. Four (4) 8GB USB 2.0 Flash memory stick/keys. A 50 pack of DVD +R discs, 100 pack CD-R, 100 standard size CD cases, Roxio Easy Media Creator, CD label kit with 100 laser compatible CD labels. Microsoft Office Professional Edition, Microsoft OneNote, and Adobe Acrobat Elements. For all software including operating systems, the latest edition shall be provided, the original CD-media and a hard copy manual. Provide an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with capacity to handle the desktop PC. Margaret-Orthodox Station Rehabilitation Conformed Set Printer: All-in-one laser network ready, color printer, copier, scanner, fax machine and ancillary items: Provide the following or SEPTA approved equal. All-in-One printer/copier/scanner/fax machine shall support a memory card slot, standard accessories including print cartridges, standard network interfaces, and standard paper sizes including 11x17. Printer/Copier/Scanner hardware shall also support PDF files (creating and saving to PDF). Users shall be able to import and export files/documents to PDF. Provide one, 10’ USB 2.0 cable. Provide a separate, sturdy table to support the printer, cable modem and switch / router as required. Include a multiple outlet strip with circuit breaker and surge suppression including for telephone line. Provide and maintain on hand one Provide and maintain on hand one spare print cartridge of each color. Provide heavy-duty three-hole punch on table. Linksys BEFSR81 EtherFast Cable Router with 8-Port Switch and CAT 5E cables:



Install CAT 5E cabling, jacks and equipment and setup network. Connect Cable modem to router / switch. Connect router / switch with CAT 5E cables to desktop computer desks, to the network printer on printer table and to each Field Engineer’s office desk. Provide a jack at each point for termination. Provide ten foot patch cables, or longer cables if necessary, to enable connection of all devices. The Field Engineers patch cables shall reach any point on their office desks. All cables shall be installed in a professional manner including the avoidance of tripping hazards. Provide a multi-outlet surge protector for each computer desk, the all-in-one table and each of the Field Engineers’ office desks for power connections. Install hardware at each Field Engineer’s desk to enable a security cable to be connected and not easily removed.

3.02 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE:

A. The Contractor shall provide all electrical and telephone tie-ins for the field office and provide continuous maintenance of utility tie-ins during the construction period.

B. The Contractor shall provide continuous maintenance during the

construction period including daily janitorial service for offices and toilet facilities and provide toiletry supplies as necessary. The Contractor shall clean the windows bi-weekly.

C. The Contractor shall repair or refinish damaged areas as required.

D. The Contractor shall provide supplies for the copying machine for an

average usage of approximately (#TBD) copies per month.

E. The Contractor shall repair or replace the FAX machine and related equipment within 48 hours of becoming inoperable or defective.

F. The Contractor shall pay cost of all utilities including long distance

telephone usage. 3.03 SEPTA PARKING

A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of (#TBD) parking spaces at the trailer location for SEPTA's use.

3.04 SECURITY



A. The Contractor shall guard against unauthorized or illegal entry and protect the field office against vandalism, theft and mischief. The Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement and/or compensation for any item owned by the SEPTA or its employees, which are related to the subject work, removed or damaged as the result of vandalism, theft, mischief or illegal entry to the field office.

3.05 REMOVAL

A. Upon project completion, the Contractor shall remove temporary field office and appurtenances from the worksite.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Material And Equipment 01600-1

SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

Work of this section includes:

A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations

B. Fulfilling SEPTA sustainability goals and the reuse of materials

C. Transportation and handling

D. Storage and protection

E. Repairs and replacements

F. Product options 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. SEPTA Agreement,

B. Section 01010: Summary of Work

C. Section 01011: Summary of Project

D. Section 01060: Regulatory Requirements and Safety


F. Section 01400: Quality Requirements 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. The Contractor shall include in its Quality Assurance Program all procedures that are required to assure the proper handling, storage and installation of all materials and equipment.

B. The contractor must identify the country of origin for all materials subject to source restrictions such as the “Buy America” requirements. Specifically stated relief, including acknowledgement of the country of origin, from these regulations must be obtained in writing before installation of any non-conforming material. Merely obtaining clearance for non-conforming material through the submittal process, even if the



country or origin is stated, shall not be interpreted as providing this relief.

C. The contractor shall turn over copies of all bills of lading, packing slips, labels, quality assurance test results and other information which establishes that materials delivered to the job site are consistent with the requirements of the construction documents to the SEPTA PM.

D. The contractor shall maintain on site a copy of storage and installation instructions and Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials being used in the project.

1.05 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS:

The Contractor shall comply with manufacturers' recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection except as noted in the Contract Documents or otherwise approved by SEPTA. If the contract documents deviate from any manufacturer’s recommendations for material utilization and/or installation, the contractor shall bring this to the attention of the SEPTA Project Manager and obtain clarification before proceeding.

1.06 FULFILLING SEPTA SUSTAINABILITY GOALS AND THE REUSE OF

MATERIALS

A. For materials identified elsewhere as required to meet specific sustainability goals, the contractor will keep all documentation necessary to establish that specific materials were used in a manner which meets these requirements.

B. The Contractor shall not reuse materials and equipment found on the existing premises, except as specifically called for by the Contract Documents or as approved through the change order process. If materials are called to be reused, their use shall be documented to the satisfaction of the SEPTA Project Manager and in sufficient detail to fulfill all sustainability documentation requirements.

1.07 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. The Contractor shall transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Excessive damage during transport and unloading, as judged by the SEPTA PM, may be grounds for rejection of that material.

B. The Contractor shall promptly inspect shipments to ensure that

products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products



are undamaged.

C. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

D. The Contractor shall deliver and have delivered products to the job site

in their manufacturer's original container, with labels intact and legible.

1. The Contractor shall maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of installation.

2. The Contractor shall promptly remove damaged material and

unsuitable items from the job site, and promptly replace with material meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost to SEPTA.

E. SEPTA may reject, as non-complying, material and products that do not

bear satisfactory identification as to manufacturer, country of origin, grade, quality, and other pertinent information.

1.08 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

B. The Contractor shall store sensitive products in weather tight, climate

controlled enclosures.

1. Material subject to moisture damage as defined in the International Green Construction Code (IGCC) shall be inspected by an approved agency in conformance to the IGCC. Any material which has sustained damage per the IGCC will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of the SEPTA project Manager at no cost to SEPTA.

C. For exterior storage of fabricated products which are intended for

exterior installation; the Contractor shall provide above ground sloped supports as a minimum storage strategy. Components shall be appropriately protected from the weather. This storage is subject to the approval of the SEPTA PM.

D. The availability of laydown areas may be limited. Unless otherwise

directed by the contract documents, the Contractor shall make off-site arrangements for storage, staging, and deliver material to the site as required to not affect work progress of other contractors and/or create unsafe conditions.



E. The Contractor shall protect all finished surfaces and equipment.

F. The Contractor shall provide protection for finished floor surfaces prior to allowing equipment or materials to be moved over such surfaces.

G. The Contractor shall maintain finished surfaces and equipment clean,

unmarred, and suitably protected until final acceptance by SEPTA. 1.09 REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS:

A. In event of damage, the Contractor shall promptly make replacements and repairs at no additional cost to SEPTA. Do not install damaged material.

B. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs

will not be considered by SEPTA as justification for extension to contract time.

1.10 PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. If a product becomes unavailable during the construction process, the contractor must submit an alternative following the normal submittal review process in Section 01300. Under no circumstances may a contractor install an alternate material from that which was submitted, no matter how closely the substitute resembles the original, without the written permission of the SEPTA PM.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Contract Closeout 01700-1

SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies the requirements for closing out the Contract and

supplements requirements specified in Paragraph XII of the Agreement. B. Contract closeout is the term used to describe the collective

requirements that are to be fulfilled at the end of the Contract term in preparation for final acceptance and occupancy of the Work by SEPTA, as well as final payment to the Contractor and the completion of the Contract.

C. Prior to the completion of the whole project, and at the discretion of the

SEPTA PM, a Certificate of Substantial Completion may be issued for portions of the Work completed to the full satisfaction of SEPTA in accordance with 1.03 below.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Agreement B. Section 01710: Final Cleaning C. Section 01720: Project As-Built Documents

D. Section 01810: Commissioning of Systems E. Relevant Division 2 through 16 Specification Sections

1.03 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. General: The Contractor shall complete the following before requesting the Project Manager's inspection for certification of substantial completion for the Work of the Contract. The Contractor shall list known exceptions in the request.

1. In the progress payment request that coincides with, or is the first

request following the date substantial completion is claimed, activities should be either 100 percent complete for the portion of the Work claimed as "substantially complete," or provide a list of incomplete



items, the value of incomplete Work, and reasons for the Work being incomplete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Submit written certification to the Project Manager that the project, or

designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 3. Submit the list of items to be completed or corrected and material

delivery dates of major items, as applicable. 4. Advise SEPTA of pending insurance change-over requirements. 5. All contract record documents, maintenance manuals, warranties, and

bonds shall be submitted as defined in the Agreement and Sections 01720, and 01830 (if applicable).

6. Obtain and submit releases enabling SEPTA full, unrestricted use of

the Work and access to services and utilities. Where required, include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.

7. Deliver any access tools and material stock as required and further

defined in Section 01830. 8. Change out locks, transmit keys and transfer security provisions if

required. 9. Start up testing and demonstration of equipment and systems shall be

completed as specified in Section 01810. 10. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and

services from the project site as directed by the Project Manager along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements.

11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 12. All building operations, maintenance and owner education instructions

for the SEPTA's personnel shall be completed as defined in Section 01830 and in the International Green Construction Code.

13. Add other specific requirements.

B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of the Contractor's request and submittal for inspection, the Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unresolved prerequisites.

1. Following the initial inspection or before (see below), the Project



Manager will either prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion or advise the Contractor of Work which must be performed before the certificate will be issued. The Project Manager will repeat the inspection when requested and when assured that the Work has been completed.

SEPTA reserves the right to halt inspections at any time if in the opinion of the SEPTA PM, the incomplete items of work are either too numerous or too complex to qualify the project as substantially complete.

2. Results of the completed inspection will form the initial "punch list" for

final acceptance but this list may be modified at the discretion of the SEPTA PM.

3. The "punch list" shall include a reasonable time period to effectuate the

work, which is mutually agreed upon by all parties. 1.04 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. General: The Contractor shall complete the following before requesting the Project Manager's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment as required by the Agreement, specifically sections regarding the Contractor and Payment and Completion. The Contractor shall list known exceptions, if any, in the request.

1. Submit the final payment request with final releases and

supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement to account for final additional

changes to the Contract sum. 3. Submit a Certified copy of the Project Manager's final "punch list"

which documents all work which has been completed. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of

stored fuel and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or as of the date SEPTA took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work, if required.

5. Submit Consent of Surety. Affidavit of Payments of Debts and

Claims, Affidavit of Release of Liens. General Release by Trade Contractor of Owner, Guarantee against Defects, any Warranties



and Maintenance Bonds. Any special documentation such as copy of Engineer or DER Permits or Certification of Occupancy.

6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage, which

complies with insurance requirements. 7. Submit any remaining record documents and drawings,

maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement survey, property survey, and similar final record information and as defined in the International Green Construction Code.

8. The Contractor shall also issue final project records in an electronic format. Electronic files shall be in a format approved by the SEPTA PM for each specific item. Electronic files shall be organized and named per applicable section or naming protocol as provided by the SEPTA PM.

9. The SEPTA PM may elect progressive submissions of specific listed items during the course of the work. Electronic files shall be created for the following items:

Submittals

Construction Permits

Certificate of Use and Occupancy

As-Built Drawings

Manufacturer’s OEM manuals.

Manufacturers’ Warrantees

Construction Photographs

Approved Shop Drawings

Testing Service Results

Concrete Delivery Forms

Steel Certifications

UL Inspections

Survey Log Records

Drilling log Records

All Engineering, design and calculations

Documentation required by regulatory requirements.



Soil Management documentation including but not limited to Testing results, Soil disposal documentation, chain of custody and permissions, & Disposal records

Accident Reports.

B. Reinspection Procedure: The Project Manager will re-inspect the Work

upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work, including “punch list” items resulting from earlier inspections, has been completed except for those items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances that are acceptable to the Project Manager. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Project Manager will either

prepare a Certificate of Final Acceptance or will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but which are required for final acceptance. SEPTA reserves the right to halt inspections at any time if it becomes apparent that the incomplete items of work are either too numerous or too complex to qualify the project as substantially complete.

2. If necessary, the reinspection procedure will be repeated.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Final Cleaning 01710-1

SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION:

The section details work for preparing the site and/or facility for substantial completion.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls

1.03 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 01300 provide information on the proposed cleaning materials and chemicals for the review of the SEPTA Project Manager including but not limited to MSDS Sheets.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. In addition to the standards described in this Section, the Contractor shall comply with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

B. "Clean," for the purpose of the Article, and except as may be specifically provided otherwise, shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials.

C. For any finishes, SEPTA may require a sample test area be cleaned to insure compatibility and to set a standard for final appearance.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT:

The Contractor shall provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to achieve the specified standard of cleanliness.

2.02 COMPATIBILITY:



A. The Contractor shall use only the cleaning materials and equipment

which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material and acceptable to SEPTA.

B. The Contractor shall replace surfaces damaged from improper use of

material and/or cleaning methods at no cost to SEPTA. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING:

A. The Contractor shall, prior to turning over the substantially completed area to SEPTA maintenance, remove from the area all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. If any of the Contractor's work continues in the substantially completed area, the Contractor shall continue the cleaning specified in Section 01500. Schedule a final cleaning date as approved by SEPTA with sufficient time for a post-cleaning inspection walk through with the SEPTA PM and a contractor’s representative.

B. Site:

1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by SEPTA, the Contractor

shall sweep grade areas within the contract limit and paved areas adjacent to the site.

2. The Contractor shall completely remove resultant debris.

3. The Contractor shall remove graffiti from all surfaces and restore

surface to original condition.

C. Structures

1. The Contractor shall visually inspect all existing and finished surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, graffiti and other foreign matter.

2. The Contractor shall remove all traces of splashed materials from

structure within contract limit and from adjacent surfaces.

3. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, the Contractor shall wash the exterior of the structure with high pressure detergent.



4. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with detergent, the Contractor shall utilize other cleaning methods (including light particle blasting if needed) subject to SEPTA’s written approval and at no additional cost to SEPTA.

5. The Contractor shall remove paint droppings, spots, stains and

dirt from existing and finished surfaces. 6. The Contractor shall clean existing and new glass surfaces and

frames, both inside and outside before and after applying anti-vandal film to surfaces as called for in the contract.

D. Finished Surface:

1. The Contractor shall remove all labels and tags, which are strictly

used for the convenience of manufacturing, assembly, installation and identification. Remove all label residue.

2. The Contractor shall clean glass and glazing to a polished

condition. Remove substances, which are noticeable on surfaces. Replace any broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

3. The Contractor shall clean stainless steel surfaces (including

screens) of all foreign material. Use cleaners as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by SEPTA.

4. The Contractor shall clean existing and new tile surfaces including

the grout joints to a dirt and graffiti free condition.

E. Equipment & Lighting:

1. The Contractor shall wipe surfaces of all mechanical and electrical equipment including system components to a dirt free condition. Touch up the painted surfaces to match with the overall finish of the equipment/system component.

2. Insure that the equipment and system components are properly

identified as required by the Contract Documents, and applicable codes. Confirm that all cover plates are installed properly and locked if applicable. Missing or broken cover plates and those which don’t fit and lock properly must be replaced.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Project As-Built Documents 01720-1

SECTION 01720 - PROJECT AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor, throughout progress of the Work, shall maintain an accurate record of changes to the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall at the time of substantial completion, but prior to

requesting release of retainage, transfer the changes to a set of Final As-Built Documents, which shall include an As-Built set of Construction Drawings and an annotated set of Specifications.

C. The Contractor shall in addition to the defined requirements to provide

paper copies, also provide approved Final As-Built Documents in an electronic format for SEPTA’s future use. The format of these electronic files shall be approved by the SEPTA PM prior to submission.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the Agreement and Division 1 of these Specifications.

B. Other requirements affecting Project As-Built Documents may appear in

other pertinent sections of these Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.


A. Accuracy of Records:

1. The Contractor shall thoroughly coordinate changes within the As-Built Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly.



2. Accuracy of records shall be such that investigations to determine actual installed items may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Final Record Documents.

B. The Contractor shall make entries on the As-Built Documents on a

weekly basis to include all changes to the Work performed during the last week to confirm they are an accurate representation of the As-Built conditions.

C. The Contractor shall transfer "job set" information to a set of Final As-

Built Documents in a neat and professional manner. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

The Contractor shall maintain the “job set” of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the Final As-Built Documents.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Job Set:

Following receipt of SEPTA's Notice to Proceed, the Contractor, shall secure from SEPTA one complete set of all drawings and specifications comprising the Contract Documents. This “job set” will be maintained at the site to record all As-Built changes.

B. Final As-Built Documents:

The Final As-Built Documents are to include:

1. Updated As-Builts of the original Contract Drawings.

2. Additional As-Built Drawings as necessary, to describe changes

during the Contract period that could not be included on the original contract drawings.

3. Annotated Specifications to include Contract Specifications with all

changes made during the Contract period.

4. “As installed” versions of same size drawings of all fabrication, detail and installation drawings.



PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET

A. The Contractor shall, immediately upon receipt of the job set described in Paragraph 2.01, A. above, identify each of the Documents with the title "AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS - JOB SET."

B. Preservation:

1. The Contractor shall devise a suitable method for protecting the

As-Built Job Set (job set) in consideration of the Contract duration, the probable number of occasions upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination; the transfer of information on Final As-Build Documents; and the conditions under which these activities will be performed.

2. The Contractor shall not use the job set for any purpose except

entry of new data, for review by SEPTA and for the transfer of data to Final As-Built Documents.

3. Maintain the job set at the site of Work.

C. Making entries on Drawings:

1. The Contractor shall utilize an erasable colored pencil (not ink or

indelible pencil) to clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required.

2. The Contractor shall date all entries.

3. The Contractor shall call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn

around the area or areas affected.

4. The Contractor shall in the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes.

D. Revisions:

1. The Contractor shall transfer all changes to respective

Specifications and/or Drawings set (if appropriate) immediately, as the change is approved.

2. The Contractor shall make appropriate entries in the drawings as

soon as the change is incorporated in the field. E. Conversion of schematic layouts:



1. The Contract drawings may indicate arrangements of conduits,

circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items shown schematically, and is not intended to portray precise physical layout.

Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to SEPTA's written approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility requires accurate information as to the final physical layout of items, which must be schematically shown on the Final As-Built Drawings.

2. Show on the job set of As-Built Drawings, by dimension accurate

to within 1/8” to the centerline of each run of items such as are described in subparagraph 3.01E.1 above.

a. The Contractor shall clearly identify the item by accurate

note such as "cast iron drain", "galv. conduit," and the like.

b. The Contractor shall show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ("under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like).

c. The Contractor shall make all identification sufficiently

descriptive that it may be related reliably to the Specifications.

3.02 FINAL PROJECT RECORD INFORMATION

A. The purpose of the Final Project As-Built Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modifications of the Work to proceed without lengthy and extensive site measurement, investigation, and examination.

B. Accuracy of Record Data Prior to Transfer:

The Contractor is solely responsible for accurate transfer of all field changes and preparing additional reproducible drawings and specification pages.

C. Transfer of Data to Drawings:

1. The Contractor shall carefully transfer change data shown on the job set to the Final As-Built Documents coordinating the changes as required.



2. The Contractor shall clearly indicate at each affected detail and

master drawing a full description of changes made during construction, and the actual location of items.

3. The Contractor shall call attention to each entry by drawing a

"cloud" around the areas affected.

4. The Contractor shall make changes neatly, consistently, and with the proper media to assure longevity and clear reproduction.

5. The Contractor shall prepare additional reproducible drawings in

the same size as the original contract drawings for changes to details (including installation and fabrication drawings) incorporated in the construction that could not be corrected on the As-Built drawings. These drawings shall be adequately identified and cross-referenced with pertinent Drawing(s) to make it part of the Final As-Built Documents.

D. Transfer of Data to Specifications:

The Contractor shall accurately and legibly transfer all information from job set to Final Annotated Project Record Specifications Set.

E. Review and Submittal:

1. The Contractor shall submit the completed set of Final As-Built

Documents to SEPTA.

2. The Contractor shall participate in review meetings as required.

3. The Contractor shall make required changes and promptly deliver the Final Project As-Built Documents to SEPTA.

4. The Contractor shall sign each sheet of the record drawings,

certifying that they are an accurate representation of the As-Built condition.

5. The Final approved set of As-Built Documents shall in conveyed as 2 paper copies and 2 copies of the electronic sets.

3.03 CHANGES SUBSEQUENT TO ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor has no responsibility for recording changes in the Work subsequent to Final Completion, except for changes resulting from work performed under Warranty.



END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Commissioning of Systems 01810-1

SECTION 01810 - COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Start-Up Systems

B. Demonstration and Instructions

C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01400: Quality Requirements

B. Sections related to Division 15 and 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01300 furnish for SEPTA’s Project Manager review the following:

1. Schedule for all Start-up Testing

2. Testing Program

3. Schedule for Instruction

1.04 SYSTEMS START-UP

A. The Contractor shall coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. The Contractor shall notify SEPTA (#TBD) days prior to start-up of each

item.

C. The Contractor shall verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage.

D. The Contractor shall verify that tests, meter readings, and specified

electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

E. The Contractor shall verify wiring and support components for



equipment are complete and tested.

F. The designer of record and/or approved SEPTA Personnel shall execute start-up with the participation of applicable (manufacturer's representative) and (Contractors' personnel) in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and the provisions of the International Green Construction Code.

G. The Contractor shall require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

1.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and/or systems to SEPTA's personnel (#TBD) weeks prior to date of (final inspection).

B. The Contractor shall demonstrate project equipment and shall provide,

at no additional cost, instruction and an instructor to SEPTA employees in a classroom environment located at (#TBD). The Contractor shall provide a qualified (specify qualifications) manufacturer's representative as an instructor who is knowledgeable of both the equipment and project.

C. The Contractor, for equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,

shall perform demonstration for other season within (#TBD) months after the initial demonstration and commissioning.

D. The Contractor shall utilize manufacturer’s operational and

maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. The contents of manuals shall be reviewed with SEPTA in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

E. The Contractor shall demonstrate start-up, operation, control,

adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at (scheduled) or (agreed time) (#TBD), at (designated) location.

F. The Contractor shall prepare and insert additional data in operations

and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment

and system may be specified in individual sections or in this paragraph.



1.06 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. The Contractor shall employ the services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing under the direction of the designer of record and/or approved SEPTA personnel as part of the commissioning process.

B. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to SEPTA and the

contractor indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting these reports to the Project Manager.

END OF SECTION


v.15-04 Operation and Maintenance Data 01830-1

SECTION 01830 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Format and Content of Manuals

B. Instruction of SEPTA Personnel 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01300: Submittals

B. Section 01400: Quality Requirements

C. Section 01410: Testing and Inspection Services

D. Section 01600: Material and Equipment

E. Section 01700: Contract Closeout F. Section 01720: Project As-Built Documents G. Sections identify in Divisions 2 through 16

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit operations and maintenance manuals for each machinery and equipment item as follows:

1. Two copies of sample format and outline of contents in draft form

with the equipment shop drawings. 2. Two copies of the complete manual in final form on equipment

delivery date for review and comment by SEPTA.

3. Four copies of approved manual after the equipment is installed and ready to test.

4. In addition to the paper copies required elsewhere in this section,

all documents, after final approval, will be submitted in an electronic



format as approved by the SEPTA PM. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

B. General Requirements for Manuals:

1. Prepare manuals written in clear grammatical English. 2. Manuals furnished may be manufacturer’s standard publications

in regard to size and binding provided they comply with specified requirements relative to quantity and quality of information data.

3. Bind manuals within hard or flexible covers. Make illustrations

clear, and printed matter, including dimensions and lettering on drawings, easily legible. If reduced drawings are incorporated into manuals, heavy-up original lines and letters as necessary to retain their legibility after reduction. Larger drawings may be folded into manuals to page size.

C. Prepare manuals using the following materials:

1. Loose leaf, on 60-pound, three hole punched paper. 2. Holes reinforced with plastic cloth.

3. Page size, 11 x 8 ½ (if available) or 280 mm x 215 mm.

4. Foldout diagrams and illustrations.

5. Reproducible by dry-copy xerography method.

6. Oil, moisture and wear-resistant plastic covers.

1.05 FORMAT

A. The Contractor shall prepare data in the form of an instructional manual which conforms to the requirements outlined below.

Clearly identify each manual through the front cover with at least the following information:



(*description of manual) (description of equipment or systems) SOUTHEASTERN PENNSYLVANIA TRANSPORTATION AUTHORITY CONTRACT (NAME & PO #) (Name of Contractor) Date: (#TBD)

B. The Contractor shall prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with

each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows:

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors, and SEPTA Personnel including Operations.

a. Title page: Include the name and function of the equipment

and manufacturers

b. Table of Contents, in numerical order listing all sections and subsection titles of included diagrams and drawings.

c. Index, in alphabetical order.

d. Front piece: Recognition illustration of the equipment

described in the O&M Manual.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by systemand subdivided by specification section . For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:

a. Significant design criteria b. List of equipment,

Manufacturer’s literature describing each piece of equipment including major assemblies and subassemblies, and giving manufacturer’s model number drawing number.

c. Parts list for each component.

1) Manufacturer’s literature describing each piece of equipment including major assemblies and subassemblies, and giving manufacturer’s model number and drawing



number. 2) “Long-Lead-Time” spare parts list for all spare parts not

readily available on the open market or for which it is anticipated ordering and delivery time will exceed 30 days.

3) Complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices

and sources of supply.

4) List of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with purchase of equipment, or specified herein to be furnished as part of Contract.

5) List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment parts.

d. Operating Instructions.

1) Operation instructions including step-by-step preparation

for starting, operation, shutdown and draining, and emergency requirements.

2) Control diagrams, as installed by the manufacturer. 3) Sequence of operation by the control manufacturer. 4) Wiring diagrams, as installed by the manufacturer. 5) Diagrammatic location, functions and tag numbers of

each valve.

e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.

1) Maintenance instruction: Include step-by-step procedures for inspection, operation checks, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repair, overhaul, disassembly, and reassemble of the equipment for proper operation of the equipment. Include list of special tools, which are required for maintenance with the maintenance information.

2) Possible breakdowns and repairs. 3) Lubrication schedule indicating type and frequency of

lubrication.

f. Maintenance instructions for all finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions



identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and product data

b. Air and water balance reports

c. Certificates

d. Photocopies of warranties (and bonds). e. Appendix: Include safety precautions, a glossary, and, if available

at time of submittal, copies of test reports, and other relevant material not specified to be submitted.

1.06 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME

A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Sub-consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone

numbers of Sub-contractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and

component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component

parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Project As-Built Documents shall not be used as maintenance drawings.

E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical

sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer’s instructions.

1.07 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designatures. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured Products.



B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer’s

recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data

listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification

sections.

E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

1.08 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Each item of Equipment and each system: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics,

controls, and communications; by label machine. B. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal

operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for

trouble-shooting, disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions.

H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.



I. Provide original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.

K. Provide Contractor’s coordination drawings, with color-coded piping

diagrams as installed.

L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

M. Provide list of original manufacturer’s spare parts, current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

N. Include test and balancing reports as specified elsewhere in these specifications.

O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification

sections.

P. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed (and space for insertion of data.

1.09 INSTRUCTION OF SEPTA PERSONNEL

A. The contractor is responsible for creating a Building Owner Education Manual in conformance with the International Green Construction Code.

B. Before final inspection, instruct SEPTA designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon time.

C. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other

seasons with 6 months.

D. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

E. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual

when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction.



END OF SECTION


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1

SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of concourse or structure.

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements

2. Section 02086 – Handling and Disposal of Contaminated Soils

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated

to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed

by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


02070 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of concourse.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures

proposed for protecting individuals and property for environmental protection, for dust control,

and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure SEPTA's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs.

5. Coordination of SEPTA's continuing occupancy of portions of existing concourse and of

SEPTA's partial occupancy of completed Work.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. SEPTA will occupy portions of concourse immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so SEPTA's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by SEPTA as

far as practical.

C. Notify the SEPTA Project Manager of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings

before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify the

SEPTA Project Manager.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.



1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with SEPTA's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by SEPTA. SEPTA does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or

adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective

demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas

to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.



a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same

or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to SEPTA.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage

and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during selective demolition operations.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

2. Contractor Design: Design temporary shoring and protection system, including

comprehensive engineering analysis, signed and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:



1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting

members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices

during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of

areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim

openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,

using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and

remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.



3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.



Handling And Disposal Of Contaminated Soils 02086 - 1

SECTION 02086 - HANDLING AND DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED SOILS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is for the excavation and staging or direct loading and removal of

contaminated material from within the project footprint in accordance with a Waste

Management Plan approved by SEPTA and/or the City of Philadelphia. All soil will be

treated as soil which is classified as “Regulated Fill” by the Pennsylvania Department of

Environmental Protection (PA DEP) Management of Fill Policy.

B. If allowed by SEPTA and/or the City of Philadelphia, excavated soils will be re-used on-

site to the extent possible, and soils to be disposed off-site shall be tested and disposed at

a SEPTA and/or City of Philadelphia approved facility.

C. Contractor shall retain a qualified and approved environmental consultant to perform all

soil/waste profiling for disposal of soils.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02160 – Excavation Support and Protection

B. Section 02220 – Earthwork

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The contractor shall prepare a Waste Management Plan and obtain approval of it by

SEPTA and/or the City of Philadelphia prior to soils handling including digging test pits

and excavating. The Waste Management Plan shall be submitted at least two weeks

prior to any construction activity at the site for approval by SEPTA’s PM. The Waste

Management Plan shall follow the Transportation Project Development Process, Waste

Site Evaluation Procedures Handbook PennDOT Publication No. 281, dated December

2012, and SEPTA’s Management Program for Soils, Construction and Demolition

Debris Generated from SEPTA Property, Document #3005, dated May 2009.

B. Submit for SEPTA approval at least two weeks prior to planned construction activity, a

letter report that documents testing performed by Contractor, the Waste Management

Plan, and recommended soil disposal options.

C. Submit complete chain-of-custody documentation including typewritten Bills of Lading

and Waste Manifests for the wastes directly to SEPTA's PM in duplicate and one copy to

the Engineer within 7 days of transportation of the waste material from the site.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Regulated Fill: PADEP defines Regulated Fill as soil, rock, stone, dredged material,

used asphalt, historic fill, and brick, block or concrete from construction and demolition

activities that is separate from other waste and recognizable as such, that has been

affected by a spill or release of a regulated substance and the concentrations of regulated

substances exceed the values in Table FP-1a and b, as found in the General Permit

WMGR096 – General permit for Processing/Beneficial Use of Residual Waste.


02086 - 2 Handling And Disposal Of Contaminated Soils

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Preliminary Environmental Subsurface Exploration Report (HNTB, October 3, 2014)

B. Limited Phase II Environmental Subsurface Assessment Report (HNTB, December 5,

2014).

C. Waste Site Evaluation Procedures Handbook PennDOT Publication No. 281, dated

December 2012.

D. SEPTA’s Management Program for Soils, Construction and Demolition Debris

Generated from SEPTA Property, Document #3005, dated May 2009.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

A. Excavate, handle, and place waste material in an predetermined Waste Material Staging

Area approved by SEPTA (or other approved storage method) or direct load into

transportation vehicles for disposal to an approved facility in accordance with applicable

specifications. On-site loading of the waste material shall be conducted in such a

manner as to minimize the generation of fugitive dust or prevent the contamination of

surface waters.

B. Transport trucks shall be weighed prior to off-site transportation of the waste material.

The weight of each vehicle shall be properly documented in the site log by the

Contractor. Transport trucks shall be properly permitted and identified with proper

markings. The waste material shall be properly contained and covered during transport.

Transportation shall be performed in accordance with 49 CFR 171, Subchapter C and 40

CFR 263. Prepare and provide the necessary Bills of Lading or manifests.

C. All material disposed off-site shall be removed and properly disposed at an approved

Solid Waste Facility in accordance with the Solid Waste Management Act.

D. For bidding purposes, it is anticipated that approximately 300 cubic yards shall be

removed and properly disposed of at a Clean Earth® (http://www.cleanearthinc.com)

facility All testing and coordination with the disposal facility shall be performed at no

additional cost to SEPTA.


http://www.cleanearthinc.com/


EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND

PROTECTION

02160 - 1

SECTION 02160 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.


1. Division 1 – General Requirements.

2. Section 01100 – Special Project Procedures.

3. Section 02200 – Earthwork.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The work covered in this Section shall conform to the latest edition and latest addenda thereto

of the following publications to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the

text by the basic designation only.

1. American National Standards Institute/American Welding Society (ANSI/AWS):

a. ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM A 36, Carbon Structural Steel.

b. ASTM A 307, Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

c. ASTM A 328, Steel Sheet Piling.

d. ASTM A 572, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.

e. ASTM A 615, Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

f. ASTM A 690, High-Strength Low-Allow Nickel, Copper Phosphorus Steel H-

Piles and Sheet Piling with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance for Use in Marine

Environments.

g. ASTM A 722, High-Strength Steel Bars for Prestressed Concrete.

h. ASTM A 992, Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing.

3. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT);

a. PennDOT Specifications, Publication 408.

4. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB):

a. SPIB Grading Rules.

5. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA):


02160 - 2 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND

PROTECTION

a. WWPA Catalog A - Product Use Manual.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.

2. Review coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility

services.

3. Review proposed excavations.

4. Review proposed equipment.

5. Review monitoring of excavation support and protection system.

6. Review coordination with waterproofing.

7. Review abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer.

B. Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of

Pennsylvania, responsible for their preparation.

C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of

adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

inadequate performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work

begins.

1. The Contractor shall walk through the site with the SEPTA Project Manager prior to

starting the work.


A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent

existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points

to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of

supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and

superimposed and construction loads.



PROTECTION

02160 - 3

1. Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including

comprehensive engineering analysis, signed and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.

3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings,

structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation.

4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of

excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is

prevented.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, ASTM A 690, or ASTM A 992.

C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328, ASTM A 572, or ASTM A 690; with continuous interlocks.

1. Corners: Site-fabricated mechanical interlock.

D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength

required for application.

E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

G. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Three to ten days prior to starting work, contact the Pennsylvania One Call System (800-242-

1776) to mark locations of existing utilities. Locate all adjacent utilities by test holes prior to

excavation or installation of sheet piling or soldier piles. Verify locations of all adjacent

utilities. Relocate sheet piling or soldier piles or interfering utilities as required.

1. The Contractor shall meet the requirements of Section 01100 – Special Project

Procedures and obtain SEPTA approval prior to starting the work.

B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop

during excavation support and protection system operations.

1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

C. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads,

streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.



PROTECTION

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from SEPTA and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate

routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that

construction and finishing of other work is not impeded.

3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING

A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade

level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not

to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of

flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of

vertical alignment.

B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as

required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.

3.3 TIEBACKS

A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks.

B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.

1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of

excavation support and protection system.

C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and

hydrostatic pressures.

3.4 BRACING

A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent

work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work

unless otherwise approved by SEPTA Project Manager.

2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.

3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until

permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation

support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains



PROTECTION

02160 - 5

open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with

original elevations and positions. Promptly notify the SEPTA Project Manager if changes in

elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent

construction.

B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that

excavation support and protection system remains stable.

C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of

excavation support and protection systems.

3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed

sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to

avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and

utilities.

1. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in

Section 2200 "Earthwork."

2. Repair or replace, as approved by SEPTA Project Manager, adjacent work damaged or

displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.




PROTECTION

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK


EARTHWORK 02200 - 1

SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and backfilling within the concourse.


1. Division 1 – General Requirements.

2. Section 02086 “Handling and Disposal of Contaminated Soils.

3. Section 02160 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling

of excavations.

1.3 REFERENCES





a. ASTM C 33, Concrete Aggregates.

b. ASTM D 698, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard

Effort.

c. ASTM D 1556, Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone

Method.

d. ASTM D 2167, Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon

Method.

e. ASTM D 2487, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified

Soil Classification System).

f. ASTM D 2937, Density of Soil in Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method.

g. ASTM D 2940, Graded Aggregate Material For Bases or Subbases for Highways

or Airports.

h. ASTM D 6938, In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).


02200 - 2 EARTHWORK

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying

pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward

capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by SEPTA Project Manager. Authorized

additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract

provisions for unit prices.

2. Equipment for Footing, Trench, and Pit Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted

hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch maximum-width, short-tip-radius rock

bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less

than 28,700 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf with extra-long reach

boom.

G. Structures: Buildings, tunnels, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, mechanical

and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below

the ground surface.

H. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix

asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete

pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

I. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services

within buildings.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Warning tapes.


EARTHWORK 02200 - 3


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as

follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.

C. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused

by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and

ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

B. All soils brought to the site and removed from the site shall be fully tested for contaminants and

the testing results and other supporting information must be submitted to the SEPTA Project

Manager for approval prior to transport to and from the site. Provide test results and other

supporting information to the SEPTA Project manager at least two weeks prior to the planned

importing and exporting of soil to the site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during earth-moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by SEPTA or

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on

property adjoining SEPTA's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by SEPTA Project

Manager.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Pennsylvania One Call System (800-242-1776) for area where

Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations.

D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Foot traffic.

4. Erection of sheds or structures.


02200 - 4 EARTHWORK

5. Impoundment of water.

6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

F. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification [Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to

ASTM D 2487 or Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145, or a

combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension,

debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT

according to ASTM D 2487 or Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to

AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of

optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch

sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed



F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed



G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch


H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and

natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-

inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.


EARTHWORK 02200 - 5

J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide

and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core

encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is

buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving

operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary

protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.


02200 - 6 EARTHWORK

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil

materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be

authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If

applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing

concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms

to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below

frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of

pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations

to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding

bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify SEPTA Project Manager when excavations have reached required subgrade.


EARTHWORK 02200 - 7

B. If SEPTA Project Manager determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation

and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired to identify

soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by SEPTA Project Manager, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as

directed.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by SEPTA Project Manager, without additional

compensation.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

2. Do not remove any soil material from the site without the approval of the SEPTA Project

Manager.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing concrete formwork.

5. Removing trash and debris.

6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.


02200 - 8 EARTHWORK

2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

3. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

D. Do not provide soil fill from off-site sources without approval of the SEPTA Project Manager.

3.12 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

dry unit weight.

3.13 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material

compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12

inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each

layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90

percent.

3.14 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.

Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the

following subgrade tolerances:


EARTHWORK 02200 - 9

1. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.

2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-

foot straightedge.

3.15 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as

follows:

1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades.

3. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer.

4. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3

inches thick.

5. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit

weight according to ASTM D 1557.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to

perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with

requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed

to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing

subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when

approved by SEPTA Project Manager.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,

ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at

the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill

layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in

no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every

100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for

every 150 feet or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.


02200 - 10 EARTHWORK

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to

depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent

construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by SEPTA Project

Manager; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off SEPTA's property.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.



2. Section 03350 – Concrete Finishing

3. Section 03930 – Concrete Rehabilitation

1.3 REFERENCES




1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. AASHTO M182, Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. ACI 117, Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

b. ACI 121R, Quality Assurance Systems for Concrete Construction.

c. ACI 201.2R, Durable Concrete.

d. ACI 211.1, Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.

e. ACI 214, Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete.

f. ACI 301, Structural Concrete.

g. ACI 304R, Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.

h. ACI 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.

i. ACI 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.

j. ACI 306.1, Cold Weather Concreting.

k. ACI 308, Curing Concrete.

l. ACI 309R, Consolidation of Concrete.

m. ACI 311.1R, ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection.

n. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

o. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

p. ACI 347R, Formwork for Concrete.


03300 - 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

q. ACI SP-2, ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection.

r. ACI SP-15, Structural Concrete for Buildings.


a. ASTM C31, Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

b. ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates.

c. ASTM C39, Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

d. ASTM C42, Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed

Beams of Concrete.

e. ASTM C94, Ready-Mixed Concrete.

f. ASTM C138, Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content

(Gravimetric) of Concrete.

g. ASTM C143, Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

h. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.

i. ASTM C156, Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.

j. ASTM C171, Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

k. ASTM C172, Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

l. ASTM C173, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method.

m. ASTM C227, Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations

(Mortar-Bar Method).

n. ASTM C231, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method.

o. ASTM C260, Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

p. ASTM C470, Molds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically.

q. ASTM C494, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

r. ASTM C618, Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a

Mineral Admixture in Concrete.

s. ASTM C827, Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical

Specimens of Cementitious Mixtues.

t. ASTM C920, Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

u. ASTM C989, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and

Mortars.

v. ASTM C1077, Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in

Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

w. ASTM C1107, Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

x. ASTM C1260, Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method).

y. ASTM D512, Chloride Ion in Water.

z. ASTM D516, Sulfate Ion in Water.

aa. ASTM D1179, Fluoride Ion in Water.

bb. ASTM D1339, Sulfite Ion in Water.

cc. ASTM D1751, Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

dd. ASTM D1752, Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

ee. ASTM D1785, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and

120.

ff. ASTM D3867, Nitrite-Nitrate in Water.

gg. ASTM E96, Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet

Form.



hh. ASTM E329, Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials

Used in Construction.

4. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PADOT):

a. Publication 408, Specifications.

5. Concrete Plant Manufacturer's Bureau (CPMB):

a. Concrete Plant Standards of the Plant Manufacturers Bureau.

6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

a. CRSI Manual of Practice.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the SEPTA Project Manager.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.



4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Bonding agents.

7. Adhesives.

8. Semirigid joint filler.

9. Joint-filler strips.

10. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

D. Quality Control Submittals

1. Concrete Mixture Designs:

a. Proposed mixture design method and test data for each class of concrete and for

each proposed change of ingredients and ingredient sources, including admixtures,

in accordance with the documentation provisions of ACI 301. Identify for each

mixture design submitted the method by which proportions have been selected.

b. Mix proportions conforming to the requirements of this Section for water/cement

ratio, cement content, slump, maximum size of coarse aggregate, air content,

admixtures, and chloride concentration, as well as compressive strength.

c. For mixture designs based on trial mixtures, include laboratory trial mixture

proportions, test results and graphical analysis, and indicate required average

compressive strength, f'c, developed at 7 and 28 days from not less than 3 test

cylinders cast for each test and for each design mixture. Indicate quantity of each

ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures

proposed or required. Indicate aggregate gradation for fine and coarse aggregates.

d. Submit for approval new historical field strength test data, data from new trial

mixtures or evidence which indicates that the change will not adversely affect the

relevant properties of the concrete prior to changing the brand, type, size or source

of cementitious materials, aggregates, water, ice or admixtures.

2. Test Reports:

a. Submit following information for review:

1) Types, classes, procedures, names and plant locations for cementitious

materials.

2) Types, pit or quarry locations, producer's names, gradations and properties

required by ASTM C33 and ASTM C330 for aggregates for the building

structure and site structures.

3) Types, brand names, producer's names for admixtures; and source of supply

for water and ice.

b. Except for admixtures and water, test results not more than 90 days old confirming

the conformance of all concrete materials with applicable specifications.

c. Cement: Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C150 Portland Cement

and/or ASTM C595 and ASTM C1157 for blended cement. Submit current mill

data.



d. Fly Ash: Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C618. Submit test results

performed within 6 months of submittal date.

e. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: Submit test results in accordance with

ASTM C989 for ground iron blast-furnace slag. Submit test results performed

within 6 months of submittal date.

f. Aggregates: Submit test results for aggregate quality for normal weight concrete

in accordance with ASTM C33, the combined graduation curve for grading

proposed for use in the work and used in the mixture qualification and ASTM

C295 for results of petrographic examination. Where there is potential for alkali-

silica reaction, provide results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM C227

or ASTM C1260. Submit results of all tests during progress of the work in tabular

and graphical form as noted above, describing the cumulative combined aggregate

grading and the percent of the combined aggregate retained on each sieve.

g. Admixtures: Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C494 and ASTM

C1017 for concrete admixtures, ASTM C260 for air-entraining agent. Submitted

data shall be based upon tests performed within 6 months of submittal.

h. Submit samples of materials as requested by the Engineer including name, source

and description of each type of aggregate.

i. Submit copies of laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mixture design

tests. The Engineer's review will be for information only. Production of concrete

to comply with the specified requirements shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor.

j. A complete record of the date and details of each concrete placement including the

exact location thereof and the date of removal of forms. This record shall be

coordinated with and in addition to that maintained by the Resident Engineer.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified

Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,

Grade II.



D. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the

methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

E. Comply with "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete", ACI 301, except as may be

modified herein.

F. Do not commence furnishing or placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed

and approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.

1.8 CONCRETE TESTING SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall engage a Testing and Inspection Agency to develop mix designs and to

perform material evaluation tests.

B. The Contractor shall submit qualifications of the proposed Testing Agency for approval by

SEPTA in accordance with Section 01410.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature

range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of

ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is

Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301.

2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,

paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding

specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient

to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.



H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed

concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete

surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 , deformed bars, ASTM A 767, Class I

zinc coated after fabrication and bending.

B. Galvanized-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from

galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar

supports.

C. Mechanical Splices: Mechanical splices shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield

strength of the reinforcing bar.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide product by the following or approved equal.

a. Bar Lock (MBY) Coupler Systems.

b. NMB Splice Sleeve.

c. Erico Lenton Splices

d. Or approved equal.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.



B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, gray.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'

satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and

cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Fine

aggregate shall be composed of clean, sharp, hard, strong, durable, insoluble, uncoated,

natural sand free from loam, clay lumps or other deleterious substances.

3. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam

or foreign matter, as follows;

a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.

b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun gravel is not

permitted.

4. Alkali-silica Reactivity: For concrete exposed to weather the potential alkali-silica

reactivity of the aggregates shall be evaluated using procedures outlined in ASTM C

1260. Expansion shall be less than 0.1%. Coarse and fine aggregate blending should be

the same as proposed in the considered concrete mix.

a. Alternately aggregates, in combination with silica fume, fly ash or blast furnace

slag, may be evaluated for potential alkali-silica reactivity using procedures

outlined in ASTM C1567. The composition of the concrete mix used in the test

shall match the proposed mix design for the project. Expansion shall be less than

0.1%.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened

concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

F. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor

or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing

chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494,

Type C.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.

b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; ARRMATECT.

c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.

d. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.

G. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use

in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches long.

B. Shall meet performance level 1 toughness requirements per ASTM C 1018.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Fibrillated Fibers:

a. Fibrasol F; Axim Concrete Technologies.

b. Fibermesh 300; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.

c. Fiberstrand F.; Euclid Chemical Company

d. Forta; Forta Corporation.

e. Grace Fibers, Gilco or Grace Microfibers; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction

Products Div.

f. MasterFiber F70; BASF

g. MasterFiber F100; BASF

2.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,

bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to

concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal.

b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite.

c. Grace Construction Products; DeNeef Swellseal 2010.

2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive

or pressure-sensitive tape.


a. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.

b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.

c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green.




B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,

Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and

manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve,

10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve;

complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or

ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily

fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.



2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag Cement: 40 percent.

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 40 percent portland cement minimum,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

5. No mix design shall contain more than 120 pounds of fly ash per cubic yard.

6. Cement content of mix shall not be less than 350 pounds per cubic yard.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

4. If the Contractor intends to place concrete at air temperatures below 50 degrees

Fahrenheit and intends to use a non-corrosive accelerator to meet the requirements of

ACI 306.1 "Cold Weather Concreting" then a separate mix design containing the

admixture shall be submitted.

D. Chloride Ion Content of Mix:

1. Water soluble chloride ion content of concrete mix from all constituents shall not exceed

0.15% chloride ions by weight of cement for reinforced concrete. Test to determine

chloride ion content shall conform to ASTM C1218.

E. Concrete chloride ion content shall be determined by Testing Agency prior to placement. Cast

samples from current production of concrete mix proposed for superstructure.

F. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written

instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURE

A. Normal-weight structural concrete. Select concrete proportions to produce the required design

strength and provide durability against deterioration and abrasion, watertightness, workability

and mixture consistency to facilitate concrete placement, compaction into the forms and around

reinforcement without segregation or excessive bleeding, and achieve the desired finished

appearance.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.40.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (without addition of water-reducing admixures), plus or minus 1

inch.

4. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal

maximum aggregate size.

B. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 564 lb/cu. yd.



4. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus or minus 1

inch.

5. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery. Do not allow air

content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3.0 percent.

6. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's

recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.5 lb/cu. yd.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. All concrete shall be ready mixed concrete provided by a central batch plant. All concrete shall

be completely plant batched. Attention is called to the importance of scheduling and

dispatching trucks from the batching point so that they shall arrive at the site just before the

concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in

placing successive layers of concrete in the forms.

B. Deliveries shall be timed to insure that all concrete can be placed within one and one half hours

after initial mixing water is added. Partially hardened concrete shall not be re-tempered or used.

C. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time to 60 minutes.

D. Project-site mixing is not permitted.

2.15 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS

A. Chemical Adhesive Anchor System:

1. Externally-Threaded Anchor: Provide post-installed externally-threaded anchors,

compliant with 2009 International Building Code, consisting of a stud-type, all-thread

anchor rod, nut and washer, manufactured from AISI 304 stainless steel.

2. Internally-Threaded Anchor: Provide post-installed internally-threaded anchors,

compliant with 2009 International Building Code, manufactured from AISI 304 stainless

steel.

3. Chemical Adhesive:

a. Provide chemical adhesive anchors, compliant with 2009 International Building

Code, consisting of a two-part vinyl ester or structural epoxy resin adhesive and an

amine-based hardener.

b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



1) Hilti, Inc.: HIT-HY 200.

2) Sika Corporation; Sikadur Injection Gel.

3) Simpson Strong Tie; Acrylic Tie.

4) Or approved equal.

B. Mechanical Expansion Anchors:

1. Provide wedge-type mechanical expansion anchors, compliant with 2009 International

Building Code, manufactured from AISI 304 stainless steel meeting the requirements of

Fed. Spec. A-A-1923 (formerly FF-S-325, Group II). Anchor may be headed, threaded

or countersunk depending on intended use.


a. Hilti, Inc.; Hilti Kwik Bolt III, (for use in concrete masonry ICC-ES ESR-1385)

b. Hilti, Inc.; Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ Expanison Anchor (ICC-ES ESR-1917)

c. Simpson Strong Tie; Simpson Wedge-All, (for use in concrete masonry ICC-ES

ESR-1396)

d. Simpson Strong Tie; Simpson Strong Bolt 2 (ICC-ES ESR-3037)

e. Powers Fasteners, Inc.; Powers Wedge Bolt +, (for use in masonry ICC-ES ESR-

1678) (for use in concrete ICC-ES ESR-2526)

f. Or approved equal.

2.16 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. General Use: Provide a non-shrink, non-metallic, ready-mix high strength, structural grout

conforming to the requirements of ASTM C1107, Grade A, B or C depending on formulation

and application, where indicated on the Contract Drawings. Non-shrink-grout shall show

positive expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C827. General uses of non-shrink

grout shall include, but not be limited to, equipment bases, anchor rods and bolts, bearing plates,

and grout-filled CMU block.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Masterflow 713 Plus.

2. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company NS Grout.

3. Sika Corporation; SikaGrout 212.

4. Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.



B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent

loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.



3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50

deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by

form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day

design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new

form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces

unless approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Placement

tolerance is plus 1/4 inch. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Place and secure reinforcement bars and welded wire reinforcement in position by means of

accepted non-corrosive spacers, supports, chairs, runners, standees, bolsters or hangers as

required.

E. Do not field bend reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete without the Engineer's written

approval.

F. Welding: Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted, unless approved by the Engineer in

advance for each specific application. Perform welds in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4.

G. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material

according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel

reinforcement.



3.5 SPLICING

A. Locate splices as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings or as directed by the SEPTA Project

Manager. When it is necessary to splice reinforcing at points other than where shown, the

character of the splice shall require approval by the SEPTA Project Manager.

B. Provide splices in accordance with the required lengths given on the Contract Drawings and in

conformance with ACI 318 and ACI 315. Do not splice at points of maximum stress.

C. Mechanical couplers and exothermic welded splices shall be used only where shown on the

Contract Drawings unless permitted otherwise in writing by the SEPTA Project Manager.

Prepare ends of bars to be exothermically welded, insert ends into high strength welding sleeve

and follow welding procedures in strict accordance with printed instructions of the exothermic

welding system manufacturer.

D. Couplers which are located at a joint face shall be a type which can be set either flush or

recessed from the face as shown on the Contract Drawings. Seal couplers during concrete

placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. After the concrete is

placed, couplers intended for future connections shall be plugged and sealed to prevent any

contact with water or other corrosive materials. Threaded couplers shall be plugged with plastic

plugs which have an O-ring seal.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 2 inches into concrete.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder

intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate

or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.



3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit

concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have

begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to

consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded

items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits

on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.



1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-

place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete the Work.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather

protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder

of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at

least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven

days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material

and waterproof tape.



a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound

manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity

of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.11 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed

joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the SEPTA Project

Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to the SEPTA

Project Manager's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2

parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.



1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of

cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes

and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding

agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place

with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.

Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before

proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than

surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by the SEPTA Project Manager.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,

square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.

Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without

coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to the SEPTA Project Manager's approval, using

epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to the SEPTA Project

Manager's approval.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.



B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Verification of use of required design mixture.

3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional

tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one

test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens

at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to the SEPTA Project Manager, concrete

manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength

tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,



name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work,

design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,

compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by the SEPTA Project Manager but will not be used as sole basis for

approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by the SEPTA Project Manager. Testing and

inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored

cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by The

SEPTA Project Manager.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.



CONCRETE FINISHING 03350 - 1

SECTION 03350 – CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies requirements for:

1. Patching and repair of existing concrete floor with Portland cement-based, polymer

modified cementitious topping.

2. Parging of vertical and overhead surfaces with Portland cement-based, polymer-

modified, finishing compound.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition

C. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

D. Section 09705 – Epoxy Resin Flooring

E. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The following is a listing of the publications referenced in this Section:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a. ASTM C109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for sustainable design submittals

requirements:

1. Material Selection: indigenous materials

2. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control

B. Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.

C. Manufacturers Literature:



1. Product Data Sheets for each type of product, including certifications that each complies

with specified requirements and is an appropriate product for use as shown on Contract

Drawings.

2. Material Safety Data Sheets for each type of product.

D. Samples

1. Samples for approval for each different type, showing full range of exposed color,

texture, and dimensions to be expected in the finished Work.

E. Construction and Installation Procedures for Cold or Hot Weather: Detailed description of

methods, materials and equipment to be used to comply with cold or hot weather requirements

as applicable, evidencing compliance with specified requirements.

F. Qualifications: Qualification data for firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance Article

to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.

G. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a

qualified testing agency.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Quality-Control Program: Submit before work begins.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO 9001

certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance program independently

audited on a regular basis.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer is a certified installer with documented experience installing

manufacturer’s products according to manufacturer’s specifications, on projects of similar size

and complexity.

C. Install materials in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required by manufacturer

or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and federal authorities having

jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets for complete handling recommendations.

D. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or snowing or if such

conditions appear to be imminent. Minimum application temperature 45ºF (5ºC) and rising.

E. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to any surface near the work zone due

to mixing and handling of the specified material.

F. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written plan for concrete finishing to systematically

demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly perform finishing work, including each phase or

process, protection of surrounding materials during operations, and control of debris and runoff

during the Work. Describe in detail materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations

to be used for each phase of the Work.




A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer’s name,

labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be removed from the

site immediately.

B. Store materials on a clean, dry surface or platform, off ground, covered, separate from each

other and protected from deterioration and the elements.

C. Condition the product as specified by the manufacturer.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations for Epoxies: Do not apply when air and substrate temperatures are

outside limits permitted by manufacturer. During hot weather, cool epoxy components before

mixing, store mixed products in shade, and cool unused mixed products to retard setting. Do not

apply to wet substrates unless approved by manufacturer.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Do not apply unless concrete-surface

and air temperatures are above 50 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after

completion of Work.

C. Hot-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Protect repair work when temperature

and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from patching materials.

Provide artificial shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply to

substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide a written warranty from the manufacturer against defects of materials for a period of

five (5) year, beginning with date of substantial completion of the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Sustainable Aspects: Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements”:



B. Source Limitations: For repair products, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

product from single source and from single manufacturer with resources to provide products of

consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers

1. Basis of Design: Ardex Engineering Cements

2. Sika Corporation

3. Or Approved Equal

B. Cementitious topping for flooring

1. Portland cement-based, polymer modified, cementitious topping for filling and repairing

areas of interior or exterior concrete applications that will receive a coating of sealer or

paint.

a. Basis of Design Product: ARDEX CP; manufactured by ARDEX Engineered

Cements, or approved equal.

2. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values for materials:

a. Compressive Strength: 3600 psi at 28 days

b. VOC: 0 g/L, calculated SCAQMD 1168

3. A smooth and uniform finished surface is required.

C. Finishing Compound for vertical and overhead parging

1. Portland cement-based, polymer modified, finishing compound for interior or exterior

overhead or vertical applications that will receive a coating of sealer or paint.

a. Basis of Design Product: ARDEX OVP; manufactured by ARDEX Engineered

Cements, or approved equal.

2. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values for material

cured at 73° F (23° C) and 50 percent relative humidity:

a. Application: Trowel.

b. VOC: 0 g/L, calculated SCAQMD 1168

c. Color: Concrete gray.

3. A smooth and uniform finished surface is required.

2.3 MIXES

A. General: Mix products, in clean containers, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Do not add water, thinners, or additives unless recommended by manufacturer.

2. When practical, use manufacturer's premeasured packages to ensure that materials

are mixed in proper proportions. When premeasured packages are not used,



measure ingredients using graduated measuring containers; do not estimate

quantities or use shovel or trowel as unit of measure.

3. Do not mix more materials than can be used within time limits recommended by

manufacturer. Discard materials that have begun to set.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect persons and surrounding surfaces of building being repaired from harm resulting from

concrete repair work.

1. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and

precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and

adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.

2. Use only proven protection methods appropriate to each area and surface being protected.

3. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude public from

areas where concrete repair work is being performed.

4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian entrance and

exit that must remain in service during course of concrete repair work.

5. Contain dust and debris generated by concrete maintenance work and prevent it from

reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.

6. Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only with adequate,

approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create a hazard

or adversely affect other building areas or materials.

7. Protect floors and other surfaces along haul routes from damage, wear, and staining.

8. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment by covering them with heavy polyethylene film

and waterproof masking tape. If practical, remove items, store, and reinstall after

potentially damaging operations are complete.

9. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.

10. Dispose of debris and runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that

prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping,

and water penetration into building interiors.

B. All concrete surfaces must be structurally sound, solid and free of any contaminant that might

act as a bond breaker, including, but not limited to, form release agents, existing sealers or

paints, patching compounds, weak or loose concrete, dust, dirt or oils. If necessary,

mechanically clean the surface down to sound, solid concrete by sandblasting or grinding.

Overwatered, frozen or otherwise weak concrete surfaces must also be mechanically prepared

down to clean, sound and solid concrete. Acid etching, adhesive removers, solvents and

sweeping compounds are not acceptable means of cleaning the substrate. Sanding equipment is

not an effective method for removing curing and sealing compounds.

C. Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, sandblast the steel to a white

metal finish to remove all contaminants and rust. Where corrosion has occurred due to the

presence of chlorides, the steel shall be high pressure washed after mechanical cleaning and

primed.



3.2 APPLICATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which materials will be installed. Do not

proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper sequence of construction. Protect

adjacent areas and landscaping from contact due to mixing and handling of materials.

C. Mixing: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.

D. Application: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.

E. Sealing and Painting: refer to Section 09900 Paints and Coatings for vertical overhead surfaces

and Section 09705 Epoxy Resin Flooring for floor surfaces.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Remove excess material before material cures. If material has cured, remove using

mechanical methods that will not damage substrate.

B. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spillovers

onto adjacent areas.



CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 1

SECTION 03930 - CONCRETE REHABILITATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, tools and other

incidentals necessary to remove, repair and restore existing concrete surfaces as directed by the

SEPTA Project Manager, as specified herein and as required for a complete and proper

rehabilitation. Types of repairs to be made include but are not limited to:

1. Removal of deteriorated concrete and subsequent replacement and patching.

2. Floor joint repair.

3. Crack injection at water leaks.

4. Crack repair at floor cracks.

5. Surface spall and delamination repair.



2. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, chemical composition, physical

properties, test data, and mixing, preparation, and application instructions.

2. Include sketches of repair sites indicating type of repair, location, dimensions and areas

to be repaired.


A. Qualification Data: For concrete-rehabilitation specialist and manufacturers.

1. Certification from the product manufacturer’s representative stating in writing that the

representative:

a. Is familiar with the project and aware of the job conditions.

b. Agrees with the intended application of the specified products.

c. Will determine quantities of material to accomplish the intended result.

d. Will assist the Contractor to ensure satisfactory quality of application.


03930 - 2 CONCRETE REHABILITATION

2. Certification that the concrete rehabilitation specialist has a minimum of three (3) years

of documented experience in installation of concrete restoration materials and is

acceptable to the product manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For each type of product supplied for mixing or adding to products at

Project site.

C. Product Test Reports: For each manufactured product, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Quality-Control Program: Submit before work begins.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Each manufacturer shall employ factory-authorized service

representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and on-site

assistance.

B. Concrete-Rehabilitation Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced concrete-

rehabilitation firm that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by

manufacturer to apply packaged patching-mortar and crack-injection adhesive to perform work

of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that

indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience in only

installing or patching new concrete is insufficient experience for concrete-rehabilitation work.

1. Field Supervision: Concrete-rehabilitation specialist firm shall maintain experienced full-

time supervisors on Project site during times that concrete-rehabilitation work is in

progress.

2. Applicator qualifications: Minimum of three (3) years of documented experience in

installation of concrete restoration materials and acceptable to the product manufacturer

in writing.

C. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written plan for concrete maintenance to systematically

demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly perform maintenance work, including each

phase or process, protection of surrounding materials during operations, and control of debris

and runoff during the Work. Describe in detail materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of

operations to be used for each phase of the Work.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for

materials and execution.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature

requirements and other conditions for storage.

B. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.



C. Store aggregates covered and in a dry location; maintain grading and other required

characteristics and prevent contamination.


A. Environmental Limitations for Epoxies: Do not apply when air and substrate temperatures are

outside limits permitted by manufacturer. During hot weather, cool epoxy components before

mixing, store mixed products in shade, and cool unused mixed products to retard setting. Do not

apply to wet substrates unless approved by manufacturer.

1. Use only Class A epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected to go

below 40 deg F within eight hours.

2. Use only Class A or B epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected to

go below 60 deg F within eight hours.

3. Use only Class C epoxies when substrate temperatures are above and are expected to stay

above 60 deg F for eight hours.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Do not apply unless concrete-surface

and air temperatures are above 40 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after

completion of Work.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Comply with the following

procedures:

1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat patching-material ingredients and existing

concrete to produce temperatures between 40 and 90 deg F.

2. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed Work

with weather-resistant insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair or provide enclosure

and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after

repair.

3. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to

maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after repair.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Protect repair work when temperature

and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from patching materials.

Provide artificial shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply to

substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above.

1.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Measurement

1. The General Contractor shall perform all measurements for payment in the presence of

the SEPTA Project Manager or designated representative.

2. The General Contractor shall prepare a listing of the types and locations of concrete

repairs performed as described herein (e.g. shallow, medium and deep spalls, cracks,

concrete beam reconstruction) including the units and actual quantities repaired under

each repair category and present this list to the SEPTA Project Manager for review and

approval.



a. The approved quantities of repair material actually incorporated in the work,

delineated by the specified unit of measure, will be the basis for payment.

3. Units of measure for concrete spall repair work shall be as follows:

a. Shallow Depth Spall Repair (less than 1" deep) - square feet

b. Medium Depth Spall Repair (1" to 2" deep) - square feet

c. Deep Spall Repair (greater than 2" deep) - square feet

4. Structural Crack Repair Using Hydrophilic Injection Sealant - linear feet

5. Structural Crack Repair at Floor Slab Cracks - linear feet

6. Partial Reconstruction of Beam Encasement - cubic feet.

7. Expansion Joint Repair – linear feet

8. Joint Seal Repair – linear feet

B. Payment

1. Payment for all work performed under this Section shall be determined by the agreed-

upon quantities of repairs actually incorporated in the work.

2. The basis for payment shall be the actual measured quantity of each repair type

incorporated in the work, delineated by the specified unit of measure, multiplied by the

corresponding contractual unit price shown on the Bid Form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: For repair products, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

product from single source and from single manufacturer with resources to provide products of

consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 BONDING AGENTS

A. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881, bonding system Type II and free of VOCs.


a. Sika Corporation; Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL.

b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Dural LPL MV.

c. Or approved equal.

B. Mortar Scrub Coat: Apply scrub coat to the concrete substrate according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

2.3 PATCHING MORTAR

A. Patching Mortar Requirements:

1. Only use patching mortars that are recommended by manufacturer for each applicable

horizontal, vertical, or overhead use orientation.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11914

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456996232





2. Color and Aggregate Texture: Provide patching mortar and aggregates of colors and sizes

necessary to produce patching mortar that matches existing, adjacent, exposed concrete.

Blend several aggregates if necessary to achieve suitable matches.

3. Coarse Aggregate for Patching Mortar: ASTM C 33/C 33M, washed aggregate, Size

No. 8, Class 5S. Add to patching-mortar mix only as permitted by patching-mortar

manufacturer.

B. Polymer-Modified, Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix for repair of concrete and

that contains a latex additive as either a dry powder or a separate liquid that is added during

mixing.

a. Repair of Horizontal Top Surfaces: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide one of the following:

1) Sika Corporation; SikaTop 122 Plus.

2) BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterEmaco T 1060.

3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Tammspatch II.


b. Repair of Vertical and Overhead Surfaces: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Sika Corporation; SikaTop 123 Plus.

2) BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterEmaco N 400 RS.

3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; EucoRepair V100.


2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT AND BACKER ROD

A. Use a moisture-cured, single-component, polyurethane base, non-sag, gun-grade elastomeric

sealant compound at expansion joints and control joints in cast-in-place concrete work. Provide

joint sealant that meets the requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 and Use

T or NT as applicable. Provide a backer rod that is closed-cell polyethylene foam rod, non-

gassing with a diameter as recommended by the manufacturer for the joint width indicated. Use

a backer rod that is compatible with the joint sealant and acceptable to the joint sealant

manufacturer.


a. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1c SL.

b. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal SL 1.

c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Eucolastic 1SL.


B. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.







http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11914






2.5 CRACK-INJECTION MATERIALS AT WATER LEAKS

A. Applicable to repair of vertical and overhead cracks in concrete slabs and walls of the structure

that presently leaks or exhibit signs of previous leakage. Repairs shall be made using a

hydrophilic polyethylene resin sealant injected under pressure.

1. Hydrophilic polyurethane resin or injection grout: non-toxic, low viscosity: Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Sika Corporation; SikaFix HH Hydrophilic.

b. Grace Construction Products; DeNeef Sealfoam PURe.

c. AQUAFIN Inc; InjectPro-SEAL.


2. Color: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations.

2.6 CRACK REPAIR MATERIALS AT FLOOR CRACKS

A. Applicable to repair horizontal cracks in concrete slabs.

1. Low viscosity gravity fed epoxy resin: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

one of the following:

a. Sika Corporation; Sikadur 52

b. Five Star Corporation; LV Adhesive

c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Dural 50 LM

d. Or approved equal

2.7 MIXES

A. General: Mix products, in clean containers, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Do not add water, thinners, or additives unless recommended by manufacturer.

2. When practical, use manufacturer's premeasured packages to ensure that materials are

mixed in proper proportions. When premeasured packages are not used, measure

ingredients using graduated measuring containers; do not estimate quantities or use

shovel or trowel as unit of measure.

3. Do not mix more materials than can be used within time limits recommended by

manufacturer. Discard materials that have begun to set.

B. Mortar Scrub Coat: Mix dry ingredients with enough water to provide consistency of thick

cream.

C. Dry-Pack Mortar: Mix required type(s) of patching-mortar dry ingredients with just enough

liquid to form damp cohesive mixture that can be squeezed by hand into a ball but is not plastic.

D. Concrete: Comply with Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Grout for Use with Preplaced Aggregate: Proportion according to ASTM C 938. Add grout

fluidifier to mixing water followed by portland cement, pozzolan, and fine aggregate.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE REHABILITATION

A. Have Concrete-Rehabilitation work performed only by qualified concrete-rehabilitation

specialist.

B. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for surface preparation and product

application.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Notify SEPTA Project Manager seven days in advance of dates when areas of deteriorated or

delaminated concrete and deteriorated reinforcing bars will be located.

B. Locate areas of deteriorated or delaminated concrete using hammer or chain-drag sounding and

mark boundaries. Mark areas for removal by simplifying and squaring off boundaries. At

columns and walls make boundaries level and plumb unless otherwise indicated.

C. Pachometer Testing: Locate at least three reinforcing bars using a pachometer, and drill test

holes to determine depth of cover. Calibrate pachometer using depth of cover measurements,

and verify depth of cover in removal areas using pachometer.

D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from concrete-rehabilitation

work.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are on-site and on duty when concrete maintenance work

begins and during its progress.

B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being repaired, building site,

plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from concrete maintenance work.

1. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and

precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and

adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.

2. Use only proven protection methods appropriate to each area and surface being protected.

3. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude public from

areas where concrete maintenance work is being performed.

4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and

vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of concrete

maintenance work.

5. Contain dust and debris generated by concrete maintenance work and prevent it from

reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.

6. Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only with adequate,

approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create a hazard

or adversely affect other building areas or materials.



7. Protect floors and other surfaces along haul routes from damage, wear, and staining.

8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate removal and dismantling work

from other areas of the building.

9. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment by covering them with heavy polyethylene film

and waterproof masking tape. If practical, remove items, store, and reinstall after

potentially damaging operations are complete.

10. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off SEPTA's property.

11. Dispose of debris and runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that

prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping,

and water penetration into building interiors.

C. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is

functioning properly. Notify SEPTA Project Manager immediately of inadequate drainage or

blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is in working order.

1. Prevent solids such as aggregate or mortar residue from entering the drainage system.

Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other

materials resulting from concrete maintenance work.

2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean

water to pass.

D. Preparation for Concrete Removal: Examine construction to be repaired to determine best

methods to safely and effectively perform concrete maintenance work. Examine adjacent work

to determine what protective measures will be necessary. Make explorations, probes, and

inquiries as necessary to determine condition of construction to be removed in the course of

repair.

1. Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped.

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed for reinstallation or salvage.

3. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and temporary structural supports as required to

preserve stability and prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement, settlement, or

collapse of construction being demolished and construction and finishes to remain.

Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of removal work.

E. Reinforcing-Bar Preparation: Remove loose and flaking rust from exposed reinforcing bars by

wire brushing until only tightly adhered light rust remains.

1. Where section loss of reinforcing bar is more than 25 percent, or 20 percent in two or

more adjacent bars, cut bars and remove and replace as indicated on Drawings.

2. Remove additional concrete as necessary to provide at least 3/4-inch clearance at existing

and replacement bars.

3. Splice replacement bars to existing bars according to ACI 318 by lapping, welding, or

using mechanical couplings.

F. Preparation of Floor Joints for Repair: Saw-cut joints full width to edges and depth of spalls, but

not less than 3/4 inch deep. Clean out debris and loose concrete; vacuum or blow clear with

compressed air.



3.4 CONCRETE REMOVAL

A. Do not overload structural elements with debris.

B. Saw-cut perimeter of areas indicated for removal to a depth of at least 1-inch. Make cuts

perpendicular to concrete surfaces and no deeper than cover on reinforcement.

C. Remove deteriorated and delaminated concrete by breaking up and dislodging from

reinforcement.

D. Remove additional concrete if necessary to provide a depth of removal of at least 1/2 inch over

entire removal area.

E. Where half or more of the perimeter of reinforcing bar is exposed, bond between reinforcing bar

and surrounding concrete is broken, or reinforcing bar is corroded, remove concrete from entire

perimeter of bar and to provide at least 3/4-inch clearance around bar.

F. Test areas where concrete has been removed by tapping with hammer, and remove additional

concrete until unsound and disbonded concrete is completely removed.

G. Provide surfaces with a fractured profile of at least 1/8 inch that are approximately

perpendicular or parallel to original concrete surfaces. At columns and walls, make top and

bottom surfaces level unless otherwise directed.

H. Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris.

3.5 PATCHING MORTAR APPLICATION

A. Place patching mortar as specified in this article unless otherwise recommended in writing by

manufacturer.

1. Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape.

2. Wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then remove standing water.

B. Pretreatment: Apply specified bonding agent or slurry coat.

C. General Placement: Place patching mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force intimate

contact with edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center,

always troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars, force patching

mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of bars.

D. Vertical Patching: Place material in lifts according to the product manufacturer’s specifications.

Do not feather edge.

E. Overhead Patching: Place material in lifts according to the product manufacturer’s

specifications. Do not feather edge.

F. Consolidation: After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface.

G. Multiple Lifts: Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough surface for

placing subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing subsequent lifts.



H. Finishing: Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become firm and then finish to a

surface matching adjacent concrete.

I. Curing: Wet-cure cementitious patching materials, including polymer-modified cementitious

patching materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive

cover.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete” and as specified in this

article.

B. Pretreatment: Apply epoxy-modified, cementitious bonding and anticorrosion agent to

reinforcement and concrete substrate.

C. Standard Placement: Place concrete by form-and-pump method unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use vibrators to consolidate concrete as it is placed.

2. At unformed surfaces, screed concrete to produce a surface that when finished with

patching mortar will match required profile and surrounding concrete.

D. Form-and-Pump Placement: Place concrete by form-and-pump method where indicated.

1. Design and construct forms to resist pumping pressure in addition to weight of wet

concrete. Seal joints and seams in forms and where forms abut existing concrete.

2. Pump concrete into place from bottom to top, releasing air from forms as concrete is

introduced. When formed space is full, close air vents and pressurize to 14 psi.

E. Wet-cure concrete for not less than seven days by leaving forms in place or keeping surfaces

continuously wet by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.

F. Fill placement cavities with dry-pack mortar and repair voids with patching mortar. Finish to

match surrounding concrete.

3.7 FLOOR-JOINT REPAIR

A. Cut out deteriorated concrete and reconstruct sides of joint with patching mortar as indicated on

Drawings. Clean all surfaces. Joint walls must be sound, clean, dry, and free of oil and grease.

B. Depth: Install backer rod to the depth indicated on the Drawings.

C. Top Surface: Install joint sealant according to the product manufacturer’s specifications. Tool

the sealant as required.

3.8 SHALLOW DEPTH SPALL REPAIRS (1” DEEP MAXIMUM)

A. General: This work consists of the removal of unsound concrete and the repair of spalled and

delaminated concrete surfaces 1" and less in depth, using a polymer-modified structural repair



mortar as determined on the basis of a field inspection conducted by the General Contractor in

the presence of the SEPTA Project Manager or designated representative.

B. Repair Procedure:

1. Inspection: In the presence of the SEPTA Project Manager, inspect concrete surfaces to

determine the type of repair, limits and locations of all areas to be repaired as work of this

Section.

2. Make a 1" deep saw cut around the perimeter of the repair area. Saw cut area shall be

approximately square or rectangular in shape. Remove spalled, scaled, loose and

deteriorated concrete to sound concrete. Use a maximum 28 lb. size pneumatic hammer

or other approved method to remove deteriorated concrete.

3. Thoroughly clean, air blast and vacuum the newly exposed area prior to installing repair

mortar. Remove all debris from the site in accordance with the specifications.

4. Apply structural repair material, in lifts as required, to be flush with adjacent surfaces and

protect against damage in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation

instructions.

3.9 MEDIUM DEPTH SPALL REPAIRS (1” TO 2” DEEP)


delaminated concrete surfaces greater than 1" and not exceeding 2" in depth, using a polymer-

modified structural repair mortar as determined on the basis of a field inspection conducted by

the General Contractor in the presence of the SEPTA Project Manager or designated

representative.

B. Repair Procedure:


determine the type of repair, limits and locations of all areas to be repaired as work of this

Section.




or other approved method to remove deteriorated concrete. If existing reinforcing steel is

encountered, repair concrete in accordance with the procedures described herein for Deep

Spall Repairs.

3. Thoroughly clean, air blast and vacuum the newly exposed area prior to installing repair

mortar. Remove all debris from the site in accordance with the specifications.

4. Install mechanical expansion anchors in the concrete substrate at the grid spacing

indicated on the Contract Drawings. Maintain 3/4" minimum concrete cover.

5. Apply structural repair material in lifts to be flush with adjacent surfaces and protect

against damage in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation

instructions.

3.10 DEEP SPALL REPAIRS (DEEPER THAN 2”)


delaminated concrete surfaces in areas greater than 2" deep, or less than 2" deep if existing

reinforcing steel is encountered, using formed, plasticized concrete as determined on the basis



of a field inspection conducted by the General Contractor in the presence of the SEPTA Project

Manager or designated representative.

B. Mixing Concrete:

1. For hand or batch mixing of plasticized concrete, provide scale approved by the SEPTA

Project Manager in which cement, fine and coarse aggregates and admixtures can be

accurately weighed for the required mix proportions.

2. Provide measuring instruments with graduated markings in inches for the proportioning

of the Air Entraining Admixture (A.E.A.) and Water Reducing-High Range (WR-HR)

admixture. Do not mix the A.E.A. and the WR-HR together before adding to the mix; the

resultant solution will perform as intended. Do not add the A.E.A. and WR-HR at the

mixture simultaneously; these admixtures must be added separately in the mixing cycle.

Store, mix and use manufactured materials in strict accordance with the written

recommendations of the respective manufacturer.

C. Repair Procedure:


be repaired under work of this Section to determine the type of repair, limits and

locations of all areas to be repaired as work of this Section.




or other approved method for deteriorated concrete removal.

3. Remove unsound concrete material in a manner to facilitate the uniform placement of

freshly placed concrete to preclude the entrapment of air or forming of voids.

4. Remove all resulting debris from the site in accordance with the specifications.

5. Render all surfaces of exposed concrete and reinforcing steel free of oil, solvent, grease,

dirt, dust, bitumen, rust, loose particles and other foreign matter. Thoroughly clean, air

blast and vacuum the newly exposed area prior to forming.

6. Use caution where reinforcing steel is uncovered so as not to damage the steel or its bond

in the surrounding concrete. Do not use pneumatic tools in direct contact with

reinforcing steel. Use a maximum 28 lb. size hammer for chipping behind reinforcing

steel. Clean exposed reinforcing steel in accordance with SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool

Cleaning, or SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning, to remove all contaminants, rust and rust

scale.

a. In areas where reinforcing steel is found to be surrounded by deteriorated concrete

or has at least one-half of its surface area exposed or has less than 1" cover, the

depth of removal shall be such as to include all deteriorated concrete but not less

than 3/4" below and behind the reinforcing steel.

b. Where exposed existing reinforcing steel is severely corroded or damaged, cut out

reinforcing steel and replace with new reinforcing steel of the same size and

spacing. Where existing reinforcing steel is determined by the SEPTA Project

Manager to have insufficient cover, either replace reinforcing steel or adjust as

directed. Attach new reinforcing steel behind existing reinforcement with a

minimum lap splice in accordance with ACI 318. Remove concrete to a minimum

depth of 3/4" behind the new reinforcing steel.

7. Install mechanical expansion anchors in the concrete substrate at the grid spacing

indicated on the Contract Drawings. Install welded wire fabric of the wire size and

spacing shown on the Contract Drawings. Maintain 3/4" minimum concrete cover.



8. Install formwork at demolished areas on vertical surfaces of concrete members. Coat

forms with a plastic coating or similar type film to facilitate form removal. Design forms

so that placement access will be at the top of each formwork assembly.

a. Prior to forming vertical surfaces, install reinforcement as indicated on the

Contract Drawings or as required and directed by the SEPTA Project Manager.

9. Do not use bonding compounds for placement of plasticized concrete. Dampen exposed

concrete surfaces immediately prior to placement of fresh concrete.

a. Place concrete in the maximum lift height possible and consolidate during

placement with adequately sized vibrators.

b. Small holes may be drilled into forms to permit air to escape during placement and

consolidation.

10. Curing Concrete: Cure concrete in forms for a minimum of seven (7) days in accordance

with the requirements of Section 03300. Keep continuously wet throughout the seven (7)

day period.

a. After curing and stripping of forms, blend the patched areas to match the physical

appearance of the adjacent area as closely as possible.

b. The SEPTA Project Manager will sound the patched areas to detect the presence of

hollow spots. Remove and repair such defects to the satisfaction of the SEPTA

Project Manager at no additional cost to SEPTA.

11. Testing:

a. During the entire period of concrete placement, the Testing and Inspection Agency

will provide on-site and off-site testing services for Deep Spall Concrete Repairs

similar to the services described in Section 03300.

b. Provide access to the SEPTA Project Manager or the designated representative and

the Testing and Inspection Agency to inspect or test the work at all reasonable

times.

3.11 CRACK REPAIRS USING HYDROPHILIC INJECTION SEALANT

A. Apply this crack repair method to vertical and overhead cracks in concrete slabs and walls of

the structure that presently leak or exhibit signs of previous leakage. Implement repairs using a

hydrophilic polyethylene resin sealant injected under pressure.

B. Protect walls, floor slabs, ductwork, piping and lighting below repair area to prevent staining

due to spillage and migration of sealant compound of the cracks.

C. Clean crack surfaces and remove all mineral deposits and foreign matter.

D. Determine location of existing slab, wall and/or beam reinforcing steel bars along the length of

the crack.

E. Drill test injection holes, install test injectors and test pump water to determine spacing for

injectors along the crack. Drill hole size, spacing and injector size shall be in accordance with

the instructions of the manufacturer's technical representative. The distance between the entry

ports shall not be greater than the thickness of the concrete member being repaired. Do not drill

through or damage existing reinforcing steel bars.

F. Drill remainder of holes for grout injection and install grout injectors. Do not drill through or

damage existing reinforcing steel bars.



G. Flush the cracks with clean water to remove dirt, dust and other contaminants.

H. Install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise directed.

I. Do not install sealant at a temperature below 41 degrees F unless the manufacturer specifically

permits application of those materials at a lower temperature. Consult with the manufacturer's

representative.

J. Use pressure injection equipment of a type, capacity and mechanical condition suitable for

performing the work. Ensure that the sealant plant is of the continuous mixing type and is

capable of supplying, proportioning, mixing and pumping the sealant in accordance with the

recommendations of the grout manufacturer. Ensure that the hoses, check valves and other

equipment have low moisture permeability and are compatible with the sealant.

K. Pump water into cracks that appear to be dry prior to injecting sealant.

L. Begin sealant injection into a crack at the lowest elevation and proceed upward on vertical

cracks or begin at one end and proceed toward the other end on horizontal cracks.

M. Pump sealant into the first injector until sealant is observed at the second. Close the valve on

the first injector and disconnect the supply line. Pump sealant into the second injector and

repeat operation until the crack has been completely sealed.

N. Plug sealant leaks immediately with rags or oakum dipped in hydrophilic sealant or by other

methods approved by the manufacturer.

O. Remove injectors and other fittings after grout has reached gel point. Fill any remaining holes

with drypack mortar.

3.12 FLOOR CRACK REPAIRS USING LOW VISCOSITY EPOXY RESIN

A. Apply this crack repair method to horizontal cracks in concrete floor slabs. Implement repairs

using a low viscosity epoxy resin using gravity feed. Injection of epoxy under pressure is

allowed per manufacturers recommendations for hairline cracks.

B. Clean crack surfaces and remove all mineral deposits and foreign matter. Blow crack clean with

oil-free compressed air.

C. Install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise directed.

D. Do not install sealant at a temperature below 41 degrees F unless the manufacturer specifically

permits application of those materials at a lower temperature. Consult with the manufacturer's

representative.

E. For crack widths greater than 1/8”: Install layer of fine silica sand in bottom of crack before

placement of epoxy, per manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. After epoxy has hardened, sand down epoxy resin to be flush with adjacent floor slab in order to

provide adequate surface for application of finished floor resin system.




A. Use adequate number of skilled personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Manufacturer’s Representative Services: Engage manufacturers' factory-authorized service

representatives for consultation and Project-site inspection and to provide on-site assistance

when requested by the SEPTA Project Manager. Do not proceed with the first application of

each concrete repair system without the Contractor’s field personnel having received on-site

detailed instructions from the product manufacturer’s technical representative on the mixing,

application and curing of the concrete repair materials for the intended use.

C. Remedial Work

1. Repair or replace deficient work as directed by the SEPTA Project Manager and at no

additional cost to SEPTA.

2. Patch defective concrete surfaces with a suitable, approved patching material, mix or

product as directed by the SEPTA Project Manager.




THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK


CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220 - 1

SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies requirements for concrete masonry units and accessories.

B. Requirements for concealed flashing are found in other Division 7 Section 07600.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

C. Section 04815 – Glass Block Assemblies

D. Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal

E. Section 07841 – Joint Firestopping

F. Section 09300 - Tile

G. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The following is a listing of the publications referenced in this Section:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/ The

Masonry Society (TMS)

a. ACI 117 Standard Specifications for Tolerance for Concrete Construction and

Materials

b. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/ Specification for Masonry Structures.

c. TMS 602

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

a. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a. ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.



b. ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile

Strength.

c. ASTM C 90 Specifications for Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

d. ASTM C 140 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and

Related Units.

e. ASTM C 331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry

Units.

f. ASTM C 426 Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry

Units.

g. ASTM C 549 Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation

h. ASTM C 578 Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

i. ASTM C 744 Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry

Units.

j. ASTM C 1093 Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.

k. ASTM C 1262 Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of

Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units and Related Concrete Units.

l. ASTM C 1364 Specification for Architectural Cast Stone.

m. ASTM D 2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications.

n. ASTM E 119 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.

1. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, and indigenous materials


B. Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of “Shop Drawings, Catalog Cuts,

and Samples” of Division 1 - Section 01300

C. Product Data: For each type of concrete masonry unit and accessory including certifications

that each complies with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. For concrete masonry units, showing sizes, profiles, coursing, bond pattern, special shape

locations, joint locations and embedded items.

2. For joint reinforcement and steel reinforcing. Detail fabrication, bending and placement

of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 showing reinforcing bar

schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars and arrangement of masonry

reinforcing.

3. Shop Drawings and/or manufacturer's catalog cuts of dovetail slots and other devices, if

any, required for anchoring masonry to steel or other materials, including instructions for

their proper use.

4. Shop drawings for the active wall system noted within Section 04815 Glass Block

Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including concrete masonry unit

components. All related work, including work of related trades, shall be included into a

compiled shop drawing to document the entire system. Shop drawings shall indicate



existing conditions of the site including items that impact the assembly and field

dimensions for layout purposes. Refer to Section 04815 Glass Block Assemblies for

requirements.

5. After shop drawings are approved, a Mockup is required per “Quality Assurance” article.

Any changes and updates required based on comments by the SEPTA Project Manager

and Architect to the Mockup shall be integrated into the shop drawings for resubmission

and approval prior to fabrication of the concrete masonry units.

E. Samples

1. Samples for approval for each different type and shape of masonry unit required, showing

full range of dimensions to be expected in the finished Work.

2. Samples of accessories embedded in masonry.

F. Certifications

1. Test results from qualified testing lab, certifying that masonry complies with Quality

Assurance section.

2. Galvanizing certifications for steel hardware showing compliance with ASTM A153.

3. Material test report for anchor bolts, wire ties and anchors

G. Construction and Installation Procedures for Cold or Hot Weather: Detailed description of

methods, materials and equipment to be used to comply with cold or hot weather requirements

as applicable, evidencing compliance with specified requirements.

H. Qualifications: Qualification data for firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance section

to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project

names, addresses, telephone numbers, names of Septa Project Manager and

Architects/Engineers, and other information specified.

I. Quality Control Reports: Submit copies of reports verifying compressive strength requirements

of completed masonry, if required by the SEPTA Project Manager, within 7 calendar days of

the date of each completed test.

J. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water

retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.

a. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry

unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive

strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength

of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

b. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods,

materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.



1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide concrete masonry units that develop an installed compressive strength of 1500 psi,

unless greater compressive strengths are shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Where fire-rated masonry construction is shown on the Contract Drawings, provide materials

and construction which are identical to assemblies tested and approved by a testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to the Engineer as complying with ASTM E 119, by calculated

fire resistance (equivalent thickness), or by other means as permitted by authorities who would

have jurisdiction if the Authority were a private corporation.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply uniform loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after

building masonry walls or columns.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout, mortar or soil that comes in contact with such

masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings

spread on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames and similar elements with painted and

integral finishes from mortar droppings.

C. Weather Requirements

1. Conform to requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for hot and cold weather

construction. Follow cold weather requirements for ambient temperatures below 40

degrees F. Follow hot weather requirements for ambient temperatures above 100 degrees

F, or for temperatures above 90 degrees F with wind speed above 8 mph.

2. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen.

3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of concrete masonry units with documented experience

installing manufacturer’s products according to manufacturer’s specifications, on projects of

similar size and complexity.

B. Inspecting Laboratory Qualifications: The Contractor-chosen independent testing laboratory

must demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction, based on his evaluation of laboratory-submitted

criteria conforming to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to conduct the

testing indicated in this Section without delaying the progress of the Work.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color from

a single manufacturer for each type of product required.



D. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry

Structures, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2,

and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing laboratory to perform

the following preconstruction testing indicated as well as other inspecting and testing services

required by referenced unit masonry standard or indicated herein for source and field quality

control:

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each different concrete masonry unit shown on the

Contract Drawings for dimensions, compressive strength, absorption, weight (density)

and moisture content per ASTM C 140. Test exposed and/or exterior units with water

repellent additive for water penetration, in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E

514.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Refer to Section 04815 Glass Block Assemblies for additional mockup requirements for

concrete masonry units.


A. Deliver, store and handle all materials to prevent damage by breaking, water or moisture and

contamination by foreign materials.


other and protected from deterioration and the elements.

C. During freezing weather protect materials with tarpaulins or other suitable material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General

1. Sustainable Aspects: See section “01112 Sustainable Design Requirements”

a. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, and indigenous materials

b. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control

2. Special Shapes: Furnish as required by the installation or as shown on the Contract

Drawings.

3. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.



4. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of

units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units

where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet

vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

5. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform

texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,

from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

6. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

B. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU)

1. Hollow or solid load-bearing units: ASTM C 90.

2. Weight Classification: Lightweight

3. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive

strength of 1500 psi.

4. Aggregate: Lightweight aggregate, 100 percent expanded clay, shale or slate produced by

the rotary kiln process and conforming to ASTM C 331. The blending of screenings or

any other deleterious substances which will impair the block’s fire rating or insulation

value shall not be permitted.

5. Linear Shrinkage: Maximum 0.065 percent, tested in accordance with ASTM C 426.

6. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions.

7. CMU Faces

a. Color and Texture: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise shown on the

Contract Drawings.

b. Pattern: Plain face, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

8. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows

a. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,

headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2.2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

1. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam

CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with

reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels

before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Manufacturers: Essroc Materials, Inc., Glen-Gery Corporation, Lehigh Portland Cement Co., or

approved equal

B. Mortar: With cementitious materials limited to portland cement and lime, conforming to

ASTM C270 for job-mixed mortar and ASTM C1142 for ready-mixed mortar



1. Type S or RS: For reinforced masonry

2. Type M: For masonry below grade and in contact with earth

3. Type N: Interior walls and locations for which another mortar type has not been

specifically indicated

4. Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch, use

aggregate graded with 100% passing No. 16 sieve

C. Grout: Conforming to ASTM C476, and of consistency as follows:

1. Fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension

2. Coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension

3. Lightweight Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C331

4. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced ASTM standards

D. Portland Cement: Conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or II, natural color

E. Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C207, Type S

F. Water: Potable

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420) deformed billet bars; galvanized.

B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip

galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 4.8 mm (0.1875 inch) side rods

with 3.8 mm (0.1483 inch) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 25 mm (1

inch) and not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) of mortar coverage on each exposure.

C. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip

galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/153M, Class B; 3.8 mm (0.1483 inch) side rods

with 3.8 mm (0.1483 inch) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 25 mm (1

inch) and not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) of mortar coverage on each exposure.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Ties and Anchors: Where shown on the Contract Drawings, furnish and install products as

listed below, or approved equals. Furnish hot-dip galvanized products, unless otherwise

indicated herein or shown on the Contract Drawings.

1. Ties, if any, shall be wire ties as specified in other Sections and as shown on the Contract

Drawings.

2. Wall Anchors : Heckmann Building Products, Inc. Chicago, IL, No. 340-A, or Engineer’s

approved equal; 16 gage corrugated galvanized steel, 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches long,

or length as required, by 2 inches bend with 7/16 inch diameter hole or Engineer’s

Approved Equal.

3. Channel System Wall Anchor



a. Channel: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. No. 360 or No. 360-C; 10 gage galvanized

steel, "Gripstay Channel" or Engineer’s Approved Equal.

b. Anchors: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. No. 364 or No. 365; 3/16 inch by 1-1/4 inch

stainless steel, "Gripstay Anchor" or Engineer’s Approved Equal; length as shown

on the Contract Drawings.

4. Anchors for Securing Masonry to Steel Columns

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY, No. 353, 353L or Engineer’s

Approved Equal; 1-1/4 inch wide by 3/16 inch galvanized steel.

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY, No. 354 or Engineer’s Approved

Equal; 1-1/2 inch wide by 3/16 inch galvanized steel.

5. Anchors for Securing Masonry to Steel Beams

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. No. 357 or Engineer’s Approved Equal; 1-1/4 inch wide

by 3/16 inch galvanized steel.

6. Intersecting Rigid Partition Anchors

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. No. 344 or Engineer’s Approved Equal; 1-1/4 inch wide

by 3/16 inch galvanized steel, length as required.

7. Wire Mesh Wall Ties: 16 gage galvanized steel, 1/2 inch square mesh; minimum 12

inches long; width as required to provide 5/8 inch mortar cover at edges; Heckmann

Building Products, Inc. No. 269, or Engineer’s approved equal.

8. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers complying with ASTM A 307,

Grade A, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C, in size and

configuration as shown on the Contract Drawings.

9. Pre-molded Control Joint Gaskets: Extruded rubber material complying with ASTM D

2000 2AA-805, durometer hardness of 80 plus or minus 5 when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 2240; designed to fit CMU sash block; "No. RS Series" as manufactured

by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or Engineer’s approved equal.

B. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded closed cell neoprene compressible filler strip with pressure

sensitive adhesive; "No. NS" as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or Engineer’s

approved equal.

C. Weeps/Vents: Rectangular plastic tube, 1-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches by 3/8 inch outside width

and spaced as shown on the Contract Drawings, manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or

Engineer’s approved equal.

D. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying

with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to

maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

E. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I

(No. 15 asphalt felt).

F. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not

degrade within the wall cavity.



1. Configuration: Provide one of the following:

a. Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail-shaped notches 7

inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.

2.6 MASONRY-CELL FILL

A. Lightweight-Aggregate Fill: ASTM C 331/C 331M.

2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that the slab or concrete on which the wall is to be built has a clean, level surface free

from laitance, other foreign materials, and frost or ice.

B. Verify that the slab or concrete curb elevation is such that the masonry bed joint shall not vary

more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Clean projecting dowels and steel reinforcing to remove loose rust, scale, dirt, concrete or other

material that will inhibit bond.

D. Verify that dowels and inserts for securing masonry to concrete and metal ties for securing

masonry to structural steel are properly located and installed.

3.2 EXECUTION

A. General

1. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated in this

Section applicable to each type of installation included in this Contract.

2. Comply with construction site tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard.

3. Maintain uniform thickness of horizontal and vertical joints.

4. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Where required to provide a

continuous pattern or to fit to adjoining construction, cut masonry units with motor-

driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

5. Cut units accurately to fit penetrations for plumbing, ducts, electrical, fire protection and

communication Work, and patch holes neatly.

6. Use proper special shape units for windows, doors, bond beams, lintels, pilasters and

corners with a minimum of unit cutting.



7. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full

thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units

of widths indicated.

8. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

9. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

10. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors

and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

11. Contractor is required to protect and plug existing floor drains and associated piping

system during construction. No construction related debris is to be washed through

existing drainage system.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or

minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,

1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8

inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more

than 1/16 inch.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more

than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch or minus 1/4 inch.



4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than

1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING CMU

A. Furnish and install concrete masonry units of the types and sizes shown on the Contract

Drawings and which are dry, sound, clean and free from dust, dirt and cracks before laying.

B. Lay units plumb, level and true to line, with cells vertical unless otherwise required by existing

conditions.

C. Fully bed each concrete masonry unit in mortar with vertical joints completely filled and shove

unit to a solid bearing.

D. Joint Size: Not more than 3/8 inch thick

E. Lay units in running bond pattern, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

F. Point and tool joints in exposed concrete masonry units slightly concave with an approved

jointing tool. Strike joints smooth and flush with a trowel at surfaces within wall cavity and at

surfaces to be plastered, stuccoed, covered with masonry, paneling or gypsum board, or where

resilient base is to be applied.

G. Where epoxy mortar joints are shown on the Contract Drawings, rake out setting mortar to a

uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy mortar

manufacturer's instructions.

H. Completely fill with mortar the hollow cores of concrete masonry units which support

additional loads such as lintels, brackets, mechanical or electrical equipment, those adjacent to

door frames and elsewhere where shown on the Contract Drawings. Unless units below are

shown on the Contract Drawings to be filled also, install 1/4 inch square mesh grout screen to

prevent grout from dripping into voids below.

I. Solidly grout longitudinal joints in two or more wythe masonry, except for cavity in cavity wall

construction, if any.

J. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials. Make provisions during laying up

of cavity walls to permit the removal of mortar droppings and other debris that may fall into

cavity.

K. Anchor concrete masonry unit walls to columns, beams, joists and similar structural members

with anchor bolts or equivalent devices. Anchors shall be fully and solidly grouted in place.

Embedment shall be not less than two-thirds of the wall thickness, unless otherwise shown on

the Contract Drawings.

L. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive

mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh

masonry.



M. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

N. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

O. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to

provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48

inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,

or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches

final position.

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above to comply with Section 07841 "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Install flashings and other sheet metal items to be incorporated in masonry as shown on the

Contract Drawings, fully bedded in mortar above and below and overlapping a minimum of 4

inches at ends.

1. Thru-wall flashing shall extend completely through wall, or shall terminate in a stainless

steel drip edge.

B. Install anchor bolts, sleeves and other miscellaneous steel items to be incorporated in masonry

in accordance with the Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings submitted under other

Sections. Solidly fill spaces between such items and masonry with mortar and tool exposed

joints.

3.6 LAYING SILLS AND COPINGS

A. Set masonry sills and copings where shown on the Contract Drawings using anchors as

recommended by the manufacturer in a manner so as not to affect the waterproofing integrity of

the metal flashings underneath the sills and copings.

B. Install expansion joints at ends of sills and caulk joints where shown on the Contract Drawings

and as specified in other Sections.

C. Install expansion joints in copings where shown on the Contract Drawings consisting of 1/2

inch joints for sealants as specified Division 7 Section 07900 on Joint Sealers.

3.7 STEEL REINFORCING



A. If a dowel does not line up with a vertical core, it shall be sloped not more than 1 inch

horizontally per 6 inches vertically. Grout dowels within a core to a vertical alignment, even

though it may be in a cell adjacent to the vertical wall reinforcing.

B. Where reinforcing bars are to be spliced, lap reinforcing bars by a minimum distance equivalent

to 30 reinforcing bar diameters. Separate overlapping reinforcing bars by 1 bar diameter or

wire together.

3.8 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Completely embed joint reinforcement in mortar or grout. Joints with wire reinforcement shall

be a minimum of twice the thickness of the wire. Lap reinforcement 6 inches minimum at

splices to contain at least one cross wire of each piece of reinforcement in the lapped area.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints.

C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T"

reinforcement sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for

continuity at returns.

3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as Work progresses. Offset control

joints from expansion joints in wythes. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion

joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Control joint location and quantity shall follow requirements of the National Concrete Masonry

Association TEK 10-2C, Control Joints for Concrete Masonry walls – Empirical Method.

Distance between joints shall not exceed 1-1/2 times the height of the wall that the joints are

location within.

C. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.

Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of

sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of sealant.

4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit masonry

is complete for application of sealant.

3.10 LINTELS



A. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches

for brick size units and 24 inches for block size units are shown without structural steel or other

supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar

to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy

mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than

paint) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated.

G. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with masonry to prevent

staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted.

3.12 Cavity walls at the Oculus and other required areas shall be designed so that all components

including the air space, flashing, cavity drainage mat, weeps, and vents and all other elements

work in an integrated fashion to allow free drainage of water through the cavity, out of the

weeps and away from the structure as well as allowing the movement of air through weeps and

vents to allow drying of the cavity. Locate weeps in conjunction with through-wall flashing at

lintels, sills, and a minimum of 6” above finish grade at the bottom of the wall; vents should be

positioned near the top of the cavity wall, above the highest flashing/weep location.

A. Bond CMU wyth to existing concrete walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less

than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c.

horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide

additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart

around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more

than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.



b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use

adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties to allow for differential movement regardless

of whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending

across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)

reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

3. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into each

wythe. Space headers not more than 8 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear

vertically.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds

away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or

remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

3.13 GENERAL GROUTING

1. Placement Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for

Masonry Structures, including requirements for pour height.

2. Place grout only after entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained proper strength

to resist grout pressure. Stop grout pour 1 inch from top of masonry unit so that next

pour will be keyed in.

3. Steel reinforcing shall be in place before grouting begins.

4. Vibrate, rod or puddle grout in place.

5. Keep mortar droppings out of grout spaces.

6. Maintain vertical cell alignment to preserve a continuous unobstructed cell area not less

than 2 inches by 3 inches.

7. Solidly fill with grout, cells containing steel reinforcing, bolts or other anchor devices

and where shown on Contract Drawings.

8. Solidly fill spaces at metal door frames and other built-in items with grout or mortar.

B. Patching: Point holes and defective mortar joints in exposed masonry. Where necessary, cut

out and repoint defective joints in exposed masonry. Patching shall match adjoining masonry

in quality and appearance.


A. Place grout only after the Engineer has verified compliance of steel reinforcing grade, sizes and

placement, anchorages and grout spaces with the requirements of the Contract Drawing

requirements.

B. Verify compliance with compressive strength requirements of completed masonry, where

shown on the Contract Drawings or as required by the Engineer.



3.15 REPAIRING AND POINTING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,

where indicated.

3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exposed masonry against staining from grouting or other sources and clean excess

mortar off surfaces as the Work progresses. Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry

brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Furnish temporary protection for door jambs and corners during the Work. Remove temporary

protection when directed by the Engineer.

C. Upon completion of masonry construction, clean exposed masonry surfaces with stiff-bristled

brushes and water so as to leave the masonry surfaces clean and free of mortar daubs.

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding

with cleaning of masonry.

2. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking

tape.

3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

D. If ordinary cleaning is not adequate, use special methods and materials to clean surfaces as

approved by the Engineer.

3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste, as described above or recycled,

and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of offsite.



GLASS BLOCK ASSEMBLIES 04815 - 1

SECTION 04815 - GLASS BLOCK ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies the fabrication and installation of prefabricated solid glass block window

unit, AW-1.

B. All glass block units, anodized grid system, stainless steel fasteners, caulks, gaskets, and other

items required to complete the specified assembly

C. Contractor is required to provide complete custom assembly based on the design intent shown

on the contract document, allowing access to behind the glass block modules by a single

maintainer and removal and reuse of the panels at interchangeable locations.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 01300 - Submittals

C. Section 04220 – Concrete Masonry Units

D. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications

E. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry

F. Section 07420 – Metal Wall Panels

G. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal

H. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers

I. Section 08873 – Decorative Films

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

B. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure and Temperature Differences

Across the Specimen.

C. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.



D. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,

Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

E. ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,

and Ultra-High Strength.

F. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

1. Each aluminum frame section- 6” long.

2. Samples of aluminum illustrating the specified finish.

3. Glazing tapes- 6” long- each type.

4. Decorative film overlay

5. Verification Samples:

a. Two glass block units of each type specified, showing size, design, and pattern of

faces.

b. Four block (two block by two block) representative assembly (model).

c. Gasketing and elastomeric joint cover strips

d. Mechanisms (hinges, receiver frames, cam locks, handles, hardware, etc) required

for access to behind the panels

6. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature on each product to be used, including:

a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

c. Installation methods.

d. Manufacturer of aluminum grid system shall provide back-up engineering

calculations specific to job conditions, which support their system design per

conformance to code and design criteria as described in the specification and

drawings. All support data including but not limited to shop drawings and

structural calculations must be prepared and sealed by a Pennsylvania licensed

structural engineer. The support data, shop drawings and calculations must be

submitted to SEPTA for review and approval prior to fabrication.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections, and details of the system.

Flashings, sealants, and anchorage details shall be clearly indicated.



2. Note gauges of break metal, finishes of frames and hardware, and dimensions of work to

be performed by other trades (if applicable).

3. Label fastening devices as to type and spacing.

4. Shop drawings for the active wall system shall be submitted as a complete system. All

related work, including work of related trades, shall be included into a compiled shop

drawing to document the entire system. Shop drawings shall indicate existing conditions

of the site including items that impact the assembly and field dimensions for layout

purposes.

5. After shop drawings are approved, a Mock Up is required per “Quality Assurance”

Article. Any changes and updates required based on comments by the SEPTA Project

Manager and Architect to the Mock Up shall be integrated into the shop drawings for

resubmission and approval prior to fabrication of the Glass Block Assembly.

D. Mock-ups: Construct a full active wall module approximately 6’ feet long by 12’ feet high

including the glass masonry assembly and hardware, typical ACM panel jambs, associated sill

and head conditions, removable ACM panels above, existing Jack Arch closure pieces, lighting,

associated conduit and related structural supports, as directed by the SEPTA Project Manager

and Architect for approval. Use all related systems scheduled to be used in the Work. Mock up

to be provided on site at an existing location similar to the project area or within the project area

as selected by the SEPTA Project Manager. See Contract Documents for example of Mock up

module.

1. Mock up to exhibit full functionality of all components of the active wall, including

access behind the glass wall assembly and electrical requirements for lighting.

2. Retain mock-ups during construction as standards for judging completed Work. When

directed by the SEPTA Project Manager, demolish mock-ups and remove from work

area.

3. Prepare a list of materials used to construct mock-ups, for information purposes only, for

SEPTA Project Manager and Architect. Include manufacturer and product names, generic

materials, suppliers, colors, identifying lot or batch numbers and design mixes.

E. Maintenance Data: For glass block assembly system and each decorative film overlay to include

in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer

1. The drawings and specifications are based on the EXTECH Series 2100NSL system as

manufactured by EXTECH/Exterior Technologies, Inc., or engineer’s approved equal.

2. The manufacturer for this project must have documented experience in the domestic

manufacturing of aluminum framed grid systems for use with glass block systems of the

general type and function as specified and as shown in the Drawings.

3. Manufacturer is required to provide complete custom assembly based on the design intent

shown on the contract document, allowing access to behind the glass block modules by a

single maintainer and removal and reuse of the panels at interchangeable locations.

B. Direct Representation



1. The manufacturer shall have available a direct representative with full knowledge and

experience of the product and systems incorporated in this project to assure custom

assembly and a quality installation.

C. Installer Qualifications: Installer of glass block framing is a certified installer with documented

experience installing manufacturer’s products on projects of similar size and scope according to

manufacturer’s specifications.

1. Engage an experienced installer who has completed installations similar in design and

extent to those required for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with

a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Single Source Responsibility

1. Provide prefabricated mortarless framing system panels that can accommodate each type

of glass block listed in this specification, produced by a single manufacturer.

E. Performance Characteristics

1. Design the framing system to provide for expansion and contraction of component

materials caused by a surface temperature range of –10 degrees F to 120 degrees F,

without causing excessive buckling stresses on this glass block infill, failure of joint

seals, undue stress on structural elements of the structure or any reduction in system

performance.

2. Design the assembly and framing system to allow access behind the glass block modules

by a single maintainer and removal and reuse of the panels at interchangeable locations.

a. Acceptable options include, but are not limited to, bottom hinged panels and

breaking down the typical 7 wide by 10 tall typical glass block panel into 7

individual 1 wide by 10 tall. Options should hold site lines as indicated on the

contract drawings. Deviation we require approval by the SEPTA PM.


A. Deliver, store and handle all materials to prevent damage by breaking, water or moisture and

contamination by foreign materials.


other and protected from deterioration and the elements. Bear fully along all supported edges on

level and true structural supports.

C. During freezing weather protect materials with tarpaulins or other suitable material.

D. Handle all materials in a manner which will prevent undue stress on component parts, sealants

and structural members. Do not rack, torque, or cause load forces in an inappropriate manner.

Lift panels from top only unless specifically instructed by the manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY



A. The Manufacturer of the wall system shall warrant that, if within five (5) years from the last

date of Final Acceptance, the Owner notifies the Manufacturer in writing of defects in the

system, the Manufacturer will, at its option, repair or provide replacements for those

components of the system found to be defective. Warranty shall cover the complete glass block

assembly including but not limited to hardware systems.

B. Manufacturer will provide a "Certificate of Compliance" upon completion of installation

attesting that all components and installation conforms to the requirements on drawings and in

specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Sustainable Aspects: See section “01112 Sustainable Design Requirements”



2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. EXTECH/Exterior Technologies, Inc., 200 Bridge St., Pittsburgh, PA 15223 (412/781-0991).

1. Basis of design: EXTECH/Exterior Technologies, Inc., Series #2100NSL

B. Or Engineer’s approved equal

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Framing Extrusions.

1. Framing extrusions shall be aluminum 6063-T5, 6005-T5 or 6105-T5 alloy and temper or

engineer’s approved equal. All sections shall be formed to detail and free from defects

impairing appearance, strength, and durability. Perimeter framing members shall not

incorporate an integral structural polyurethane thermal break.

2. Installer will provide compressible neoprene gasketing material at the perimeter of all

extruded framing units within rough structural steel opening. Provide backer rod and

sealant per Section below.

B. Fasteners

1. Bolts, anchors and other fastening devices shall be of approved types as required for the

strength of the connections and shall be suitable for the conditions encountered. Washers

shall be of the same metals as the fasteners.

2. Exposed fasteners shall be 300 Series 18-8 stainless steel and shall utilize stainless steel

washers with neoprene seals.

3. Exposed fasteners shall be of a vandal resistant design, requiring specialized tools for

assembly and removal.



4. All fasteners for the glass block infill panels shall be supplied by the system

manufacturer.

C. Glazing Seals

1. Wall Assemblies shall incorporate two silicone sealant beads around the entire perimeter

of each glass block glazing unit, one inside and one outside. The sealant shall be Dow

#795 or an engineer’s approved equal. All seals will be backed by polyethylene or

polyurethane foam tape of a type recommended by the sealant manufacturer as being

compatible with the sealant.

D. Sealants

1. Those sealants between the aluminum framing and substrate shall be a one-part neutral

cure silicone as recommended by the manufacturer for each specific application.

Manufacturer shall be GE, Dow, or engineer’s approved equal.

2. Sealant color shall be clear as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color

range.

E. Backer Rods

1. All construction seals shall be backed by self-expanding closed cell polyethylene rods

oversized by 50% of joint width of a type recommended by the sealant manufacturer as

being compatible with the sealant.

F. Finish

1. The exposed surfaces of all aluminum members shall be clean and free from serious

surface blemishes, scratches or tool marks. The finish shall be the following:

a. Clear Anodic Finish: Class I (215-R1) AA-M10022A42. Thickness to be 0.7 mil

and shall conform to AAMA 607.1-77

b. Or Engineer’s approved equal.

G. Glass Block.

1. Type 1: Solid Glass Block, 8X8 inches, nominal; thickness: 1.5 inches

a. Manufacturer:

1) Pittsburgh Corning VISTABRIK solid glass block

2) Circle Redmont Inc

3) Mulia Inc

4) Or Engineer’s approved equal.

b. Pattern: Clear

H. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, 2-mil- minimum

thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable

protective backing.



1. Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and

free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in pattern indicated on Drawings

to the back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including

surface preparation and application temperature limitations. Refer to Section 08873

Decorative Films.

I. Integral Grid System:

1. Grid system must accommodate all types of glass block specified in this Section.

2. The structural grid shall be composed of extruded aluminum members 6063, 6005, or

6105 alloy; T-5 or T-6 temper. Once the grid and glass block units are assembled, they

shall be structurally drawn together using a set of two (2) stainless steel threaded rods at

approximately 8” OC to hold the blocks and grid system together for shipping and

installation. The threaded stainless steel rod shall be an integral part of the finished

design/system and the entire assembly shall be fabricated at the factory. The grid and

glass block panel system shall be designed to slip into and fasten to a steel windscreen

frame.

3. The extruded members shall have no sharp edges.

4. The horizontal and vertical members shall fasten to each other without welding

5. The leading edges of the grid extrusions shall be recessed ¼” to ½” behind the faces of

the glass units on the exterior side

6. The opening(s) in the structure shall be sized to allow a minimum ¼” sealant joint

between the glass block unit frame and the shelter framing members.

7. Dissimilar materials shall be isolated from each other using gaskets or other suitable

materials to protect against galvanic reactions.

8. The system shall permit a ¼” min. sealant joint surrounding the perimeter of the overall

glass panel.

9. In addition to threaded rods, intermediate grid members shall be coped to fit around the

flange above and below the spanning members.

10. The intermediate extrusions shall be hollow and be 2-9/32” front to back and 11/32”

wide.

11. Glass blocks shall rest against a 3/8” wide flange around the full perimeter of the

opening.

12. The intermediate horizontal members shall run continuous from jamb to jamb unless

structural considerations dictate otherwise. Horizontals will be mechanically fastened to

each vertical jamb frame with 300 series stainless steel screws. Corners of all units shall

be sealed, mitered and locked utilizing aluminum keys and secured with stainless steel

bolts and nuts.

13. The system perimeter frame shall be predrilled to accept vandal-resistant fasteners for

anchorage of the system to the adjoining structure.

14. The system shall be capable of accommodating glass blocks of varying sizes to match

existing field conditions. And the design intent of the project.

15. The system shall be designed to permit replacement of a glass block at any location

within the glazed field.

16. The system shall be designed to allow for gasketing located along the vertical edges of

the individual glass block and for a bonding agent along their horizontal edges.

17. Clean off any excess exposed sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 INSPECTION

A. Prior to installation of the system, the installer shall examine all mounting surfaces to determine

that the area is in design and dimensional agreement with the approved shop drawings.

B. In the event of an error in the substrate, the installer is to bring all deviations to the attention of

the General Contractor/SEPTA Project Manager and the glass block framing system

manufacturer (in writing). No further erection work will be done until the faulty substrate has

been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces of contact between aluminum and potentially reactive dissimilar materials shall receive

a protective coating to prevent electrolysis. Protective coating shall be in the form of a

bituminous coating or a polyethylene (or similar plastic) film.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The wall system is to be erected and glazed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Glass block assemble is to be shop assembled.

B. The installer is responsible for verifying the quantities of material components as shown on

delivery or packing slips.

C. The installer shall be responsible for the materials until they become a fixed part of the building.

He will also be responsible for any subsequent damage which he, or others, may do to those

materials, until final approval of the Work.

D. Contractor shall not install defective panels.

E. Replace any damaged glass blocks during installation or thereafter before final acceptance.

F. Do not cut, trim, or weld components during erection in any manner which would damage the

finish, decrease strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the

work. Return components which required alteration to the shop for re-fabrication or

replacement, unless specifically directed by the manufacturer to do otherwise.

G. Install components level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints. Attach to structure with

non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners and spacers.

H. Provide adjustment within the work to accommodate job variations.

3.4 CARE AND CLEANING

A. The wall system shall be carefully installed to avoid damage to the metal and glass surfaces.

B. Upon completion of each phase, the installer will provide final cleaning of the exterior and

interior surfaces.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1

SECTION 05400 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior framing

1.2 RELATED WORK


Conditions and Division 01 General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. Section 01112 – Sustainable Design Requirements

C. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal

framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,

bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

D. Delegated Design: Provide structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Perform the design calculations required to size members, and prepare details of

connections and other structural data including specifications for fasteners, anchors, and

other structural items required.

2. Submit the Professional Engineer’s calculations to the SEPTA Project Manager for

approval.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Qualification Data: For installer, professional engineer and testing agency.



G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that

each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests

for current products:

1. Steel sheet.

2. Expansion anchors.

3. Power-actuated anchors.

4. Mechanical fasteners.

5. Vertical deflection clips.

6. Horizontal drift deflection clips

7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of cold-formed metal framing is a manufacturer trained

installer with experience installing manufacturer’s products according to manufacturer’s

specifications

B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other

structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project

in material, design, and extent.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, indicating

steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile

strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing

identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the

Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel

Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01.




A. Structural Performance: Design, fabricate and install cold-formed metal framing capable of

withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

B. Design Loads: Applicable code specific minimums unless otherwise indicated on structural

drawings

C. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than required by applicable codes.

D. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or

overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or

other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

E. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances,

and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as stated in the structural

drawings but no less than ½”.

F. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed

Steel Framing - General Provisions."

G. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header

Design."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during

delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid

condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL




2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:



1. Marino Ware; a division of Ware Industries.

2. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.

3. United Metal Products, Inc.

4. Or Approved equal

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and

coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2. Coating: G60 (Z275)

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated,

of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance

2. Coating: G90 (Z275)

2.4 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Wall framing shall have a maximum depth as shown on construction drawings

B. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,

with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)

C. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,

with straight flanges, and as follows:



D. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header

beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:



2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural

Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise

indicated, as follows:



1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. Anchor clips.

5. End clips.

6. Foundation clips.

7. Gusset plates.

8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.

9. Joist hangers and end closures.

10. Hole reinforcing plates.

11. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-

steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,

without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488

conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated

from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10

times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping

steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.

Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for

placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Non-shrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and

plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency

and 30-minute working time.



D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from

manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting

as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

B. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing bolting, or screw fastening, according to

Shop Drawings.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum

allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960)

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements

of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-

square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary

framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as

needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-



resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect

remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of

foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel

Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent

requirements are indicated.

C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by screw fastening, clinch fastening, or

riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and

complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in

intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,

undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent

connections to framing are secured.

F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

Independently frame both sides of joints.

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard

punched openings.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 NON – LOAD BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and

securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:



1. Anchor Spacing: To match stud spacing.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm)

between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to

top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: minimum 16 inches (406 mm)

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs

cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously

reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting

structure as indicated.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as

indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to

supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. Fasten jamb

members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to

jamb studs with clip angles and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support

fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring

attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's

written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load

resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten at each stud

intersection.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to

reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of

bracing and anchor to structure.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and

stable wall-framing system.



3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to

supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,

brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38

mm).

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,

steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls

D. Joist Spacing: minimum 16 inches

E. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or

another combination of connected joists if indicated.

F. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located

directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as

indicated on Shop Drawings.

G. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

H. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist

intersection as follows:

1. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated

and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to

bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

I. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

J. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,

clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete

and stable joist-framing assembly.


A. Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to the SEPTA Project Manager,

Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified

requirements.



E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time

of Final Acceptance.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

SECTION 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work of this Section consists of the fabrication and installation of stainless steel fabrications

as shown in the construction drawings and as specified herein.

1. Stainless steel cladding

2. Stainless steel trim, reveals, and other accessories

3. Custom floor expansion joint cover assembly replacing existing covers

B. For all metal items scheduled to be cleaned, refer to requirements within Section 05900 Metal

Restoration and Cleaning.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, labor, transportation, and installation

required for delivery of complete assemblies in locations designated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 04815 – Glass Block Assemblies

C. Section 05520 – Handrails and Railings

D. Section 05900 – Metal Restoration and Cleaning

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Latest Edition. Applicable standards.

B. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

D. Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI) - "Fastener Standards Book"

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A-312 – Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe.

2. ASTM A480/480M - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat Resisting

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

3. ASTM A484/484M - General Requirements of Stainless Steel Bars



4. ASTM A555/555M - General Requirements for Stainless Steel and Heat Resistant Steel

Wire and Wire Rods

5. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and

Studs

6. ASTM A666 - Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar for Structural

and Architectural Applications

F. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

1. Metal Finishes Manual; Code of Standard Practice for the Architectural Metal Industry

G. SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. The Contractor shall provide the following unless noted otherwise:

1. Provide shop drawings of each fabrication. Include plans, sections and details of

connections. Shop drawings shall include materials schedule, hardware installation

details, weld sizes & symbols, finishes, notes and dimensions of all components.

Reproductions of the contract documents will not be accepted.

a. Shop drawings for the active wall system noted within Section 04815 Glass Block

Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including metal fabrication

components. All related work, including work of related trades, shall be included

into a compiled shop drawing to document the entire system. Shop drawings shall

indicate existing conditions of the site including items that impact the assembly

and field dimensions for layout purposes. Refer to Section 04815 Glass Block

Assemblies for requirements.

b. After shop drawings are approved, a Mockup is required per “Quality Assurance”

article. Any changes and updates required based on comments by the SEPTA

Project Manager and Architect to the Mockup shall be integrated into the shop

drawings for resubmission and approval prior to fabrication of the metal

fabrications.

2. Welding procedure qualifications.

3. Current welder certifications.

4. Manufacturer’s technical data (cut-sheets)

5. Mill Certifications.

6. Passivation Certification.

7. Partial and poorly prepared submittals will be rejected and returned to the Contractor for

revision, any losses of time and additional costs associated with re-submittals are the

Contractor’s responsibility.



8. Confirmation of the existing control joint system and requirements for movement and

connection

C. The Contractor shall provide one (1) each of the following for each fabrication:

1. 12” square and / or lineal sample which will show adequately the quality of fabrication,

welding and finish. These can also represent the required finish samples as noted

elsewhere in the specification.

2. Full size mockup, with final finishes to all surfaces, to be fabricated. Mock-ups shall be

representatives of the finished products and provided at the fabricator’s plant for SEPTA

review. If approved, mockup may be incorporated into construction.

a. Refer to Section 04815 Glass Block Assemblies for additional mockup

requirements for metal fabrications.


A. Fabricator Qualifications:

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification testing for welding

processes involved and possesses current certification.

2. Stainless steel fabrications shall be from a manufacturer who has a dedicated facility for

the assembly, welding, and polishing of stainless steel. The manufacturer should have

dedicated tooling, fixtures, and machine tools, for the manufacturer of stainless steel

products. Dedicated is defined as exclusively used for the use on stainless steel materials.

This is to avoid contamination with other metals, especially carbon steel.

3. Fabricator shall participate in the AISC Certification Program and shall be designated an

AISC Certified Plant, Category STD at time of bid.

4. Fabricator shall comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice

for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” current edition.

5. In lieu of AISC Certification, the fabricator must submit documentation or certification of

approval per IBC, Section 1704.2.2.

B. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS Structural Welding Code.

C. SEPTA reserves the right to shop inspect at any time during the fabrication and finishing

processes.

D. SEPTA reserves the right to require NDE inspection from an independent testing agency, at no

cost to SEPTA.

E. The contractor must notify SEPTA (5) days prior to beginning fabrication and finishing, to

determine if SEPTA shall require a shop inspection prior to allowing the product to move

forward to the next phase.

F. Provide certification by the passivator stating that the fabrication was passivated after the

stainless steel was bent, cut and/or welded.

G. Contractor shall note that the Work incorporates several different metals. All dissimilar metals

shall be carefully separated to prevent corrosion due to galvanic action.



H. Contractor to confirm assemblies and attachments shall resist a concentrated load of 200 lbs

applied at any point in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbs per linear foot applied in any

direction.

I. Field Visit and Measurements:

1. Prior to beginning the fabrication of the metal fabrications, detailed field measurements

must be taken.

2. Any discrepancies between the drawings and what is in the field shall be brought to the

attention of the SEPTA’s project manager. It is assumed that slight variation may exist

and this is to be expected. Extras associated with discrepancies shall only be granted

where these discrepancies can be proved to be a major consequence on the design and

fabrication.

3. It is recommended that the fabricator visit the site prior to bidding on any fabrication in

which the size of the project may require special on-site handling requirements, or where

the fabrication must fit into existing conditions.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

A. Package so that products will not be damaged during shipping or storage.

B. Clearly label each package of contents. Label shall be on (2) ends and (1) face. Contents shall

be labeled and coordinated with installation drawings.

C. Store & handle metal fabrications and appurtenant items in strict compliance with

manufacturers’ instructions.

D. Protect units adequately against damage from the elements, construction activities, and other

hazards before, during, and after constructions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a five-year warranty on all fabrications against fabrication and

finish failure, mill scale, rusting, corrosion, rust stains, and / or discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




B. Stainless Steel



1. Stainless Steel shall be Austenitic Grade AISI type 316/316L

2. Stainless Steel Sheet, Plate, Flat Bar: ASTM A666, Type 316/316L

3. Welding materials: AWS Structural Welding Code: type required for materials being

welded. Use E70xx low hydrogen electrodes for stainless steel welds.

2.2 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLY

A. Custom Expansion Joint Design Criteria

1. Application: Floor to Floor

a. Contractor to verify connection details, joint width at the nominal, minimum, and

maximum widths, and size of existing joint covers in field

2. Installation: Surface mounted

3. Load Capacity

a. Uniform Load: 50 lb/sq. ft.

b. Concentrated Load: 300 lb

c. Maximum Deflection: 0.0625 inch

4. Cover-Plate Design: Match Existing

5. Exposed Metal

a. Aluminum: Mill

1) Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color

densities

6. Seal: Preformed elastomeric membrane or extrusion.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Fasteners:

1. Bolts with Nuts: All nuts and bolts to be stainless steel

a. ASME B18.2.2.

b. ASTM A 307 for 415 MPa (60,000 psi) tensile strength bolts.

c. ASTM F 468 for nonferrous bolts.

d. ASTM F 593 for stainless steel.

B. Screws: ASME B18.6.1., stainless steel

C. Washers: ASTM F 436, stainless steel.

D. Nails: ASTM F 1667, Type I, style 6 or 14 for finish work.



E. Anchors and Inserts: Anchors and inserts shall be the proper type, size, and material for the

type of loading specified and installation condition shown, and as recommended by the

manufacturer. Opening force less than or equal to 5 lbf. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors

and inserts shall be stainless steel of the sizes and type indicated on the plans.

F. Heavy Duty Spring Loaded Hinges: Structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow

opening and automatic closing without binding. Non-lift type hinge design shall permit gate to

swing 180°.

G. Latch: magnetic lock

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING, ANCHORS & ACCESSORIES

A. Materials:

1. Anchors or fasteners for items including threaded bolts or anchors to secure wood inserts

and blocking.

2. Other miscellaneous metal work indicated on drawings or otherwise implied.

B. Non-shrink Grout: Non-shrink nonmetallic grout shall be premixed, factory-packaged, non-

staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621, “Specification for

Non-shrink Grout”. The Contractor shall provide the grout specifically recommended by the

manufacturer.

C. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be of the same basic metal as the joined metal, unless otherwise

indicated. Metals, which are corrosive or incompatible with the materials to be joined, shall not

be used.

1. Concealed fasteners shall be used whenever possible. Exposed fasteners shall be

tamperproof flat-head machine screws.

D. Anchors and Inserts: Anchors and inserts shall be the proper type, size, and material for the type

of loading specified and installation condition shown, and as recommended by the

manufacturer. Anchors and inserts shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel of the sizes and type

indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble components in sizes as shown on the drawings or the largest practical

size when not shown on the drawings for shipping.

B. Form fabrications from material of size, thickness and shapes indicated, but not less than that

needed to comply with the performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated

or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of

material indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

C. Shear, punch, and laser cut metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs, sharp and rough areas

on exposed surfaces.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:



1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and resist corrosion of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth using concealed fasteners

wherever possible. Miter all corners

F. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted, corners mitered and secured.

G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components from stainless steel and paint to match fabrication, except were specifically noted

otherwise.

H. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel, flush countersunk and with vandal resistant heads.

Finish to match color of surrounding material.

I. Grind exposed joints and welds flush and smooth with adjacent surface. Make exposed joints

butt tight, flush and hairline.

J. Form exposed edges to tight uniform radius. Miter all corners. Inside corners must be ground

smooth to create sharp right angles. All open ends must be closed-off.

K. Exposed sheet edges shall be hemmed.

L. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrications to receive finish hardware, screws and similar

items.

M. Exposed surfaces of all products shall be clean and free from surface blemishes, scratches or

tool marks.

N. Fabricator shall take all preventative measures to eliminate cross-contamination of stainless

steel with ferrous metals during fabrication, machining, storage and delivery. All grinding,

polishing, and buffing shall be performed so that no contamination occurs to affect the

material’s corrosion resistance or finish. Particular care shall be exercised to protect the material

from coming in contact with iron particles. All tools used in the fabrication and finishing

process shall be tools dedicated only to use on those materials.

O. All mill seams and marks shall be concealed or located out of prevalent field of vision.

P. All welds shall be fully restrained. Close off all open tube ends with stainless steel plates,

except the bottoms of vertical members that shall receive vent holes.

Q. Hermetically seal all joints so as to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may

accumulate.

R. All stainless steel shall be passivated prior to packaging and shipping. Any area that has been

cut, welded or bent shall be passivated to assure that the area does not show signs of rust

discoloration created by the fabrication processes.

S. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Maximum bow and camber - 1/4 inch per 4 feet



2. Maximum out of plane - 1/16 inch

3. Maximum misalignment - 1/8 inch per 8 feet

2.6 FINISH

A. Finish exposed surfaces in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual.

B. Stainless Steel

1. Stainless Steel grain shall run in same direction for each fabrication.

2. Finish shall be #4 brushed for all components unless otherwise specified on the drawings.

3. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove any embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

C. Surface roughness

1. No more than 15 micro-inches.

D. Refer to contract drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION

A. SEPTA reserves the right to shop inspect at any time during the fabrication and finishing

process.

B. The contractor must notify SEPTA (5) days prior to beginning fabrication, galvanizing and

painting, to determine if SEPTA shall require a shop inspection prior to allowing the product to

move forward to the next phase.


A. All work shall be installed by the contractor’s forces.

B. The contractor shall supply all fasteners and attachments, which shall be, but not necessarily

limited to, stainless steel threaded rods, washers, bolts, and nuts. Exposed fastener heads shall

be painted to match the surrounding materials/assembly. Exposed fasteners shall be vandal

resistant.

C. Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown, plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set

parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.

D. Items set into existing concrete or masonry.

1. Provide temporary bracing for such items until fencing is set and rigid.

2. Place in accordance with setting drawings and instructions.



E. Set frames of covers, and similar items flush with finish floor or wall surface and, where

applicable, flush with side of opening.

F. Shop weld in accordance with AWS. Field welding shall not be permitted.

1. Design and finish as specified for shop welding.

2. Use continuous weld unless specified otherwise.

G. Install anchoring devices and fasteners as shown and as necessary for securing metal

fabrications to building construction as specified. Expansion Anchors should be used where

shown on the drawings and elsewhere except where shown otherwise. Power actuated drive pins

may be used except for removable items and where members would be deformed or substrate

damaged by their use.

H. Isolate components from dissimilar metals and from contact with concrete and masonry

materials as required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS

A. Anchorage to structure.

1. Secure framing and connections to structure as shown or as required.

2. Secure steel plate and steel angles to slabs or ceiling, with epoxy anchors unless shown or

specified otherwise.

3.4 CLEAN AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean after installation exposed pre-finished and plated items and items fabricated from

stainless steel, as recommended by the metal manufacture and protect from damage until

completion of the project.



HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05520-1

SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all labor and materials to shop fabricate stainless steel assemblies as shown on the

drawings and described herein.

1. Handrails.

2. Railings.

3. Gates and associated hardware.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements



E. Section 09300 – Tile

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM A312/312M - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes





Wire and Wire Rods




Studs

B. AWS - American Welding Society


C. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers




D. SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of

Pennsylvania, as defined in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including

attachment to building construction. Railings must be designed to comply with structural

loading requirements per International Building Code, 2009 edition.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Scaled shop drawings of each fabrication. Include plans, sections and details of connections.

1. Shop Drawings shall be drawn to a scale that clearly shows all design and fabrication

details. This shall include but not be limited to welding symbols showing weld type, size,

and spacing. Material component schedules must be included with the shop assembly

drawings.

2. When the product requires field assembly the contractor must supply detailed assembly

drawings that are keyed to the labeled boxes in which the products shall be shipped along

with all fasteners. Fasteners must be stainless steel and tamperproof. All boxes, cartons,

pallets, and/or skids shall be clearly marked with its contents.

3. The contractor has an absolute obligation to meet all applicable codes controlling the

fabrication and installation of handrails and guardrails. Shop drawings which either omit

information or show information which is in violation of applicable codes will not, even

if approved, allow the contractor to install components which will not meet code. Any

railing which does not conform to the applicable codes will be removed and replaced at

no cost to SEPTA.

C. Welding procedure qualifications.

D. Current welder certifications.

E. Manufacturer’s technical data (cut-sheets)

F. Mill Certifications.

G. Passivation Certification.

H. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including structural calculations signed and sealed by

the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

I. Samples: Provide (3) 6" long or square samples which will show adequately the quality of

fabrication and finish as specified herein. All steel samples shall be stainless steel per the

specification. All finishes on the delivered products shall be judged against these samples.



1. Provide (3) samples of elbow, and tee, connections along with wall brackets, escutcheon,

and end stops for the handrails.

2. Provide (3) samples of all fasteners including, washers, threaded rods, bolts, and nuts.

J. The Contractor shall provide one (1) each of the following for each fabrication shown:

1. 12” square and / or lineal sample which will show adequately the quality of fabrication,

welding and finish. These can also represent the required finish samples as noted

elsewhere in the specification.


A. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification testing for welding

processes involved and possesses current certification.

B. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS Structural Welding Code.

C. SEPTA reserves the right to shop inspect at any time during the fabrication and finishing

processes.

D. The contractor must notify SEPTA (5) days prior to beginning fabrication and finishing, to

determine if SEPTA shall require a shop inspection prior to allowing the product to move

forward to the next phase.

E. Refer to Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications for requirements for protection of stainless steel

fabrications, passivating, cleaning and repassivating in case of damage, and field testing

requirements and documentation confirming the use of Type 316 Stainless Steel throughout.

F. Fabricator Qualifications:

1. Fabricator shall participate in the AISC Certification Program and shall be designated an

AISC Certified Plant, Category STD at time of bid.

2. Fabricator shall comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice

for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” current edition.

3. In lieu of AISC Certification, the fabricator must submit documentation or certification of

approval per IBC, Section 1704.2.2.

4. SEPTA reserves the right to require NDE inspection from an independent testing agency,

at no cost to SEPTA.

5. Stainless steel fabrications shall be from a manufacturer who has a dedicated facility for

the assembly, welding, and polishing of stainless steel. The manufacturer should have

dedicated tooling, fixtures, and machine tools, for the manufacturer of stainless steel

products. Dedicated is defined as exclusively used for the use on stainless steel materials.

This is to avoid contamination with other metals, especially carbon steel.

6. Provide certification by the passivator stating that the fabrication was passivated after the

stainless steel was bent, cut and/or welded.

G. Design Requirements for Hand and Guardrails:



1. Railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments shall resist a concentrated load of 200 lbs

applied at any point in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbs per linear foot applied

in any direction.

2. Guardrail assembly and attachments shall resist a concentrated load of 200 lbs applied at

any point in any direction along the top railing member. Guardrail assembly shall also be

designed to resist a uniform load of 50 lbs per square foot applied horizontally at the

required guardrail height and a simultaneous uniform load of 100 lbs per square foot

applied vertically downward at the top of the guardrail. The concentrated and uniform

load shall not be applied simultaneously.

H. Field Visit and Measurements:

1. Prior to beginning the fabrication of the hand and guardrails for stairs and ramps, detailed

field measurements must be taken.

2. When steel fabrication will be installed into an existing structure, or where the guard and

handrail are configured different from the standard platform module layouts; "A," "B,"

"C," and "D," as shown on the standard guard/handrail drawings then field measurements

for shop drawings shall be required prior to beginning fabrication.

3. Any discrepancies between the drawings and what is in the field shall be brought to the

attention of the SEPTA’s project manager. It is assumed that slight variation may exist

and this is to be expected. Extras associated with discrepancies shall only be granted

where these discrepancies can be proved to be a major consequence on the design and

fabrication.

4. The fabricator shall visit the site prior to bidding on any fabrication in which the size of

the project may require special on-site handling requirements, or where the fabrication

must fit into existing conditions.


A. Package so that products will not be damaged during shipping or storage.

B. Clearly label each package of contents. Label shall be on (2) ends and (1) face. Contents shall

be labeled and coordinated with installation drawings.

C. WARRANTY

D. All components shall be warranted for 5 year against frame failure, mill scale, rusting,

corrosion, rust stains, chipping, and/or discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General






B. Stainless Steel shall be Austenitic Grade type 316/316L

C. Stainless Steel Sheet, Plate, Flat Bar: ASTM A666, Type 316/316L

D. Steel square & rectangular shapes (HSS): ASTM A 500, grade B.

E. Steel section plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A 36.

F. Steel welded and seamless pipe: Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM A 120, A 53, and A 36.

G. Welding materials: AWS Structural Welding Code: type required for materials being welded.

Use E70xx low hydrogen electrodes for stainless steel welds.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble components in sizes as shown on the drawings or the largest practical

size when not shown on the drawings for shipping.

B. Form fabrications from material of size, thickness and shapes indicated, but not less than that

needed to comply with the performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated

or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of

material indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

C. Shear, punch, and laser cut metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs, sharp and rough areas

on exposed surfaces.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and resist corrosion of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth using concealed fasteners

wherever possible. Miter all corners.

F. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured.

G. Grind exposed joints and welds flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed

joints butt tight, flush and hairline.

H. Form exposed edges to small uniform radius.

I. Exposed sheet edges shall be hemmed.

J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrications to receive finish hardware, screws and similar

items.

K. Exposed surfaces of all products shall be clean and free from surface blemishes, scratches or

tool marks.



L. Fabricator shall take all preventative measures to eliminate cross-contamination of stainless

steel with ferrous metals during fabrication, machining, storage and delivery. All grinding,

polishing, and buffing shall be performed so that no contamination occurs to affect the

material’s corrosion resistance or finish. Particular care shall be exercised to protect the material

from coming in contact with iron particles. All tools used in the fabrication and finishing

process shall be tools dedicated only to use on those materials.

M. All mill seams and marks shall be concealed or located out of prevalent field of vision.

N. All welds shall be fully restrained. Close off all open tube ends with stainless steel plates,

except the bottoms of vertical members that shall receive vent holes.

O. Hermetically seal all joints so as to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may

accumulate.

P. All stainless steel shall be passivated prior to packaging and shipping. Any area that has been

cut, welded or bent shall be passivated to assure that the area does not show signs of rust

discoloration created by the fabrication processes.

Q. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Maximum bow - 1/4 inch per 4 feet

2. Maximum out of plane - 1/16 inch

3. Maximum misalignment - 1/8 inch

R. Finish

1. Stainless Steel grain shall run in same direction for each fabrication.

2. Finish shall be non-directional #4 brushed for all components unless otherwise specified

on the drawings.

3. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove any embedded


4. Surface roughness

a. No more than 15 micro-inches.

S. Swing Gate Hardware for each gate within Occulus:

1. Hinges: Heavy duty, double-acting spring hinge, ADA compliant.

2. Closer: Auto close, spring loaded, ADA compliant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION

A. SEPTA reserves the right to shop inspect at any time during the fabrication and finishing

process.



B. The contractor must notify SEPTA (5) days prior to beginning fabrication to determine if

SEPTA shall require a shop inspection prior to allowing the product to move forward to the next

phase.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All work shall be installed by the contractor’s forces.

B. The contractor shall supply all fasteners and attachments, which shall be, but not necessarily

limited to, stainless steel threaded rods, washers, bolts, and nuts. Exposed fastener heads shall

be painted to match the surrounding materials/assembly. Exposed fasteners shall be vandal

resistant.

C. Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown, plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set

parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.

D. Items set into existing concrete or masonry.

1. Provide temporary bracing for such items until fencing is set and rigid.

2. Place in accordance with setting drawings and instructions.

E. Set frames of covers, and similar items flush with finish floor or wall surface and, where

applicable, flush with side of opening.

F. Replace any tile damaged by the installation of new Work detailed in this Section. Refer to

Section 09300 –Tile.

G. Shop weld in accordance with AWS. Field welding shall not be permitted.

1. Design and finish as specified for shop welding.

2. Use continuous weld unless specified otherwise.

H. Install anchoring devices and fasteners as shown and as necessary for securing metal

fabrications to building construction as specified. Expansion Anchors should be used where

shown on the drawings and elsewhere except where shown otherwise. Power actuated drive pins

may be used except for removable items and where members would be deformed or substrate

damaged by their use.

I. Isolate components from dissimilar metals and from contact with concrete and masonry

materials as required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS

A. Anchorage to structure.

1. Secure framing and connections to structure as shown or as required.

2. Secure steel plate and steel angles to slabs or ceiling, with expansion anchors unless

shown or specified otherwise.



3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware

using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage.

Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean after installation exposed pre-finished and plated items and items fabricated from

stainless steel, as recommended by the metal manufacture and protect from damage until

completion of the project.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial

Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required

alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.



STAIR TREADS AND NOSING 05550-1

SECTION 05550 - STAIR TREADS AND NOSING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install Stair Nosings for concrete stairs.

1. Single Component stair nosing systems.




1.3 REFERENCES

A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to the extent referenced. The criteria

established in the specifications shall take precedence over the standards referenced herein.


a. ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes

2. State of California Title 24, Stripping code for the visually impaired.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Stair nosing assemblies shall be anchored to substrate.

B. Stair nosing treads shall be ribbed.

C. Stair nosing tread surfaces shall be slip resistant.

D. Stair nosing treads shall be removable and replaceable.

E. Stair nosing treads shall meet OSHA Barrier-Free Code requirements for stair design in public

buildings.

F. Abrasives with cementious-based resins shall not be acceptable.

G. Abrasive ribs shall be photoluminescent.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and technical data, including Material Safety Data Sheets,

installation instructions, and catalog cuts and templates to explain construction and to provide

for incorporation into the project.

C. Submit certificates and/or copies of independent test reports or research reports showing

compliance with specified performance requirements.

D. Submit shop drawings showing complete fabrication details for all stair nosings, including

required anchorage to surrounding construction.

E. Submit three (3) 6" samples of the specified system.


A. Manufacturer: Obtain stair nosing assemblies through one source from an approved

Manufacturer.

1. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 Certified or shall be an Approved Manufacturer for

an ISO Certified Supplier.

a. ISO 9001:2000 Certified Manufacturer shall have documented management and

control of the processes that influence the quality of its products.

b. Approved Manufacturer shall be approved by the Approved Supplier and shall

have documented specifications that control their processes and influence the

quality of its customer service.

2. Manufacturer shall have documented experience in the fabrication of stair nosing

systems.

B. Installer: Firm with documented experience in the installation of systems similar to those

required by this project and acceptable to the manufacturer of the system.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The manufacturer shall fill stair nosing sub-channels with a protective material to provide

protection during construction.

B. Prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall cover the abrasive with heavy-duty tape to eliminate

concrete infiltration and staining.

C. Deliver stair nosing assemblies to jobsite in new, clean, unopened crates of sufficient size and

strength to protect materials during transit.

D. Store components in original containers in a clean, dry location.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s warranty that materials furnished will perform as specified for a period

of not less than one (1) year when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL




2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Furnish and install as noted in specifications and as indicated on drawings.

B. Balco, Inc., P.O. Box 17249, 2626 S. Sheridan, Wichita, KS 67217; phone: 800-767-0082 or

(316) 945-9328; fax: (316) 945-0789.

1. Basis of Design: R-315P Single Component Stair Nosing

C. Wooster Products Inc.

D. Westfield Sheet Metal Works, Inc.

E. Or approved equal

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions.

B. Cast Aluminum: Cast Aluminum alloy 319, tread plate.

C. Abrasive:

1. Photoluminescent: Two (2) part Epoxy combined with thermoplastic aggregate and high-

grade strontium aluminate photoluminescent pigment, zinc sulfide shall not be allowed.

D. Fasteners required for complete installation to manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Single Component Stair Nosings: Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either

integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.



2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stair nosing assemblies as detailed. Provide anchors and accessories necessary for

complete installation.

1. Fabricate heavy-duty abrasive tread ribs ¼ inch thick by width indicated on Contract

Drawings.

2. Fabricate stair nosings with the depth of nose to measure underside 3/8”inches.

3. Provide abrasive treads of specified color.

4. Provide specified anchors and, where required, tread plate securing screws.

5. Surfaces to be embedded in concrete shall be coated with a clear acrylic lacquer.

B. Package components with anchors.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Aluminum subchannels and tread plates shall be:

1. Mill finish.

B. Solid abrasive tread shall be: Photoluminescent, color Black

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installer shall examine conditions under which work is to be performed and shall notify the

contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Installer shall not proceed until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install stair nosings in accordance with the governing regulations, the industry standards

applicable to the work, and the manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B. Work shall be aligned plumb, level, and, where required, flush with adjacent surfaces and

rigidly anchored to the substrate.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Contractor is to coordinate work within this Section with work of other Sections during the

remainder of construction. Protect work within this Section to prevent damage.



B. Finished units shall be without damage. Units damaged during shipping or construction shall be

repaired by the contractor at the expense of the party damaging the material, in accordance with

the contract requirements.

3.5 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITY

A. Any variation from this specification resulting in additional cost to any other contractor or

subcontractor on this project shall be the sole financial responsibility of the contractor for the

work of this section.



COLUMN COVERS 05580-1

SECTION 05580 - COLUMN COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section includes snap-together metal column covers in stainless steel finish.

B. Refer to Section 05500 Metal Fabrications for treatment of stainless steel material.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Latest Edition. Applicable standards.

B. American Welding Society (AWS)


C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

D. Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI) - "Fastener Standards Book"

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):





Wire and Wire Rods


Studs



F. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers


G. SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual



1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square

Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.

E. Qualification Data: For stainless steel fabricator.

F. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.

G. Maintenance Data: For stainless-steel finish to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Passivation Certification.

I. Refer to Section 05500 Metal Fabrications for additional requirements for stainless steel

materials.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing column covers similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as

sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Stainless steel fabrications shall be from a manufacturer who has a dedicated facility for the

assembly, welding, and polishing of stainless steel. The manufacturer should have dedicated

tooling, fixtures, and machine tools, for the manufacturer of stainless steel products. Dedicated

is defined as exclusively used for the use on stainless steel materials. This is to avoid

contamination with other metals, especially carbon steel.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups of typical column covers.

2. Refer to Section 05500 Metal Fabrications for additional requirements for stainless steel

materials

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:



A. Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs

or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished

surfaces.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a one-year warranty on all fabrications against fabrication and

finish failure, mill scale, rusting, corrosion, rust stains, and / or discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




2.2 SNAP-TOGETHER COLUMN COVERS

A. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated

below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that engages continuous mounting clips.

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316.

a. Finish: No. 4.

2. Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after

fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view.

3. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or

both, as needed to provide flat surfaces where indicated.

4. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining

sheets in flush alignment.

5. Form returns at vertical joints to provide hairline V-joints.

6. Fabricate column covers with hairline horizontal V-joints produced by forming returns on

mating ends of column cover sections. Locate horizontal joints as indicated.

7. Apply manufacturer's recommended sound-deadening mastic to backs of column covers.


A. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise

indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers and for attaching them to

other work unless otherwise indicated.



B. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by column cover manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining

construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and

surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.

B. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush

surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible.

After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet

finish.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.

2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES:

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

C. Non-directional Satin Finish: No. 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of column

covers.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place column covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform

cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers.

1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items

with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing,

or provide new units as required.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible.

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and

openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on

concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials

that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean stainless steel finish according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that

leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required

alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective

coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL RESTORATION AND CLEANING 05900-1

SECTION 05900 - METAL RESTORATION AND CLEANING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Description: Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services necessary for cleaning,

repair, and reinstalling existing metal as indicated. Clean metal only where cleaning is

indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 01 – General Requirements


C. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product proposed for use in the

work. Include instructions for handling, storage, and application of each product. Include test

data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit floor plans/elevations, locating each metal piece, and identifying each

with a sequential number, which corresponds to that metal piece. Do not use the same number

for more than one piece. Also on the plan, or in the schedule, show the size of each piece.

C. Qualification Data: For metal refinishing specialist.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For chemical cleaning of metal.

E. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificates: Submit signed certification that materials are in accordance with the

specified requirements.

F. Photographs: Submit photographs of each metal piece as it exists in place prior to dismantling.

Show surface on which metal piece is mounted so that it can be identified, and label each

photograph with space name and metal piece number.




A. Metal Cleaning Specialist: A qualified metal cleaning specialist. Cleaning specialist shall be

experienced in using mechanical and chemical methods on the types of metal surfaces indicated.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of decorative metal cleaning processes on existing surfaces to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Prepare

mockups so they are inconspicuous.

1. Cleaning: Prepare an area approximately 2 sq. ft. for each process on each type of metal

indicated for treatment.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Delivery:

1. Schedule delivery of materials at the site at such time as required for proper coordination

of work. Receive materials in manufacture’s unopened packages and bearing

manufacturer’s label.

B. Storage and Handling:

1. Store materials in a dry and well ventilated place, adequately protected from damage and

exposure to the elements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Materials:

1. Surfactant: A non-ionic surface-active agent composed of an anhydrous mixture of

alkylaryl polyether alcohols.

a. Source:

1) Triton X-100 by Rohm and Haas Company, or approved equal. Triton X-

100 is available from Fisher Scientific Company, 201-796-7100; J. T. Baker

Chemical Co., 201-859-2151; and various photographic supply stores.

2) Equivalent products by other manufacturers will only be considered for use

after safety and effectiveness have been demonstrated through 1)

Description of chemical and physical properties and effects; and 2)

Comparison testing at site.

2. Ethanol: Industrial grade, denatured ethanol.

3. Water: Clean, potable, and free of acids and other deleterious substances.



4. Brushes: Medium stiffness nylon bristle, natural bristle, or stiff animal hair brushes

selected for maximum cleaning efficiency but with least potential for surface injury to

material being cleaned.

B. Color: Color to match cleaned existing finish of representative metal pieces designated by the

Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for protecting surrounding surfaces

from liquids used in cleaning. Continuously collect and dispose of liquids and other waste.

1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical solutions being

used unless products being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use protective

materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply masking agents to comply with

manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or

porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive

staining.

2. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil

erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water

penetration into building interiors.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Remove all loose dirt and dust with soft bristle brushes.

B. Wash with a surfactant solution:

1. Prepare a 2 percent solution of surfactant (2-1/2 fluid ounces to one gallon of warm

water).

2. Pre-wet area to be cleaned with warm water.

3. Wash surfaces with surfactant solution applied to a soft lint-free cloth. Thoroughly wash

all surfaces, including recesses and crevices. Use small soft brushes or cotton swabs to

reach into narrow crevices. Control and collect run-off of solution; do not allow it to

contact other surfaces.

4. Rinse surfaces with ethanol applied to a soft lint-free cloth. Thoroughly rinse all

surfaces, including recesses and crevices. Control and collect ethanol; do not allow it to

contact other surfaces.

5. Remove dirt built-up in crevices with acetone applied to cotton swabs after the initial

surfactant washing and rinsing.

6. Repeat washing and rinsing procedures as necessary to remove all dirt and surfactant

residue.

3.3 REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF METAL PIECES



A. Perform removal work in a systematic manner and use such methods as required to complete

the work indicated on the Drawings and as needed for completion of the work and the project

objectives in accordance with the requirements of the Project Specification.

B. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting

methods least likely to damage metal to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or

small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize

disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

C. Neatly trim and cut metal slats as needed as per project scope.

D. Clean metal pieces of dirt and extraneous material


A. Touch-up scratches and other defects with same paint as used for refinishing. Remove, strip,

polish, refinish, if touch-up work is unacceptable to the Engineer, until completed work is

acceptable.

B. Wipe completed work carefully with a soft cloth to remove fingerprints and dirt and leave in

perfect condition.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide fire retardant rough carpentry work as shown and as specified per Contract Documents,

including, but not limited to:

1. Wood grounds, blocking, and nailers

2. Fire resistant treated plywood

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements



E. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Lumber: American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20 by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

B. Grading Rules:

1. Douglas Fir, Hem-Fir, Idaho White Pine, and other Western Wood Products Association

(WWPA) or West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

2. Southern Pine - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPEB).

C. Preservative Treatment: American Wood Preservers' Association (AWPA) and American Wood

Preservers Bureau (AWPB) standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.

1. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, bio-based, and indigenous materials


B. Quality Control Submittals



1. Engineered Wood Products: Provide documentation that composite wood and agrifiber

products are third-party certified as meeting ANSI standard requirements for

formaldehyde emissions and/ or contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

a. ANSI A208.1 – 1999, Particleboard

b. ANSI A208.2 – 2002, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior

Applications

C. Letter of Certification(s) for Sustainable Forestry:

1. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber

supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC "Principles for Natural Forest Management" and

identify certifying organization.

a. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item

basis.

b. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers.

2. Sustainable Forestry Board: Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier.

Indicate compliance with the Sustainable Forestry Board’s Sustainable Forestry Initiative

(SFI) and identify certifying organization.

a. Submit SFI certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item

basis.

b. Submit copies of invoices bearing the SFI certification numbers.

D. Letter of Certification for Pressure Treatment: Submit Certification from treating plant stating

chemicals and process used and net amount of preservatives retained are in conformance with

specified standards.

E. Shop Drawings:


Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including rough carpentry





requirements.




and approval prior to fabrication of the rough carpentry.


A. Fabricator’s Qualifications: All fabricators shall have experience in the successful

completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance

requirements.



B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for

fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the

classification marking is representative of the material tested.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


requirements for metal wall panels.


A. Delivery:


of the work. Receive materials in manufacturer’s unopened packages and bearing


B. Storage and Handling:

1. Store materials in a dry and well-ventilated place, adequately protected from damage and

exposure to the elements.

2. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide

air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General


a. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, bio-based, and indigenous materials


B. Lumber:

1. Furnish seasoned dimensional lumber dressed to nominal sizes indicated with 19 percent

maximum moisture content.

2. Concealed board lumber, less than 2" thick: Southern Pine No. 3 (SPIB), any species No.

4 (WWPA) or any species Standard (WCLM)

3. Miscellaneous Lumber - grounds, nailers, and blocking: standard grade, No. 3 grade, or

better grade unless otherwise indicated; Douglas Fir, Hem-Fir, Idaho White Pine or

Southern Pine.

C. Plywood Backing Panels



1. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness

indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

D. Fasteners and Anchoring Devices:

1. Provide items of type required for secure installation of the work. Items shall be

galvanized for exterior use. Unless indicated otherwise, comply with the Federal

Specifications applicable to each type.

2. Fasteners and anchors for wood treated with waterborne preservatives shall be hot-dip

galvanized or stainless steel if the wood will be exposed to moisture.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials:

1. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with

fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per

test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of

significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,

and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline

of the burners at any time during the test.

a. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

b. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above

for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being

subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior

locations and where indicated.

c. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or

less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity

d. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to

ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according

to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where

high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with

adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme

fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

3. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

4. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified

testing agency.

a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or

back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment

compliance issued by testing agency.

5. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations

shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

6. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.



F. Preservative Treatment: Pressure-treat the following wood items, and other items indicated on

the drawings, with waterborne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2 (for above-ground

use). Re-dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent after treatment.

1. Blocking, cants, and similar members used in conjunction with roofing, copings,

waterproofing and related flashing and trim.

2. Blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with exterior masonry and

concrete (including interior wythe of exterior walls), and all sills for framing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wood Nailers, Blocking, and Grounds:

1. Provide items where required for attachment of other work.

2. Size and space fasteners as required to support applied loading.

3. Counter-sink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into

masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to form work

before concrete placement. Shims shall be cedar shingles or redwood wedges.

B. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and

as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96

inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to

close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at

ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not

inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width

as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to

limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below

partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more

than 20 feet o.c.

C. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Provide all wood blocking, attachment strips, rough framing

and sheathing at coping coverings, canopy fascias, metal covered work, base flashing, railing

sleeves and similar locations where indicated or required. Wood shall be preservative treated

by pressure method as specified.

D. Plywood: Install with grain texture perpendicular to bearing members edges and ends occurring

only over bearings.

E. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities

requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.



F. Rough Hardware: Provide all rough hardware, such as nails, screws, anchors, bolts, buck

anchors, clips, brackets, braces, fittings, and other rough hardware required for the proper

fitting, connecting, and erecting of the work.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet

enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



METAL WALL PANELS 07420-1

SECTION 07420 - METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies requirements for:

1. Impact resistant aluminum composite metal wall panel with plywood core, attachments

and sealants. Removable where indicated on drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing

D. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry

E. Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal

F. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM C481 - Laboratory Aging of Sandwich Constructions.

3. ASTM E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building

Construction.

4. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

5. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors.

6. ASTM E289 - Linear Thermal Expansion of Rigid Solids with Interferometry.

7. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.

8. ASTM E331 - Water Penetration for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.

9. ASTM D1781 - Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives.

10. ASTM - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA 501 – Water Penetration using Dynamic Pressure.

2. AAMA 605.2 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on

Architectural Extrusions and Panels.



3. AAMA TIR-a11 - Maximum Allowable Deflection of Framing Systems for Building

Cladding Components at Design Wind Loads.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:

1. Design system to accommodate movement of components without buckling, failure of

joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subjected to

temperature and humidity ranges reasonably anticipated.

2. Design system to accommodate tolerances of structure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for sustainable design submittal

requirements:



B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, flashings, drainage, ventilation,

profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and

textures. Drawings must locate all proposed reveals and fasteners for removal


Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including metal wall panel





requirements.




and approval prior to fabrication of the metal wall panels.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 3 inches

by 5 inches representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance

characteristics and physical properties.



2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with

specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements.

G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

H. Maintenance Data: For metal material panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation

during construction, approving acceptable installer and approving application method.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in

installation of work similar to that required for this project.

2. Panel Installer shall assume responsibility for all components of the panel system

including, but not limited to attachment to sub-construction, panel to panel joinery, panel

to dissimilar material joinery, and joint seal associated with the panel system.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly, including corner

supports, attachments, and accessories.


requirements for metal wall panels.



in writing.



D. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,

substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty

requirements.


A. Store panels horizontally, off-the-ground, in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for

installation.

B. Examine delivered materials upon receipt to insure that no damage has occurred during

shipment. Store metal-faced composite wall panels horizontally, covered with a suitable

weather tight and ventilated covering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure

dryness, with a positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall

panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface

damage. DO NOT allow storage space to exceed 120 degrees F.



C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim,

construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Finish Warranty: Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

1. Provide 20-year written warranty with PVDF fluoropolymer finish color coated metal

finish covering color fading, chalking, and film integrity.

2. Finish coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack or check.

3. Chalking, fading or erosion of finish measured by the following tests:

a. Finish coating shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in

accordance with ASTM D659.

b. Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 8 NBS units as

determined by ASTM D2244.

B. Material and Installation Warranty: Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

1. When installed as directed by manufacturer, panels covered by this warranty are

warranted not to delaminate (separate) at any manufacturer produced glue line for a

period of five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Sustainable Aspects: Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements”:

1. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, bio-based, and indigenous materials


2.2 MANUFACTURERS



A. Basis of Design - Laminators Incorporated; 3255 Penn St., Hatfield, PA 19440. ASD. Tel:

(215)723-8107. Toll Free: (877) OMEGA77. Fax: (215) 721-1239.

B. Citadel Architectural Products, Inc

C. High Standard Inc.

D. Or approved equal.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Impact resistant aluminum composite metal wall panel with plywood core, attachments and

sealants

1. Basis of Design – Omega-Ply Composite Panel manufactured by Laminators

Incorporated, or approved equal.

a. Panel Construction: Finished aluminum sheet over exterior grade plywood core

with backer sheet.

b. Panel Facing: Smooth face, minimum 0.021 inch thick, ASTM B209 aluminum

sheet.

c. Panel Backing: Random painted aluminum sheet, minimum 0.013 inch thick,

ASTM B209 aluminum sheet.

d. Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch.

e. Fire Test Performance: ASTM E84: Class A.

f. Bond Test Performance: ASTM C481-A Cyclic Aging: Pass.

g. Finish: Kynar 500 - PVDF fluoropolymer paint system meeting AAMA 2605.

h. Finish Colors: provide full line of manufacturers’ colors for Architect to select

from.

i. Silicone sealant: Silicone sealant must be installed around all outer edges of

plywood panels prior to installing panel within installation system.

B. Composite Panel Installation System:

1. Installation: 1-Piece Tight-Fit Extrusion with tamper resistant screws.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturer's Sealants and Accessories: Provide manufacturer's recommended sealants and

accessories for product installation.

B. Flashing: Fabricate flashing materials from 0.030 inch minimum thickness aluminum sheet

painted to match the metal panel system where exposed. Provide a 12 inch wide lap strap under

the flashing at abutted conditions and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non-hardening

sealant.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's

standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements



demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or

separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that

minimize noise from movements.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and

seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-

lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant

and to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view unless otherwise required to allow for

the panels to be removable.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored

or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel

manufacturer.

D. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel

manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with substrate installer present, for compliance with

requirements for structural soundness, installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other

conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine primary and secondary wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs,

and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within

alignment tolerances listed below.

a. 1/4 inch in any 20 feet length vertically or horizontally.

b. 1/2 inch in any building elevation.

2. Examine solid wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required.

3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by panel installer and substrate installer,

listing remedy for conditions detrimental to performance of work.



C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal panel

installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify SEPTA Project Manager

of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation guides and product data, including product technical

bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for

installation type selected.

B. Work shall be done and completed in a thorough and workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled

in their various trades.

C. Caulk Locations:

1. Use only approved sealants as described in manufacturer’s Installation Guidelines.

2. The sealant manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed in preparing and installing

sealants.

3. Joints to receive sealant shall be clean, dry and free from dust, grit and contaminants.

4. The sealant shall completely fill the pockets.

5. Caulk locations shall be coordinated with removable panels

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect

against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request, provide manufacturer's field service

consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product

installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mock-up: provide mock-up of two standard panels showing attachment and caulk joint. When

approved, mock-up will set the standard of final appearance for subsequent installation.


A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

B. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or

replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and

legally dispose of debris.

1. Use manufacturer’s cleaning procedure on mock-up panel for approval before cleaning

remainder of panels.



C. Protect installed products until completion of project.

D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1

SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials fabricate and install the following:

1. Drip edges, fascia extenders and trim.

2. Reglet mounted counterflashings.

3. Counterflashings at walls and penetrations.

4. Aluminium sill with stifners

5. Aluminum brake metal ceiling

6. Other components.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry

D. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B-209 Specification for aluminum sheet

B. ASTM B-221 Specification for aluminum extruded shape

C. FS QQ-L-201 Specification for Lead Sheet

D. ASTM A792-96 Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process

E. ASTM B32 Solder Metal

F. ASTM B209 Aluminum and Alloy Sheet and Plate

G. ASTM B486 Paste Solder

H. FS O-F-506 Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid

I. WH Warnock Hersey International, Inc. Middleton, WI.

J. FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet



K. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of this specification

B. Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for sustainable design submittals

requirements.



C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specification data sheets for each product.

D. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical external corner, internal corner,

valley, junction to vertical dissimilar surface, material and finish.

E. Shop Drawings

1. For shop fabricated coping caps, wall flashings, reglet counterflashings, and all other

sheet metal fabrications.

2. Shop drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening

methods, flashing, terminations, and installation details.

3. Indicate type, gauge and finish of metal.


Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including flashing and sheet metal





requirements.




and approval prior to fabrication of the flashing and sheet metal.

F. Manufacturer's Product Data

1. Metal material characteristics and installation recommendations

2. Submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or fabrication so that equivalent colors

to those specified can be approved


A. Reference Standards

1. Comply with details and recommendations of SMACNA Manual for workmanship,

methods of joining, anchorage, provisions for expansion, etc.



B. If required, fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial

Responsibility. The owner’s representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in

determining qualifications

C. Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized method for maintaining quality

control such as ISO-9001 approval.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


flashing and sheet metal.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact

and legible

B. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to

provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage

C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Material Manufacturer's Warranty

1. Pre-finished metal material shall require a written 20-year non-prorated warranty

covering fade, chalking and film integrity. The material shall not show a color change

greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D-2244 or chalking excess of 8 units per

ASTM D-659. If either occurs material shall be replaced per warranty, at no cost to the

Owner

B. Contractor's Warranty

1. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized written warranty assuring that

all sheet metal work including caulking and fasteners to be watertight and secure for a

period of five (5) years from the date of final acceptance of the building. Warranty shall

include all materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop, and

make good any damage to other work or equipment caused by such leaks or the repairs

thereof

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General






B. Metal systems (drip edges, fascia extenders, etc.) are to be comprised of Aluminum unless

noted otherwise, coated on both sides with an epoxy primer and on the weathering surface with

a polyvinylidene fluoride (Kynar) coated finish. Reglet mounted couterflashings, equipment

counterflashings and slip flashings shall be mill finish

1. Materials: Note that all thicknesses included in this specification shall be considered

minimum material thicknesses or gauge. If a specific thickness indicated within the

specifications can be considered in conflict with a thickness indicated in the construction

drawings, the thicker dimension or gauge shall govern.

a. Aluminum ASTM B209, alloy 3105-H14, in thickness of .050” nominal for all

coping caps, drip edges and fascia extenders. All reglet mounted counterflashings,

equipment counterflashings and slip flashings shall have a thickness of 0.040”.

1) Minimum thickness of Aluminum to be specified in accordance with

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractor's National Association, Inc. recommendations and to prevent

oil canning / elastic buckling.

b. Color shall be selected by Architect from manufactures full color range.

Counterflashings, expansion joint covers and slip flashings shall be mill finish

C. Miscellaneous Metals and Flashings:

1. Equipment Slip Flashing: Mill finished Aluminum, 0.040 inch thick

2. Equipment Support Flashing: Mill finished Aluminum, 0.040 inch thick

3. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, used with an acid flux of type

recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer; use a noncorrosive rosin flux over

tinned surfaces

4. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead

5. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material

being fastened. Exposed fasteners shall have a neoprene or other suitable

weatherproofing washer

6. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur

and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat

7. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating

sealant

8. Sealing Tape: Pressure sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,

nonstaining tape

9. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and

weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal

10. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar

accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with

material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance



11. Stainless Steel Sheet: Type 316, ASTM A167, 24 gage, (0.0276"), annealed except dead

soft where fully concealed by other work, 2D (dull) finish

12. Copper Sheet: ASTM B370, 20 oz., temper HOO (cold-rolled)

13. Lead-Coated Copper Sheet: ASTM B101. Type I, Class A (12-15 1 lb. of lead coating

per 100 sq. ft.), 17.1 oz. (0.022")

14. Zinc Alloy Sheet: Zinc with 0.6% copper and 0.14% titanium; 0.27" thick (21 gauge);

standard (soft) temper, mil finish

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Metal Primer: Zinc chromate type

B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586

C. Sealant: As required by material manufacturer

D. Lead: Meets Federal Specification QQ-L-201, Grade B, four pounds per square foot

E. Solder: ANSI/ASTM B32; 95/05 type

F. Flux: FS O-F-506

G. Underlayment: Ply of specified base flashing modified membrane or approved equal

H. Fasteners

1. Nails and Fasteners: Non-ferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized fasteners complying

with ASTM A153 and connectors complying with ASTM A653, Class G185; Type 304

or Type 316 stainless steel fasteners and connectors shall be used with new generation of

pressure-treated wood and copper metal flashing system; aluminum or stainless steel

nails shall be used with aluminum; and stainless steel nails shall be used with stainless

steel. Fasteners shall be self-clinching type of penetrating type as recommended by the

manufacturer of the wood blocking/nailer material. Nails and fasteners shall be flush-

driven through flat metal discs of not less than one (1) inch diameter. Omit metal discs

when one-piece composite nails or fasteners with heads not less than one (1) inch

diameter are used. Rivets for copper counterflashing shall be copper rivets.

2. Fastening shall conform to Factory Mutual 1-90 requirements or as stated on section

details, whichever is more stringent

I. Termination Bars:

1. Shall be aluminum unless otherwise recommended by membrane manufacturers

2. Material shall be .125” x 1” (minimum) aluminum conforming to ASTM B-221, mill

finish. Bar shall have caulk cup and holes for fasteners at 8” o.c. maximum



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect contact areas of dissimilar metals with heavy asphalt or other approved coating,

specifically made to stop electrolytic action

3.2 GENERAL

A. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress, or distortion, allowing

for expansion and contraction

B. Fastening of metal to walls and wood blocking shall comply with SMACNA Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual and/or manufacturer's recommendations whichever is of the highest

standard

C. All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of sheet metal installation, whether

specifically indicated or not, shall be provided and of the same material as item to which

applied

D. Cleats and metal fascia extenders shall be secured to wood blocking with approved wood

fasteners, and to the masonry wall with approved masonry anchors at 8” on center. Cleats shall

be at least one gauge heavier than the metal it secures

3.3 INSPECTION

A. Verify openings, sleeves, ducts, or vents are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips

located.

B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.

3.4 SHOP FABRICATED SHEET METAL

A. Installing Contractor shall be responsible for determining if the sheet metal systems are in

conformance with specifications minimum recommendations

B. Metal work shall be shop fabricated to configurations and forms in accordance with recognized

sheet metal practices

C. Hem exposed edges

D. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drip

E. All corners for sheet metal shall be lapped with adjoining pieces fastened and set in sealant



F. Joints for drip edges and metal edge fascia extender system shall be formed with a 1/4” opening

between sections. The opening shall be backed by an internal drainage plate formed to the

profile of fascia piece. The metal coping cap and drip edge shall be embedded in two rows of

sealant over the internal drainage plate. The internal drainage plate shall be embedded in two

rows of sealant over the continuous cleat and fastened through the opening between the

sections and loose locked to the drip edges. Joints for counterflashings shall be overlapped a

minimum of 2”.

G. Install sheet metal to comply with Architectural Sheet Metal manual, Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractor's National Associations, Inc.

H. Provide stiffener ribs as required to ensure no oil canning of any surface in public view

3.5 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Reglet Mounted Counterflashing

1. Reglet shall be provided with watertight accessories such as miters, transitions, end caps,

etc. and finished to match

2. Accessories: Joint covers, corners, fasteners, strip flashing at joinings, fastening, and

other accessories shall be included

a. Cut reglet in masonry one joint above flashing

3. Caulk top of the termination bar and flashing system with sealant to provide a watertight

seal

4. Secure reglet counterflashing with expansion fasteners and caulk reglet opening

5. Adjacent counterflashing pieces shall overlap a minimum of 2”.



FIRESTOPPING 07840- 1

SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Requirements for an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke and gases and for

maintaining the integrity of the rated firestopping at slabs and fire rated wall penetrations

1.2 RELATED WORK


1.3 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

A. International Building Code (2009)

B. International Energy Conservation Code (2009)

C. All other applicable local codes

1.4 RESTRICTIONS AND QUALITY CONTROL

A. Firestopping shall be approved for use in the State of Pennsylvania

1.5 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, data sheets, and installation instructions.

C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of

firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system,

submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping

system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent

fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to

submittal.



D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

F. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing firestopping

similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has

resulted in firestopping installations with a record of successful in-service performance

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

manufacturer


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using

natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping

systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers, with brand names, date of

manufacture, shelf life, and material designation clearly marked thereon

B. Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials

C. Do not subject to sustained temperatures exceeding 5 C (90 F) or less than 32 C (40 F)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MATERIALS

A. General


a. Material Selection: indigenous materials


B. Materials shall be manufactured by Hilti Corp., Isolatek International, Specified Technologies

Inc., 3M Company, United States Gypsum Co. or approved equal and shall comply with the

following minimum standards:

1. Flame spread: 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Smoke Density: 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Nontoxicity: Nontoxic to human beings at all stages of application and during fire

conditions.

4. Fire Resistance:

a. Materials shall be capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases

sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E119 time-temperature

fire conditions for one hour.

b. Materials used to seal openings between floor slabs and exterior walls shall be

capable of preventing flames and hot gases from passing when subjected to ASTM

E119 time-temperature fire conditions for one hour at a 2-inch wide opening

between floor slab edge and vertical wall assembly.

c. Material shall not require a rise in temperature to install or activate seal.

C. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

D. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined

per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage

when tested according to UL 1479.

4. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm

cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting

agency for conditions indicated.



1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

2. Substrate primers.

3. Collars.

4. Steel sleeves.

2.2 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors

and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of

the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during

exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or

inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil

on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,

fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant

additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect

pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and

cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.3 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,

comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate

proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer

speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products

of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings

immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of

developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles

remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and

migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and fire test reports.

B. Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration,

subject to tolerances established by the manufacturer. Firestopping for filling voids in floors in

which the smallest dimension of the void is 4-inches or more shall support the same load as the

floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent loading or

traffic in firestopped area.

C. Insulated pipes and ducts penetrating fire-rated floors and walls shall be insulated with materials

that provide the same performance as the firestopping material. This material shall extend a

minimum of 6-inches on each side of the opening. Vapor barrier of such insulation shall have a

perm rating of .03 maximum.

D. Firestopping at penetrations of electrical conduits shall comply with the requirements of NFPA

No. 70.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION



A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the

words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not

less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall

and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or

plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration

firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or

firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives

capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the

following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers

and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that

penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and

remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to

produce systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07841-1

SECTION 07841 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.


A. Section 01112 - Sustainable Design Requirements

B. Section 07840 - Firestopping for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal

assemblies, and smoke barriers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Product Data: For each type of product.

C. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of

firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-

resistance-rated assembly.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

F. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing firestopping


resulted in firestopping installations with a record of successful in-service performance


manufacturer


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate

temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when

substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural

means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed

according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL





A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to


2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide

rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing

agency.



1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

2.3 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases,

and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping

systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements

without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems

with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.

1. Hilti Corp., Isolatek International, Specified Technologies Inc., 3M Company, or

approved equal.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor,

or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than

25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

D. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming

materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required.

Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the

qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to

comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with

adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum

bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning

operation.




B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer

using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of

bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill

materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and

depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent

components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce

the following results:

1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to

achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.

3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish

to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels.

Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels are

visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or

self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on

which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management

of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.


A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint

firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If

damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or

deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-

resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT SEALERS 07900-1

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section covers all sealant and caulking materials and their application, wherever required for

complete installation of building materials or systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units



1.3 REFERENCES

A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are

referenced in text by basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 509-06: Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material.

2. C 612-14: Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

3. C 717-14a: Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants.

4. C 834-14: Latex Sealants.

5. C 919-12: Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.

6. C 920-14a: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

7. C 1021-08: Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants

8. C 1193-13: Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

9. C 1330-02: Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid

Applied Sealants.

10. D 1056-14: Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

11. E 84-15a: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI).

1. The Professionals’ Guide

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.



B. Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for sustainable design submittals

requirements.



C. Manufacturer's installation instructions for each product used.

D. Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.

Submit schedule for all sealant locations for selection and confirmation of color to coordinate

with each material and location.

E. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Caulking compound

2. Primers

3. Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in

contact with each other.

F. Shop Drawings:


Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including joint sealer components.

All related work, including work of related trades, shall be included into a compiled shop

drawing to document the entire system. Shop drawings shall indicate existing conditions

of the site including items that impact the assembly and field dimensions for layout

purposes. Refer to Section 04815 Glass Block Assemblies for requirements.




and approval prior to installation of joint sealers.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants


resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.


manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Obtain test results from a qualified testing agency based on testing current

sealant formulations within a 12-month period.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to

ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.



3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI’s Sealant Validation Program for

compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and

cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in peel, and indentation hardness.

4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing

standard specifications and test methods.

D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their

adhesion to joint substrates in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations:

1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer / Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer’s technical representative

present.

E. Project Conditions:

1. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under

following conditions:

a. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by

joint sealant manufacturer or are below 4.4 C (40 F).

b. When joint substrates are wet.

2. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint

widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated

3. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until

contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


joint sealers.

1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers, with brand names, date of

manufacture, shelf life, and material designation clearly marked thereon.

B. Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.

C. Do not subject to sustained temperatures exceeding 5 C (90 F) or less than 32 C (40 F).



1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights

Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace

elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified

in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Acceptance.

C. Standard Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant

manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Final Acceptance.

D. Warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants

from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by

structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




2.2 SEALANTS

A. S-1:

1. ASTM C 920, polyurethane or polysulfide.

2. Type M.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade NS.

5. Shore A hardness of 20-40



B. S-2:


2. Type M.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade P.

5. Shore A hardness of 25-40.

C. S-3:


2. Type S.

3. Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent.

4. Grade NS.


6. Minimum elongation of 700 percent.

D. S-4:

1. ASTM C 920 polyurethane or polysulfide.

2. Type S.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade NS.


E. S-5:


2. Type S.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade P.

5. Shore hardness of 15-45.

F. S-6:

1. ASTM C 920, silicone, neutral cure.

2. Type S.

3. Class: Joint movement range of plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent.

4. Grade NS.


6. Minimum elongation of 1200 percent.

G. S-7: Not Used

H. S-8: Not Used

I. S-9:

1. ASTM C 920 silicone.

2. Type S.

3. Class 25.



4. Grade NS.


6. Non-yellowing, mildew resistant.

J. S-10:

1. ASTM C 920, coal tar extended fuel resistance polyurethane.

2. Type M/S.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade P/NS.


K. S-11:

1. ASTM C 920 polyurethane.

2. Type M/S.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade P/NS.

5. Shore A hardness of 35 to 50.

L. S-12:

1. ASTM C 920, polyurethane.

2. Type M/S.

3. Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent.

4. Grade P/NS.

5. Shore A hardness of 25 to 50.

M. S-13:

1. Pourable Penetration Sealant, 1-Part, non-shrink.

2. ASTM C 920, polyether sealant.

3. Type S

4. Class 25

5. Grade NS.

2.3 CAULKING COMPOUND

A. C-1: ASTM C 834, acrylic latex.

B. C-2: One component acoustical caulking, non-drying, non hardening, synthetic rubber.

2.4 COLOR

A. Caulking shall match the adjacent finish and approved by the Architect and SEPTA Project

Manager.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING



A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with

joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications

indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Backup Rod Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density

to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.

2. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing

complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining

resilient at temperatures down to minus 32 C (minus 26 F). Provide products with low

compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant

depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-

adhesive tape where applicable.

2.6 FILLER

A. Mineral fiber board: ASTM C 612, Class 1.

B. Thickness same as joint width.

C. Depth to fill void completely behind back-up rod.

2.7 PRIMER

A. As recommended by manufacturer of caulking or sealant material.

B. Stain free type.

2.8 CLEANERS-NON POUROUS SURFACES

A. Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturer of sealants and sealant backing material free of

oily residues and other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent

non-porous surfaces and formulated to promote adhesion of sealant and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect substrate surface for bond breaker contamination and unsound materials at adherent

faces of sealant.

B. Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials.



C. Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimensions are within tolerance established by sealant

manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATIONS

A. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and SWRI.

B. Clean surfaces of joint to receive caulking or sealants leaving joint dry to the touch, free from

frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy

or impair adhesion.

1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable

of developing optimum bond with joint sealants.

2. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or

blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the

following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.


4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

C. Do not cut or damage joint edges.

D. Apply masking tape to face of surfaces adjacent to joints before applying primers, caulking, or

sealing compounds.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Apply primer to sides of joints wherever required by compound manufacturer's printer

instructions.

1. Apply primer prior to installation of back-up rod or bond breaker tape.

2. Use brush or other approved means that will reach all parts of joints.

a. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.

3.3 BACKING INSTALLATION



A. Install back-up material, to form joints enclosed on three sides as required for specified depth of

sealant.

B. Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the back-up rod and position the rod at

proper depth.

C. Cut fillers installed by others to proper depth for installation of back-up rod and sealants.

D. Install back-up rod, without puncturing the material, to a uniform depth, within plus or minus

1/8 inch for sealant depths specified.

E. Where space for back-up rod does not exist, install bond breaker tape strip at bottom (or back)

of joint so sealant bonds only to two opposing surfaces.

F. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.

3.4 SEALANT DEPTHS AND GEOMETRY

A. At widths up to 1/4 inch, sealant depth equal to width.

B. At widths over 1/4 inch, sealant depth 1/2 of width up to 1/2 inch maximum depth at center of

joint with sealant thickness at center of joint approximately 1/2 of depth at adhesion surface.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Apply sealants and caulking only when ambient temperature is between 5 degrees C and

38 degrees C (40 and 100 degrees F).

2. Do not use polysulfide base sealants where sealant may be exposed to fumes from

bituminous materials, or where water vapor in continuous contact with cementitious

materials may be present.

3. Do not use sealant type listed by manufacture as not suitable for use in locations

specified.

4. Apply caulking and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's printer

instructions.

5. Avoid dropping or smearing compound on adjacent surfaces.

6. Fill joints solidly with compound and finish compound smooth.

7. Tool joints to concave surface unless shown or specified otherwise.

8. Finish floor joints flush unless joint is otherwise detailed.

9. Apply compounds with nozzle size to fit joint width.

10. Test sealants for compatibility with each other and substrate. Use only compatible

sealant.

B. For application of sealants, follow requirements of ASTM C1193 unless specified otherwise.




A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as recommended by

sealant manufacturer:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric

sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter

B. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with

specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log.

C. Inspect tested joints and report on following:

1. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of

product and joint substrate.

2. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer’s field-

adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

3. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids.

4. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements

D. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed,

names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed,

adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant

dimensions.

E. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used

to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts

original sealant.

F. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or

noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove

sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Fresh compound accidentally smeared on adjoining surfaces: Scrape off immediately and rub

clean with a solvent as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.

B. After filling and finishing joints, remove masking tape.

C. Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition.

3.8 LOCATIONS

A. Exterior Building Joints, Horizontal and Vertical:



1. Metal to Metal: Type S-1, S-2

2. Metal to Masonry or Stone: Type S-1

3. Masonry to Masonry or Stone: Type S-1

4. Stone to Stone: Type S-1

5. Threshold Setting Bed: Type S-1, S-3, S-4

6. Masonry Expansion and Control Joints: Type S-6

7. Wood to Masonry: Type S-1

B. Metal Reglets and Flashings:

1. Flashings to Wall: Type S-6

2. Metal to Metal: Type S-6

C. Sanitary Joints:

1. Walls to Plumbing Fixtures: Type S-9

2. Pipe Penetrations: Type S-9

D. Interior Caulking:

1. Typical Narrow Joint 6 mm, (1/4 inch) or less at Walls and Adjacent Components: Type

C-1, C-2.

2. Perimeter of Doors, Windows, Access Panels which Adjoin Concrete or Masonry

Surfaces: Type C-1, C-2.

3. Joints at Masonry Walls and Columns, Piers, Concrete Walls or Exterior Walls: Type C-

1, C-2.

4. Exposed Isolation Joints at Top of Full Height Walls: Type C-1, C-2.

5. Concealed Acoustic Sealant Type S-4, C-1, C-2.



METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 1

SECTION 08100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


1. Stainless steel doors and frames



B. Section 08700 – Hardware

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): Materials and testing standards as identified throughout this Section.

1. A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. C236 Test Method for Steady State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by

Means of a Guarded Hot Box 3. C976 Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a

Calibrated Hot Box 4. E152 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI A117.1: Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.

C. Door Hardware Institute (DHI): Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 252: Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.

E. Steel Door Institute (SDI):

1. ANSI/SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2. ANSI/SDI-105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 3. ANSI/SDI-112 Galvanized Standard Steel Doors and Frames 4. ANSI/SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 10B, Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.



G. Definitions:

1. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. 2. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to

ANSI/SDI A250.8

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements” for sustainable design submittals requirements.

1. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, and indigenous materials 2. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, where applicable.

D. Samples

1. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches.

2. Doors: Include section of vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement.

3. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels if applicable.

E. Product Schedule

1. Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Refer to Section 05500 for requirements for stainless steel fabrications.



B. Applicable Standards: Specifications and standards of SDI 100-98.

C. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of span.

D. Supplier Qualification: Qualified direct distributor of products to be furnished. The distributor shall have in their regular employment an A.H.C./C.D.C. or person of equivalent experience who will be available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect, Contractor and the SEPTA Project Manager regarding any matters affecting the total door and frame openings.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Installer Qualification: Experience with installation of similar materials.

G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certificate or label from approved independent testing and inspection agency, indicating that door and frame assembly conforms to requirements of design, materials and construction as established by individual listings for tested assemblies.

I. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have Temperature Rise Rating of 450 degrees F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

J. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication

K. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Performance: Level B, SDI A250.4.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Or Engineer’s approved equal

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General


a. Material Selection: recycled, recyclable, and indigenous materials b. Material Emissions and Pollutant Control

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 316

C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

D. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

E. Frame Anchors:

1. ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.



2. Stainless-steel sheet. Same type as door face. 3. For anchors built into walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners:

1. Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy

Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

I. Minimum gauges of hollow metal are specified below. Provide heavier gauge if required by details or specific condition. Entire frame and sidelight shall be of same gauge. 1. 16 gauge: Labeled frames (or heavier if required by label) 2. 14 gauge: Door frames, window-wall and window frames. 3. 16 gauge: Doors. 4. 20 gauge: Trim members.

J. Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled stainless steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

2.4 HEAVY DUTY DOORS AND FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Construct doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Door and Frame Finish: Stainless Steel sheet cladding, Type 316, #4 Finish 3. Construction: seamless 4. Welded Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.031-inch- thick, stainless-steel vertical stiffeners

extending full-door height, spaced not more than 6 inches apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.

5. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, 0.062-inch thick stainless

steel.



a. Spot welded to both face sheets.

B. Stainless-Steel Frames: Fabricate stainless-steel frames of construction indicated, with faces of corners mitered and contact edges closed tight.

1. Frame Construction: Machine mitered and full (continuously) welded.

a. Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Louvers: Provide louvers for idoors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.032-inch- thick, cold-rolled stainless steel sheet set into 0.05-inch- thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof and Vandalproof Louver: Stationary weatherproof louvers constructed with horizontal inverted-V blades, integral bird/insect screen.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.062-inch- thick stainless steel with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter, stainless-steel bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

4. Minimum four (4) anchors per door jamb, 24 inches on center maximum.

B. Head: Provide minimum of two (2) anchors at frames over 2'-6" wide; 24 inches on center, maximum.

C. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.



B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 2) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Door and frame shall be factory finished.

1. Finish door and frame with stainless steel cladding as indicated above.

a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.



F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide fixed frame moldings on on secure side of doors and frames. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops and installation types

indicated.

G. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section 08700 " Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.



b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Metal Doors: Fit metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6

mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).



d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Refer to requirements of Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications for information regarding stainless steel finish.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08310- 1

SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

B. Refer to 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces for custom access panel fabricated from perforated

metal ceiling plank material.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Section 04220 – Concrete Masonry Units

C. Section 09290 – Gypsum Board

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details,

fire ratings were required, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each

type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 mm) in size, in

specified finish.

E. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including

types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a

single manufacturer.

B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which

may vary slightly from sizes indicated.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to

concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work.


A. Deliver work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and project site

storage. Do not use unvented plastic

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Acudor Products, Inc.

2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.

3. Milcor Inc.

4. Or approved equal

C. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

1. Locations: Walls

2. Size: 24”x 24” unless otherwise noted

3. Door: Minimum 0.062-inch, 16 gage, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.

Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4 (match adjacent)

4. Frame: Minimum 0.062-inch, 16 gage with 1-1/4-inch wide, surface-mounted trim.

Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4 (match adjacent)

5. Hinges: Continuous piano.

6. Latch: lockable cylinder lock

D. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from un-coated steel sheet

1. Locations: Ceilings

2. Quantity: 3, minimum

3. Size: 24”x 24” unless otherwise noted

4. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch 16 gage, set flush with exposed face flange of frame, factory

primed. Top finish coat to match ceiling color and finish.

5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch 16 gage with 1-1/4-inch wide, surface-mounted trim,

factory primed. Top finish coat to match ceiling color and finish.

6. Hinges: Continuous piano.

7. Latch: lockable cylinder lock



2.2 STEEL MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove tool and

die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel

sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed

to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

E. Plaster Beads: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet with

flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster.

F. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

G. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish

attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports

indicated.

1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated.

2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.

3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable

metal masonry anchors.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when

closed.

1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic

grommets and install in holes cut through finish.



2.4 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,

conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal

primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

E. Stainless-Steel Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2. Polished Finish: No. 4 finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of

cross scratches.

a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels

aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



HARDWARE 08700-1

SECTION 08700 - HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish

all the hardware as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 08100 – Metal Doors and Frames

1.3 REFFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute - ANSI 156.18 - Materials and Finishes.

B. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for making buildings and facilities usable by physically

handicapped people.

C. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association.

D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.

E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.

G. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies.

H. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

I. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

J. Pennsylvania State Building Code.

K. SDI - Steel Door Institute.

L. WDI - Wood Door Institute.

M. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.

N. NAAM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.


HARDWARE 08700-2


A. Hardware: shall be suitable and adapted for its required use and shall fit its designated location.

Should any hardware as shown, specified or required fail to meet the intended requirements or

require modification to suit or fit the designated location, determine the correction or

modification necessary and notify the Architect in ample time to avoid delay in the manufacture

and delivery of hardware.

B. Fire rated openings: provide hardware complying with NFPA Standard No. 80 requirements of


C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: The Hardware Supplier shall have been regularly engaged

in the sale and distribution of Hardware for projects of comparable scope and size. The

Hardware Supplier shall have an AHC of the Door and Hardware Institute on staff who will be

responsible for overseeing the scheduling, detailing, ordering, and coordinating of Hardware,

and shall be available for consultation with the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner,

during progress of construction. The Hardware Supplier shall be a direct factory authorized

distributor for all Finish Hardware items being furnished in accordance with this Specification.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Submittals: shall be in accordance with Conditions of the Contract, Division 1, and

Specification sections.

C. Hardware submission: Submit hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the

“Sequence and Format for Hardware Schedule” pamphlet published by the Door and Hardware

Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking.

D. Hardware schedule shall clearly indicate architect’s hardware set and manufacturer of each item

proposed.

E. Hardware Supplier shall provide all product information, wiring diagrams, and electrical data to

the Electrical Contractor.

F. Samples: Submit samples as requested by Architect. Do not proceed with installation until

samples have been approved. Approved samples may be installed in the work after substantial

completion of work.


A. Pack finish hardware in manufacturer's containers, complete with trimmings, bolts, screws,

washers, etc., as required for application. Each container shall bear a suitable label which shall


HARDWARE 08700-3

state the quantity and kind of contents of said container, as well as identifying marks relating to

the approved Hardware Schedule and its location in the project.

1. Knobs, handles, pulls and other items of finish hardware with easily damaged finishes

shall be individually wrapped before placing in containers and with sufficient sheet cloth

or cotton-backed paper which shall be adequately secured all as necessary to protect the

finishes.

2. Finish hardware shall be delivered, as directed, to the building site or the factories of the

various fabricators of metal or wood work to which such hardware is to be applied.

Deliver hardware in the order required and in ample time to permit application at the

building, or fabricators' shops, within the time required for the completion of the

building.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Field Service: The hardware supplier shall assign a competent representative, acceptable to the

Architect, to be at the job site each time a major shipment of finish hardware is received. Such

representative shall assist in "checking in" these shipments and shall secure a receipt covering

the contents of each shipment. In addition, such representative shall be available for immediate

call to the job site when, in the opinion of the Architect, his presence is necessary.

B. Templates: Promptly following approval of the Hardware Schedule by the Architect, furnish

and deliver template information, to the fabricators, of items to which finish hardware is to be

applied.\

1. Such deliveries shall be made in ample time to avoid delays in such work of said

fabricators. Provide drawings, schedules and detailed information to other trades as

necessary for them to accommodate and prepare their work to receive the finish

hardware.

C. Cooperation and Coordination: Prior to the installation of any finish hardware, all parties and

trades having responsibility to any of all of the openings for the job, shall meet in a pre-

construction meeting, for instruction on the proper installation of finish hardware with the

manufacturer’s representative.

1. Cooperate and coordinate work with that of other trades supplying materials or

performing work in contact with, connecting to, underlying, or overlaying the work of

this Section.

2. Provide complete data of requirements for work of this Section to those other trades

whose work is affected by or dependent upon the work of this Section.

3. Furnish all items to be built into other work in ample time to avoid delaying the progress

of such work.

4. Examine all drawings covering the work of this Section and refer to all other drawings,

including mechanical and electrical drawings, which may affect the work of this Section

or require coordination by this trade.

D. Existing Conditions: Verify all existing conditions in the field to ensure compatibility with

hardware specified in the Hardware Sets herein. Any discrepancies between the existing field

conditions and hardware specified shall be brought to the attention of the Architect


HARDWARE 08700-4

immediately. Hardware Supplier shall not order any hardware until all discrepancies are

rectified and the Architect grants written approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type

of finish hardware are indicated herein. Products are identified by using appropriate hardware

designation numbers.

B. Sustainable Aspects: See section “01112 Sustainable Design Requirements”



2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide hardware as indicated in hardware sets. Products other than those listed in the sets may

be considered, provided that they are proven to be of equal quality and have equal performance

to those products specified. See product description for each type of product for details on

performance and quality requirements. The architect reserves the right to review and approve

all proposed equivalents.

B. Additional hardware items: Provide hardware items required to complete the Work in

accordance with these specifications and manufacturers’ instructions, including items

inadvertently omitted from this specification. Note these items in submittal for review.

2.3 HANGING MEANS

A. Hinges

1. In general, where new hinges are to be provided at existing frames, existing condition

must be verified before determining which hinge shall be provided so that new hinges

will fit existing frame cut out size and locations.

2. Doors up to 60” in height shall be furnished with two hinges. Furnish one additional

hinge for each 30” of door height or fraction thereafter.

3. Hinges shall be of types, sizes and materials as required to suit door weights thickness

and fire ratings.

4. Unless otherwise specified, hinges shall be heavy weight. Doors over 3’-4” in width

shall receive 5 x 4½ .190 gauge hinges.

5. Hinge sizes shall be detailed so that the least amount of projection shall be visible from

the frame.

6. Unless otherwise specified, hinges shall have concealed ball bearings (combination anti-

friction or oil impregnated) and three (3) knuckles.

7. All hinges shall have non-rising pins.

8. All keyed reverse bevel doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins.


HARDWARE 08700-5

9. Hinge Series: Hager series, see hardware sets for sizes.

10. Approved Equals: Stanley FBB series, Ives 5BB1HW series.

2.4 MORTISE LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS

A. Mortise Locksets

1. Lock cases to be constructed with a protected leading edge and screw configuration that

limits access to operating parts.

2. Lock cases are to be multi-functional that transform into different functions without

opening the lock case.

3. Lock components to be manufactured of zinc dichromate plated steel. Manufacturers

utilizing plastic parts, spacers and/or bushings are not acceptable.

4. Lock components to incorporate a spring loaded fusible link for Fire/Life Safety.

Manufacturers utilizing gravity, fusible link are acceptable.

5. Latch bolts to have a standard 2 ¾” backset with a full ¾” throw.

6. Latch bolts to be non-handed, field reversible without opening the lock case.

7. Latch bolts to be 2-piece anti-friction, manufactured from stainless steel. Solid latch bolts

and/or plastic anti-friction devices are not acceptable.

8. Cylinders to be secured by a cast stainless steel, dual retainer. Manufacturers utilizing

screws and/or stamped retainers are not acceptable.

9. Manufacturers utilizing an exposed toggle on edge of door as “locked indicator” are not

acceptable.

B. Lever Trim

1. Lever assembly (external) to be one-piece design attached by threaded bushing. Lever

assembly (internal) shall be attached by screwless shank. Lever attachment by common

tools (allen nuts and/or set screws) are not acceptable.

2. Thru-bolt lever assemblies through the door for positive interlock. Manufacturers

utilizing a through the door spindle for attachment are not acceptable.

3. Levers to have independent rotation in both directions.

4. Spring cages are to be incorporated into the lever assemblies.

5. Hub blocking plate to be solid, cast stainless steel. Manufacturers utilizing open hub

designs are not acceptable.

6. Spindles to be independent, designed to “break-away” at a maximum of 75psi torque.

C. Thumb turns

1. Thumb turn and back-plate to be manufactured from castings and comply with ANSI 117

accessibility standard.

D. Deadbolts

1. Deadbolts to be 1 ¾” total length; have standard 1” throw with a minimum ¾” internal

engagement when fully extended.

2. Deadbolts to be constructed of stainless steel, incorporating a security roller pin with a

minimum Rc60 rating for surface hardness.

E. Strikes


HARDWARE 08700-6

1. Strikes to be non-handed and bridged to ensure dead latching. Manufactures utilizing

fillers of any kind for deadlatch engagement are not acceptable.

2. Mounting tabs are to be automatic self adjusting, vertically and horizontally for door

bevel and strike alignment.

F. Lock Series & Design: Schlage L Series Heavy Duty Mortise Locks, lever trim as specified in

hardware sets

G. Approved Equals: Falcon MA Series, Sargent 8200 Series.

H. Certifications:

1. Provide mortise locksets that comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational

Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims.

2. Provide mortise locksets that comply with UL10C and UBC 7-2 positive pressure

requirements.

3. Provide mortise locksets that comply with ANSI/ASTM F476-76 Grade 40, UL Listed

for locksets utilizing concealed cylinders.

2.5 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices shall be touch bar type, as specified in hardware sets.

1. Furnish stainless steel touch bars on all exit devices

2. Touch bar and touch bar end caps shall overlap the mechanism case.

3. Touch bar sub assembly shall be minimum .160” thick, with minimum .060 supports.

4. Touch bar surface shall be minimum 2-1/4” high x 18” long for 36” doors, and minimum

2-1/4” high x 24” long for doors wider than 36”.

5. Exit device touch bars shall be equipped with a fluid sound dampening feature.

B. Furnish exit devices, less bottom rod, on all cross corridor pairs of doors, where doors are for

compartmentalization only

C. Rim and Mortise type devices shall have ¾” throw latch bolt. Surface and Concealed Vertical

Rod devices shall have 5/8” throw latch bolts.

1. Latch bolt security deadlocking shall be standard.

D. All fire doors shall receive devices U.L. listed Fire Exit Hardware

E. Furnish roller strikes, which interlock the door to the frame (499F) for all rim devices and

surface vertical rod devices.

F. All internal springs shall be compression type.

G. Where lever trim is specified, levers shall match the balance of the project.

1. Escutcheons of all lever trim shall be forged brass or bronze, with (4) thru-bolts

anchoring trim assembly to exit device chassis

2. Levers shall be solid forged brass or bronze

3. Lever return springs shall be compression type.


HARDWARE 08700-7

4. Cylinders shall be recessed from face of escutcheon.

H. Lever trim shall be breakaway type. When rotational force of 35 ft.lbs. is applied, lever trim

appears to break. Lever trim can be reset to normal function, without disassembly

1. Lever shall be protected by a shear pin, which will withstand a rotational force of 55

ft.lbs. before shearing, to prevent further damage to lever. Lever shall not separate from

the escutcheon.

I. Furnish all necessary Glass Bead Kits where exit device may interfere with raised glass beads

on doors.

J. Certifications:

1. Devices shall be Underwriters Laboratories™ listed for Panic Hardware (FVSR) SA163

2. Fire Devices shall be Underwriters Laboratories™ listed Fire Exit Hardware (GXHX)

R4501, A Label

3. Cycle Testing: Exit devices shall be certified by an independent testing lab for 1,000,000

cycles.

K. Exit Device Series & Design: Von Duprin 22 series exit devices with outside trim as specified

in hardware sets.

L. Approved Equals: Falcon 25 series, Sargent 80 Series.

2.6 CLOSERS

A. All surface closers shall exceed ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 requirements in all aspects as called for

below. All closers shall have certification by an independent testing laboratory of 10,000,000

cycles without failure.

B. Closer cylinders shall be cast iron. Closer pinions shall be dual heat treated. Pinion and piston

shall be steel alloy. Piston diameter shall be minimum 1-1/2”.

C. Closers shall be barrier free with spring tension adjustable from size 1 to size 5.

D. Closers shall maintain control of the door in all conditions. Closers shall have 3 non critical

adjusting valves: latch, main and backcheck. Backcheck shall take affect at 45 (AVB) degrees

of opening for parallel arm closers and 70 degrees for regular arm closers. Closers with

pressure relief valves are not acceptable.

E. All closers shall have forged main arms. Forearms of parallel arm closers shall be forged.

Parallel arm brackets shall be forged. All parallel arm joints shall have bronze bushings with

minimum 5/8” diameter pins. Cylinders, arms, brackets and mounting plates shall be powder

coated.

F. Provide all plates, brackets and special templates when needed for interface with particular

header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. Consult factory for special

template (“ST” suffix to closer number) pricing.


HARDWARE 08700-8

G. All closers shall be installed so that closer bodies are positioned on room side of doors to and

from corridors. Out-swing doors shall have an extra heavy duty parallel arm (EDA). Parallel

arm shall be used on connecting doors between rooms.

H. All exterior closers shall have all weather fluid that does not require seasonal adjustment to

control speed of door, and shall exhibit the same viscosity from -30 F to +120 F.

I. All closers shall have a powder coated aluminum finish on cylinder, arm and accessories.

There shall be a full metal, powder coated cover.

J. Furnish all brackets, drop plates and any other necessary hardware required to insure proper

installation.

K. All Closers shall comply with UL 10C requirements for positive pressure testing.

L. All closers shall be of one manufacturer’s products. All closers shall be inspected after

installation by a factory representative to insure proper adjustment and operation.

M. All closers shall be through bolted.

N. Closer Series: LCN 4011/4111 series.

O. Approved Equals: Falcon SC70 Series, Sargent 281 Series

2.7 DOOR STOPS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all door stops shall be wall mounted with concealed fasteners Ives

WS407CCV/CVX series. Where wall stops will not function for the application, furnish floor

mounted stops Ives FS436/438 series.

2.8 OVERHEAD STOPS

A. Overhead Stops: Stainless steel. Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Provide

field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions. Coordinate templates for door and

wall conditions and neighboring hardware. Furnish drop plates at locations where regular arm

closer are used in conjunction with overhead stops. See hardware sets for specific model

numbers.

2.9 PROTECTION PLATES

A. All kick plates and mop plates unless otherwise noted shall be 8” high x 2” less door width

(LDW), beveled three sides x .050 thick

2.10 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS

A. Manual Flush Bolts: Shall be Ives FB458/FB358 series, furnished with DP2 dustproof strikes

for all bottom bolts. Top bolts shall be furnished with proper extensions to allow for easy

operation.


HARDWARE 08700-9

B. Self Latching Flush Bolts: Shall be Ives FB51P/FB61P series, furnished with DP2 dustproof

strikes for all bottom bolts. Furnish wear plates as required.

C. Automatic Flush Bolts: Shall be Ives FB31P/FB41P series, furnished with DP2 dustproof

strikes for all bottom bolts. Furnish wear plates as required.

D. Coordinators: Shall be Ives COR series. Furnish all fillers, mounting brackets, carry bars and

special cut outs for use with exit devices, as required. Finish shall be black.

2.11 KEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Final keying: requirements to be determined by the SEPTA Project Manager and reviewed by

SEPTA locksmith. A meeting must take place between the SEPTA Project Manager, and the

hardware distributor prior to cylinders being ordered, to establish the keying requirements and

required keyway.

B. Key System: Tie into the existing interchangeable-core key system coordinate with SEPTA

Locksmith.

C. Provide Concealed Key Control (CKC) keyset symbol stamping on the side of each master

keyed core. Provide visual key control for all operating and master keys.

D. Construction keying: provide brass keyed-alike temporary cores plus 10 operating keys for all

cylinders, interior and exterior.

E. Provide: Three (3) change keys for each differently keyed lock. Provide (3) control keys for

construction cores, and (3) control keys for permanent cores. Provide 10 copies of each level

Master Key, Grand Master Key, and/or Great Grand Master Key. Permanent keys and cores:

secured shipment direct from point of origination to the SEPTA Project Manager . Provide

bitting list, ship direct from point of origin to the SEPTA Project Manager upon project

completion.

F. Provide a key control system including envelopes. Labels, tags with self-locking key clips,

receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard

metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of

the number of locks required for the project.

1. Provide four hinged panel type cabinet for wall mounting.

2.12 WEATHER SEALS AND THRESHOLDS

A. Weather Seals and Thresholds: Zero as Scheduled.

B. Perimeter seals: shall be of compressible black Neoprene material. Housing shall be solid alum

stock. Furnish seals on three sides of the opening. Coordinate the amount of material is

required in each specified opening.

C. Seals shall be mechanically fastened to door frame.

D. Door sweeps: shall be extruded aluminum and black neoprene sweep.


HARDWARE 08700-10

1. Fasten door sweeps with wood screws for wood doors and sheet metal screws for hollow

metal and fiberglass reinforced doors.

2. Door sweep shall be 1 ¼” in overall height with a ½” high neoprene sweep.

3. Mount door sweep on the exterior side of the door, with the neoprene engaged with the

threshold or finish floor.

E. Thresholds: shall be extruded aluminum meeting ADA requirements. They shall not exceed ¼”

in height with a wall thickness of .125” unless specified otherwise. Coordinate templates for

any and all hardware, which may require cutouts or slots within the threshold for the proper

installation of that hardware.

1. Furnish threshold with non-slip epoxy abrasive bonded within the grooves of the

threshold.

2. Thresholds shall extend a minimum of 1” past the exterior face of the door, and have

returned closed ends.

3. Set all thresholds in grout, and seal with silicone caulk.

4. Fasten thresholds with expansion shield mounting at masonry sub-straight locations, and

wood screws at wood substrate locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS

A. Factory trained and certified, and carries a factory-issued card certifying that person as a

"Certified Installer”.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation.

B. The installer shall notify the architect, in writing, of all unacceptable condition that could affect

the proper operation of the finish hardware.

C. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and

security codes.

D. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match

locations of existing hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-

mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true

to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and

operation.


HARDWARE 08700-11

1. Unless otherwise specified, locate all hardware in accordance with the recommended

locations for builders hardware for standard doors and frames as published by the Door

and Hardware Institute.

2. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc.

Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom

pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.

3. Unless otherwise specified or detailed, install thresholds with the bevel in vertical

alignment with the outside door face. Notch and closely fit thresholds to frame profile.

Set thresholds in full bed of sealant.

4. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement

exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws.

5. Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall.

6. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

7. Shim doors as required to maintain proper operating clearance between door and frame.

8. Use only fasteners supplied by or approved by the manufacturer for each respective item

of hardware.

9. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give

to the SEPTA Project Manager items not scheduled for reuse.

10. Where necessary, adjust doors and hardware as required to eliminate binding between

strike and latchbolt. Doors should not rattle.

11. Install door closers on corridor side of lobby doors, room side of corridor doors, and stair

side of stairways.

12. Adjust spring power of door closers to insure exterior and fire rated doors will

consistently close and latch doors under existing conditions. Adjust all other door closers

to insure opening force does not to exceed 5 lbs.

13. Adjust "sweep", "latch", & "back check" valves on all door closers to properly control

door throughout the opening and closing cycle. Adjust total closing speed as required to

comply with all applicable state and local building codes.

14. Deliver to the SEPTA Project Manager 1 complete set of installation and adjustment

instructions, and tools as furnished with the hardware.


A. After installation has been completed, the hardware supplier and manufacturers representative

for locksets, door closers, exit devices, and overhead stops shall check the project and verify

compliance with installation instructions, adjustment of all hardware items, and proper

application according to the approved hardware schedule. Hardware supplier shall submit a list

of all hardware that has not been installed correctly.

B. After installation has been completed, the hardware supplier and manufacturers representative

shall meet with the SEPTA Project Manager to explain the functions, uses, adjustment, and

maintenance of each item of hardware.


A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to

operate freely and smoothly.


HARDWARE 08700-12

B. At final completion, and when H.V.A.C. equipment is in operation, installer shall make final

adjustments to and verify proper operation of all door closers and other items of hardware.

Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by the manufacturer.

C. All hardware shall be left clean and in good operation. Hardware found to be disfigured,

defective, or inoperative shall be repaired or replaced.

D. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to

acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance or

occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area.

Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.

3.6 EXTRA STOCK

A. See hardware sets for additional hardware. Additional hardware is to be delivered directly to

the SEPTA Project Manager for maintenance purposes.

B. Extra screws shall be furnished to the contractor for installation purposes. See hardware sets

for a detailed listing of extra screws.

C. All extra hardware items, fasteners, and special installation tools are to be turned over to the

SEPTA Project Manager at completion of the project.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware systems, including adjustment and

maintenance procedures.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc.

Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process.

3.9 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.


HARDWARE 08700-13

Hardware Group No. 01

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr

3 EA HW HINGE BB1199 4.5 X 4.5 NRP US32D HAG

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 22-NL-06 626 VON

1 EA RIM CYLINDER TO MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 MIS

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN

1 EA WALL STOP WS401CCV 626 IVE

3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE




1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070L 06A 630 SCH

EA MORTISE CYLINDER TO MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 MIS



1 EA THRESHOLD 656A MSLA-10 AL ZER





1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L 06A 630 SCH

1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER TO MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 MIS






HARDWARE 08700-14


Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr


1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE



1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE

2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB

(PROVIDE MB TO SUIT HM FRAME

DETAILS)

689 IVE

2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA ST-1384 689 LCN

2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE






3 EA HW HINGE BB1199 4.5 X 4.5 US32D HAG





1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER





1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 22-EO 626 VON

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 CUSH 689 LCN





DECORATIVE FILMS 08873 - 1

SECTION 08873 - DECORATIVE FILMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Decorative films for application to the back of glass block assemblies.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 04815 - Glass Block Assemblies

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate application of decorative glazing with glass block assemblies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For decorative glass. Show fabrication and installation details. Include the

following:


Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including decorative film. All related

work, including work of related trades, shall be included into a compiled shop drawing to

document the entire system. Shop drawings shall indicate existing conditions of the site

including items that impact the assembly and field dimensions for layout purposes. Refer

to Section 04815 Glass Block Assemblies for requirements.

2. After shop drawings are approved, a Mockup is required per “Quality Assurance” Article.



and approval prior to installation of the decorative film.

C. Samples: 12 inches square:

1. Each decorative film.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer and for decorative film manufacturer

E. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.



G. Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative film to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has documented manufacturing

decorative films similar to that used for this project.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect or SEPTA Project Manager.




concrete masonry units.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials in manufacturer's protective packaging.

B. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent

damage from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Ambient Conditions: Maintain temperature, humidity, and ventilation within limits

recommended by manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace films that fail within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of original installation.

2. Warranty coverage limited to owner of property at time of installation.

3. Manufacturer’s obligation is limited to furnishing replacement film for any film covered

by limited warranty which manufacturer determines to be defective. Manufacturer will

not be liable for installation costs of replacement film or for any special, indirect,

incidental or consequential damages.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Llumar

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=12295&mf=04&src=wd



B. 3M

C. Or approved equal

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of decorative film from single source from single

manufacturer.

2.2 DECORATIVE FILMS

A. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, 2-mil- minimum

thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable

protective backing.

1. Basis of Design: Llumar Dusted Frost

2.3 DECORATIVE-GLASS FABRICATION

A. Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free

from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in single sheet completely overlaying the

back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including surface

preparation and application temperature limitations.

2.4 DECORATIVE FILM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories either manufactured by or acceptable to decorative film

manufacturer for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces

contacted in installation.

B. Adhesive: Pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive system.

C. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by decorative film manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance

of decorative film including glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any

way.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation.



B. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation.

C. Prepare substrates using methods recommended by decorative film manufacturer to achieve the

best results for the substrate under project conditions.

D. Protect glazing frames and surrounding surfaces to prevent damage during installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install film continuously, in one (1) continuous length per individual glass block. Install with

no gaps or overlaps. Make seams non-overlapping.

C. Do not remove release liner from film until just before each piece of film is cut and ready for

installation.

D. Install film with mounting solution and custom cut to the glass with neat, square corners and

edges to within 1/8-inch of glass block frame.

E. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other defects. Be careful to remove “fingers” to eliminate any

contamination or excess water pockets. It is crucial to remove as much water as possible during

installation.

F. A final squeegee pass over the entire pane using a Blue Max Blade with an extended handle

design (or Thor’s Hammer) is recommended.


A. After installation, view film from a distance of 10 feet against a bright uniform sky or

background. Film shall appear uniform in appearance with no visible streaks, wrinkles,

banding, thin spots or pinholes.

B. If installed film does not meet these criteria, remove and replace with new film.


A. Remove excess mounting solution at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

B. Use cleaning methods recommended by decorative film manufacturer.

C. Replace films that cannot be cleaned.

D. Protect installed products until completion of project.

E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 09100-1

SECTION 09100 – METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.




C. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing

D. Section 07420 – Metal Wall Panels

E. Section 09290 – Gypsum Board

F. Section 09545 – Special Ceiling Surfaces

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.




1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is

according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel

Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members."

C. Shop Drawings:


Assemblies shall be submitted as a complete system including metal support assembly







requirements.




and approval prior to fabrication of the metal support assemblies.


A. Contractor to submit calculations and/or certification by an Engineer registered in the

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania that all components and systems comply with Code

requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

C. Refer to Section 04815 Glass Block Assemblies for mockup requirements for metal support

assemblies.


A. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,

and handling.

B. Store metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL





A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.



1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gauge min

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in

thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner

and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide

lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer

runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The).

2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

3) Or approved equal

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with

movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;

in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.

b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

c. Or approved equal

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth:1-1/2 inches



2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound

transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-

steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment

flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit

insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Existing ceiling system on site shall be utilized for the gypsum board ceiling.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.





A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members.

Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacing indicated, but not greater than spacing

required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to existing substrate.



2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall

with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven

fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange

extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring

channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more

than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



GYPSUM BOARD 09290-1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01112 “Sustainable Design Requirements”

B. Section 05400 “Cold-Formed Metal Framing” for structural steel framing and suspension

systems that support gypsum board panels.

C. Section 09100 "Metal Support Assemblies" for non-structural steel framing and suspension

systems that support gypsum board panels.

D. Section 09300 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.




C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory

indicated.


A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects

and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

b. Each texture finish indicated.



2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on

exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.




A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

B. Manufacturer:

1. United States Gypsum Company (USG)

2. Flintkote Company

3. Georgia Pacific

4. Domtar Gypsum America Inc.

5. National Gypsum Company (Goldbond)


C. General






2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board, tested according to

ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.

1. Core: 5/8 inch thick

2. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements.

3. Indentation: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements.

4. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements.

5. Hard-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements

according to test in Annex A1.

6. Long Edges: Tapered.

7. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with

manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thick

2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.



1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use [setting-type taping] [drying-type, all-purpose] compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and


B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.



B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge

trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural

surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Impact-Resistant Type: Ceiling surfaces

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally

(perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated

assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.



3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with

no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a

uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to

ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect].

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.

3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.



3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall

application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



TILE 09300-1

SECTION 09300 - TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Requirements for porcelain wall tile; WT-1, WT-2, WT-3 and WT-4, as indicated on the

contract documents

B. Requirements for treatment of historic tile.

C. Requirements for granite wall base, G-1.

1.2 RELATED WORK




D. Section 03350 – Concrete Finishing

E. Section 04220 – Concrete Masonry Units

F. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers

G. Section 09290 – Gypsum Board

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A137.1 – Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile

2. ANSI A136.1 – Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile

3. ANSI A118.3 – Standard Specification for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-

Setting and Grouting Epoxy Adhesive

4. ANSI 108.1 – Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set

Method

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement

2. ASTM C207 – Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

3. ASTM C 615 - Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.

4. ASTM C897 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job Mixed Portland Cement

Based Plasters


TILE 09300-2

5. ASTM C631 – Standard Specification for Bonding Compounds for Interior Gypsum

Plastering

6. ASTM C926 – Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster

C. Tile Council of America (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation

D. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association Division of NAMM (ML/SFA): Specifications for

lathing and furring


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to treatment and replacement of historic tile

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Verify historic treatment specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to

make progress and avoid delays.

b. Materials, material application, and sequencing.

c. Historic tile treatment and replacement program

1.5 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Product Data: Written product information for each product, which demonstrates materials to

be used on the project comply with contract documents. Provide reference standard from TCA

for each installation type.

C. Shop Drawings: Showing tile layout and details of expansion joints in tile work and underlying

construction.

D. Samples of each type, class and color of tile, not less than 12 inches square, on plywood

backing, and grouted.

1. Trim and accessories: Samples of actual units in selected color.

2. Edge strips: 6-inch long samples.

E. Manufacturer's specifications, installation, and maintenance instructions for materials specified.

F. Certification: Submit Master Grade Certificates for each delivery of each tile type, signed by

tile manufacturer and installer.

G. Test Reports: Submit independent testing agency's certified test reports which demonstrate tile

materials and installation products comply with project requirements.


TILE 09300-3

H. Qualifications Documentation: Written confirmation that companies executing work in this

section comply with experience requirements.

I. Qualification Date: For historic treatment specialist.

J. Historic Treatment Program: For cleaning and replacement historic tile work.

K. Photographs: Submit photographs of each damaged tile as it exists in place prior to removal.

Show surrounding surface on which tile is mounted so that it can be identified, and label each

photograph with space name. No removals are to commence until the Architect has given

written approval to this submittal.

L. Pre-Construction Testing report.


A. Comply with applicable recommendations of the Tile Council of America (TCA) and ANSI

reference standards.

B. Meet the requirements of ASTM C-1028 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static

Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces.

C. Comply with United States Access Board ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

D. Comply with Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA) Guidelines

E. Provide tile of domestic manufacture, standard grade, conforming to TCA 137.1.

F. Furnish a "Master Grade Certificate" in the form acceptable in the above-referenced standard

for each type of tile, signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor, certifying the grade, type

and quantity of tile.

G. Provide temperatures in tiled areas during installation and after completion as required by

referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions, but not less than 50 degrees F.

H. If necessary to use temporary heaters, vent units to exterior to protect tile work from carbon

dioxide accumulation

I. Material Source: Furnish each type, finish, and color of tile product and accessory materials

from a single supplier.

J. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: A qualified historic tile cleaning and replacement

specialist. Specialist shall be experienced in using hand cleaning and removal methods on the

types of tile indicated.

K. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.




TILE 09300-4

L. Historic Tile Mockups: Prepare mockups of historic treatment cleaning and tile replacement

processes on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for

materials and execution. Prepare mockups so they are inconspicuous.

1. Scheduled work: Prepare an area approximately 2 sq. ft. for each process on each type of

tile indicated for treatment.



in writing.




A. Deliver and store tile products and setting materials in manufacturer's sealed packages. Protect

material from damage and store in dry location.

B. All historic tiles scheduled for removal are to be salvaged and handed over to SEPTA.


A. Provide temperatures in tiled areas during installation and after completion as required by

referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions, but not less than 50 degrees F.

B. If necessary to use temporary heaters, vent units to exterior to protect tile work from carbon

dioxide accumulation.

1.9 CLOSE OUT

A. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer’s instructions for each product

B. Extra Stock: Deliver one (1) percent or a minimum of one full container of each kind and type

of product used


A. Schedule delivery of materials at the site at such time as required for proper coordination of the

work. Receive materials in manufacturer’s unopened packages and bearing manufacturer’s label

B. Storage: Store materials in a dry and well-ventilated place, adequately protected from damage

and exposure to the elements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Provide, in required form, for a period of two (2) years from date of final acceptance by SEPTA

PM.


TILE 09300-5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL




B. Ceramic Tile Standard: ANSI A137.1.

1. Tile grade: "Standard Grade," unless noted otherwise.

C. Tile Installation Materials Standard: ANSI standard referenced for setting and grouting

materials.

D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns, Tile, Grout, and Other Products: Match colors indicated or as

selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standards.

1. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.

E. Color Blending: Factory-blend tile products which have a natural color range so products taken

from one box will have the same range as products from a separate box.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Porcelain Tile Type WT-1: Glazed wall tile

1. True by Pantheon, or approved equal

2. Size:3x6

3. Sheen: Polished

4. Tile Color and Pattern: As shown on Contract Drawings

5. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range

B. Porcelain Tile Type WT-2: Matte wall tile


2. Size:6 x12

3. Sheen: Matte



C. Porcelain Tile Type WT-3: Matte wall tile


2. Size:2x12

3. Sheen: Matte




TILE 09300-6

D. Ceramic Tile Type WT-4: Glazed wall tile


2. Size:1x1

3. Sheen: Polished



E. Trim units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and

matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from

manufacturer’s standard shapes:

1. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as

adjoining flat tile.

2. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces

designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

F. Historic tile:

1. Salvage: retain all existing historic tile when possible. If tile cannot be retained in place,

remove carefully to permit reinstallation or documentation for replacement. No pieces of

tile are to be thrown away without written permission from the Architect.

2. Replacement: as required, replace broken tiles. Replacement tiles shall be of the same

material, color, thickness, and finish as surrounding historic tile. Grout and mortar

composition shall be compatible with existing grout and mortar and shall match the color,

texture and appearance of surrounding historic grout and mortar.

2.3 STONE PRODUCTS

A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide those indicated.

B. Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated,

including cracks, seams, and starts.

C. Stone Tile, G-1:

1. Stone Type: Granite, complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.

2. Finish: polished

3. Edges: Square. All exposed edges shall be polished

4. Module Size: 24 inches long by height shown on Contract Drawings

5. Nominal Tile Thickness: 1/2 inch

6. Joint Width: 1/16 inch

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. For Ceramic and Porcelain Tile:

1. Portland Cement Mortar Installation: ASTM C150, Type I; white where required to

match samples


TILE 09300-7

a. Setting bed reinforcing: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches,

ASTM A 185; with W0.3 by W0.3, 0.0625 inch diameter, wire, ASTM A 82

except for minimum wire size.

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S, or ASTM C207, Type S.

3. Water: Clear and without deleterious substances.

4. Sand: ASTM C144.

5. Setting material composition shall match existing for replacement of historic tiles.

B. For Granite Tile:

1. Standard Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.1.

a. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for

nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

2.5 PIGMENTS

A. Pure mineral pigments, resilient to alkalis, non-fading and weatherproof, colors selected by the

Architect.

2.6 CLEAVAGE MEMBRANE

A. 4-mil polyethylene film, sealed at all edges and 1 inch sealed overlaps.

2.7 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Trowel applied membrane consisting of a liquid polymer and dry powder, job-mixed to form a

plastic paste, applied in multiple layers with continuous glass fiber reinforcement forming a

seamless waterproof membrane. Laticrete "Trowel Applied Waterproofing Membrane System",

Laticrete International, or approved equal.

2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Compatibility: Provide sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates for project performance conditions.

B. Refer to Section 07900 – Joint Sealants

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. For Ceramic and Porcelain Tile: Dry-Set Mortar: ANSI A118.1. Comply with TCA Formula

759 for use with impervious tile and with TCA Formula 763 for use with non-vitreous tile.

B. For Granite Tile: Unsanded Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6


TILE 09300-8

C. Grout for Tile: Color to match samples approved by the Architect. Manufactured by the

following or approved equal. Grout colors will vary to coordinate with varying tile colors at

each location and tile type.

1. L & M Surco Mfg., Inc., South River, N.J.

2. USM Corp., Upco Chemical Division, Cleveland, OH

3. H.B. Fuller Company, Palatine, IL


D. Fungus and bacteria-inhibiting agents as standard with the grout manufacturer.

E. Mortar and grout composition shall match existing for replacement of historic tiles.


A. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic,

designed specifically for wall applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge

material.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout

surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout

manufacturers.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Facial Dimensions of Stone Tiles with Polished Faces: Do not vary facial dimensions from

specified dimensions by more than plus or minus 1/64 inch.

B. Thickness of Stone Tiles with Polished Finish: Do not vary from specified thickness by more than

plus or minus 1/32 inch.

C. Joint Surfaces: Except for specified beveled or eased edges if any, dress joint surfaces square for

full depth of stone tile.

D. Backs of Tiles: Gage units by dressing backs of tiles smooth and flat. When tested with a 24-inch

straightedge, gap shall not exceed 1/32 inch.

2.12 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'

written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other

procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance

characteristics for installations indicated.


TILE 09300-9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify with the installer that substrate areas where tile is to be installed have been prepared

correctly, and that all backing materials have been installed. Correct unacceptable conditions

before start of tile work.

B. MEASUREMENTS: Take field measurements; report variance between plan and field

dimensions

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish products as indicated.

B. Ensure that substrates are in suitable condition to receive the work.

C. Factory Blending: Before start of installation verify that tile with an anticipated range of colors

has been correctly blended to achieve a uniform color range from tile package to tile package.

D. SCHEDULING: Do not apply floor tile in space requiring wall tile until wall tile setting is

complete

E. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Maintain minimum temperature of materials,

substrate and ambient air temperature above 50 degrees F during application and for at least 48

hours after each coat is applied. Do not apply when temperature exceeds 80 degrees F, or

during wet or windy weather conditions

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA

installation methods specified in stone and ceramic tile installation schedules. Comply with

parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are

referenced in TCNA installation methods specified in stone tile installation schedules, and apply

to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the installation of each material.

C. Wipe backs of stone tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed.

D. Do not exceed the following deviations from level or plumb, or from elevations, locations,

slopes and alignments shown:

1. Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 feet any direction plus or minus 1/8 inch at any locations 1/32 inch

offset at any location.

2. Joints: Plus or minus 1/32 inch joint width variation at any location; 1/16 inch in 3 feet

for deviation from plumb and true, and for other variations in alignment of joints.

3. Joint width in historic tile work shall match existing.


TILE 09300-10

E. Lay out tile work using field tile and trim shapes. Center tile fields both directions in each

space or on each wall area, and adjust to minimize tile cutting. Use uniform joint widths of 1/16

inch. Cut field tile, not trim shapes.

F. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures. Form a complete covering

without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without

disruption of pattern or joint alignments.

G. Provide expansion joints.

H. Install tile under or behind equipment and fixtures.

I. Carefully cut, drill, and grind tile to fit around items projecting through tile surface, so that

escutcheons or cover plates conceal cut edges.

J. Joint Patterns: Lay out tile according to patterns indicated on drawings, or if not shown, in a

grid pattern with floor joints aligning with wall and trim joints. Install joints straight and of

uniform width.

K. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone tile without

marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in

items for straight aligned joints. Fit stone tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and

other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap stone tile.

L. Cutting:

1. General: Do not use cut tile smaller than half size; use cut tile on outer edges of field

only

2. Smoothing: Level cut edges with carborundum stone; install no tile with jagged or flaked

edges

3. Splitting: Expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible

M. Curing:

1. General: Per referenced standards; keep damp for at least 72 hours

2. Horizontal Surfaces: Cover areas with curing paper

3. Epoxy Grout: Keep at a relatively even temperature during first 8 hours of cure

A. Finish cut stone tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by grinding and

honing cut surfaces to match factory-fabricated edges unless otherwise indicated.

N. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile meets another

surface that is flush with top of tile.

3.4 TILE APPLICATIONS

A. Interior Wall, Thin-Bed:

1. Tile: Ceramic and Porcelain

a. Installation method:


TILE 09300-11

1) Concrete and Masonry Walls: TCNA W202

2) Metal Stud Walls: TCNA W244E

3) Adhesive: Organic adhesive, ANSI A108.4

b. Grout: Sand-portland cement

2. Tile: Granite

a. Installation method:

1) Concrete and Masonry Walls: TCNA W202

2) Metal Stud Walls: TCNA W243

3.5 HISTORIC TILE REMOVAL, GROUT AND MORTAR

A. All tile to be removed must be photographed and documented prior to removal.

B. Remove tile that is cracked taking care not to damage adjacent tiles.

C. Tools used for removals shall neither shock, vibrate nor damage features to remain.

D. Historic tile and associated grout and mortar scheduled to be removed shall be removed by hand

method only. Use of hammer and chisel are not permitted.

E. Grout removal method shall be performed with a grout saw and/or dry-cutting diamond blade

mounted in an angle grinder or circular saw.


A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete per ANSI 108.1.

B. Replace any broken, chipped, marred, or otherwise damaged tile before final acceptance.

C. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile

manufacturer. Overlay completed tile installation with kraft paper for protection from

subsequent construction activities.

1. Do not allow any traffic on completed tile floors for minimum 7 days after completion.

2. Remove protection, rinse, and dry tile installations before final review and acceptance.

3.7 CLEANER FOR HISTORIC TILE

A. Cleaning product and method to be tested in an inconspicuous area as determined by SEPTA

PM.

1. Only nonabrasive, nonacidic cleaners are permitted.

2. Cleaning method shall be by hand with natural bristle or nylon brushes.

3. Tile shall be vacuumed clean prior to application of cleaning product.

4. Tile is to be thoroughly wetted with clean potable water prior to applying cleaner.


TILE 09300-12

5. Tile shall be rinsed twice with clean potable water after cleaner is removed.



TERRAZZO RESTORATION 09410 - 1

SECTION 09410 - TERRAZZO RESTORATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work related to the restoration of the existing Terrazzo flooring, indicated as Z-1 on the

Contract Documents; including, but not limited to:

1. Floor replacement,

2. Crack repair, and

3. Polishing of completed floor

B. Contractor is responsible for confirming existing terrazzo base system. New work shall be

compatible with existing terrazzo base system.

1.2 RELATED WORK



1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: For cast in place epoxy terrazzo, submit shop drawings showing large scale

details of layout, including divider strips, control joint strips, and base and border strips,

jointing, edge conditions, and showing elevations and plans for layout of work. Include details

of anchorage and other special features required. Include patterns and spacing showing

relationship and alignment of tile.

1. Clearly and precisely document all existing terrazzo conditions prior to demolition.

Indicate all locations where epoxy terrazzo abuts other materials, and coordinate

accordingly with other trades.

C. Samples:

1. Submit a maximum of three samples, minimum 12” x 12” showing full range of color,

type, texture, and pattern and finish of terrazzo.

2. Submit two 6” minimum lengths of border and base to match existing of divider strip to

match existing.

D. Maintenance Literature:



1. Submit two copies of maintenance recommendations of National Terrazzo and Mossaic

Association (NTMA) to maintenance product members of NTMA.

E. Certification:

1. Suppliers shall furnish certification attesting that materials meet requirements, and

guidelines specified by NTMA.

2. Suppliers shall furnish properly labeled material and Material Safety Data Drawings

which comply with current state and federal requirements.

F. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data, and installation instructions for

review.

G. Substrate Acceptability: Submit a certified statement issued by the manufacturer of the epoxy

terrazzo materials, and countersigned by the epoxy applicator, attesting that all areas to receive

epoxy terrazzo have been inspected and found satisfactory for the reception of this Work.

Application will be construed as acceptance of surfaces.


A. References:

1. Comply with recommendations of National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association (NTMA),

Guide Specifications, Terrazzo Design Data and Terrazzo Technical Data

B. Qualifications:

1. Installer specializing in the work of this Section with documented experience;

manufacturer approved.

2. Acceptable supplier:

a. Materials furnished shall meet NTMA Specifications and be supplied from a single

manufacturer with the experience providing materials of the types specified herein.

3. Installer qualifications:

a. Installer shall be a contractor member of NTMA and shall perform all work in

accordance with NTMA standards.

b. Contractor shall submit a list of completed projects of a similar magnitude and

complexity.

1.5 MOCK-UP

A. After approval of samples, cast a visual mock-up of each type, color, and finish of terrazzo,

including divider strips and sealants, in location as directed by the SEPTA Project Manager.

Alter or revise mock-up(s) as directed, to the complete satisfaction of the SEPTA Project

Manager, at which time they shall remain as the standard of workmanship for the Project.

Mock-up(s), if approved, may be utilized in the final work.




A. Delivery:




2. Deliver materials in a manner to prevent damage to containers and/or bags.

B. Storage And Handling:

1. Deliver materials, other than bulk materials, in manufacturer’s unopened containers, fully

identified with trade name, grade and color.

2. Store materials above grade, protected from the weather, soiling or damage from any

source. Store in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Closeout:

1. Guarantee: Provide, in required form, for a period of two (2) years from date of final

acceptance by Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




B. EPOXY TERRAZZO MATERIALS: The thin set epoxy floor system shall consist of the

following multiple components formulated by the manufacturer for compatibility and to provide

a complete floor system including epoxy primers, epoxy terrazzo matrix, epoxy filler, marble

chips, epoxy grout, filler, divider strips and sealer coats.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Primer: As recommended by Epoxy Resin Supplier.

B. Epoxy resin mixed according to manufacturer’s recommendation and tested without aggregate

added. All specimens cured for 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 degrees Fahrenheit and

50% plus or minus 2 R.H. The product shall meet the following requirements:



PROPERTY TEST METHOD REQUIREMENTS

HARDNESS ASTM D-2240 Shore D Durometer 75-88

TENSILE

STRENGTH

ASTM D 638

C307

4800 psi

2500 psi

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH

ASTM D 695, Specimen R cylinder 10,000 psi

FLEXURAL

STRENGTH

ASTM D580 or ASTM D790 6500 psi minimum

IMPACT

RESISTANCE

Gardner 100 in/lb

ABRASIVE

RESISTANCE

ASTM D4060 0.045 gm maximum

PROPERTY TEST METHOD REQUIREMENTS

WATER

ABSORPTION

ASTM D570 0.10% (24 hr immersion)

FLAMMABILITY ASTM D635 Self-extinguishing

LINEAR

EXPANSION

ASTM D696 25 x 10.6 inches @ 140F

C. Manufacturer: Provide epoxy terrazzo system as produced by one manufacturer for the entire

project. Products specified herein by proprietary designation are as manufactured by General

Polymer Company and establish the quality standards required. Equivalent products of others

will be considered provided they meet those established standards.

1. Epoxy Terrazzo: “#1100 Thin Set Epoxy Terrazzo, with 5371 Terrazzo Grout Additive”

(General Polymers or approved equal).

2. Crack Isolation/Waterproofing: “#3552 Epo-Flex Flexible Epoxy Membrane, with FS38

Fiberglass Scrim”. (General Polymers or approved equal). Clear epoxy isolation

membrane with 0.4 ox. Fiberglass scrim for crack isolation.

3. Primer: “3578 Universal Penetrating Primer” (General Polymers or approved equal).

Low viscosity, low modulus epoxy primer.

4. Sealer: Manufacturer’s water based sealer everywhere, except in toilets use “4685

Polyurethane Enamel seal coat” (General Polymers or approved equal).

5. Pigments: Pure mineral pigments, resistant to alkalies, nonfading and weatherproof,

colors as required to match existing and approved by Architect.

D. Marble Chips:

1. Size: To confirm with NTMA graduation standards.

2. Abrasion and Impact resistance when testing in accordance with ASTM C 131-89 shall

not exceed 40% loss.

3. 24 Hour absorption rate not to exceed 0.75 percent.

4. Chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter.

5. Dust content less than 1% by weight.

6. Color/Type: To match existing.

E. Strips:

1. Stop and divider “L” strips to match existing.



F. Terrazzo Cleaner: A liquid neutral cleaner, with Ph factor between 7 and 10, specially

compounded for cleaning terrazzo, as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealer and

complying with NTMA requirements.

G. Floor Sealer (for Interior Floors and Stairs): Colorless, slip and stain resistant penetrating sealer

with Ph factor between 7 and 10, which will not discolor or affect physical properties of the

terrazzo surface and be U/L listed as slip resistant.

A. Slip Coefficient

1. Slip coefficient of friction shall be in compliance with ANSI A117.1-2009 requirements.

2. Provide minimum wet static coefficient of friction of 0.8 for sloped surfaces tested per

ASTM C-1028-07.

3. Sign off from SEPTA Project Manager on texture for slip resistance must be complete

before installation of flooring system

2.3 MIXES

A. Terrazzo to match existing color, texture and finish:

1. The mix and proportions for the resin epoxy terrazzo shall be in accordance with the

recommendations of the epoxy resin manufacturer and the reviewed submitted samples.

2. For the terrazzo topping charge and mix the marble chips and epoxy resin in strict

accordance with the instructions of the epoxy resin terrazzo manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Prior to the start of the Work, and at the Contractor’s direction, meet at the Project site to review

material selections, methods and sequence of installation, special details and conditions,

standard of workmanship, quality control requirements, job organization, coordination with

other trades, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The meeting shall include the

Architect, the Contractor’s project superintendent, primary component materials suppliers, and

any other subcontractors whose work requires coordination with this Work.

3.2 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is

to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

B. Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of inserts for this work and

coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the

location and size of cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other work or

adjoining construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.

3.3 PREPARATION



A. Comply with NTMA specifications and recommendations, unless otherwise shown or specified

for preparation of substrate. Clean substrate of loose chips and foreign matter. Make

provisions for setting of boxes of recessed floor closers, and other inserts.

B. The installer shall visit the jobsite prior to beginning the installation of the epoxy thin-set

terrazzo flooring system to evaluate substrate condition, including substrate moisture content,

and the extent of repairs required, if any. Concrete substrates shall be tested to verify that the

moisture content of the substrate does not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests indicated below.

a. Test Method: Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by

terrazzo manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. The installer shall exercise care during surface preparation and system installation to protect

surrounding substrates and surfaces. Prepare the substrate to remove laitance and open the

surface, which shall be achieved by light brush grit blasting. Surface profile achieved shall be

similar to medium grit sandpaper and free from bond-inhibiting contaminants.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NTMA specifications and recommendations, unless otherwise shown or specified

for installation of strips, placing, curing, grinding, grouting and finishing of terrazzo.

B. Extend terrazzo work into recesses and under equipment in the spaces shown or scheduled to

receive terrazzo. Form a complete covering without interruptions or seams, except provide

divider strips and expansion joints to match existing. Place and finish terrazzo uniformly and

neatly around obstructions so as to achieve continuous color, pattern and finish throughout the

Work.

C. Complete terrazzo work prior to contiguous work which might be damaged by water, cement or

other materials used. Control and collect dust produced by grinding operations. Protect

adjacent construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations. Provide dustproof

partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust migration and to isolate areas from noise.

D. THIN SET EPOXY TERRAZZO INSTALLATION:

1. Prior to the start of the Work, examine the concrete substrates to assure that they are

whole and intact. Penetrations through the slabs shall be in their proper locations, secure

and at the right elevations. Prepare concrete substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s

written instructions including vacuum blasting to remove all contaminants or bond

breakers and other deleterious materials. Fill slab with epoxy resin and fiberglass tape, as

recommended by system manufacturer.

2. Comply with NTMA specifications and recommendations and manufacturer’s written

instructions for installation of strips, placing, curing, grinding, grouting and finishing of

epoxy terrazzo. Do not start work until a qualified representative of the epoxy terrazzo

manufacturer is present on the jobsite.

3. Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to 1/4 inch in 10

feet; non-cumulative.



4. Extend terrazzo work into recesses and under equipment in the spaces shown or

scheduled to receive terrazzo. Form a complete covering without interruptions or seams,

except provide divider strips and expansion joints where shown. Place and finish

terrazzo uniformly and neatly around obstructions so as to achieve continuous color,

pattern, and finish throughout the Work.

5. Complete terrazzo work prior to contiguous work which might be damaged by water,

cement or other materials used.

6. Prepare and prefill substrate cracks with membrane material and install the epoxy flexible

membrane onto the properly prepared slab to a thickness of not less than 40 mils in a

manner recommended by the manufacturer. Prepare epoxy membrane according to

manufacturer’s written instructions before applying substrate primer.

7. Install divider strips on the concrete sub-floor and trowel firmly along the edges to assure

positive anchorages. Install control joints trips where noted on the reviewed submittals.

Prior to placing the epoxy terrazzo prime the concrete sub-floor in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions

8. Apply the epoxy terrazzo matrix, filler and chips in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions, to a total of 3/8 in. thickness. Form bases to proper profiles by hand

troweling, in a manner recommended by the terrazzo manufacturer.

9. Immediately after the topping is placed, and as soon as the surface will bear weight,

apply a liberal coating of the curing material using an applicator according to the

instructions of the manufacturer. Apply to all areas thoroughly. Cure until topping

develops sufficient strength to prevent lifting or pulling of terrazzo chips during grinding.

10. FINISHING: Utilize the following procedure or as otherwise recommended by the

manufacturer:

a. Do not grind terrazzo floors or bases until they have developed sufficient strength

to prevent chips from pulling out. Ensure fluids from grinding operations do not

react with divider and control-joint strips and stain stone chips.

b. Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. Follow

initial grind with 80 or finer grit stones at interior locations only. Work shall be

ground so as to produce a non-slip surface. Hand grind bases and other areas as

required.

c. After grinding, thoroughly wash the surface with water and clean residue from

holes and recesses. Remove excess water with a vacuum or squeegee, and machine

or hand apply to fill all voids. Grout shall be identical to the in-place terrazzo

topping. Remove excess grout by grinding with 100 or finer grit stones.

d. Upon completion terrazzo shall be identical to the reviewed samples.

e. After final grinding, thoroughly clean the terrazzo surfaces, using a neutral

cleaning solution in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Apply sealing

compounds as per the manufacturer's directions.

E. SURFACE: Grout cured terrazzo topping in accordance with NTMA specifications and

requirements. Delay grinding and finishing until heavy trade work is completed and

construction traffic through the area is restricted. Finish by grinding with abrasive grit specified

by NTMA or as otherwise to match Architect's sample.

F. Cut out and replace terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate or underbed

including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. Cut out terrazzo areas in panels

defined by strips and replace to match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels according to NTMA's

written recommendations as reviewed by the Architect.



3.5 CLEANING AND SEALING

A. Clean finished terrazzo with cleaner in accordance with the recommendations of the sealer

manufacturer.

B. Apply sealer to cleaned terrazzo surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after

joint sealants have been installed. Apply the maximum number of coats of sealer recommended

by the manufacturer, but not less than 2 coats unless the manufacturer's instructions prohibit

multiple coats.

C. Not more than 2 days before occupancy or acceptance by Owner, clean terrazzo work as

recommended by the manufacturer of the sealer. Machine buff as recommended.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. After initial cleaning, rope off paving and flooring to permit curing of setting bed. Prohibit

traffic from installed terrazzo for a minimum of 72 hours.

B. Protect terrazzo flooring during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining

areas require construction work access cover terrazzo tile paving and flooring with a minimum

of 3/4 in. thick untreated plywood over nonstaining kraft paper. Protect work from damage due

to subsequent building operations.



SPECIAL CEILING SURFACES 09545-1

SECTION 09545 - SPECIAL CEILING SURFACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included:

1. Metal plank ceiling panels, C-1

2. Radial ceiling panels, C-2

3. Suspension system

4. Wire hangers, clips, wall angle moldings and accessories

5. Custom access panel within C-1

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 16 Electrical Work

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 641 “Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire”

2. ASTM C 423 “Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation

Room Method”

3. ASTM E 84 “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials”

4. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms

Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum

5. STM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products

6. ASTM E1477 “Standard Test for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by

use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers”

B. International Code Council Evaluation Service

1. AC156 - Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural

Components

1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.





B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of ceiling unit and suspension

system required

C. Samples: Mimimum 12 inch x 12 inch samples of specified metal panel; 8 inch long samples of

suspension system if applicable

D. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions as referenced in Part 3,

Installation

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Linear pattern.

2. Joint pattern.

3. Ceiling suspension members.

4. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

5. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and

access panels.

6. Ceiling perimeter and penetrations through ceiling; trim and moldings.

7. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of attachment devices.

G. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified requirements,

including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards

H. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide metal ceiling and suspension components produced by a

single manufacturer with resources adequate to deliver a product of consistent quality in terms of

appearance and physical properties for all project scopes without risk of delay or interruption.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer licensed to practice in the

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" to design

attachment devices.

C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify ceiling components with appropriate applicable, testing,

including:

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84:

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.



E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not

limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems,

and sprinklers

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.




A. Deliver system components in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages clearly labeled with the

following information: item number and quantity, manufacturer’s name and address, client name

and address and site address

B. Store components in a fully enclosed dry space where they will be protected against damage from

moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination and other construction activities

C. Exercise care in handling components to prevent damage to the surfaces and edges and prevent

distortion or other physical damage


A. Space Enclosure:

1. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. Products may

be installed where temperatures are between 32°F (0°C) and 120°F (49°C). Installations

shall not be exposed to abnormal conditions, namely: chemical fumes, presence of standing

water, or contact with moisture.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Ceiling System: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or

replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:

1. Ceiling Panels and Suspension System: Rust and manufacturing defects.

B. Warranty Period:

1. One (1) year from date of substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other

warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents

1.9 MAINTENANCE



A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials as per the SEPTA Project Manager. Furnish extra

materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for

storage and identified with appropriate labels

1. Ceiling Units: Furnish quanity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed

2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component

equal to 1 percent of amount installed

B. Deliver extra stock to the SEPTA Project Manager

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




2.2 MANUFACTURER

A. Suspension Systems:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Gordon-Inc

3. Rockfon


B. Ceiling Panels and Trim:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc

2. Gordon-Inc

3. Rockfon


2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. C-1 Basis of Design Product: Armstrong MetalWorks Plank Grid System, or approved equal.

B. C-2 Basis of Design Product: Armstrong MetalWorks Radial, or approved equal

C. Components:

1. U-Profile Carrying Channel

2. U-Profile Splice used to form continuous U-Profile carrying channel



3. Plug-in clip provided for attachment to U-Profile carrying channel

4. Wall Anchor

5. Wall Molding/Perimeter Treatment

D. Finish: All steel parts shall be chemically cleansed electro galvanized steel

1. Wall Molding Color: To match the actual color of the ceiling panel unless otherwise

specified

E. Hanger Wire: Hanger wire shall be galvanized carbon steel per ASTM A 641, soft temper, pre-

stretched, with a yield stress load of at least three (3) times design load, but not less than 12 gauge

(0.106”) diameter

2.4 METAL CEILING PANELS

A. Ceiling Panels C-1:

1. Surface Texture: Smooth

2. Composition: 0.028 inch thick electrogalvanized steel

3. Finish: Scrubbable, powder coat, post painted (applied after forming)

4. Color: As indicated on Contract Documents

5. Size: 72 inch x 16 inch

6. Edge Profile: Hook-on

7. Basis of Design: Metal Plank, 5330 (or approved equal), unperforated

8. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product

carton 0.10

9. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton

36

10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A per IBC

11. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; 0.77

12. Dimensional Stability: Standard

B. Ceiling Panels C-2:

1. Surface Texture: Smooth

2. Composition: 0.028 inch thick electrogalvanized steel

3. Finish: Scrubbable, powder coat, post painted (applied after forming)

4. Color: As indicated on Contract Documents

5. Size: custom

6. Edge Profile: Hook-on

7. Basis of Design: Metalworks Radial (or approved equal), unperforated

8. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product

carton 0.10

9. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton

36

10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A per IBC

11. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; 0.77

12. Dimensional Stability: Standard

C. Accessories:



1. Cutouts and apertures as appliacable for proposed fixtures in the ceiling system.

2. Infill Metal Panel Accessories:

a. 5336 - 4-1/2" Plank Trim

b. 5337 Seismic Spring

c. M311081 – Pressure Spring

d. M330003 – F Wall Angle RA4F

e. M330005 - F Wall Angle RA4F

f. M330011 - F Shadow Gap Wall Angle RA5F

D. Aluminum Custom Trim

1. Basis of Design Product/Manufacturer: Axiom by Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated

(or approved equal)

a. Trim Channel: 4in Axiom Classic Straight

b. Commercial quality extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel, factory finished in

baked polyester paint. Commercial quality galvanized steel unfinished T-bar

connection clips; galvanized steel splice plates.

1) 4in Axiom Classic Straight, AX4STR

2) Color: Match ceiling plank color

3) Size: 120IN x 4IN

2. Axiom Trim Channel:

a. 4in Axiom Classic Straight

3. Axiom Outside Corner Posts (Straight Only):

a. 4in Axiom Classic Outside Corner Post

4. Axiom Inside Corners (Straight Only):

a. 4in Axiom Classic Inside Corner Post

5. Axiom Accessories:

a. AX4SPLICE - Splice Plate with Setscrews

b. AXSPLICE - Splice Plate

E. Custom flush access door with concealed trim: Fabricated from ceiling planks.

1. Locations: ceiling cloud surface

2. Hinges: concealed continuous aluminum

3. Latch: lockable cam latch

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installer must inspect the area where the ceiling system is to be installed for conditions that may

affect the work and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions before

proceeding

B. All work above the ceiling system is to be satisfactorily completed prior to start of the ceiling

installation

C. All unsatisfactory conditions potentially affecting the ceiling system are to be corrected prior to the

start of ceiling installation

D. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete repair, terrazzo, plastering,

parging, and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine construction and conditions under which system will be installed. Do not proceed with

installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install the suspended ceiling system in accordance with the manufacturer’s shop drawings,

installation instructions, applicable industry standards, and the governing code of jurisdiction

B. Installed panels should be free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and

function

C. Install partial panels as shown on manufacturer’s shop drawings, but not less than one-half full size

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by

bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings

that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes

or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum

of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or

other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate to which hangers are attached and

for type of hanger involved.

5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of

each member.

6. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.



C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of linear metal ceiling area and where

necessary to conceal edges and ends of linear metal pans.

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more

than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in

12 feet . Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

D. Install suspension system carriers so they are aligned and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Cut linear metal pans for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by other work

through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling or

variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.

F. Install metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim.

1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in both

directions unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at borders

and around construction penetrating ceiling.

3. Install pans with butt joints using internal pan splices and in the following joint

configuration:

a. As indicated.

4. Where metal pan ends are visible, install trim unless noted otherwise.

5. Install filler strips as required.

G. Install hold-down clips as required.


A. Deflection of any grid components shall not exceed 1/360 of the span


A. Adjust ceiling components to provide a consistent finish and appearance in conformity with pre-

established tolerances and requirements. All panels showing signs of damage, either in finish or in

form are to be replaced. All exposed surfaces are to be cleaned of any dirt, grease, fingerprints and

marks or other imperfections with cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer.



EPOXY RESIN FLOORING 09705 - 1

SECTION 09705 – EPOXY RESIN FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to perform the work of this section as

shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This Section includes epoxy resinous flooring

system, R-1, R-2, B-1, and B-2.

1. Application Method: Metal, power or hand, troweled.




C. Section 03350 – Concrete Finishing

D. Section 03930 – Concrete Rehabilitation

E. Section 05550 – Stair Treads and Nosing

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data,

application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

C. Shop Drawings for floor design and integral cove base, including layout drawings coordinated

with the Active Wall submittals, installation, and related items which are aligned, based on

verified field conditions

D. Samples for Verification:

1. For each resinous flooring system required, minimum 6 inches square, applied to a rigid

backing by Installer for this Project.

2. Samples of transitions for each system, color, and type, minimum 6 inches long, applied

to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.

E. Product Schedule: Use resinous flooring designations indicated in Part 2 and room designations

indicated on Drawings in product schedule. Schedule to be coordinated with project specific

phasing and approved by the SEPTA Project Manager.



F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified

requirements.

G. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.

H. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system, by a qualified testing agency.

I. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in

applying resinous flooring systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service

performance, and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as

qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

2. Contractor shall have completed projects of similar size and complexity.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,

hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, through one source from a single manufacturer.

Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair

materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 48-inch square floor area selected by SEPTA Project

Manager.

2. Include 48-inch (1200-mm) length of integral cove base and the typical transition detail

for flooring colors

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

4. Sign off from SEPTA Project Manager on texture for slip resistance must be complete

before installation of flooring system.

D. Pre-installation Conference:

1. Contractor shall arrange a meeting not less than fifteen days prior to starting work.

2. Coordinate attendees with SEPTA Project Manager


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing

manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other

components.

B. Store materials to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other

detrimental effects.



C. All materials used shall be factory pre-weighed and pre-packaged in single, easy to manage

batches to eliminate on site mixing errors. No on site weighing or volumetric measurements

allowed.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions

for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions

affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate

permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after

application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

D. Concrete substrate shall be properly cured for a minimum of 30 days. Refer to Section 3 within

this specification for moisture test requirements of concrete substrate.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall furnish a single, written warranty covering both material and workmanship

for a period of five (5) full years from date of installation, or provide a joint and several

warranty signed on a single document by material manufacturer and applicator jointly and

severally warranting the materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) full years from date

of installation. A sample warranty letter must be included with bid package or bid may be

disqualified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, product that may be incorporated

into the work include,

1. Must comply with troweled mortar base with broadcast topping. Liquid rich, slurry type

systems will not be accepted, and will result in a disqualification from bid.

B. Acceptable Manufactures:



1. Basis of design: Stonhard, Inc.; Stonshield HRI

2. Dur-A-Flex

3. Sherwin Williams


C. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of available

colors.

2. Wearing Surface: Standard or medium texture. Texture must be in compliance with

requirements noted within “Slip Resistant” article within this Section and approved by

the SEPTA Project Manager

3. Integral Cove Base: As shown on Contract Drawings.

4. Overall System Thickness: nominal 1/4”.

D. System Components: Manufacturer's components that are compatible with each other and as

follows:

1. Sealant for metal and expansion joints:

a. Material Basis: Stonhard Stonflex MP7, or approved equal

b. Formulation Description: (2) two component polyurethane

c. Method: saw cut resinous system and fill void with MP7 product

d. Number of Coats: (1) one

2. Positive side vapor barrier:

a. Refer to Section 3 Preparation Article of this Specification for use requirements of

this product.

1) Basis of Design: Stonhard Stonfill OP2, or approved equal.

3. Primer:

a. Material Basis: Stonhard Standard Primer, or approved equal

b. Resin: Epoxy

c. Formulation Description: (2) two component, 100 percent solids.

d. Application Method: Squeegee and roller.

e. Number of Coats: (1) one.

4. Mortar Base:

a. Material design basis: Stonclad GS, or approved equal

b. Resin: Epoxy.

c. Formulation Description: (3) three component, 100 percent solids.

d. Application Method: Metal Trowel.

1) Thickness of Coats: nominal 3/16” (inch).

2) Number of Coats: One.

e. Aggregates: Pigmented Blended aggregate.

5. Undercoat:



a. Material Basis: Stonshield undercoat, or approved equal

b. Resin: Epoxy

c. Formulation Description: (2) two-component, 100% solids, UV Stable.

d. Type: Clear.

e. Finish: Gloss.

f. Number of Coats: one.

6. Broadcast Media:

a. Material Basis: Stonshield quartz aggregate or approved equal.

b. Type: pigmented.

c. Finish: standard.

d. Number of Coats: one.

e. Pattern: Tweed.

7. Sealer:

a. Material Basis: Stonshield Sealer, or approved equal.

b. Resin: Epoxy

c. Formulation Description: (2) two-component, 100% solids, UV Stable.

d. Type: Clear.

e. Finish: Gloss.


g. Texture level: Standard or medium.

h. Prep for Seal Coat: light sanding and vacuum as required by manufacturer.

8. Seal coat: Chemical resistant, UV stable.

a. Material Basis: Stonseal CF7 clear flat, or approved equal.

b. Resin: Aliphatic polyurethane.

c. Formulation Description: (2) two-component, waterborne, flat, aliphatic

polyurethane.

d. Type: Clear

e. Finish: Gloss.


E. Slip Coefficient

1. Slip coefficient of friction shall be in compliance with ANSI A117.1-2009 requirements.

2. Provide minimum wet static coefficient of friction of 0.8 for sloped surfaces and 0.6 flat

surfaces tested per ASTM C-1028-07.

3. Final wearing surface to be approved by the SEPTA Project Manager

F. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum

physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi after 7 days per ASTM C 579.

2. Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi per ASTM C 307.

3. Flexural Strength: 4,300 psi per ASTM C 580.

4. Water Absorption: < 1% per ASTM C 413.

5. Impact Resistance: > 160 in. lbs. per ASTM D 2794.

6. Flammability: Class 1 per ASTM E-648.

7. Hardness: 85 to 90, Shore D per ASTM D 2240.



2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer

and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

B. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of

service and joint condition indicated. Allowances should be included for Stonflex MP7 joint fill

material, and CT5 concrete crack treatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written

instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for resinous

flooring application.

B. Metal Substrates: Prepare metal substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer’s written

instructions for substrate indicated.

C. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,

curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants

incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Mechanically prepare substrates as follows:

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains

the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum

pickup.

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written

instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's

written recommendations.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture vapor emissions are within

acceptable levels according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

a. Perform in situ probe test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with application only after

substrates do not exceed a maximum potential equilibrium relative humidity of 85

percent.

b. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 7 lb of

water/1000 sq. ft. of slab in 24 hours.

c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with

application only after substrates pass testing.

d. If tests result in high moisture content than a positive side vapor barrier shall be

installed as required by manufacturer.

4. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that resinous flooring will adhere to

them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after

substrates pass testing.



5. SEPTA to verify concrete substrate prior to application of resinous material.

D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring


E. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to


F. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting

through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Allowances

should be included for Stonflex MP7 joint fill material (or approved equal), and CT5 concrete

crack treatment (or approved equal).

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written

instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring

system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.

2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply

with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.

a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Apply primer where required by resinous system, over prepared substrate at manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate.

C. Integral Cove Base: Stonshield cove mortar (or approved equal), apply cove base mix to wall

surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and

details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, of cove base. Round

internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: See contract documents.

D. Apply metal trowel single mortar coat in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or

power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and roughness.

E. Undercoat: Remove any surface irregularities by lightly abrading and vacuuming the floor

surface. Mix and apply undercoat with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation

procedures and coverage rates.

F. Broadcast: Immediately broadcast quartz silica aggregate into the undercoat using

manufacturer's specially designed spray caster. Strict adherence to manufacturer's installation

procedures and coverage rates is imperative.

G. Apply topcoat in number of coats indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates

recommended in writing by manufacturer.



3.3 TERMINATIONS

A. Chase edges to “lock” the flooring system into the concrete substrate along lines of termination.

Penetration Treatment:

B. Penetration Treatment: Lap and seal the flooring system onto the perimeter of the penetrating

item by bridging over compatible elastomer at the interface to compensate for possible

movement.

C. Trenches: Continue flooring system into trenches to maintain monolithic protection. Treat cold

joints to assure bridging of potential cracks.

D. Treat floor drains by chasing the flooring system to lock in place at point of termination.

3.4 JOINTS AND CRACKS

A. Treat control joints to bridge potential cracks and to maintain monolithic protection.

B. Treat cold joints and construction joints to bridge potential cracks and to maintain monolithic

protection on horizontal and vertical surfaces as well as horizontal and vertical interfaces.

C. Discontinue floor coating system at vertical and horizontal contraction and expansion joints by

installing backer rod and compatible sealant after coating installation is completed. Provide

sealant type recommended by manufacturer for traffic conditions and chemical exposures to be

encountered.


A. Material Sampling: SEPTA Project Manager may at any time and any numbers of times during

resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with

requirements.

1. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for

testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable

materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND CURING

A. Cure resinous flooring materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to

prevent contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process.

Close area of application for a minimum of 18 hours.

B. Protect resinous flooring materials from damage and wear during construction operation.

Where temporary covering is required for this purpose, comply with manufacturer's

recommendations for protective materials and method of application. General Contractor is

responsible for protection and cleaning of surfaces after final coats.

C. Cleaning: Remove temporary covering and clean resinous flooring just prior to final inspection.

Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.



PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 - 1

SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide painting, as shown and scheduled per Contract Drawings; including, but not limited to:

1. Painting and surface preparation for finished surfaces

2. Priming of substrates.

3. Painting of concrete patching and parging

B. Refer to Section 09705 Epoxy Resin Flooring for application of epoxy floor coating over

concrete surfaces and manhole covers.

C. Refer to Section 09902 Hot Dip Galvanized and Painted Steel for all hot dip galvanized steel

scheduled to be painted.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements


C. Section 09965 – Graffiti Resistant Coatings

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of

terms used in this Section.

B. National Paint and Coatings Association (NPCA): Guide to U.S. Government Paint

Specifications.

C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): Painting - Architectural

Specifications Manual.

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


requirements.





B. Samples

1. General: Submit specified colors for each surface-finishing product.

2. Field Samples:

a. General: In place, on material scheduled to be finished, illustrating coating color,

texture and finish. Locate where directed; accepted sample may remain as part of

the Work.

b. Size: One (1) entire unit as scheduled to be finished

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data, and installation instructions for

review.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. Coating

system must include entire coating system components, including but not limited to graffiti top

coat.

E. Certificates: Submit statement of VOC compliance with local regulations.


A. General: Refer to Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

B. Qualifications

1. Applicator: Specializing in performing the work of this Section with documented

experience.

2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): Use only products in compliance with VOC

content limits required by state and local regulations.


A. Delivery




B. Storage

1. General: Store materials in a dry and properly ventilated separate structure not less than

50'-0" from any other structure on the site. Adequately protect from damage and exposure

to the elements.

2. Temperature: Maintain minimum of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F.

3. Fire Prevention: Take necessary precautions to prevent fire; remove paint-soiled rags and

waste from building each day or store in metal containers with covers in the paint storage

structure.



1.7 CLOSEOUT

A. Extra Stock: Deliver one percent (1%) or a minimum of two (2) gallons of each color, type, and

surface texture of paint installed. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room

locations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Guarantee:

1. General: Provide, in required form, for a period of five (5) years from date of final

acceptance.

2. Criteria: Color and finish appearance shall remain unchanged throughout entire

guarantee period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




B. Manufacturer

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Sherwin Williams

b. Carboline Co.

c. Benjamin Moore


2. Container Label: Identify with manufacturer's name, and include description of type of

paint, brand name, lot number, brand code and color designation.

C. General: Provide ready mixed products, except field catalyzed coatings. Provide accessory

materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, cleaners, and other materials not specifically

indicated but required to achieve finishes specified.

1. Use only one lot of paint for any individual element to be painted. Do not mix lots of

paint.


D. System Locations and substrates:

1. Galvanized Steel – Spot Primed Areas and Finish



a. Refer to Section 09902 – Hot Dip Galvanized and Painted Steel

2. Composite Trim

a. (1) coat Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Gray Primer B66-310

b. (2) coats Pro Industrial HP Acrylic, B66-650 (semi-gloss)

3. Miscellaneous Metal trim, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

a. (1) coat Macropoxy 646-100 Fast Cure Epoxy, B58-620 b. (2) coats High Solids 100 Polyurethane, B65-600

4. Various Slightly Rusted Substrates

a. (1) coat Kem Bond HS Universal Metal Primer B50AZ8

b. (2) coats Industrial Enamel High Solids Gloss B54 series

c. or

d. (1) coat Macropoxy 646-100 Fast Cure Epoxy B58-620

e. (2) coats High Solids 100 Polyurethane B65-600

5. Walls

a. Exposed Standard CMU or Concrete Block.

1) (1) coat PrepRite Block Filler B25W25

2) (2) coats A-100 Exterior Latex Semi-Gloss A82 Series

b. Exposed Concrete Walls or Curbs

1) (1) coat Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24

2) (2) coats A-100 Exterior Latex Semi-Gloss A82 Series

6. Concrete Ceilings

a. (1) coat (spot or full prime as required) Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer,

A24W8300

b. (2) coats Pro Industrial HP Acrylic, B66-50, Semi-gloss

E. Miscellaneous Cleaning And Refinishing Materials

1. Fine grade Scotch-Brite pads (white and/or green type, manufactured by 3M Co, St Paul

MN, or approved equal.

2. Very fine steel wool, clean and free of contaminants and corrosion.

3. Clean, soft, lintless, cotton rags.

4. Cotton pads and swabs.

F. Solvent Cleaners And Thinners

1. Xylene: Commercial manufacture.

2. White Spirit: Commercial manufacture.

3. Odorless Lacquer Thinner: Commercial manufacture.

4. Denatured Alcohol: Commercial manufacture.




2.2 MIXING

A. General: Mix paints at the factory; do not alter or reduce materials except as directed by

manufacturer.

B. Colors: See schedule.

C. Mildew Resistance: Add fungicidal agent to paint per manufacturer's recommendations. Add

agent at the factory; clearly indicate on label that paint is mildew resistant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Environmental Requirements

1. General: Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is

outside the humidity ranges required by the manufacturer.

2. Temperature:

a. General: Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are

outside the temperature ranges required by the manufacturer.

b. Exterior Paints: 40 degrees F minimum during and for 48 hours after application;

do not apply when temperature is over 90 degrees F, except in protected or shaded

areas.

c. Interior Paints: 50 degrees F for minimum of 48 hours before, during, and for 48

hours after application.

3. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation of all interior spaces during application and

curing of all painting products.

4. Lighting Level: Provide minimum 80 foot candles measured at mid-height of room. At

exterior, measured at mid height of element to be painted.

B. Examination

1. General: Examine conditions of surfaces in place before beginning work; report defects.

2. Shop Applied Primer: Test for compatibility with subsequent cover materials

3. Moisture Content: Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture

meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces is below the following

maximums:

4. Acceptance: Application of first coat of painting process constitutes acceptance of

surface

C. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled for paint finish from damage resulting from

painting operations.

D. Steel/Metals Surface Preparation (non-galvanized steel only)



1. Blast cleaning of faying surfaces shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-SP10,

Near-white Blast Cleaning.

2. Blast cleaning all other steel shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-SP6,

Commercial Blast Cleaning.

3. Oil, grease, salts, or other surface contaminations must first be removed by the methods

outlined in SSPC SP 1.

4. Dust conditions at the station site shall be anticipated, and such dust as may collect shall

be removed before touch-up paint is applied.

5. All flux, spatter, slag, or laminations from welding or other sharp projections shall be

ground smooth prior to blast cleaning.

6. All areas blast cleaned on any day shall be coated on the same day. Any such areas not

coated that are exposed overnight shall be lightly “whip-blasted” to remove any visible or

invisible rust that may have formed.

7. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings

prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect

work of this Section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface conditions.

Use Shellac to seal marks, which may bleed through surface finishes.

8. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium

phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

9. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent to remove

all oil, grease and other foreign matter. Prime bare steel surfaces.

10. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Install in conformance with referenced standards, manufacturer's written directions, as

shown, and as specified.

B. Performance

1. General: Apply each coat to uniform finish, slightly darker than preceding coat unless

otherwise approved. Sand surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles; use tack cloth just prior to applying next

coat. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.

3.3 CLEANING

A. General: Upon completion, remove masking materials, reinstall electrical cover plates,

hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing, and thoroughly

clean all exposed surfaces per manufacturer's instructions. Keep premises free from

accumulation of waste and rubbish. At the completion of work remove surplus materials,

rubbish, and debris.

B. Touch-Up: After detailed inspection of paint work, touch up or refinish abraded, stained, or

otherwise disfigured work, as required by the Engineer.

C. Cleaning: Remove containers, rags, and debris from the site; observe special care in control or

disposal of flammable materials.



HOT DIP GALVANIZED AND PAINTED STEEL 09902-1

SECTION 09902 - HOT DIP GALVANIZED AND PAINTED STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall fabricate, galvanize and paint the steel components and assemblies as

shown on the Drawings and described herein.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, labor, and shipping costs as required for a

complete finished system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 01300 – Submittals

C. Section 09900 – Paints and Coating

D. Section 09965 – Graffiti Resistant Coatings

1.3 SUBMITTALS


requirements.



B. The Contractor shall supply all manufacturer’s technical data and MSDS (Material Safety Data

Sheets) sheets on all galvanizing and paint products used. Submissions shall be complete and

include all required items for the galvanizing and paint finishes.

C. The Contractor shall include, in steel fabrication shop drawings, vent hole layout which

indicates vent hole spacing and sizes required for a complete galvanized product both inside and

out. Vent holes shall be placed so as not to be visible on the finished product; typically on a

surface that faces downwards or is covered or set tight against another object once assembled.

Vent holes shall be closed off after the galvanizing process has been completed and prior to

painting. Vent holes shall be capped with nylon plugs.

D. The Contractor shall supply (4) color samples of each color specified.

E. The Contractor shall supply (2) steel tube samples that includes (1) 6” long leg welded at 90

degrees to a 3” long leg. The ends of both legs shall be welded closed. (1) Sample shall be

galvanized to show the quality of paint ready galvanized steel and proper vent hole locations.

The other sample shall be galvanized, vent holes plugged, and painted per the paint



specification. These samples shall be used as a quality acceptance baseline for the finished

product.

F. The Contractor shall submit a letter of certification which outlines and identifies the process and

standards to which the fabrication was galvanized to. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility

to assure that Subcontractors (fabricator, galvanizer, and painter) satisfy the specification

requirements.

G. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. Coating

system must include entire coating system components, including but not limited to graffiti top

coat.


A. The Contractor shall coordinate fabrication along with all component finishes, and shall assure

that the components / fabrications are packaged and shipped properly to assure that the finish is

not damaged while in storage and / or in transit. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at

no additional cost to SEPTA.

B. The Contractor shall assure that painting shall not be permitted on contaminated and / or

blemished surfaces. In particular the Contractor shall assure that all galvanized steel to be

painted shall not be quenched. All galvanized metal shall be free of drips, runs and splatters.

C. The galvanizing finish shall meet ASTM D6386 standards to the satisfaction of SEPTA or be

rejected and replaced at no additional cost to the SEPTA.

D. During the drying process the painted steel shall be protected from damage by individually

hanging, bracing, laying, and / or standing the steel to assure that the surfaces are not marred

and that surfaces do not stick to adjacent surfaces. All items shall be dried for a period long

enough to assure that the surface can withstand stacking prior to bundling. All items shall be

individually wrapped and have spacers placed between adjacent components to assure damage

does not occur during storage and / or shipping. If items must be strapped, the use of protective

pads must be utilized where the strapping may mar the finish.

E. See 3.1G for additional Quality Assurance requirements.


A. Deliver materials in protective wrappings with each item labeled with installation location.

B. Store all items inside in dry location.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Guarantee:

1. General: Provide, in required form, for a period of five (5) years from date of final

acceptance.



2. Criteria: Color and finish appearance shall remain unchanged throughout entire

guarantee period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General




2.2 HOT DIP GALVANIZING SYSTEM

A. Galvanizing system shall be suitable for paint finish work and shall meet ASTM A123 and

ASTM D6386 standards. Visible drips, splatters, and runs shall not be acceptable. The

galvanizer shall provide a smooth consistent surface to receive paint. All galvanized steel to

receive a shop paint system shall not be quenched.

B. Thickness – Provide a 2.0 oz/sq ft (610 g/sm m) zinc coating.

C. The galvanizing process shall not warp, twist, or deform material/ assemblies/ fabrications/

members. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent warping, twisting, or deformations such

as, providing adequate vent holes, controlling temperatures, and providing reinforcing. If the

Contractor has concerns that the material may deform during the galvanizing process the

concern shall be brought to the attention of SEPTA prior to fabrication. The Contractor assumes

sole responsibility of the process by proceeding with fabrication and galvanizing process

without notification.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper handling of the material / fabrication throughout

the entire fabrication process until final delivery and acceptance of finished product by SEPTA.

E. Certification of galvanization shall be provided to SEPTA prior to delivery, see Submittals

Section 01300.

2.3 PAINT SYSTEM

A. The steel / metal fabrication paint system shall be a duplex system. The prep, prime and finish

of the paint system shall be in accordance with the written specification of the manufacturer,

Sherwin Williams. SEPTA draw down colors can be obtained by contacting the Sherwin

Williams Philadelphia Store located at 2301-07 E. Venango Street, Philadelphia, PA 19134.

B. Quenched galvanized steel shall be rejected. Newly galvanized steel must be prepped using

Clean and Etch as manufactured by Sherwin Williams. Galvanized steel that has light scaling

shall be lightly brush blasted to clean off light scaling. After prepping the galvanized steel for

painting the contractor shall verify that the galvanized film thickness meets or exceeds



specification. If small areas do not meet the specified film thickness then these section must be

primed with Corothane I Galvapac Zinc Primer (B65G11). If large or numerous areas do not

meet specification then the painting contractor shall notify the Prime Contractor and these units

shall be rejected and re-galvanized so they meet specification.

C. The following paint systems shall be used:

1. General Steel Shapes (framing members)

a. (1) shop-applied wash coat

b. (1) coat Recoatable Epoxy Primer Low VOC, B65A5H5, R5/B65V5

c. (2) coats High Solids 100 Polyurethane B65-360

d. Clear Top Coat: Graffiti Resistant Coating – see 09965 Graffiti Resistance

Coatings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING AND FACTORY-APPLIED ARCHITECTURAL FINISH

A. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip

process, Duragalv by Duncan Galvanizing or approved equal. Comply with ASTM A 123 for

fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified

in referenced standards. The galvanizing bath shall contain special high grade zinc, nickel, and

other earthly materials.

B. Galvanizing shall exhibit a rugosity (smoothness) not greater than 4 rug (16-20 microns of

variation) when measured by a profilometer over a 1 inch straight line on the surface of

architectural and structural elements that are less than 24 pounds per running foot. Profilometer

shall be capable of operating in 1 micron increments.

1. Surface blasting prior to application of factory-applied post galvanizing wet coatings will

produce a high rugosity and not be acceptable.

C. Galvanize all components after all welding has been completed, to the maximum extent

possible. Provide holes throughout fabrication to permit galvanizing fluids to flow inside and

out for complete galvanization. Drain holes in horizontal members shall be placed along the

bottom of the tube. After the galvanization process close-up all holes not required to be weep

holes. Holes shall be plugged with plastic or rubber, cut flush with metal surface prior to

painting.

D. Architectural Finish: Provide factory-applied architectural coating over hot-dip galvanized

steel.

1. Primer coat shall be factory-applied prime coat. Apply primer within 12 hours after

galvanizing at the same facility where the galvanizing is done in a controlled

environment meeting applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the

primer coating manufacturer.



2. Finish coat shall be factory-applied color-pigmented architectural finish. Apply finish

coating at the galvanizer’s plant, in a controlled environment meeting applicable

environmental regulations and as recommended by the finish coating manufacturer.

3. Coatings shall be certified VOC compliant and conform to applicable regulations and

EPA standards.

4. Apply the galvanizing, primer and coating within the same facility and provide single-

source responsibility for galvanizing, priming and finish coating.

5. Blast cleaning of the galvanized surface is not acceptable.

E. Performance Criteria: Coatings must meet or exceed the criteria for the following categories as

stipulated by the coatings manufacturer:

1. Primer:

ABRASION - Method: ASTM D 4060 (CS17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load).

ADHESION - Method: ASTM D 3359, (Method B, 5 mm Crosshatch).

HUMIDITY - Method: ASTM D 4585

SALT SPRAY (FOG) - Method: ASTM B 117

PENCIL HARDNESS

FLEXIBILITY

2. Topcoat:



EXTERIOR EXPOSURE - Method: Exposed at 45 degrees facing south

SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS: - Method: ASTM E-84

QUV - Method: ASTM G 53 (ES-40 bulbs, 4 hours light, 4 hours dark)


PENCIL HARDNESS

FLEXIBILITY

F. Clearcoat: Provide factory-applied clear coating over primed and color-coated galvanized steel.

1. Performance Criteria: Coatings must meet or exceed the criteria for the following

categories as stipulated by the coatings manufacturer:



GRAFFITI RESISTANCE - Method: The following graffiti materials applied to coating

and allowed to dry for seven days: acrylic, epoxy-ester and alkyd spray paints, ballpoint

ink, crayon, Markett marker, black shoe polish and lipstick. Refer to Section 09965

Graffiti Resistance Coatings.



WEATHERING: - Method: ASTM D 1014, 45 degrees south; Method: ASTM D 4141C

EMMAQUA-NTW

QUV - Method: ASTM G 53 (FS-40 bulbs, 4 hours light, 4 hours dark)


FLEXIBILITY – Method: ASTM D 522 (Method B, Cylindrical Mandrel)

HARDNESS: Method: ASTM D 3363 (Pencil)

G. Quality Assurance for Hot-Dip Galvanizing and Factory-Applied Metal Coatings:

1. Galvanizing shall be performed by a company with documented experience in the

successful application of hot-dip galvanizing utilizing the dry kettle process.

2. Factory-applied metal coatings shall be performed in a facility acceptable to the coating

manufacturer.

3. Submit two 3 inch by 6 inch samples of factory-applied coatings and colors proposed for

use for approval prior to coating application.

4. Engage the services of a galvanizer who has demonstrated experience in the successful

performance of the processes outlined in this specification in within the same facility as

outlined herein. The Architect has the right to inspect the facility where the work is to be

done and who will apply the galvanizing and coatings, and approve or reject the

galvanizer/galvanizing facility.

5. Handle and install materials with factory-applied coatings as recommended by galvanizer

and coating manufacturer to prevent damage to coatings prior to and after installation.

6. Touch-up factory-applied metal coatings as recommended by galvanizer and coating

manufacturer.

7. Coatings not matching approved submittals shall be removed and replaced at no

additional expense to the Owner.

8. Certificate of compliance that the galvanizer has certified weighers on premises with a

certification from the local municipality, and a certified scale or municipal scale has been

utilized by the galvanizer.

9. Fabricator shall provide a notarized statement from the galvanizer, along with a

description of the material processed, indicating that all work has been done in

conformance with this specification prior to receiving payment.

10. Certificate of Compliance for Shop Drawing Review by Galvanizer: Submit galvanizer's

certification that shop drawings for metal fabrications to receive metal coatings have been

reviewed and that fabrications are acceptable to galvanizer for proper application of

galvanizing and metal coatings. All drawings should be stamped by the galvanizer to

indicate approval of design for galvanizing.



11. Substitutions shall not be considered unless approved by Architect, Owner/Owner's

Representative and Contractor. Substitution requests shall be accompanied by proof that

the substitution meets or exceeds the performance, aesthetic and durability requirements

of the specified Duncan process. Coatings not matching approved submittals shall be

removed and replaced at no additional expense to the Owner

12. Galvanizer/coater shall supply a certificate of compliance that all coatings have been

performed in accordance with QP-3 standards and procedures.



IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-1

SECTION 10400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide and install all identifying devices as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Aluminum Signs 2. Acrylic Signs 3. Tactile and Braille Signs 4. Vinyl Graphic Window Film at all interior storefront window and door glazing


A. Division 1 Specification Sections


C. Section 07900 – Joint Sealants

1.3 REFERENCES

A. All signage shall comply with the current version of the SEPTA Standard Manual; the messages indicated on the Contract Drawings are illustrative in nature. The Contractor shall become familiar with full range of messages provided. Signage messages for each sign will be provided by SEPTA.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1: Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicap People, Current Edition.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM)

D. Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines (ADAAG)

E. Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, "Americans with Disabilities Act", Public Law 101-336 (ADA)

F. Federal Register Part II, Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, 36 CFR Part 1191: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Amendment to Final Guidelines, July 23, 2004

G. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. B209-14 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate



2. B211-12 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire

3. B221-14 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

H. Aluminum Welding Society (AWS)

1. D1.2-14 Structural Welding Code-Aluminum

I. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. ASD-1 Aluminum Standards and Data, 2013

J. DAF-45 Design System for Aluminum Finishes, 2003

K. Federal Specification (FS)

1. FF-92B(1) Screw, Machine, Slotted, Cross Recessed or Hexagon Head. 2. TT-645a Primer, Paint , Zinc-Chromatic, Alkyd-Type

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01300 – Submittals.

B. Submit a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide detailed Shop Drawings including message layouts, fabrications, mounting, bracketing details, installation details, and key plans for installation.

2. Submit Braille Certification per Section 2.4.A.7 3. Provide mounting design details and calculations designed and stamped by an approved

Professional Engineer (PE) licensed in the State of Pennsylvania 4. Sign Schedule including message copy for every sign, by sign number.

a. Sign messages shall be cross-referenced to the appropriate typical layout and the mounting details.

b. Sign number, quantity, panel dimension, copy height, graphics, artwork, copy color, background color, and mounting condition shall be noted for each sign.

5. Provide a mockup for each sign type, after approval of shop drawings and prior to fabrication.

a. Mockup shall be ½” size showing actual typography and actual colors. b. Mockup shall be exact replicas of sign layouts. c. Mockup shall be keyed to the approved sign schedule. d. Secure SEPTA approval prior to fabrication.

D. SAMPLES:



1. Accompanying the material list, submit a sample of each sign material illustrating the actual finish obtained with complete graphics.

2. Submit sample basketry design for typical mounting surfaces wall, pendent, column, etc. (see signage schedule for complete listing.) Also submit a panel sample with frame on two sides for each proposed thickness combination.

3. PROTOTYPE: Provide a production prototype for approval at the place of fabrication. The unit will be reviewed by the Engineer and corrections made. This unit will be used as a model for the line production and will be considered and actual unit to be placed on a site, not a mock up, if acceptable to the Engineer

E. Sustainable Aspects:

1. Recycled Content:

a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project.

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight.

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.

2. Local/Regional Materials:

a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost only.

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product.

3. Recyclability Content: Provide documentation of manufacturer recycling program, if any. 4. VOC data: Provide documentation that product’s VOC content is in accordance with

limits set within Section 01112 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


A. General: Refer to Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

B. Pre-installation conference: Contractor shall closely coordinate tolerances required in this Section for completely coordinated and smooth installation with SEPTA PM.

C. For the fabrication of the Signage, use only mechanics that are thoroughly trained and experience in skills required for the manufacture and fabrication of the units.



1. In acceptance or rejection of the manufactured units, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the fabricator / manufacturer.

2. The materials must be in full compliance with Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings.

D. ADA design requirements:

1. Signage requiring tactile graphics:

a. Wall mounted signs designating permanent rooms and spaces, such as room numbers, restrooms, electrical closets, and mechanical rooms.

b. Individually applied characters are prohibited.

2. Signage not requiring tactile graphics but requiring compliance to other ADA requirements: All other signs providing direction to or information about function of space, such as directional signs (signs with arrow), informational signs (operating hours, policies, etc.), regulatory signs (no smoking, do not enter) and ceiling and projected wall mounted signs.

E. ADA performance requirements:

1. Tactile graphics sign mounting requirements:

a. Single doors: Mount 60" to sign centerline above finished floor and on wall adjacent to latch side of door, as shown on drawings.

b. Openings: Mount 60" to sign centerline above finished floor adjacent to opening. c. No wall space adjacent to latch side of door, opening or double doors: Mount 60"

to centerline above finished floor on nearest adjacent wall.

F. An interior sign plaque shall be installed adjacent to each new door. The final room description on each sign shall be determined by the Owner. A list generated from room names noted on drawings shall be submitted to the Owner for review and comment.

G. TOLERANCES:

1. Sign Panels and Extrusions:

a. The Contractor shall note on the shop drawings all fabrication tolerances including, but not limited to: plumb, thickness, length, width, squareness, camber, and flatness.

b. Signs shall be free of defects including, but not limited to: buckles, dents, wraps, wrinkles, and burrs.

c. All extrusions for a given shape shall be fabricated from dies of identical cross section dimensions.

2. Messages:

a. Messages Location: +/-1/16 inch from the location shown b. Line to Line:+/-1/32 inch between each line and +/-1/16 inch over the entire

message. Letter to Letter or Symbol (horizontally and vertically) +/-1/32 inch between each letter of symbol and +/-1/16 inch over and entire line.



3. Where multiple panels adjoin, the face and edges shall be milled to a tolerance of a +1/32 inch or –1/32 inch from a straight plane, so that when two adjoining panels are assembled, no gap over 1/16inch shall be visible between panels.

4. Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for temperatures ranging between –20degrees F and +100 degrees F, without causing bucking, opening of joints other than control joints, or overstressing of welds and fasteners.

5. Comply with AWS D1.2 for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of all welding flux and dress on all exposed and contact surfaces.

6. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints.

H. Loading: The unit must withstand a wind load of 20#/SF and horizontal/vertical loads of 250# at top center of the sign with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of sign length. Calculations are to be submitted for SEPTA review.

I. Mounting: The Contractor shall have all mounting and fabrication details and calculations designed and stamped as approved by a Professional Engineer (PE) licensed in the State of Pennsylvania.

J. Sustainable Aspects:

1. Recycled Content Materials: Not less than 25% combined post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.

2. Recyclability Content Materials: Minimum recovery rate of 30% through recycling and reprocessing or reuse.

3. Local/Regional Materials: Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Product must be manufactured within 500 miles of project site. If a local source is not possible, contractor must provide documentation of said hardship. Documentation will not absolve contractor from meeting other requirements noted herein this Section or with Buy American Act. Refer to Section 01112 Sustainable Design Requirements for additional information.

4. VOC data: Adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building shall comply with the VOC content limits set in Section 01112 Sustainable Design Requirements.


A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the signs prior to delivery. The pre-assembled units are to be shipped in protective crating and palletized. Each sign package is to bear the identification as noted on the sign schedule.

B. Packaging: Each sign will come individually shrink-wrapped complete with its own bracketry and attachment hardware.

C. Replacements: The Engineer’s sole discretion as to whether replacement or repair will be the procedure for damaged units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Aluminum Signage:

1. Philadelphia Sign Company, Palmyra, New Jersey, Telephone 609-829-1460. 2. Sweet Sign Systems, Doylestown, Pennsylvania, Telephone 215-340-1600. 3. G.P. Dunphy Co., Ashford CT. (860) 429-2550. 4. Or Engineer's approved equal

B. Acrylic Signage:

1. Venture Laser, Philadelphia, PA, Telephone 215-284-3477. 2. Everything Plastic, Philadelphia, PA, Telephone 877-677-8872. 3. Or Engineer’s approved equal

C. East Coast Sign & Supply Inc., Bethel CT, Telephone 203-791-8326

1. United Sign System, Staten Island, NY, Telephone 718-980-7097 2. G.P. Dunphy Co., Ashford CT. (860) 429-2550. 3. Or Engineer’s approved equal

2.2 FABRICATION, ALUMINUM SIGNAGE

A. Face and Back Sheets:

1. Double sided graphic signs

a. Face sheets and back sheet to be fabricated in one piece from minimum .040” thickness aluminum sheets, 3003 H14 alloy.

2. Single sided graphic signs: Face sheets to be fabricated in one piece .040” thickness. The back sheet shall be .040” minimum thickness, aluminum alloy sheet 3003-H-14 with an alloy 1230 cladding of approximately 5% on both sides.

B. Panel Frame: Each Panel section as defined in signage schedule shall be provided with an extruded internal perimeter framing shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6 with a minimum thickness of .080 inches. The perimeter frame shall have mitered corners, reinforced, welded and ground smooth. Intermediate supports shall be included as required.

C. Core Materials: Core Material shall be 1”thick phenolic impregnated paper honeycomb. Core materials shall meet specification MIL-D-5272 for resistance to fungus. The cell size shall be ½”, weight of Kraft Paper 80lb; impregnation 18 percent by weight minimum.

D. Lamination: Lamination shall be achieved by use of 3M Scotch-Grip High Performance Contact Adhesive- 1357, meeting specification requirements of MMM-A-1211 and MIL-A2-1366.

E. Space Bars: Space Bars shall be solid aluminum ¾” x 2” length as required. All exposed surfaces to be primed with zinc chromate alkyd base primer. Provide two (2) finishes coats of epoxy oil base paint. Color: 100% black with low sheen finish.

F. Hardware:



1. All bolts and screws shall be made of stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed fasteners on sign faces shall be not be permitted. 3. Exposed fasteners shall be made tamper-proof by an approved method. 4. Hangers, studs, clip angles and filler plates shall be aluminum, mill finish. 6063 T6,

unless otherwise indicated. 5. All welds shall be continuous, and ground smooth, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Finish:

1. Pre-Treatment:

a. The aluminum sheets are to be especially prepared for application by pretreatment meeting ASTM D1730-67, Type B, Method 5 or 7. Processing shall conform with ASTM B-449-67 (1972) Section 5. Conversation coating weight shall be between 30-100 mgms per square foot.

2. Four (4) Coat System Equal to Kynar 500 3. Coating application shall be performed under specifications issued by manufacturer and

an applicator specifically approved by manufacturer. Said applicator shall provide written notification of approval by manufacturer to application of finish.

a. Coating System shall include (1) primer coat; (2) background color coat; (3) graphic coat; (4) clear coat; with the total minimum dry film thickness to be 1.7 mils. Exposed cap extension shall be aluminum 6063 alloy and coated with System.

H. Mounting: As specified on Signage Type Detail drawings and per reviewed shop drawings for all signs.

1. Holes shall be pre-drilled in each corner of each sign by the manufacturer. Screws shall be tamper-proof.

a. Sign mounting will be in accordance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines height and clearance requirements.

2. The Contractor shall verify that the Braille message matches the text message. 3. Each sign shall include a complete installation kit with stainless steel, non-removable

/clutch head screws.

2.3 FABRICATION, ACRYLIC SIGNAGE

A. Fact Sheet: Provide cast methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet in sizes and thicknesses indicated on Signage Schedule.

1. Sheet material to be transparent as indicated on Signage Schedule. 2. Colors:

a. Standard colors shall be clear .



3. Sheet material to be 0.25” injection molded, high impact, UV resistant and surface texture as indicated on signage details.

4. Acrylic sheet material to have a minimum flexural strength of 16000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D790, a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 degrees F.

5. Refer to Contract Drawings for signage message information.

B. Hardware:

1. All bolts and screws shall be made of stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed fasteners on sign faces shall be not be permitted. 3. Exposed Fasteners shall be made tamper-proof by an approved method.

C. Mounting: As specified on Signage Type Detail drawings and per reviewed shop drawings for all signs.

1. Holes shall be pre-drilled in each corner of each sign by the manufacturer. Screws shall be tamper-proof.

2. Sign mounting will be in accordance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines height and clearance requirements.

3. Each sign shall include a complete installation kit with stainless steel, non-removable /clutch head screws.

2.4 TACTILE AND BRAILLE SIGNS

A. Tactile and Braille signs of type, text and in locations as scheduled on the Contract Drawings.

1. Finished thickness of signs, including raised areas, shall be 0.156”. Finished thickness of signs, exclusive of raised areas, shall be 0.125”.

2. Material: All signage with tactile and braille to be fabricated from Zinc Sheet Metal, 1/8” thick. Copy shall be photo-etched .039 inches from the surface.

3. Letters/Pictograms/Header line

a. All shall be raised 1/32” Integral with the sign face by means of die-stamping. Letters, pictograms, header lines shall have well defined, but not sharp edges.

4. Vandal Resistance Level

a. All raised characters, as well as the sign base shall be scratchproof. Sign finish shall not deteriorate upon application of graffiti removal products.

5. Tactile Characters: As specified on Signage Schedule

a. Unless otherwise noted, 5/8 “-1” Helvetica Medium uppercase letters; die-raised; tactile text, depending on expected size/message of sign. Contractor to be instructed which size to use on a per sign basis. Glue-on letters or etched backgrounds are not acceptable.

6. Pictograms: As specified on Signage Schedule .



a. 4” tactile pictograms, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

7. Braille characters: Grade 2 Braille to be used, with translation to be provided by signage manufacturer, and certified by an independent organization or agency specializing in services for the blind, to be selected by the manufacturer.

8. Signs to have corners rounded with a ½” radius, and have no borders. 9. Holes for mounting screws/anchors shall be pre-drilled in each corner of each sign. 10. Color: As specified on Signage Schedule.

a. Positive / Relief: Brushed satin silver finish integral with the metal. No applied graphics.

b. Negative / Background: Baked enamel finish with clear coat in eggshell finish c. Copy: Tactile characters, pictograms and header line. d. Entire sign shall be coated with clear urethane protective coating after finishing.

11. Mounting: As specified on Signage Type Detail drawings and per reviewed shop drawings for all signs.

a. Holes shall be pre-drilled in each corner of each sign by the manufacturer. Screws shall be tamper-proof.

b. Sign mounting will be in accordance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines height and clearance requirements.

c. The Contractor shall verify that the Braille message matches the text message. d. Each sign shall include a complete installation kit with stainless steel, non-

removable /clutch head screws.

2.5 INFORMATIONAL, LOCATION MAP, AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE

A. Reference Standard: SEPTA Signage Manual (latest edition) for specific guidelines on sign layout basic sizes.

B. Material: As specified on Signage Schedule

C. Sign Sizes: As specified on Signage Schedule

1. Length: Dependent on sign message 2. Depth: .125 inch 3. Height: Dependent on number of lines

D. Character Size: As specified on Signage Schedule

E. Character Typeface: Futura BT BOLD

F. Mounting: As specified on Signage Type Detail drawings and per reviewed shop drawings for all signs

1. Holes shall be pre-drilled in each corner of each sign by the manufacturer. Screws shall be tamper-proof

2. Sign mounting will be in accordance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines height and clearance requirements



3. Each sign shall include a complete installation kit with stainless steel, non-removable /clutch head screws

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREINSTALLATION MEETING:

A. A meeting with SEPTA PM is required prior any installation.

3.2 INSPECTION:

A. Inspection: Install no work until surfaces on which signage and other Work of this Section are to be placed and attached are free of defects and are in a completed conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. General: All surfaces to receive placement of Work of this Section shall be clean and dry.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install all signage, and other Work of this Section level, and plumb: secure to substrate in the manner as detailed on the Drawings and as recommended by the Manufacturer.

B. Mounting Locations: See Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings for locations of signs.

C. Attachment: Attach as detailed on the Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.

3.5 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. General:

1. Clean all surface with suitable materials. 2. Remove all debris from Work area. 3. Remove protective covers at Project Completion.

3.6 SIGN SCHEDULE

A. Sign Schedule:

1. See Sign Schedule on Drawings.



ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 13280-1

SECTION 13280 - ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work specified in this Section applies to the demolition, removal, and disposal of all

existing construction material suspected of containing asbestos. It applies to the areas

shown on the Contract Drawings; and, additional demolition, as required, to execute the

work of this Contract including, but not necessarily limited to complete or partial

demolition and removal of the following:

1. Removal of asbestos containing materials (ACM).

2. The Contractor shall engage a third party testing agency to test for all potential

asbestos containing materials (PACM) and the test results shall be submitted to

SEPTA prior to removing the materials.

3. Materials to be tested shall include, but not limited to:

a. Existing waterproofing system.

b. Non-metal flashing, mastic and adhesives

c. Any other material which is deemed suspicious by the contractor, SEPTA or other

governmental agency with authority.

B. Asbestos containing materials may be located in building areas not accessed during

sampling. All materials listed in the USEPA’s publication “Managing Asbestos in Place,”

Appendix G, are suspect and shall require testing or special handling in accordance with

this Section.

C. Removal of non-friable PACM shall be performed in such a manner that the materials

remain non-friable during the renovation. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that

the materials are removed without rendering the material friable.

D. Refer to 13285 Lead Paint Abatement Appendix A for a report of findings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 01

B. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.

C. Section 01300 - Submittals

D. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching.

E. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition

F. Section 13285 – Lead Paint Abatement Appendix A



1.3 REFERENCES


1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.

2. ANSI – Standard Safety Code for Building Construction.

3. OSHA – Standards as applicable.

4. United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), Managing Asbestos in Place.

5. NFPA-241 – Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operations.

6. City of Philadelphia, Department of Public Health. Removal of Friable or Rendered

Friable Asbestos Containing Roof Materials, December 13, 1994.

7. City of Philadelphia, Department of Public Health. Asbestos Control Regulations, March

4, 1993.

8. National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), Subpart M –

National Emission Standard for Asbestos.

9. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania:

a. Department of Labor and Industry: Asbestos Occupations Accreditation and

Certification Act of 1990, No. 194 as amended by Act. No. 161 effective

2/20/99.

b. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Title 25 Rules and

Regulations: Chapter 124, National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air

Pollutants.

c. Department of Labor and Industry: Worker and Community Right-To-Know

Act 1984-159.

d. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection: Act 97, the Solid

Waste Management Act of July 7, 1980.

e. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Title 25 Rules and

Regulations: Chapter 109, Pennsylvania Safe Drinking Water Act.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01300 “Submittals”, submit the following for approval:

1. Submit a removal plan for SEPTA approval consisting of statements or drawings that

indicate the means and methods that will be employed to remove the presumed materials

and other suspect materials. This should include the methods employed for adequately

maintaining the non-friable conditions during the removal.

2. Landfill Records: The Contractor shall submit a letter from a permitted Hazardous Waste

Facility, stating that the facility has agreed to accept the waste generated by the work; is

authorized to accept the waste under laws of the State of residence; has the required

capacity to treat and dispose of the materials; and will provide or ensure the ultimate

disposal method indicated on Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest.


A. During the bid period, it is recommended to inspect and examine the construction site and

existing construction to be removed and determine the type of renovation or demolition



required or dismantlement procedure, physical conditions, and any contingency that could

be encountered during the renovation or demolition procedures

B. Conduct building demolition so SEPTA’s operations will not be disrupted.

1. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to SEPTA of activities that will affect SEPTA’s

operations.

2. Not later than ten (10) working days prior to commencing work, submit required written

notification to the Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection, Pennsylvania

Department of Labor and Industry, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and local

authorities having project jurisdiction. Provide copies of such notifications to SEPTA.

a. Notifications shall be submitted on the assumptions that the waterproofing

materials are positive for PACM.

3. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other occupied or used facilities

without written permission from the Project Manager.

C. Consider the safety of the work, safety of the people, and property on and adjacent to the

work site when determining equipment movement and use of materials and equipment on

the work site. Comply with the safety requirements specified in Sections 01060 and 01065.

All work shall be undertaken in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local

regulations, standards, codes and guidelines.

1. Where the safety of persons is endangered within or adjacent to the area of renovation or

demolition work, provide protection in accordance with requirements.

D. Arrange renovation or demolition schedule so as not to interfere with on-site operations.

Do not unduly inconvenience SEPTA employees by demolition activities.

E. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and

the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

G. Abatement Contractor shall have all licenses as required by state and federal laws.

PART 2 - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL DEMOLITION

A. Demolish indicated portions of existing structure completely in accordance the Contract

Drawings. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing

regulations and as follows:



1. Remove non-friable asbestos containing materials and presumed asbestos containing

materials.

B. Control and prevent the spread of dust to occupied portions of the site and avoid creation of

a nuisance in the surrounding area.

1. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with

governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage

adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,

flooding, and pollution.

C. Remove trash and debris daily unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager and do not

allow construction debris and waste materials to accumulate.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building

renovation or demolition activities. Return adjacent areas to the condition existing prior to

commencement of renovation or demolition activities.



LEAD PAINT ABATEMENT 13285-1

SECTION 13285 - LEAD PAINT ABATEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work specified in this section consists of the renovation, removal, and disposal of existing

construction from the areas shown on the Contract Drawings; and, as required, to execute the

work of this Contract including, but not necessarily limited to complete or partial renovation

and removal of the following:

1. All work which disturbs surfaces that are coated with lead based paint must be performed

in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 Code

of Federal Regulation (CFR) Part 1926.62, Lead Exposure in Construction; EPA 40 CFR

Part 745 Lead; PA Law 291, No. 44 Lead Certification Act; and Chester County

Regulations. In addition, all other applicable federal, state, and local codes, rules, and

regulations must be adhered to by the Contractor.

2. The Contractor shall be aware that Lead Based Paint (LBP) has been identified within the

proposed renovation project and must be familiar with the OSHA lead in construction

standard and its requirements. In addition, all waste generated as part of the renovation

project should be tested in order to determine the classification of waste. The USEPA

defines hazardous waste as waste containing the minimum concentration of a particular

contaminant identified by the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). The

USEPA regulatory level for lead (EPA Code: D008) is 5 parts per million (5 ppm).

3. Refer to Appendix A System Safety Department for report of findings.

B. The scope of work includes the removal of lead based paint at each project that will be

disturbed by the renovation and/or demolition.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 01

B. Section 13280 – Asbestos Abatement

C. Section 01010 - Summary of Work

D. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching

E. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition

1.3 REFERENCES


1. OSHA – Standards as applicable.

2. 1995 PA Law 291, No. 44 Lead Certification Act



3. 35 Penn. Stat. § 5901 to 5916

4. Codes and Regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01300, submit the following for approval

1. Submit statements or drawings that indicate the means and methods that will be employed

to remove the LBP. This should include the methods employed for adequately removing

and disposing of the LBP.

2. Landfill Records: The Contractor shall submit a letter from a permitted Hazardous Waste

Facility, stating that the facility has agreed to accept the waste generated by the work; is

authorized to accept the waste under laws of the State of residence; has the required

capacity to treat and dispose of the materials; and will provide or ensure the ultimate

disposal method indicated on Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest.


A. During the bid period, it is recommended to inspect and examine the construction site and

existing construction to be removed and determine the type of renovation or demolition required

or dismantlement procedure, physical conditions, and any contingency that could be

encountered during the renovation or demolition procedures.

B. Conduct building renovations or demolition so SEPTA’s operations will not be disrupted.

1. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to SEPTA of activities that will affect SEPTA’s

operations.

2. Provide notification of the LBP removal as necessary. Provide copies of such

notifications to SEPTA.

3. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other occupied or used facilities

without written permission from the Project Manager.

C. Consider the safety of the work, safety of the people, and property on and adjacent to the work

site when determining equipment movement and use of materials and equipment on the work

site. Comply with the safety requirements. All work shall be undertaken in accordance with

applicable federal, state and local regulations, standards, codes and guidelines.

1. Where the safety of persons is endangered within or adjacent to the area of renovation or

demolition work, provide protection in accordance with requirements.

D. Do not unduly inconvenience SEPTA employees by renovations or demolition activities.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Arrange renovation or demolition schedule so as not to interfere with on-site operations.

G. Environmental Requirements: Protect against high and low temperatures and unfavorable

environmental conditions in accordance with requirements of ACI 305R, 306R, and ACI 306.1.



H. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

I. Abatement Contractor shall have all licenses as required by state and federal laws.

PART 2 - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL DEMOLITION

A. Demolish indicated portions of existing buildings completely in accordance with Section 02070.

Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as

follows:

1. Remove and dispose of LBP. Additionally, scrape any loose and flaking paint.

B. Control and prevent the spread of dust to occupied portions of the site and avoid creation of a

nuisance in the surrounding areas.

1. All surfaces shall be maintained free of accumulation of lead dust generated during

renovation or demolition activities.

2. If applicable, separate and deposit all lead waste, including sealing tape, plastic sheeting,

mop heads, sponge filters, and disposable clothing in double polyethylene bags of at least

six (6) mils thick and seal each bag separately.

3. No equipment, supplies, or materials (except properly containerized waste materials shall

be removed from the Project work area unless such equipment, supplies, and/or materials

have been cleaned free of lead debris.

C. Remove trash and debris daily unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager and do not

allow construction debris and waste materials to accumulate.

3.2 WORK AREA CLEANUP AND CLEARANCE

A. Clean-up procedures shall utilize HEPA-filtered vacuum systems and/or wet methods, such as

mopping, wet wiping, shoveling of wet debris, etc. No dry sweeping of dust, particulate matter

or debris is allowed during any phase of the work affecting lead-coated surfaces.

B. Conduct periodic inspections.

C. At the end of the demolition Project, have a certified person conduct a clearance examination

and provide appropriate documentation or statements of LBP compliance.



3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. The Contractor shall conduct the Mass Balance TCLP Testing for all waste generated during the

renovation or demolition of the components coated with detectable levels of lead.

B. All waste shall be kept drummed, secured, labeled, and stored in a designated secured storage

space on-site until test results categorize all waste to be hazardous or non-hazardous.

C. The lead based waste media or other debris must be stored in a manner that does not allow entry

of any hazardous material into the environment. Leak-proof drums or portable bins are

generally acceptable. The containers must be kept out of flood plains or areas where run-off

may occur. Weather resistant labels using indelible ink warning of the potential hazard

associated with the material must be placed on the containers. The containers must be keyed to

the samples taken.

D. All waste, after being evaluated in accordance with the TCLP test, shall be disposed of in

accordance with all applicable Local, Federal, State, and/or County Regulations.

E. The Contractor shall submit a letter from a permitted Hazardous Waste Facility, stating that the

facility has agreed to accept the waste generated by the work; is authorized to accept the waste

under laws of the State of residence; has the required capacity to treat and dispose of the

materials; and will provide or ensure the ultimate disposal method indicated on Uniform

Hazardous Waste Manifest.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building

renovation or demolition activities. Return adjacent areas to the condition existing prior to

commencement of renovation or demolition activities.

Refer to Attachment A System Safety Department


Intra-Office

Memorandum


System Safety Department1234 Market Street, 6

th Floor, Philadelphia, PA 19107-3780

TO: Joseph Palantino

FROM: Stephanie Baer

SUBJECT: SEPTA Concourse Improvements

DATE: July 16, 2015

CC: Sean McMahon

Executive Summary

System Safety was contacted to conduct testing for suspect Asbestos Containing Material

(ACM) and Lead Based Paint (LBP) of the concourses located between the Market-

Frankford Line (MFL) and the Broad Street Line (BSL) for the upcoming improvement

project. Based on the analytical results, LBP is present in the paint samples collected in the

concourses.

Observations

On June 25, 2015, System Safety mobilized to the concourses associated with MFL and the

BSL to inspect the concourses for the proposed work and collect samples of suspect

materials. The suspect ACM observed was plaster ceiling and wall material as well as paint

texture that was located throughout the project area. These materials appeared to be in fair

to poor physical condition. No other visible suspect materials were observed in the

proposed project area. Additionally, System Safety was asked to inspect the existing terra

cotta tiles that are located behind the visible ceramic tile walls. It should be noted that terra

cotta tiles are not a suspect material.

Two previous inspections were conducted in the vicinity of the project area and include

materials that are within the project area. The first inspection was conducted on October 19,

2012 and included the concourse area adjacent to the 13th

Street Station of the MFL. Suspect

ACM (fireproofing) and LBP (ceiling and beam paint) samples were collected for this

project. The second inspection was conducted on July 25, 2012 for the alcoves located

within the BSL (Cecil B. Moore) and included sampling of suspect ACM (plaster and cable

wire wrap) and terra cotta tile material. The terra cotta tile observed in this inspection was

visibly similar the terra cotta tile observed in the concourses.

SEPTA’s Asbestos Investigator and Pennsylvania Lead Inspector collected three composite

and three bulk samples of suspect ACM as well as seven paint chip samples and submitted

them to Batta Laboratories, Inc. for analysis. The suspect ACM samples were analyzed by

the method Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) and the paint chip samples were analyzed by

the method Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (FAA) to determine the concentration

of lead in the paint. Attachment A includes the Site Plan, Attachment B includes the

P a g e | 2

Photographic Log, Attachment C includes the Analytical Results, Attachment D includes

the previous investigation documents and Attachment E includes the Lead Based Paint

Management Document.

Results

Asbestos

The analytical results indicated that all the samples collected within the project area were

non-detect for asbestos.

The two previous inspection results for the fire proofing, plaster material and terra cotta tiles

were all negative for asbestos.

Lead Based Paint

The analytical results indicated that two of the seven paint chip samples collected were

positive for LBP. It should be noted that the threshold for LBP is at or above 0.5% by

weight. The paints that were positive for LBP are as follows:

The beige/light green paint located on the ceiling.

The remaining samples from the concourses were non-detect for LBP.

The previous inspection results by the MFL indicated the green/white/black paint located on

the ceiling and beams were positive for lead based paint. The green paint is the same color

as observed in concourse inspection.

Conclusions/Recommendations

Based on the analytical results, ACM does not exist in the samples collected in the

concourse improvement project area. System Safety conducted a non-destructive survey

and it is possible that additional suspect ACM may exist within the project area that was not

visible during the survey. If any additional suspect materials are uncovered during

demolition of this project please contact System Safety for additional testing.

LBP does exist in the beige and light green paints located on the ceiling and support beams

in some areas of this project. These paints were observed to be in fair to poor physical

condition. System Safety understands that this project will be conducted by a third party

and recommends you follow our lead based paint management document #3001, see

attached.

Based on analytical results the project can proceed as planned. System Safety is available to

answer any questions or concerns.

Attachment A

Site Plan

A1, A4 & L1

L2

A5 and L3

L4

A2

A3 & L5

L6

A6 & L7

Attachment B

Photographic Log

Photographs

1 and 2

Photograph 1: View of the entrance of the concourse from the MFL to the BSL. Note beige paint.

Photograph 2: View of the wall plaster, white ceiling paint and ceramic tile wall.

Southeastern Pennsylvania

Transportation Authority

Concourse Improvement Project

MFL and BSL

Philadelphia, Pennsylvania

Photograph

3

Photograph 3: View of above the drop ceiling located by the Ritz building.




MFL and BSL


Photograph

4

Photograph 4: View of the terra cotta tiles located behind the ceramic walls.




MFL and BSL


Attachment C

Analytical Results

Attachment D

Previous Investigation Documents

Cecil B Moore and Wyoming Station-Alcove Room Project

Intra-Office

Memorandum


Audit, Safety & Investigative Services Division1234 Market Street, 10

th Floor, Philadelphia, PA 19107-3780

Administration

Contract Audit

Internal Audit

OIG

System Safety &

Risk Management

TO: Dennis Stefanski

FROM: Stephanie Baer

SUBJECT: Cecil B Moore and Wyoming Station, Out-cove Room Project

DATE: August 17, 2012

Executive Summary

System Safety was contacted to conduct an Asbestos Containing Material (ACM) survey of

the out-cove rooms located at Cecil B. Moore and Wyoming Stations on the Broad Street

Subway. Cecil B. Moore and Wyoming Stations are located at 1700 and 4700 North Broad

Street, respectively, in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Based on the analytical results, ACM

exists in the white cloth wrap located on the cables and no other ACM was identified within

the out-cove rooms of Cecil B. Moore and Wyoming Stations.

Observations

On July 25, 2012, System Safety mobilized to Cecil B. Moore and Wyoming Stations to

inspect the out-cove rooms for the proposed work and collect samples. The proposed work

is to repair the walls of the out-cove rooms along the Broad Street Subway tunnels by the

Cecil B. Moore and Wyoming Stations. The four out-cove rooms appeared to be of plaster

and terra cotta construction and included power cables and other electrical equipment. The

power cables were observed to be covered in white cloth wrap and appeared to be in

damaged condition. The rooms were observed to be in fair to poor condition with active

water leaks in some of the rooms.

SEPTA’s Pennsylvania Asbestos Inspector collected a total of five samples of suspect ACM

and submitted them to EMSL Analytical, Inc. for laboratory analysis. The samples were

analyzed by the method Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) to determine if asbestos is

present in the materials. Attachment A includes the Photographic Log and Attachment B

includes the analytical results.

Results

The analytical results indicated the one of the five samples collected were positive for

ACM. The remaining four samples were non-detect for asbestos. The material that was

positive for asbestos included the white cloth wrap on the cables.

Conclusions/Recommendations

Based on the analytical report, ACM exists in the white cloth wrap on the cables located in

the out-cove rooms. The laboratory analysis indicated the terra cotta and plaster walls did

not contain asbestos. It was reported to System Safety that the cloth wrap will not be

included in the proposed work; however caution should be taken to not disturb the wrap

when conducting the proposed work. System Safety’s Asbestos Project Inspector (API) will

prepare an Asbestos Inspection Report (AIR) of the existing ACM material under a separate

cover.



Cecil B. Moore/Wyoming Stations

Broad Street Subway, Out-cove Rooms


Photographs

1 and 2

Photograph 1: View of the white wire wrap located on cables. Note water staining.

Photograph 2: View of the wall of the out-cove room. Note terra cotta and plaster.

EMSL Analytical, Inc.200 Route 130 North, Cinnaminson, NJ 08077

Phone/Fax: (800)220-3675 /(856)786-5974

http://www.emsl.com cinnasblab@ EMSL.com

041220109

CustomerID: SEPT78

CustomerPO: 60134346

ProjectID:

EMSL Order:

Attn: Stephanie Baer

SEPTA

1234 Market Street, 6th Floor

Philadelphia, PA 19107

Received: 07/30/12 6:40PM

Cecile Moore and Wyoming Stations; #860-5090

Fax:

Phone: (215)580-7902

Project:

8/4/2012AnalysisDate:

7/25/2012Collected:

Sample Description Appearance % Type

AsbestosNon-Asbestos

% Fibrous % Non-Fibrous

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 and/or EPA

600/M4-82-020 Method(s) using Polarized Light Microscopy

CBM-072512-01

041220109-0001

N 16/10m Column

1 -W htW ireW rap

Gray

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Chrysotile10%Non-fibrous(other)90%

CBM-072512-02-

Plaster

041220109-0002

SB16/10m

Column 1 -W all

Plaster& Terra

Cotta

Gray None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Non-fibrous(other)100%

CBM-072512-02-

Terra Cotta

041220109-0002A

SB16/10m

Column 1 -W all

Plaster& Terra

Cotta

Red None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


CBM-072512-03-

Plaster

041220109-0003

NBN 16/10

Column 5 -W all

Plaster& Terra

Cotta

Gray None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


CBM-072512-03-

Terra Cotta

041220109-0003A

NBN 16/10

Column 5 -W all

Plaster& Terra

Cotta

Red None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


W YS-072512-01-

Plaster

041220109-0004

SBN 47/107

Track, Column 1 -

W allPlaster&

Terra Cotta

Gray None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


W YS-072512-01-

Terra Cotta

041220109-0004A

SBN 47/107

Track, Column 1 -

W allPlaster&

Terra Cotta

Red None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


1TestReportPLM-7.16.0 Printed:8/4/2012 2:50:38PM

Stephen Siegel, CIH, LaboratoryManager

orotherapproved signatory

Analyst(s)

EMSL maintainsliabilitylimited tocostofanalysis.Thisreportrelatesonly to thesamplesreported and maynotbereproduced, exceptin full, withoutwritten approvalbyEMSL.EMSL bearsno

responsibility forsamplecollection activitiesoranalyticalmethod limitations.Interpretation and useof testresultsare theresponsibilityof theclient.Thisreportmustnotbeused by theclient toclaim

productcertification, approval, orendorsementby NVLAP, NISToranyagencyof thefederalgovernment. Non-friableorganicallybound materialspresenta problem matrixand thereforeEMSL

recommendsgravimetricreduction prior toanalysis.Samplesreceived in good condition unlessotherwisenoted.Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertaintydata availableupon request. Unless

requested by theclient, buildingmaterialsmanufactured withmultiplelayers(i.e.linoleum, wallboard, etc.)arereported asa singlesample.

Samplesanalyzed byEMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ NVLAP Lab Code101048-0, AIHA-LAP, LLC-IHLAPLab100194, NYSELAP10872, NJ DEP03036

Initialreportfrom 08/04/2012 14:49:57

Anne Paul (4)

Ted Young (5)


Phone/Fax: (800)220-3675 /(856)786-5974


041220109

CustomerID: SEPT78


ProjectID:

EMSL Order:


SEPTA




Cecile Moore and Wyoming Stations; #860-5090

Fax:

Phone: (215)580-7902

Project:


7/25/2012Collected:






W YS-072512-02-

Plaster

041220109-0005

NBN 48/01 Track

4, Column 5 -W all

Plaster& Terra

Cotta

Gray None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


W YS-072512-02-

Terra Cotta

041220109-0005A

NBN 48/01 Track

4, Column 5 -W all

Plaster& Terra

Cotta

Red None Detected

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


2THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.TestReportPLM-7.16.0 Printed:8/4/2012 2:50:38PM



Analyst(s)





requested by theclient, buildingmaterialsmanufactured withmultiplelayers(i.e.linoleum, wallboard, etc.)arereported asa singlesample.



Anne Paul (4)

Ted Young (5)

13th

Street Non-fare Passageway Project

Photographs

1 and 2

Photograph 1: View of the peeling green paint located on the concrete support and beam located above the drop ceiling.

Photograph 2: View of the fireproofing located above the drop ceiling on the support structures.

Southeastern Pennsylvania Transportation

Authority

13th Street Non-fare Passageway Project

MFL


Client Sample Description ConcentrationLab ID Analyzed

Lead

Collected


Phone/Fax: (856)303-2500/(856)786-5974

http://www.emsl.com cinnaminsonleadlab@ emsl.com


SEPTA




13th St. St, E bound, Nonfare Passageway/ #2100525852192380900

Fax:

Phone: (215)580-7902

Project:

10/19/2012Collected:

Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B*/7000B)

201210900

CustomerID: SEPT78


ProjectID:

EMSL Order:

Site: Painton beams,grn/wht/blk

000113SS-101912-L01 4.4 % wt10/19/201210/19/2012

Site: Painton ceiling, grn/wht/blk

000213SS-101912-L02 4.0 % wt10/19/201210/19/2012

Page1 of 1

Julie Smith-LaboratoryDirector

NJ-NELAPAccredited:03036


TestReportChmSnglePrm/nQC-7.21.0 Printed:10/19/2012 7:16:39 PM

Reportinglimitis0.010% wtbased on theminimum sampleweightperourSOP.The QC data associated with theseresultsincluded in thisreportmeet themethod QC requirements, unless specifically

indicated otherwise.Unlessnoted, resultsin thisreportarenotblank corrected.EMSL bearsnoresponsibility forsamplecollection activities.Samplesreceived in good condition unlessotherwisenoted.

* slightmodifications tomethodsapplied."<"(less than)result signifiesthattheanalytewasnotdetected atorabovethereportinglimit.Measurementofuncertaintyisavailableupon request.

Samplesanalyzed byEMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ NELAPCertifications: NJ 03036, NY10896, PA 68-00367, AIHA-LAP, LLC ELLAP 100194, A2LA 2845.01



Phone/Fax: (800)220-3675 /(856)786-5974


041227445

CustomerID: SEPT78

CustomerPO:

ProjectID:

EMSL Order:


SEPTA




13 th st St, Eband, nonfare passageway/2100-5258-52-192580900

Fax:

Phone: (215)580-7902

Project:


Collected:






1355-101912-01

041227445-0001

- Fireproofingon

concreteceiling

Gray None Detected

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Min.W ool90% Non-fibrous(other)10%

1THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.TestReportPLM-7.16.0 Printed:10/19/2012 11:48:35 PM



Analyst(s)





requested by theclient, buildingmaterialsmanufactured withmultiplelayers(i.e.linoleum, wallboard, etc.)arereported asa singlesample.Reportinglimitis1%



Anne Paul (1)

Attachment E

Lead Based Paint Management Document

PUBLIC AND OPERATIONAL SAFETY DIVISION

SYSTEM SAFETY DEPARTMENT

MANAGEMENT OF LEAD PAINT

ON SEPTA CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

PREPARED BY–SYSTEM SAFETY

Document # 3001

SEPTA SOUTHEASTERN PENNSYLVANIA TRANSPORTATION AUTHORITY

PHILADELPHIA PENNSYLVANIA

1

MANAGEMENT OF LEAD PAINT

ON SEPTA CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

INTRODUCTION

The age of SEPTA’s infrastructure provides an environment prone to the presence of lead painted

surfaces and associated lead dust. Determining the presence of lead paint at the planning/design

stage of a project is critical for a project to properly handle the lead paint in a timely and cost

effective manner. The mere presence of lead paint should not be considered a major problem for

any project. The presence of lead paint simply requires the use of additional protective measures

during the course of the project to ensure that workers and the public are not exposed and that the

generation of any lead waste is properly handled. This document is intended to serve as a guide

for all project personnel to help them understand the protocols for handling lead paint on any

project.

HEALTH HAZARDS OF LEAD

Lead is a heavy, gray soft metal. Lead was utilized in many products for many beneficial reasons.

The following are some of the benefits that lead provided when added to a product:

� Prevents Corrosion – It will not crack easily with wear, weather or temperature change

� Kills Molds and Mildew

� It is easy to shape

� It is strong -

� It can block radiation - Lead aprons used during x-rays.

� Blocks sound

� Helps Paint Dry – Lead was added to paint to quicken the drying process.

Unfortunately, lead is a dangerous poison. Lead dust particles can be very small. Lead is most

dangerous when it is in the form of a dust or fume. Lead dust or fumes are easy to breathe when

it’s in the air. Lead dust is easy to ingest if it is on anything you put in your mouth – like food,

cigarettes or fingers. Lead dust settles on surfaces and when your hands touch these surfaces you

expose yourself to hand to mouth ingestion. Prolonged or excessive exposure to lead can cause

health problems. Sources of lead contamination can be found in the following environments:

• Industrial Releases – Lead is used to make batteries, ceramics, bullets and plastics. Plant

releases of air borne lead causes pollution in the air, soil and water.

• Food - Food grown in soil that contains lead can contain lead

• Water - Natural wells or water that runs through lead pipes or lead soldered pipes can

contain lead.

2

• Lead Paint - The most common exposure at SEPTA is through old lead paint surfaces.

When lead paint gets old or damaged it creates lead dust or chips. When lead paint turns to lead dust

it is easy to breathe. It is this potential generation of dust that warrants proper steps whenever this

paint is disturbed during a renovation project. It is also the reason why certain handling methods

are more favorable than others. Individuals can significantly reduce their risk of the health effects

of lead by using good general hygiene practices and utilizing proven engineering and/or

administrative controls in their work practices.

REGULATORY BACKGROUND

The U. S. Government banned the use of lead-based paint in houses, hospitals, schools, parks,

playgrounds, and public buildings in 1978. Lead-based paint is still used on cars, boats, road

markings, industrial steel and steel furniture.

In 1992 the U. S. Congress Passed the Residential Lead-Based Paint Hazard Reduction Act, also

known as Title X. Title X requires federal agencies to establish rules about working with lead. The

three primary agencies that developed rules for working with lead are:

1. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD)

2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

HUD

Lead paint abatement is regulated by HUD for target housing. The HUD Standard does not apply

to SEPTA. The HUD standards do provide in depth criteria for various techniques for eliminating

the exposure to lead-based paints. These include component removal, encapsulation and full lead

paint abatement. While the HUD regulations do not apply to SEPTA, there may be an occasion

where encapsulation or full lead paint removal is practical on a SEPTA project and the HUD criteria

provide a good source for defining proper removal procedures.

OSHA

It is SEPTA’s responsibility to inform the contractors of the presence of lead. Once the lead is

identified and the Contractor is made aware of the presence of lead-based paint then the OSHA

regulations apply. The applicable OSHA regulation for lead exposure in construction is 29CFR

1926.62. Contractors working on SEPTA projects containing lead-based paint are required and

regulated by OSHA to provide protection to their employees when there is a potential for

exposure to lead. This protection, depending on the exposure, may include training, air

monitoring, respiratory protection, protective clothing, wash facilities and medical monitoring.

The OSHA regulation is where the Action Level (30µg/cm3) and Permissible Exposure Level

(PEL = 50µg/m3) of lead concentrations are specified. OSHA also requires that all lead debris be

cleaned from the site. Before the contractor starts to disturb any identified lead paint, they

should submit a lead work plan for review and approval. This work plan should include but is

not limited to the following:�

3

� The contractors means and methods for handling the lead,

� The methods for protecting the worker (i.e. engineering controls verse personal protective

equipment like respirators)

� How will the contractor ensure the workers are not exposed to lead dust above the action

levels and permissible exposure levels set by OSHA?

� How will the contractor dispose of any lead waste

� How will the contractor protect the environment and general public?

SEPTA employees are not regulated by OSHA. However, whenever SEPTA employees are

performing similar work on lead paint, SEPTA will also utilize the OSHA regulations. This

includes medical monitoring, utilization of engineering controls, proper selection of respiratory

protection and PPE.

EPA

USEPA 40 CFR Part 261-Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) states lead containing

construction debris may meet federal requirements for categorization as hazardous waste. RCRA

regulates all solid waste products. Generators must determine whether their waste is either listed as

or characteristic of hazardous waste.

While the demolition is not an abatement, all waste associated with lead paint removal must be

measured for toxicity using the Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure and disposed of

accordingly.

The EPA RCRA regulations focus on the concept of cradle to grave. The generator (SEPTA) of a

hazardous waste (such as lead dust/chips) will never fully be released of liability even after the

waste is turned over to another entity. That is why it is important for SEPTA to ensure the wastes

are properly handled in accordance with the regulations and when at all possible destroyed and/or

recycled.

PaDEP

Construction & Demolition (C & D) debris containing lead paint is not federally regulated

except to the extent that solid waste landfills must follow a few basic standards outlined in

the Federal Register 40CFR Part 257. States therefore have the primary role in defining and

regulating the management of C&D debris.

Pennsylvania has established under Title 25, Article VIII of the Pa environmental

regulations for municipal waste, that building construction and demolition debris is

considered a residual waste, not a hazardous waste. Chapter 271.1 defines construction and

demolition waste to be: “Solid waste resulting from the construction or demolition of

buildings and other structures, including, but not limited to, wood, plaster, metals, asphaltic

substances, bricks, block and unsegregated concrete…” This allows painted wood and

metal structures to be disposed of without special preparation. Approved construction and

demolition waste landfills are acceptable disposal facilities for this waste.

4

Based on these regulations and confirmed in conversations with the PaDEP, lead paint is not

required to be removed from a structure prior to its demolition.

Furthermore:

• All building components including wood, metal, masonry, doors, etc. that contain

lead paint and are scheduled to be disposed of as part of the scope of the project do

not have to be analyzed for TCLP and may be disposed of as C&D debris.

• Any material that is going to be recycled must have all lead paint removed. This is

typically handled by the recycling center. For Example Structural Steel with Lead

Paint can be removed from the site and sent to a recycling center as scrap metal.

Many scrap plants will properly remove and dispose of the lead paint. It is

important to make sure the scraper is aware of the presence of lead paint and can

properly handle the lead.

AMS

The City of Philadelphia Department of Public Health, Air Management Services regulates air

emissions activities in the City of Philadelphia. As a result, Contractor’s and SEPTA are required

under the AMS regulations to prevent the release of dangerous air emissions. As part of their

permitting responsibilities, Contractor’s should submit their demolition and lead work plans to

AMS to ensure they comply with the City regulations.

DETERMINING THE PRESENCE OF LEAD

It is important to evaluate for the presence of lead during the planning/design phase of a project.

The designer’s scope of work should include this investigative service. Under emergency or

special circumstances SEPTA’s System Safety Department (hereinafter referred to as System

Safety) can sample for lead however, their annual budget for this service can not support every

SEPTA project. Sampling is usually conducted via bulk samples sent to a laboratory or through the

use of an XRF instrument that can instantly determine the presence of lead in a surface. System

Safety is available to provide guidance or assistance on the sampling protocols for each project.

If the lead paint is not identified at the time of design, the contract documents will not warn the

contractor of the presence of lead. Lead paint that is identified during the construction phase will

obviously result in change orders, increases in contract costs and delays to the project schedule.

Many projects will involve lead paint and other projects will not. The design phase of the project is

the optimum time to make this distinction.

HANDLING MATERIAL IDENTIFIED TO CONTAIN LEAD

If lead-based paint is identified, the next step is to determine how it will need to be handled. This

will vary by the specific work that is required under the general scope of the project. There are

5

typically three handling protocols that will be required on SEPTA projects (Component Removal,

Surface Preparation, Total Removal). The handling protocol used must respond to the

construction/demolition activity being performed.

COMPONENT REMOVAL

The project scope may require the demolition and removal of various existing components. These

components such as doors, windows, wood sofits, block walls may also be covered with lead-based

paint. Under this circumstance the component can be removed and disposed of as construction

demolition debris. The lead-based coating does not have to be removed prior to the removal of the

component. The contractor’s demolition methods do however have to be conducted in a manner

that controls dust and prohibits the coating from becoming air borne. If the contractor’s methods

can control the generation of dust the component can simply be removed and disposed of as C & D

Waste in a C & D landfill

If the component can be recycled (i.e. structural steel), the recycling company needs to be aware of

the lead-based paint and will be responsible to handle the coating as required for their recycling

process.

SURFACE PREPARATION

It Is OK To Do Nothing

Many of the surfaces coated with lead based paint may be required to remain as part of the scope of

the overall project. The magnitude of surface preparation is a result of final intentions for the

substrate. In some cases the scope of the project may not require a lead painted surface to be altered

in any way. In such cases it is acceptable to leave the surface as is. The presence of lead paint by it

self does not automatically necessitate the need to remove the paint.

If The Surface Needs to Be Prepared For a New Coating

In some cases the project may require the existing lead-based painted substrate to be repainted (i.e.

doors, windows or wood siding). In this case all the lead paint Does not have to be removed. It is

acceptable to remove loose paint and prepare the surface in accordance with the surface preparation

requirements of the new paint. The surface preparation should be a factor of the requirements of the

new coating and not contingent on the fact that the old surface contains lead. When surface

preparation requires the removal of all loose and flaking paint, the contractor will need to take

precautions to prohibit the generation of airborne lead dust.

If lead paint is to be removed on site the recommended method is wet scraping whenever feasible.

Burning, machine sanding, grinding, and dry scraping generate unacceptable levels of airborne lead

and require maximum worker protection and containment. Chemical striping is another acceptable

method of removal and surface preparation. If this method is utilized the contractor must submit

MSDS for any chemicals used on SEPTA property. It should also be noted that the use of chemical

strippers may not always be compatible with the new paint coating.

Another acceptable method is the use of needle guns with a shroud attached to a HEPA vacuum.

This method works well on metal and concrete if the substrate can support the impact of the tool.

6

SEPTA currently utilizes this method when repainting the old metal trolley wire support poles.

When done correctly, historical air sample results confirm this method does not generate any unsafe

air borne emissions. This is also the method of choice when lead needs to be removed from isolated

areas to allow for utility penetrations or to weld a new piece of steel to the original structure.

Sandblasting lead paint should be a last resort. Proper containment and decontamination are

required for this method. Protocols established under the HUD standards would serve as a

benchmark for proper means and methods even though SEPTA’s work is not regulated by HUD.

Under the sandblasting method System Safety will require third party area air monitoring to ensure

the integrity of the engineering controls are not presenting any public exposures. OSHA requires

that all surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of accumulation of lead. The standard

further states that clean up of floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates shall wherever

possible, be cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of lead becoming

airborne. Wet wiping and HEPA Vacuuming are the industry standards for proper clean-up

procedures. A visual inspection confirming proper clean-up is sufficient for clearing an area for re-

occupancy.

Encapsulation of lead paint is another acceptable method. Encapsulants are brushed or rolled on

coatings applied over the lead sealing it and providing a barrier. Many encapsulants are durable and

provide an elastic property maintaining a good seal under a variety of temperature changes. There

are numerous products that require minimum preparation and offer up to a 20 year warranty. Many

of these encapsulants can be tinted to match a specific surface color. Encapsulation has been used

successfully on many bridges and structures.

TOTAL LEAD PAINT REMOVAL

Often consultants and architects require that all of the paint is removed down to the substrate. This

approach is simply based on the aesthetic value the architect believes is brought to the final finished

product by eliminating the uneven surface and scaling appearance generated by the removing only

loose paint. This aesthetic requirement adds countless man-hours and additional costs to many

projects and is not required by any environmental regulation. Anytime full paint removal is

suggested, the project staff needs to conduct a cost comparison to determine if the end result is

justified over the added cost and time to the project. If the logistics or preference of the project staff

determines that full lead-based paint removal, in whole or in part, is needed then System Safety

recommends the following approach.

If the scope of work requires the contractor to remove all paint to bare substrate, the most cost

effective and time sensitive methods are abatement like methods as detailed in the HUD Guidelines.

The Contractor will more than likely retain the services of a certified abatement contractor. In light

of the work involved to fully remove the paint to substrate, System Safety also recommends the

utilization of a certified abatement contractor. The Contractor should provide detailed means and

methods in their Lead Work Plan to include:

� Containment methods,

� Removal methods,

� Decontamination methods,

� Methods for protecting the worker

� Detailed methods for clean up of the containment area to ensure safe re-occupancy.

7

While the contractor will be required by OSHA to conduct personal air sampling for their workers,

they will also be responsible to protect adjacent workers, the public and the environment. To

confirm the contractor’s activities do not pose an exposure to other workers or the public, System

Safety recommends conducting area samples outside the containment area during the removal

activity. These area samples should be compared against the OSHA Action level. This area

sampling, while not required by regulations, should be conducted by an independent qualified

company hired by the project. These services can be obtained by a task order to the Testing and

Environmental Services Consultant (TES) or through a separate purchase order for this service.

The independent area sampling should not be conducted by or through the Contractor as this poses a

conflict of interest. Cost for this independent sampling needs to be covered by the project budget.

System Safety does not have the financial resources to fund area sampling for construction projects.

It is true that this area sampling is not required by any regulation, however, it is a method that

enables SEPTA to confirm that the contractor’s work is not posing any exposure to the public; and

the quantifiable data provides SEPTA the information needed to dispute any claim by the public

that they were exposed during the construction activity.

There are several common methods used for total removal. Each method has pros and cons.

The use of a needle gun with a shroud attached to a HEPA vacuum is one method. This method

works well on metal and concrete if the substrate can support the impact of the tool.

The incorporation of the HEPA vacuum to collect the dust provides a process that produces minimal

exposure to the worker thereby requiring minimal PPE and offers the limited risk to surrounding

environment. The needle gun operation does an excellent job but only covers small surface areas.

As a result, it is time consuming method when covering larger surface areas.

Chemical Removal is a second method. This method of removal prevents the generation of lead

dust and allows for the coverage of larger areas and quicker removal than the needle gun. While

there is no dust generated, workers still may need respiratory protection to contend with the fumes

generated during the chemical application. The Chemical Removal process may be less effective

under colder temperatures. Chemical Removal may also not be as effective on surfaces with multi-

layers of paint. Also the residue left over after the surface is cleaned may be incompatible with

certain new coatings.

Hydro blasting is another method that can remove paint off of large surfaces with out generating

lead dust or fumes. However, the waste water needs to be captured and properly disposed of. Also

many environments may not be forgiving to the presence of water.

Abrasive Blasting (blasting with sand, walnut shells, metal beads etc.) is another method. This

method generates the most dust, involves the greatest level of PPE and respiratory protection,

requires full containment of the work environment and necessitates a method for decontamination

of the workers and work area. Abrasive blasting presents the greatest potential exposure to the

public if the containment is not properly erected. This potential exposure is why System Safety

warrants independent area sampling. Additionally, abrasive blasting requires significant clean up

protocols to ensure the work area is safe for re-occupancy before the containment is disassembled.

8

There are acceptable industry practices that should be utilized for cleaning up the work area. They

typically include a thorough HEPA Vacuum of all surfaces, followed by a wash down of the

surface using a Trisodium Phosphate (TSP) and water solution. To ensure the Contractor’s clean up

allows for safe re-occupancy, a visible inspection of the containment area should be conducted. The

containment should not be removed until the visual inspection confirms a clean area. The visual

inspection should be conducted by an independent trained individual, but not one hired by the

contractor. If the visual inspection can not definitively allow for a safe re-occupancy, an aggressive

air sample may be warranted. An aggressive air sample is conducted after the clean up is

complete and consists of air samples taken inside the containment area while air is blown

throughout the area usually via a leaf blower. For purposes of confirming a clean environment these

samples should be below the OSHA action level.

DISPOSING OF THE LEAD WASTE

As stated above, the EPA regulates the disposal of residual and hazardous waste. As a result,

SEPTA is required to ensure that the disposal of lead waste generated during construction

activity is conducted in accordance with the RCRA regulations. The disposal requirement will

vary based on the work method utilized to handle the lead.

COMPONENT REMOVAL

Under component removal, where the lead paint is still affixed to the component, the waste has

been classified by the PaDEP as acceptable C & D debris and can be disposed of in a C & D

Landfill if recycling is not an option.

SURFACE REMOVAL/ TOTAL REMOVAL

Most surface preparation methods will generate paint chips and/or dust. The contractor is required

to properly collect this material and have it analyzed. All waste associated with lead paint removal

must be measured for toxicity using the Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) and

disposed of accordingly. If the TCLP analysis indicated Hazardous levels of lead (>5mg/Kg) the

Contractor and SEPTA will have to generate the proper disposal documentation forms. The

Contractor will generate a Hazardous Material Manifest defining the quantity and type of hazardous

waste anticipated to be disposed. In order to complete the manifest, the Contractor will need an

EPA Facility ID number and a Generator’s signature. Most of SEPTA’s maintenance shops

already have EPA Facility ID numbers, which System Safety can provide upon request. For

unique locations like a bridge or a station, a Temporary ID number will be utilized. System Safety

will coordinate with the EPA to obtain this Temporary ID number on behalf of the project. This

process usually takes about 3 days. The project staff simply needs to contact System Safety and

request this number.

If the TCLP results do not indicate hazardous levels of lead, then the waste can be disposed of as

a residual waste. A chain of custody form will still need to be generated and a SEPTA

employee on the project staff will still need to sign off as the Generator.

9

In addition to the paint chips and dust, containment material (i.e. Polyethylene plastic sheeting)

and protective clothing (i.e. tyvek suits and gloves) will be required to be packaged with the lead

waste for proper disposal.

Where water is utilized to control dust or in a hydro blast procedure, the waste water can not be

disposed of in the Municipal system or to ground unless it has been determine that lead levels in

the water meet the allowable levels for that type of disposal. If the lead levels in the water do

not allow for disposal in the municipal system or ground, the waste water needs to be properly

recycled.


SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section describes the pipe hangers and supports for piping systems. Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of uninsulated pipe and tubing or, for all insulated lines, the outside diameter of the insulated pipe or pre-insulated pipe supports.

B. Design brackets, hangers and supports for increased forces due to Seismic Zone

1 loadings in accordance with the IPC, IBC and the Philadelphia approved Building Code.

. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Not used. C. Related Documents

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

D. Related Sections

1. Division 1 - General Requirements 2. 15070 - Vibration Isolation

E. Definitions

Not used.


Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards, and Specifications: A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical

Engineers (ANSI/ASME)

B31.9 Building Services Piping B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.

(MSS) SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture

SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices

C. American Welding Society (AWS)

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060-1


D. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 199 Automatic Sprinklers for Fire Protection Service Fire Protection Equipment List

E. International Plumbing Code (IPC) F. Philadelphia approved Building Code G. Material, design and manufacture of pipe hangers and supports shall conform to

MSS SP-58. H. Selection and application of pipe hangers and supports shall conform to MSS SP-

69. I. Fabrication and installation practices of pipe hangers and supports shall conform

to MSS SP-89. J. All work shall conform to ANSI/ASME B31.5, B31.9 Code(s) for Pressure

Piping. K. Pipe hangers and supports for fire protection piping systems shall be designed in

accordance with the applicable NFPA Standards (NFPA 12A, 13, 14 and 20), and shall be UL listed for fire protection service. When the requirements of this Section differ or conflict with the requirements of specified NFPA Standards for fire protection systems, the more stringent requirements shall be complied with.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings - Submit plans and details of hanger attachments to the building structure, including locations, dimensions and loads of all attachments.

B. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's product data for all products specified.

1.4 LOAD RATINGS

A. All pipe supports, including pre-insulated pipe supports, shall be load rated. Load ratings shall be established by the pipe support manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with the above referenced codes.

B. Load tests shall be made on both supporting materials and configurations. All

tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. The results of these tests shall be made available to the Contractor/SEPTA upon request.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include:



A. Pipe Hangers - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, Piping Specialties, Inc., National Pipe Hanger.

B. Pipe Clamps - Uninsulated Pipe and Tubing - Grinnell, Power Piping Company,

Piping Specialties, Inc., National Pipe Hanger; Insulated Pipe and Tubing - Pipe Shields, Inc.

C. Pipe Insulation Protection Shields - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, National

Pipe Hanger. D. Pipe Rollers - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, Piping Specialties, Inc.,

National Pipe Hanger. E. Wall Brackets - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, Piping Specialties, Inc.,

National Pipe Hanger. F. Hanger Inserts - Grinnell, National Pipe Hanger, Piping Specialties, Inc. G. Spring Hangers - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, Piping Specialties, Ins.,

National Pipe Hanger. H. Pipe Support Stanchions - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, Piping Specialties,

Inc., National Pipe Hanger. I. Pipe Supports for Rooftop Piping and Piping Located at Grade - Grinnell, Power

Piping Company, National Pipe Hanger. J. Pipe Supports for Plumbing Fixtures in Chases and Partitions - Sumner, Holdrite. K. Trapeze Hangers - Unistrut, Grinnell (Power-Strut), National Pipe Hanger. L. Grating Hangers - Duramark. M. U-Bolts - Grinnell, Power Piping Company, Piping Specialties, Inc., National

Pipe Hanger. N. Specific manufacturer’s products are cited in the following paragraphs to

establish the desired quality and performance of the work. Equivalent products by the other approved manufacturers listed above are also acceptable, subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS

A. For Uninsulated Carbon Steel, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe - Carbon Steel Clevis Type and Carbon Steel Roller Type - Grinnell No. 260 and No. 171 or No. 181, respectively.

B. For Insulated Carbon Steel Pipe and Copper Tubing - Carbon Steel Clevis Type -

Grinnell No. 300. Use with Pre-Insulated Pipe Supports. C. For Uninsulated Galvanized Pipe - Galvanized Clevis Type - Grinnell No. 260.



D. For Uninsulated Copper Tubing, 3 Inches and Smaller - Copper-Plated Carbon

Steel Clevis Type - Grinnell No. CT-65. Hangers supporting uninsulated copper tubing over 3 inches shall be plastic-coated.

E. Hanger Rods For All Pipes - Provide galvanized hanger rods for the following

pipe sizes as tabulated as a minimum for single rigid rod hangers, subject to the load ratings of MSS-SP-58. Hanger rods may be reduced one (1) size for double rod hangers with 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

Pipe Size (Inches) Minimum Rod Diameter (Inches)

½ to 2 3/8

2½ to 3 1/2

4 to 5 5/8

6 3/4

8 to 12 7/8

2.3 PIPE CLAMPS

A. Beam Clamps

1. For Structural Steel Members - Carbon Steel Beam Clamp - Grinnell No. 134.

B. Riser Clamps

1. For Carbon Steel, Cast Iron Pipe - Carbon Steel Riser Clamp - Grinnell

No. 261. 2. For Copper Tubing - Copper-Plated Carbon Steel Riser Clamp - Grinnell

No. CT-121. 3. For Stainless Steel Tubing, and Glass and Brass Pipe - Plastic-Coated,

Copper-Plated Steel Riser Clamp - Grinnell No. CT-121C.

C. Offset Clamps 1. For Wall, Floor and Structure - Carbon Steel Offset Pipe Clamp -

Grinnell No. 103. 2.4 PIPE INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS

A. Furnish and install pipe insulation protection shields on all insulated piping and tubing up to and including 6 inches in size. All shields shall be galvanized steel. Length and gauge thickness of shields shall be based on MSS SP-58.



B. Use calcium silicate insulation at each pipe insulation protection shield. Calcium

silicate insulation shall be at least the length of the protection shield. C. Support spacing shall be as specified in Part 3 of this Section. D. Approved Pipe Insulation Protection Shields - Grinnell No. 167, Power Piping

Company No. 136, Carpenter & Paterson No. 265P, National Pipe Hanger No. 300.

2.5 PIPE ROLLERS

A. Pipe Roller - Cast Iron - Grinnell No. 171.

B. Pipe Roller Stand - Cast Iron - Adjustable Type - Grinnell No. 274. 2.6 WALL BRACKETS

A. For bolting to walls, provide welded steel brackets and backing plate with sufficient thickness and size to uniformly distribute the pipe weight - Grinnell Nos. 194, 195 and 199.

B. Wall brackets shall be suitable for the pipe loading with a minimum safety factor

of 5 and shall be designed for loadings imposed by Seismic Zone 1 criteria. The larger of the two loadings shall govern the design.

2.7 HANGER INSERTS

A. Provide hanger inserts to be cast into concrete or built into masonry. B. Inserts shall be galvanized steel slotted type to receive a machine bolt head or

nut. C. Inserts shall permit adjustment in one horizontal direction and shall, when

installed in properly cured concrete, develop the full strength of the bolt with a minimum safety factor of 5 and shall be designed for loadings imposed by Seismic Zone 1 criteria. The larger of the two loadings shall govern the design.

2.8 SPRING HANGERS

A. Spring hangers shall be of the variable-support type unless shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings, fabricated of carbon steel with a steel spring enclosure and visible indication of spring deflection/load, with maximum variability of 25 percent - Grinnell Nos. 82, 98 and B-268 or 80-V and 81-H.

2.9 PIPE SUPPORT STANCHIONS

A. Stanchions shall be pipe mounted - Grinnell Nos. 258, 259 and 264. 2.10 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING FIXTURES IN CHASES AND PARTITIONS



A. Provide combination of Channel, Pipefix, Posifix and Stackfix horizontal and

vertical pipe support products by Sumner, or equal by Holdrite. 2.11 TRAPEZE HANGERS

A. Trapeze hangers shall be pre-manufactured by Unistrut. Isolate non-ferrous piping from trapeze hanger assembly to prevent galvanic corrosion.

2.12 GRATING HANGERS

A. Grating hangers shall be Duramark No. 05001. 2.13 U-BOLTS

A. Heavy-Duty Carbon Steel - Grinnell Nos. 137 and 137S.

B. When required to guide pre-insulated pipe supports listed in Paragraph 2.04 C.2 - Pipe Shields, Inc. Model G3000.

2.14 SHOP PAINTING

A. All carbon steel hangers and supports shall be shop painted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support horizontal pipe runs using hangers and supports. Space the hangers so that the supported load does not exceed the load recommended by the hanger manufacturer. Space the hangers so they do not exceed the support spacing Requirements listed in this Section. The supported load shall not overstress the building structural members.

B. Support vertical pipe using riser clamps. When run in a shaft, support riser

clamps on both sides of the shaft. Support vertical plastic piping (all sizes) and metal piping less than 1¼ inch every 8 feet with pipe clamps.

C. Securely bolt pipe roller hangers to the steel support. D. Support cast iron pipe under each section and at each hub. E. For the support of two or more pipes of similar temperatures running adjacent to

each other at the same elevation and at the same slope, structural steel trapeze hangers are permitted. Limit the longitudinal hanger spacing to suit the smaller diameter pipe.

F. Support riser piping independently from the connected horizontal piping. G. Provide isolation hangers and supports as specified under Section 15070.



H. For pipe supported on rod hangers, provide roller hangers where thermal

movement will cause the hanger rod to deviate more than 4 degrees from the vertical, or where longitudinal expansion will cause a movement of more than ½ inch in the piping, or as shown.

I. For all insulated pipe 3 inches in diameter and larger supported from below on a

flat surface where longitudinal expansion will cause a movement of more than ½ inch in the piping, use pre-insulated pipe supports.

J. Provide vertical adjustment under load in hangers for pipe 2½ inches and larger. K. In the part of the building which is steel-framed, attach hangers to the building

structural steel beams. Where hangers do not correspond with the building structural steel beams, provide supplemental steel members fastened to the building structural steel beams. Provide two (2) coats of primer on the supplemental steel. In the part of the building which is a concrete structure, attach hangers to the concrete structure by installing anchors into the concrete. Submit details of hanger attachments of the building structure to the Contractor for approval before drilling or burning holes in the structure.

L. Do not use pipe hooks, chains or perforated steel strap for pipe supports.

M. Do not support piping from ceiling supports, ductwork, raised-floor pedestals,

equipment, electrical conduit, cable trays or other piping. N. Piping shall not be hung from metal floor deck or metal roof deck without the

written approval of the Contractor.

O. Cut-off excess hanger rod lengths. Secure rods by use of locknuts or elastic stop nuts.

P. Wall brackets may be used where pipes are adjacent to walls or other vertical

surfaces which may be used for support. Q. Pre-insulated pipe supports shall be installed as pipe is erected. Utilize

Commercial Grade or Heavy Industrial Grade pre-insulated pipe supports where the hanger warrants the use of lighter or heavier duty supports, respectively. See requirements for use of other supports as indicated elsewhere in this Section. Specific hanger notes on the contract drawings will dictate over these specifications.

R. Support the base of all vertical pipe stacks (except soil pipe stacks, diesel

generator exhaust stacks and copper water pipe risers) with a base leg. Cut the top of the base leg to shape and completely weld to the heel of the base elbow. Weld leg support to a bearing plate and bolt to the floor. Locate base leg on the vertical pipe centerline.

S. Secure pipe hangers attached to concrete structure and slabs with embedded

inserts, anchor bolts or concrete fasteners, or, with specific written approval from the Contractor, power-driven inserts. Do not drill or shoot without specific



written approval of the Contractor. Location and types will be reviewed for compatibility with building structure systems only. A safety factor of 5 should be used in selection of all inserts and expansion bolts and shall be designed for loadings imposed by Seismic Zone 1 criteria. The larger of the two loadings shall govern the design.

T. Provide hangers and supports not more than 12 inches from each face of a

horizontal elbow. U. Use variable-support spring hangers where vertical movement from thermal

expansion is between ¼ inch and 2 inches. V. Use constant-support spring hangers where vertical movement from thermal

expansion is greater than 2 inches. W. Furnish inserts for pipe hangers installed in concrete slabs for installation during

concrete forming. X. Install hanger inserts prior to installation of concrete or masonry. The

Subcontractor shall be responsible for the correct location and position of the inserts for his work.

Y. Provide all supports for piping on roof and piping located at grade. Rooftop

supports shall rest on building structure, not on roofing material; make arrangements with the Contractor so that all rooftop supports are in place before roofing is completed. For piping at grade, supports shall rest on concrete, not on ground.

Z. Provide all supports for piping under raised-floor areas. Coordinate location of

supports with raised-floor pedestals. AA. Support all vertical drops to plumbing fixtures and equipment. BB. Provide maximum support spacing as listed below. This spacing does not

include any concentrated pipe-mounted load, such as valves, meters, pumps etc. Provide additional support as required. Also, adjust the span, if required, to meet the load ratings of the supports/hangers.

1. Support standard-weight steel piping for water and condensate services as

follows:



Nominal Pipe Size (Inches)

Maximum Support Spacing (Feet)

½ 7

¾ 7

1 7

1½ 9

2 10

2½ 11

3 12

4 14

5 16

6 17

8 19

10 20

12 23



2. Support steel piping for compressed air service as follows:


Maximum Support Spacing (Inches)

1/4 to 1/2 8

5/8 to 3/4 9

1 9

2 13

3 15

4 17

6 21

3. For copper tubing in contact with metallic pipe clamps, brackets or supports, provide an insulating pipe clamp assembly with plastic cushion. Pipe clamp assembly shall eliminate metal-to-metal contact and form an insulating liner to prevent galvanic action between copper tubing and metallic clamps, brackets and supports. Support copper tubing as follows:


Maximum Horizontal and Vertical Support Spacing (Feet)

Water Service

Compressed Air Service

1/4 to 1/2 5 6

5/8 to 3/4 5 7

1 6 8

1¼ 7 9



1½ 8 10

2 8 11

2½ 9 13

3 10 14

4 12 16

6 14 18

4. Support horizontal polyethylene piping continuously on light metal angles

or channels in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Support stainless steel piping or tubing at least every 10 feet. 6. Support cast iron and ductile iron piping using clevis hangers every 5 feet

(for 5-foot sections of pipe) or every 10 feet (for 10-foot sections of pipe) with at least one hanger per section.

7. Support fire protection piping in accordance with applicable NFPA requirements.

8. Support grooved end piping to provide adequate lateral restraint to prevent “snaking” of the pressurized piping system. No pipe length shall be left unsupported between any two couplings. Support grooved end piping as follows:

Average Number of Hangers Per Pipe Length, Evenly Spaced

Pipe Length (Feet)


7 10 12 15 20 22

3 to 4 1 1 2 2 2 2

5 to 8 1 1 1 2 2 2

10 to 12 1 1 1 2 2 2




SECTION 15070 - VIBRATION ISOLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies work pertaining to vibration isolation for mechanical equipment and piping.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. 05500 – Metal Fabrications

C. Related Documents


D. Definitions

Not Used.



1. Comply with codes and regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.


a. A123 “Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Subcontract Documents and with the additional requirements as specified for each:

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Design for concrete inertia block and structural-steel bases. Include tabulation of and sizes of anchor plates.

b. Design data on isolators including actual deflection; outside diameter; free, operating and solid heights of isolators; method of attachment; bolt sizes; and type for the floor and ceiling support and vibration isolation systems for the East and West Ventilation Structures’ ventilation fans shall be performed and sealed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

2. Product data for each product listed in Section 2.01, below.

3. Certification: Manufacturer’s certification that products comply with specified requirements.

VIBRATION ISOLATION 15070- 1


PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. General Requirements:

1. Vibration isolators shall be selected to produce uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed; steel components shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123.

a. Types of vibration isolators for equipment and piping:

1) Floor-mounted: Spring isolators.

2) Slab-suspended: Suspension-type isolators.

2. Spring isolators for floor-mounted equipment shall:

a. Be free-standing, laterally stable without housing, complete with minimum 1/4- inch thick neoprene, acoustical friction pad in series with spring element.

b. Utilize leveling bolts and adequate facilities for bolting to equipment and supporting structure using isolation washers.

c. Coil outside diameter: Not less than 0.8 of operating height of spring.

d. Horizontal stiffness: Not less than 0.8 of vertical stiffness.

e. Springs designed to have additional 50-percent capacity beyond rated load.

f. Springs designed so that ends remain parallel during and after spring deflection to operating height.

g. Vibration isolators selected for lowest operating speed of equipment.

h. Built-in adjustable limit stops with isolators provided for equipment of operating weight different from installed weights, to prevent rising of equipment when weight is removed and for equipment exposed to wind. Limit stops not to be in contact during normal operating conditions.

i. Welding of springs to load-plate assembly for vibration isolators with capacities of 6,000 pounds or less is prohibited.

j. Vibration isolators with capacities of 6,000 pounds or less are permitted use of cups or other positive means for restraining springs.

3. Suspension-type isolation hangers for slab-suspended equipment:

a. Combination of spring and neoprene in series.

b. Spring made of stable steel.

c. Encased in structurally stable steel bracket.

d. Spring diameter large enough to permit 15-degree angular misalignment of rod, connecting hanger and equipment, without contact

e. Designed to provide complete support for suspended units upon failure or rupture of isolator.

4. Inertia bases:

a. Furnished by vibration-isolator manufacturer.

b. Complete with steel-reinforced concrete cast into welded structural-steel channel frame

1) Structural-steel work: Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications.



c. Mounting templates and brackets for vibration isolators with minimum thickness equal to eight-percent of longest base dimension.

5. Concrete equipment subbases (housekeeping pads)

a. Concrete: Section, , 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete.

b. Concrete subbases not less than four inches high provided for floor mounted equipment. Subbases resting on structural floor and reinforced with steel rods interconnected with reinforcing bars of floor by means of tie bars hooked at both ends.

c. Clearance between subbases and inertia bases: Two inches minimum.

d. Subbase concrete:

1) 2500 psi minimum, general use

2) Class 4, Steel-Troweled Finish 6. Snubbers:

a. As recommended by manufacturer of vibration isolator.

b. Compatible with vibration isolators provided.

B. Isolation-Unit Types and Deflection:

1. Piping:

a. Slab-suspended piping: Combination spring and neoprene in shear element hangers as specified for ceiling-suspended equipment (see Section 15205). Springs designed for 1.5-inch minimum deflection. First two isolation hangers of each pipe connected to equipment to have deflection equal to equipment isolation-support deflection.

b. Floor-mounted piping isolated by spring isolators with one-inch minimum static deflection.

c. First two spring isolators of each pipe connected to equipment to have deflection equal to equipment isolation-support deflection.

2. Grout: Section 03300, premixed shrinkage-compensating grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install vibration isolators where shown and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

B. Jack bases and equipment into position and wedge or block before vibration isolators are loaded.

C. Use isolator leveling bolts for final leveling of equipment after equipment is in operation.

D. Springs installed so that ends remain parallel during and after deflection to operating height.

E. Mount snubbers as close to vibration isolators as practicable and as recommended by manufacturer.




SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies mechanical, HVAC, and plumbing insulation.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Not Used.

C. Related Documents 1. Division 1 – General Requirements

D. Definitions Not Used.


A. Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications: 1. Comply with codes and regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. A276 “Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes” b. C240 “Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block” c. C534 “Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form” d. C552 “Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation” e. E84 “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”

4. Federal Specification (FS): HH-I-558. 5. Military Specification (MS): MIL-A-3316, MIL-B-19564, MIL-C-19565, MIL-C-20079. 6. International Building Code, 2009. 7. International Plumbing Code, 2009 8. International Energy Code, 2009 9. City of Philadelphia approved Building Code, 2009.

B. Each item listed in UL Building Materials Directory.

C. Fire-Hazard Ratings: 1. Insulation, fastener, and jacketing materials, except flexible cellular plastic for expansion joints

shall meet the following fire-hazard ratings in accordance with ASTM E84: a. Not exceeding 25 for flame spread, 50 for fuel contributed and 50 for smoke developed.

2. Use of flame proofing and fireproofing treatments for the purpose of achieving specified fire-hazard ratings for insulation not meeting specified requirements is prohibited.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Subcontract Documents and with the additional requirements as specified for each:

1. Shop Drawings. 2. Certification: Manufacturer’s certification that products comply with specified requirements.

PIPE INSULATION 15083- 1 of 4


3. Submit manufacturer’s product data and illustrations for all equipment, products, and materials provided.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Label each item with manufacturer's name and brand designation, referenced specification number, type, class and thermal and acoustical rating as applicable.

B. Ship each type of insulation and accessory materials securely packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage.

C. Store materials in secure and dry storage facility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Piping Insulation: 1. General:

a. Meets the requirements of the International Energy Code, 2006 b. Vapor-permeance resistance:

(1) Maximum vapor permeance: 0.5 percent by volume. (2) Vapor-permeance ratings for piping insulation determined in accordance with

ASTM C240. 2. Insulation for pump discharge lines, forced sewer mains and hot/cold potable-water piping:

a. Pipe, valves, flanges and fittings (Insulation to consist of one layer, two-inch thick):

(1) Rigid premolded insulation sleeving: Thermal-pipe and tube covering, mineral fiber, industrial-type covered with aluminum jacket 0.016-inch thick, in accordance with ASTM C552, all-service jacket.

b. Insulation not required on embedded or buried pipe. 3. Refrigerant-piping insulation:

B. Expansion-Joint Insulation: Flexible unicellular, in accordance with ASTM C534, one-inch thickness, two layers.

C. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel, 26-gauge, 2 1/2-inch wings.

D. Metal Pipe Jacket: 1. Galvanized sheet steel, 24 gauge (U.S.S.) having Z-type longitudinal joint seam. 2. Aluminum alloy, 0.016-inch thick, mill-finish, having Z-type longitudinal joint seam.

E. Insulation-Hanger Shields: Aluminum alloy, minimum 0.050-inch thick, mill-finish, covering bottom 180 degrees of pipe insulation, lengths as follows:

Pipe Sizes/Inclusive Shield Length 1/2 inch to 2 inches 6 inches

2-1/2 inches to 6 inches 9 inches 6 inches to 12 inches 12 inches



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION OF INSULATION

A. General: 1. Do not apply insulation until all surfaces to be covered are clean, dry and free of foreign materials,

such as oil, grease, rust, scale, dust and dirt. 2. Apply only clean and dry insulation. 3. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as a minimum requirement. 4. Provide complete moisture and vapor seal wherever insulation terminates against metal hangers,

anchors and other projections through insulation on cold surfaces. 5. Provide continuous insulation through sleeves and openings except pipe sleeves piercing exterior

walls, floors and ceilings below ground level. 6. Stagger joints with respect to adjacent butt joints. 7. Unless otherwise shown, insulate all water piping. 8. Embedded or inaccessible-piping insulation:

a. Install insulation consisting of layers or thickness specified for usage specified. b. Provide inner jacket of prefabricated-fabric pipe jacket. c. Coat exposed surface of fabric pipe jacket with protective plastic film and inner surface

with special-release paper. d. Apply jacket of galvanized steel over inner jacket. e. For flanges, valves and other fittings, apply aluminum jacket with paper backing or

asphalt adhesive over galvanized-steel jacket. Secure by means of straps as specified. f. Over elbows provide mitered insulation covered with aluminum jacket material.

B. Application of Insulation on Pipe Saddles:

1. Cut two-inch thick piece of premolded pipe insulation of same material as used on piping, slightly

larger than void formed by outer pipe circumference and pipe saddle. 2. Press insulation into void by hand pressure, so that both ends project slightly beyond each end of

saddle. 3. Cut ends of insulation flush with saddle ends. 4. Use of filler, adhesive or other material to fill voids or imperfections in insulation is prohibited.

C. Expansion Joints for Piping Insulation:

1. Install expansion joints in both horizontal insulation and vertical runs of piping on centers not to

exceed 50 feet. 2. Install joints one-half inch wide and fill with cushioning material in accordance with insulation

manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Insulation for Anchors:

1. Insulate anchors which are secured directly to cold piping as specified for a minimum distance of

eight inches from surface of pipe insulation and sufficient to prevent sweating. END OF SECTION 15083



SECTION 15084 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing for freeze prevention with the following electric heating

cables: 1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for each

electric heating cable required.

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15084- 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES

A. Approved Manufactures 1. Raychem; Tyco Thermal Controls 2. Chromalox, Inc 3. Approved Equal

B. Comply with IEEE 515.1.

C. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16 AWG, nickel-plated, stranded copper bus wires embedded in conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled, nonheating leads with connectors at one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once without overheating.

D. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant modified polyolefin.

E. Cable Cover: Tinned copper braid, with a resistance less than the heating cable bus wire resistance as determined in type test (ASTM, B193, Sec. 5).

F. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150° F

G. Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 185° F

H. Minimum Installation Temperature: -40° F

I. Temperature ID Number (T-Rating): T6 - 185° F

J. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

K. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Maximum output: 3 W/ft 2. Piping Diameter: 1 Inch 3. Number of Parallel Cables: 2 4. Minimum Bend Radius (at 68° F): 0.5 inches 5. Weight (lb per 10 ft, nominal): 0.7 6. Electrical Characteristics for Single-Circuit Connection:

a. Volts: 208 or 240 volts, coordinate with drawings b. Phase: 1 c. Hertz: 60 d. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 15 amperes or 30 amperes, coordinate with drawings e. Maximum Circuit Length (at an ambient start-up temperature of 0° F): 395 feet for 15

amperes, 208 volts. 633 feet for 30 amperes, 240 volts.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Pipe-Mounted Thermostats for Freeze Protection:


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5862&mf=04&src=wd


1. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F. 2. Snap action; open-on-rise, double-pole single-throw switch with minimum current rating adequate

for connected cable. 3. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipe-

wall temperature. 4. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure. 5. See electrical drawings for thermostat locations.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape; heat-conductive putty; cable ties; power connection device, silicone end seals, tee kits and splice kits; and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels: Refer to Section 15432 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" and coordinate with plumbing contractor.

C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick, and with pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches 3/4 inch minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

D. Ground-Fault Protection: Ground-fault equipment protection must be installed on each heating cable branch circuit, as required by NFPA 70, Article 427. The drawings indicate installation of an EPD-rated circuit breaker (a breaker rated for 30 milliamps of leakage current) for each of these branch circuits to comply with this provision. Alternatively, compliance with this requirement can be achieved if controls or power supply will trip for leakage currents in the magnitude of 6-50 milliamps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described:

1. Freeze protection for water piping Self-regulating heating cable.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to manufacturer's written instructions; use cable-protection conduit and slack cable to allow movement without damage to cable.

B. Electric Heating-Cable Installation for Freeze Protection for Piping:

1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed. 2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1. 3. Plumbing contractor shall install insulation over piping with electric cables according to

Section 15084 " Pipe Insulation." 4. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 16420 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 " Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.

2. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing. 3. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current

simultaneously.

D. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe-mounted cables.

E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage during construction.

B. Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables.



SECTION 15205 - PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies work pertaining to domestic water, sanitary, and storm water piping, fittings, A.valves, drains, specialties and supporting devices for use in SEPTA Concourse. Plumbing systems start at the interface to the utility corporation stop, tie-in, manhole connection, etc., continue underground to the facility, and throughout the facility.

Related Work Specified Elsewhere B.Not Used.

Related Documents C.1. Division 1 – General Requirements

Definitions D.Not Used.


Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications: A.1. Comply with codes and regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. The International Plumbing Code. 3. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA): Standards. 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASME:

a. A21.15/AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges b. B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings c. B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings d. B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings e. B16.9 – Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings f. B16.11 – Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded g. B16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings h. B16.22 – Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings i. B16.39 – Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions j. B31.3 – Process Piping k. B31.9 – Building Services Piping

6. ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS): 7. Not used. 8. Federal Specification (FS):

a. WW-P-460D – Pipe Fittings; Brass or Bronze (Threaded), Class 125 and 250 Pound

b. WW-P-501 – Pipe Fittings, Cast Iron, Screwed 125 and 250 Pound c. A-A-59617 – Unions, Brass or Bronze, Threaded Pipe Connections and

Solder Joints d. WW-V-51F – Valve, Angle, Check, and Globe, Bronze (125,150, and 200

Pounds) 9. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS):

a. SP-58 – Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture b. SP-67 – Butterfly valves c. SP-70 – Cast iron gate valves , flanged and threaded ends d. SP-80 – Bronze Gate, globe angle and check valves

PIPING SYSTEMS 15205- 1


10. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): a. WH-201 – Water Hammer Arresters.

11. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless b. A74 – Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings c. A105 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping

Applications d. A126 – Standard Specification for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings e. A234 f. A276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes g. A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings h. B62 – Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings i. B88 – Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube j. B306 – Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube k. C564 – Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets Cast Iron Pipe and

Fittings l. D1784 – Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds m. D2665 – Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 12. American Iron and Steel Institute: Stainless Steel Grades-304, 316, 410, 416.

Qualifications of Welding Personnel and Procedures: B.1. Employ welding personnel whose qualification is certified in accordance with ASME

Section IX. Such certification is to remain in force for the duration of the welding operations.

2. Do not start fabrication until qualification has been successfully completed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Subcontract Documents and with the A.additional requirements as specified for each: 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

a. Complete catalog information and/or shop drawings for each assembly provided.

b. Submittals include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Pipes and piping layout, including locations of hangers and supports. (2) Pipe hangers and supports. (3) Valves. (4) Cleanout deck plates and wall plates. (5) Escutcheons. (6) Gauges. (7) Expansion joints, guides and anchors. (8) Air eliminators. (9) Pipe sleeves. (10) Drains. (11) Wall Hydrants

2. Certification: a. Certificates from manufacturers verifying the following:

(1) That pipe-joint gaskets and lubricants are satisfactory for use with pipe and fittings specified.

(2) That expansion joints are designed and tested as specified.



(3) Certification verifying that welding personnel have been qualified in accordance with ASME: Section IX and as specified above under Qualification of Welding Personnel and Procedures.

b. Welding procedures including post weld inspection checklist.

1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

Do not perform welding when surfaces are wet from rain, snow, ice or during periods of high wind A.unless operator and work are properly protected.

Perform welds at or above minimum temperature or perform preheat. B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


General Requirements: A.1. In design and procurement of equipment, provide for interchangeability of items of

piping equipment, subassemblies and parts.

Piping: B.1. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings:

a. Service Weight (SV) Cast Iron (1) Use:

(a) Soil pipe (sanitary waste/pipe) Inside of or embedded within structures.

(b) Track drain within two feet of track drain manholes. (c) Storm drainage within structures. (d) Storm drainage exposed within tunnel (Ventilation Structures).

(2) Material: ASTM A74, Class SV, uncoated. b. Extra Heavy (XH) Cast Iron

(1) Use: Soil pipe (sanitary waste/pipe) passing through underground structural elements or buried below or outside structures:

(2) Material: ASTM A74, Class XH, uncoated. 2. Steel pipe and fittings:

a. Seamless piping: (1) Use:

(a) Waste and drainage piping and fitting, 2-1/2 inches and smaller where embedded or otherwise inaccessible.

(2) Material: ASTM A53, Types Grade B, Seamless, hot-dip galvanized, Schedule 40.

b. Flanges: ASTM A105 and ANSI/ASME B16.5 for dimensions and tolerances.

c. Fittings and flanges furnished with properties equal to or greater than that of adjacent pipe.

3. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings: a. ANSI/ASME A21.15/C115, 250-pound pressure class.

(1) flanged for exposed piping (a) Flanges: ANSI/ASME B16.1.

(2) Threaded or butt-welded for embedded or otherwise inaccessible piping.

b. Pipe coated on outside with bituminous coating and lined with cement mortar of twice standard thickness specified for pipe size used.

(1) Cement-mortar lining having a seal coat of nontoxic, taste and odor-free bituminous material.



4. Copper drainage tube (DWV) and fittings: a. Seamless tubing: ASTM B306, No. 122 for drainage, waste, and vent piping

and fittings. 5. Unpolished stainless-steel drip pans:

a. Provided under water, waste, hydraulic, sprinkler, standpipe, or condensate-drain piping which run over transformer vaults or electric motor starters.

b. Each drip pan provided with one-inch drain. 6. Black-steel seamless pipe and fittings: Not Used. 7. PVC Plastic Pipe

a. Use: (1) Pipe sleeve embedded in concrete.

b. Material: (1) All PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be manufactured from a Type I, Grade

I Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per ASTM D1784.

(2) The pipe shall be manufactured in strict compliance to ASTM D1785 and D2665 (where applicable), consistently meeting and/or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements of these standards with regard to material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality.

(3) The pipe shall be manufactured in the USA, using domestic materials, by an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.

c. Standard lengths of pipe sizes 6” and larger shall be beveled each end by the pipe manufacturer.

d. All pipe shall be stored indoors after production at the manufacturing site until shipped from factory

8. Unions: a. 1-1/2 inch and smaller: Threaded, ASME B16.39, Type A or B to match

piping. b. Two inch and larger unions: ASTM A126, Class B, flanged.

(1) Two, 2-1/2 and three-inch union flanges: Steel, ASME B 16.39 or of cast iron, ANSI/ASME B16.1, 125-pound class.

c. Four inch and larger union: Forged steel, 150-pound class, slip-on weld-neck flanges, ANSI/ASME B16.5.

d. Nonferrous-piping unions: Brass, FS A-A-59617.

Valves: C.1. Gate valves two inches or smaller:

a. MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 150. b. Bronze with threaded ends, rough bodies and finished trim. c. Materials except hand wheels: ASTM B61. d. Furnished with malleable-iron hand wheels.

2. Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and three inches: a. MSS SP-70, Type 3, Class 125, OS&Y flanged end, Type I, Class 2, cast

iron bodies and bonnets. b. Seat rings, disc, disc guide and stem furnished in bronze. c. Outside stem and yoke (OS&Y), flanged-end connections and malleable iron

hand wheels. 3. Gate valves four inches and larger:

a. MSS SP-70, Type 2, Class 125, OS&Y, flanged end, cast-iron bodies and bonnets.

b. Seat rings, disc, disc guide and stem furnished in bronze. c. Outside stem-and-yoke type and cast-iron hand wheels.

4. Globe, angle and check valves: a. Two inches and smaller:

(1) WW-V-51F, Class B.



(2) Bronze with threaded ends, rough bodies and finished trim. (3) Materials except hand wheels: ASTM B61. (4) Globe and angle valves furnished with malleable-iron hand wheels. (5) Check valves four inches and larger:

(a) Swing-type valve seat, with iron or steel body and cap and flanged-end connections.

(b) 150-pound class, renewable arm, disc assembly and seat ring with bronze trim.

(c) Outside arm and weight for pump discharge check valves. 5. Valves for copper piping:

a. Gate valves with solder ends: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Type 1, Class B.

b. Gate valves with flanged ends: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 150, Bronze. c. Globe, angle and check valves with solder or flanged ends: FS WW-V-51F,

Bronze, Class B. 6. Pressure-reducing valves:

a. Direct-acting type in which diaphragm and spring act directly on valve stem. b. Constructed to ensure that delivered pressure does not vary more than one psi

for each ten-psi variation in inlet pressure. c. Wearing parts readily repairable/replaceable. d. Valves two inches and smaller designed for working pressure of 250 psi,

brass construction except yoke connecting valve body to separate diaphragm chamber having brass cover and assembled with brass bolts.

e. Valves larger than two inches designed for minimum 125 psi, iron bodies and bronze trim.

f. Adjustable to any outlet pressure. g. Gate valve and union on both inlet and outlet connections. h. Provided with bypass one pipe-size smaller than main water line. i. Stem-mounted pressure-reducing valve gauges, 3-1/2 inch dial, solid brass or

stainless steel case and connections with T-handle stops. j. Pressure-reducing valve strainer: Brass, removable without disconnecting

piping. (1) Strainers two inches and smaller: Brass, bodies designed for minimum

working pressure of 250 psi. (2) Strainers 2-1/2 inch and larger: Iron bodies designed for minimum

working pressure of 125 psi 7. Balancing cocks:

a. Resilient-faced, eccentric-plug type designed for minimum of 125 psi or 150 percent of system working pressure, whichever is greater.

b. Six inches and under, wrench-operated; eight inches and over, operated by worm or spur gear.

c. Combination balancing/flow measuring valves shall contain ports for measuring pressure drop.

8. Line Strainers: a. Water strainers, Y or basket-type,

(1) 1-1/2 inches and smaller: ASTM A126, Grade B, iron bodies with screwed connections.

(2) Two inches and larger: ASTM A126, Grade B, iron bodies with flanged-end connections.

b. Designed for minimum of 125 psi or 150 percent of system working pressure, whichever is greater.

c. Stainless-steel or Monel screens as follows: (1) Perforations:



Strainer size Perforation size 3/4-inch to two-inch inclusive

1/32 inch

2-1/2 inch to six-inch inclusive

1/16 inch

Eight-inch to 12-inch

inclusive

1/8 inch

Over 12

inches

5/32 inch

(2) Free area of screen minimum three times area of strainer inlet pipe.

d. Strainer provided with 3/4-inch drain valve. 9. Butterfly valves:

a. MSS SP-67, sizes as shown. b. Provide extended necks or neck extenders to accommodate two inches of

insulation. c. Provide 10-position latch-lock handles. d. Provide enclosed work screw operators, sizes eight inches and larger. e. Provide chainwheels when above normal reaching area. f. Provide adjustable balance-return stops for balancing service. g. Meeting MSS SP-67. h. Test shell at 225 psi. i. Body:

(1) Wafer-type, cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or lug-type, ductile iron, ASTM A536 grade 60-40-18, or ASTM A395.

(2) To fit between ANSI/ASME B16.5 flanges. (3) Bodies with integral flanges or full lugs drilled.

j. Seat: (1) Provide ethylene-propylene-terpolymer (EPT) bonded to rigid ring

providing noncollapsible and replaceable seat. (2) Provide bubble-tight shutoff of 150 psi at temperatures between 25F

and 225F. (3) Provide O-ring as secondary seal between seat and stem.

k. Disc: (1) Aluminum-bronze: ASTM B150.

l. Stem: (1) Stainless steel: AISI Type 304, 316, 410 or 416. (2) Isolate from contact with piped material.

10. Trap Seal Primer Valve: a. Standard: ASSE 1018. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. c. Body: Bronze. d. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. e. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded, or solder joint. f. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that

is not chrome finished.

Portable Flow Meters: D.1. Factory-fabricated case, carrying handle and fitted to hold meter securely to

accommodate the following accessories:



a. Two 10-foot lengths of connecting hose with female connectors for venturi tube pressure-tap nipples.

(1) Hose designed for minimum of 125 psi or 150 percent of system working pressure, whichever is greater.

(2) Completely assembled three-valve manifold with two block valves and vent and drain valves piped and mounted on base.

b. Set of curves showing flow versus pressure differential for each orifice or venturi tube.

c. Metal instruction plate, secured inside cover, illustrating use of meter.

Gauges: E.1. ASTM F709, Class 1, 2 or 3, Style A, Type I or III with metal case.

Shock Absorber (Water Hammer Arrestors): F.1. Constructed of stainless steel, precharged with nitrogen, argon or pneumatic pure

glycerin and permanently sealed. 2. Provided on cold-water supply piping to flush-valve water closets and urinals. 3. Provided on hot and cold supply piping to lavatories and mop service basins. 4. Certified to meet requirements of PDI WH-201.

Expansion Joints: G.1. General:

a. Designed for 150 psi and 200ºF for systems operating at 100 psi or less. b. Provide expansion joint traverse with 150 percent of pipe expansion resulting

from temperature variation of 80ºF. c. Provide corrugated-bellows expansion joints for pipe expansion of 1-1/2

inches or less, minimum of 200 percent of expansion. d. 1-1/2 inches and smaller, threaded ends; two inches and larger, flanged ends.

2. Flexible ball joints: a. Carbon steel, providing 360 degrees rotation plus 15 degrees minimum

angular-flexing movement, furnished with non-asbestos-composition gaskets, steam-molded in steam-heat presses.

3. Corrugated-bellows expansion joints: a. Bellows constructed of single-ply or multiple-ply, formed, corrugated

stainless steel for pipe sizes smaller than three inches. b. Self-equalizing type with equalizing or reinforcing rings, internal-telescoping

stainless-steel or Monel sleeves, removable steel housing to protect bellows and support insulation.

c. Corrugated element: Seamless tubing or of single sheet of metal rolled into cylinder having one longitudinal seam for sizes up to 16 inches.

d. Joints 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Internal guides and limit stops. e. Designed for a minimum life of 5,000 full-rated traverse cycles when tested

at specified pressures and temperatures.

Supporting Devices: H.1. Pipe hangers and supports:

a. Provide adjustable steel pipe hangers and supports as follows: (1) Clevis and clamp, cadmium-plated or zinc-plated: MSS SP-58, Type 1

and Type 8 for steel and cast-iron piping. (2) With cast-iron roller and sockets: MSS SP-58, Type 41 for chilled

water piping. (3) Space not greater than six feet for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2

inches; 10 feet for pipe sizes two inches through six inches; 16 feet for pipe sizes eight inches and larger



b. Pipe hangers for copper tubing: Steel, copper-plated, clevis-type, spaced at maximum five feet for tubing sizes through 1-1/2 inches and maximum eight feet for sizes two inches and larger.

c. Hanger rods minimum diameter 3/8 inch, constructed of steel, cadmium-plated, threaded full-length and diameter required by pipe size and load imposed.

d. Hanger rod nuts and washers: Steel, cadmium-plated. e. Supported from malleable-iron, hot-dip galvanized inserts in concrete slab:

MSS SP-58, Type 18. f. Pipe hangers and supports in tunnels and shafts: MSS-SP-58, stainless steel,

ASTM A276, Type 304. 2. Pipe rolls, plates and stands:

a. Cast iron: MSS SP-58, Types 44, 45, and 46. (1) Adjustable types selected for piping require grading after setting in

place. b. Protection saddles for support piping: MSS SP-58, Type 39, welded to pipe.

3. Pipe anchors: a. Designed to withstand five times anchor load minimum. b. Vertical pipes anchored by means of clamps welded around pipes and

secured to wall or floor construction. 4. Pipe guides:

a. Factory-made cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated galvanized steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted or welded tight to pipe.

b. Designed to clear pipe insulation and to prevent overtravel of spider and cylinder.

c. Guides not less than 12 inches long and spiders not less than the following:

Pipe size (inches)

Spider length (inches)

1-1/2 and smaller 2 2 to 3 2-1/2

4 3 5 and larger 3-1/2

5. Expansion bolt anchors:

a. Consisting of bolt, expander, star lock washer and nut. b. Fabricated of stainless steel, Type 303, including expander and star lock

washer. c. Anchor assemblies: FS: A-A-1992, Group II, Type 4, Class 1.

6. Self-drilling anchors: a. Self-drilling expansion anchors, with self-cutting annular broaching grooves. b. Anchor and expander plug: FS: A-A-1992, Group III, Type 1, double-plated.

7. Pipe sleeves: a. Through interior masonry-unit walls: As shown. Sleeve to be large enough to

accommodate pipe and covering but not less than two sizes larger than pipe size.

b. Through poured-concrete interior walls, floors and ceiling: As shown. (1) Sleeves minimum two sizes larger than pipe. At floors, sleeves to

project four inches above finish floor. c. Through exterior structural elements: Minimum two sizes larger than pipe

and as shown. d. Movement of pipe.



Drains: I.1. Area drains:

a. Cast iron with flashing flange and flat grate for entrance areas. b. Outlets designed for connection to cast-iron soil pipe. c. Drain sizes and types as shown. d. Clamping devices: For securing membrane or flashing for drains installed in

membrane-waterproofed floors and in floors not laid on ground. e. Area drains in public spaces having finished bronze grates. f. Area drains shall feature removable sediment bucket

2. Floor drains: a. Cast iron with flashing flanges and bottom or side outlet as required and

designed for connection to cast-iron soil pipe. b. Clamping devices: For securing membranes or flashing, for drains installed

in membrane-waterproofed floors and in floors not laid on ground. c. Reinforced-neoprene flashing: For drains installed in floors that are not

membrane-waterproofed and are not laid on ground. d. Flashing of reinforced sheet neoprene, secured to drain by clamping device

and extending 12 inches minimum from drain to ensure watertight connection.

e. Floor drains in public spaces having finished bronze grates. f. Floor-drain sizes and types as shown.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. ZURN Mfg. Co. b. Jay R. Smith Co. c. WATTS Co. d. Approved Equal

Wall Hydrants J.1. Non-Freeze Wall Hydrant

a. Bronze quarter turn non-freeze automatic draining hydrant with stainless steel face, hose connection, integral vacuum breaker and dual check valve. “T” handle key, wheel handle and stainless steel box with full 180 deg, lockable cover opening.

2. Acceptable Manufactures: a. Jay R. Smith Co. b. WATTS Co. c. ZURN Mfg. Co d. Approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Welding Procedure: A.1. Perform welding by manual metallic arc-process except for pipe sizes four inches and

smaller where gas welding (oxyacetylene) may be used. 2. Leave joint surfaces smooth, uniform, free from fins, tears and other defects which

adversely affect proper welding. 3. After each pass of weld on multiple-pass welding, clean weld free of slag and other

deposits before applying next pass. 4. Peen with light blows of blunt-nosed peening hammer.

a. Do not peen surface layers or first pass in groove welds. 5. For groove welds, have surface pass substantially centered on the seam, smooth and free

from depressions. 6. Perform fillet-welds with minimum cutting back of outside pipe.



a. Leave throat of full fillet-weld not less than 0.707 of thickness of pipe. b. Repair excess cutting back and undercutting of base metal in pipe adjoining

weld. c. Fill up craters to full cross section of weld.

7. Align and position accurately joints to be welded, so that pipe will not project beyond its adjoining pipe by more than 20 percent of pipe wall thickness or 1/8-inch maximum.

8. Install welded pipe in accordance with the applicable ASME Code under which the pipe was fabricated (i.e., ASME B31.3, ASME B 31.5 or ASME B31.9).

Soil, Waste, Vent and Drainage-Piping Installation: B.1. Grade piping to 1/4 inch per foot and not less than that of main drain to which it is

connected. 2. Use reducers to change pipe sizes on vent and drain lines. 3. Use long-sweep bends, Y-fittings, 1/8 or 1/16-bends, or combination Y and 1/8- bends to

make changes in direction. 4. Install embedded cast-iron piping at angle of 90 degrees to contraction joints with end of

pipe bell coinciding precisely with centerline of contraction joint. 5. Cut ends of screw-jointed pipes squarely to seat in bottom of recess of fittings and ream

after cutting so waterway is not reduced in size. 6. Apply thread dope or compound to male thread only.

Steel-Pipe Installation: C.1. Weld embedded pipe and install so that pipe will not penetrate construction joints or

structural contraction joints. 2. Install horizontal piping with minimum pitch of one inch in 40 feet and arrange for drains

at low points. a. Install drain valves and hose nipples not smaller than ¾ inch at low points.

3. Do not support embedded pipe from reinforcing bars with metallic means.

Pipe Anchors: D.1. Securely anchor piping where shown and where necessary for proper installation to force

pipe expansion in proper direction.

Expansion-Bolt Anchors: E.1. Drill holes and install expansion-bolt anchors as recommended by anchor-bolt

manufacturer. Do not locate less than eight inches from concrete edge.

Pipe Sleeves: F.1. Exterior walls:

a. Install as shown. 2. Interior walls:

a. Install as shown. Seal to maintain integrity of walls.

Drains: G.1. Install floor drains with traps and trap primer connections. 2. Trap seal primer lines shall be connected to all floor drain traps and routed to trap seal

primer valve location. If embedded in floor slab, coordinate location of trap seal primer valve, and stub-up and cap trap primer line for future connection to trap seal primer valve.

Air-Separator Installation: H.Not Used.



Attachments to Pre-stressed Concrete Girders: I.1. Attach pipes and similar items to pre-stressed girders by welding to embedded plates or

bolting to embedded fittings. Drilling into pre-stressed girders is prohibited, except as shown.

Bonding: In accordance with Section 16420, and with the following additional requirements: J.1. Bond mechanical joints and fittings, including valves, by exothermic-welding method. 2. Make welds in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. Clean and coat

with coal tar epoxy. 3. Bond pipe using bonding strap welded to each side of joint not less than six inches from

joint. Allow sufficient slack in conductor for expansion of pipe.

Fire Stopping: Section 07841. K.1. Pipe penetration through fire rated partitions to be sealed with approved fireproof sealant.

Floor Drains L.1. Install components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved products

data and submittals. 2. Set plumb, level and rigid

Wall Hydrants M.1. Install components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved products

data and submittals. 2. Set plumb, level and rigid

3.02 PROTECTION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Protect pipe, openings, valves and fixtures from dirt, foreign objects and damage during A.construction.

Replace damaged piping, valves, fixtures and appurtenances. B.

Prior to testing, flush piping with chemically treated water until systems are clean and free of C.scale, slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material.

Hand-clean expansion joints and strainers. D.

Coal-Tar Epoxy Coating for Protection of Ferrous Piping E.


Water-Pressure Testing: A.1. Prior to burial or concealment, test affected piping in presence of the Contractor using

specified procedures. 2. Test entire piping systems and test until found leak-free in presence of and to satisfaction

of the Contractor. 3. Notify the Contractor at least 36 hours in advance of making tests. 4. Test piping at following pressures:

a. Waste: Requirements of local plumbing code but not less than equivalent to ten feet of water.

b. Ductile-iron pipe: 150 psi or 1-1/2 times maximum working pressure, whichever is greater, at lowest point in system.



Test Procedures: B.1. Soil, waste and vent piping:

a. Water test to include entire system from lowest point to highest point. b. After filling system, shut off water supply and allow it to stand two hours

without loss or leakage. c. Conduct final test by smoke test or peppermint test as prescribed by authority

having jurisdiction. 2. Ductile-iron pipe and black-steel piping:

a. Avoid excessive pressure on safety devices and mechanical seals. b. Fill entire system with water and vent air from system at least 24 hours

before test pressure is applied. c. Apply test pressure when water and average ambient temperatures are

approximately equal and constant. d. Maintain test pressure for minimum of six hours without drop after force

pump has been disconnected. e. Visually inspect joints while pipe is under test pressure.

Repair of Leaks: C.1. Do not repair by mechanical caulking leaks in threads or welds occurring while pipeline

is under test or in service. 2. Introduction into piping system of material intended to stop leakage is prohibited. 3. Repair leaks in threaded piping by breaking joint, cutting new threads on pipe and

installing new pipe fitting. 4. Remove defective welds by chipping or gas gouging from one or both sides of joint.

a. Reweld chipped-out places. b. When base metals of fillet-weld are cut back or throat of weld is less than

specified, repair defect by adding additional weld metal.

3.04 DISINFECTION

Adjust and Clean: A.1. Flush entire hot-water, cold-water, other piping and equipment connected downstream

from the domestic-water inlet main shutoff valve. Flush with water to remove sediment after completion of tests, replacements or repairs.

2. Flush treated water from system completely. 3. Continue flushing until samples show that quality of water delivered is comparable with

public water supply and satisfactory to jurisdictional public-health authority.




SECTION 15431 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Divisions 1 – General Requirements

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

F. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

- SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15431- 1


2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless Steel 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless Steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing

elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves. 2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.



3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is

specified. 5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:



a. Piping Smaller Than 1 inch Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping 1 inch and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.




SECTION 15432 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Division 1 – General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags. 6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Approved Manufactures: a. LEM Products Inc. b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. c. Marking Services Inc. d. Approved Equal

2. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15432 - 1


3. Letter Color: White 4. Background Color: Black 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches , and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screw. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Approved Manufactures: a. LEM Products Inc. b. Kolbi Pipe Markers Co. c. Seton Identification Products d. Approved Equal

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Blue 4. Background Color: White 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch 7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Approved Manufactures: 1. LEM Products Inc. 2. Kolbi Pipe Markers Co. 3. Marking Services Inc. 4. Approved Equal

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Black

D. Background Color: Yellow



E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping

2.4 VALVE TAGS


B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain.



C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS


B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.



3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow

pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of

congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green b. Letter Colors: White

2. Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety black b. Letter Color: White

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round

b. The colors listed in subparagraphs below comply with color designation according to ASME A13.1. Background and lettering colors should comply with recommendations in ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. Note also that all colors listed in ASME A13.1 preceded by the word "Safety" are required to comply with ANSI Z535.1. Retain "Natural" option for brass or stainless-steel valve tags.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Cold Water: Natural



3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: White

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

END OF SECTION15431



SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Common electrical installation requirements.

B. Related Sections


1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration."

B. Provide all equipment, materials, wiring listed by a recognized agency, UL, installed compliant with the National Electric Code, and NECA 1.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

2. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

3. So connecting raceways and cables will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1


D. Coordinate installation of wire and conduit to be concealed behind architectural “active wall” (see plans) with the architectural plans and all other trades. Where “active wall” follows the radius of the existing corridor, conduits shall follow the radius as well and shall remain within the bounds of the “active wall.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NFPA 70, and NFPA 70E

B. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

C. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways and cables, penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls or fire rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.



C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

D. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

E. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Subsequent to excavation of existing parking lot and roadway underground power distribution circuits required for new lighting poles, contractor shall restore concrete and asphalt in accordance with SEPTA guidelines.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”




SECTION 16075 - IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Section


B. Provide electrical equipment identifications consisting of the following:

1. Nameplates

2. Labels

3. Identification signs

4. Warning signs

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following documents to the SEPTA Project Manager for review and approval:

1. Tabulation of all equipment that require nameplates

2. Drawings of all nameplates

3. Text of all labels and signs

4. System for numbering control wires and cables

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, AND OR EQUIPMENT

A. Nameplates

1. Provide all major items of equipment, such as transformers, circuit breakers, and relay and control panels with permanent nameplates identifying the equipment, relevant parameters, manufacturer, SEPTA assigned equipment designation number, and other appropriate information such as serial numbers.

2. Design the nameplates in accordance with applicable IEEE, ANSI and NEMA standards.

IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075 - 1


B. Labels

1. Provide wall mounted equipment with black lamicoid labels. Provide primary equipment description using white lettering two inches (2") high and secondary description using lettering 3/4 inch high.

2. Identify all external and internal devices mounted on enclosure doors and panels, such as protective relays, auxiliary relays, control switches, instruments, transducers, indicating lights, test blocks, terminal blocks, and fuse blocks with engraved labels. Securely attach labels in the vicinity of the device.

3. Provide control wires and cables with identification numbers.

4. Provide terminal blocks with identification numbers.

C. Identification Signs

1. Provide the following equipment identification signs, as appropriate:

a. Circuit Breaker No.

b. Cables

c. Control Wires

d. Auto Transfer Switch

e. Generator

f. Load bank

g. Switchboard cubicles

h. Panelboards

i. Transformers

j. Communication equipment

k. Disconnect switches

l. Lighting control panels

D. Warning Signs

1. Provide graffiti-resistant, stain-resistant, and airborne pollutant-resistant



signs. Select easily cleanable signs with high resistance to abrasion, bleaching cleaning agents, and fading due to UV radiation present in sunlight.

2. Provide "Danger -High Voltage" warning signs of size not less than 12 x 12 inches, at following locations as a minimum:

a. Electrical Room

b. Generator Location

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean all surfaces in preparation for attaching the nameplate.

B. After drilling tap holes, clean off all metal filings and oil residue

3.2 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, OR EXECUTION

A. Attach all nameplates, labels, and signs with non-corrosive screws.

B. Color code 600 volt and below power conductors as indicated in the following table.

C. Color code communications cables as indicated by industry standards.

Phase 208/120

Volts 480/277

Volts

A Black Brown

B Red Orange

C Blue Yellow

N White White

EGC Green Green



SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies work pertaining to conduit, raceways, cable trays, boxes and cabinets to form raceway and support system for power, communication and control cables.

B. Related Section 1. Division 1 – General Requirements


A. Qualifications: Select a manufacturer who is experienced in production of similar raceways, boxes and cabinets.

B. Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications:

1. Comply with Codes and regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2002. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems; TC-2, Electrical Polyvinyl Cloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated; C80.5, Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC); and Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment.

5. UL: 5, Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings; 6, Rigid Metal Conduit; 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment; 94, Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances; 360, Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes; 514B, Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes; 514C, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers; 651, Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit; 884, Underfloor Raceways and Fittings; and 1684, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings.

6. Federal Specifications (FS): FF-S-325C, FF-S-760, TT-S-227. 7. American Standards of Testing and Materials (ASTM): A47/A47M-99, Standard

Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; A123/A123M-00, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; A185-97, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; A276-00a, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; A507-00, Standard Specification for Drawing Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled; A532/A532M-93a(1999)e1, Standard Specification for Abrasion-Resistant Cast Irons; A536-84(1999)e1, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; A615/A615M-00, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; A653/A653M-00, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; B138-96, Standard Specification for Manganese Bronze Rod, Bar and Shapes; B455-96, Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass) Extruded Shapes; B584-00, Standard

RACEWAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS 16110 - 1


Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications; B633-98, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; C109/C109M-99, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens); C173-94ae1, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; C231-97e1, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; D149-97a, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies; D495-99, Standard Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation; D570-98, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; D638-00, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; D648-00a, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position; and D790-00, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

8. ITS: Directory of ITS listed products. 9. The equipment manufacturer shall maintain ISO 9001 or 9002 certification. 10. Comply with NFPA 130, 2003 Edition.

C. The following items to be listed or labeled per referenced UL or ITS directory:

1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Surface raceways and fittings. 3. Underfloor raceways and fittings. 4. Boxes. 5. Cabinets.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Subcontract documents, and with the additional requirements as specified for each: 1. Shop Drawings for conduit and fittings, raceways and fittings, cable trays, boxes,

cabinets, and under floor raceways and fittings. 2. Certification: Manufacturer certification that materials comply with specification

requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Mark each item in accordance with applicable reference standard.

B. Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage or distortion.

C. Store products in secure and dry storage facility.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. General Requirements for Conduit, Raceways, Cable Trays, Boxes, Cabinets and Fittings: 1. Size: As shown, minimum conduit size 3/4 inch.



2. Materials: a. Steel sheet: ASTM A507-00. b. Zinc-coated steel sheet: ASTM A653/A653M-00. c. Cast iron: ASTM A532/532M-93a (1999) e1. d. Ductile iron: ASTM A536-84(1999) e1. e. Malleable iron: ASTM A47/A47M-99. f. Bronze extrusion: ASTM B455-96, Alloy C38500. g. Bronze casting: ASTM B584-00, Alloy C83600. h. Rigid fiberglass reinforced epoxy: UL 1684. i. Stainless steel: ASTM A276-00a, Type 304.

3. Zinc coating: a. Hot-dip galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M-00.

4. NFPA 130 version 2003 requirements: a. Materials manufactured for use as conduits, raceways, ducts, boxes, cabinets,

equipment enclosures, and their surface finish materials shall be capable of being subjected to temperatures up to 932°F (500°C) for one hour and shall not support combustion under the same temperature condition.

B. Galvanized-Steel Rigid Conduit and Fittings: UL 6 and ANSI C80.1, zinc coating tested in

accordance with reference test in appendix.

C. Plastic Conduit and Fittings: 1. PVC, UL 651, NEMA TC-2, Schedule 40 and 80 heavy-wall, for use with 90C

conductors. 2. Solvent cement: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit and Fittings:

1. Applicable requirements of UL 360. 2. Flexible galvanized-steel core with extruded liquid-tight neoprene or low smoke zero

halogen flame retardant thermoplastic polyurethane jacket overall. 3. Sizes up to 1-1/4 inch provided with continuous copper bonding conductor, spiral

wound between convolutions. 4. Sizes 1-1/2 inch and above provided with separate grounding conductor. 5. No PVC compounds permitted.

E. Conduit Expansion Fittings and Expansion and Deflection Fittings:

1. Materials: a. For galvanized-steel rigid conduit:

1) Expansion fittings: Steel or malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized. 2) Expansion/deflection fittings: Bronze or ductile iron end couplings,

neoprene sleeve and stainless steel clamping bands. b. For PVC conduit: Rigid metal expansion/deflection fitting with galvanized

rigid steel to PVC conduit adapters at each end. 2. Conduit expansion fitting: Weatherproof. 3. Conduit expansion and deflection fitting: Watertight. 4. Metallic fittings equipped with bonding jumper cable to provide electrical continuity.

F. Conduit Connector Fittings:

1. UL 514B, material and finish similar to that of conduit with which they are to be used.



2. For enclosures, cabinets, boxes and gutters in electrical rooms and aboveground indoor locations: Threaded nylon-insulated bushing and locknuts.

3. For enclosure, cabinets, boxes and gutters with hub in outdoor, tunnel and underground locations, except electrical rooms: Threaded watertight hub fitting with gasket.

4. For enclosure having punched or formed knockout for conduit entry in outdoor and underground locations, except electrical rooms: Threaded watertight fitting with gasket, nylon-insulated throat and sealing locknut.

G. Conduit and Cable-Seal Fittings:

1. Conduit seal: a. To provide watertight seal between concrete and conduit where it penetrates

wall, floor or ceiling. b. Size as shown or necessary. c. Materials: Body and pressure clamp of malleable or cast iron with a

neoprene sealing grommet and PVC-coated or galvanized-steel pressure rings, oversized sleeve of FRE or galvanized steel.

d. Seal between conduit and concrete to withstand pressure from 50-foot head of water without leakage.

2. Cable seal: a. To provide watertight seal between cable and conduit for use with single-

conductor or multiple-conductor cable as necessary. b. Size as necessary, drilled to accommodate cable. c. Pressure discs of PVC-coated steel and sealing ring of neoprene. d. Seal between cable and conduit to withstand water pressure of 50 psi without

leakage. 3. Seal compound:

a. FS TT-S-227, two-component, fast-setting, polymeric sealing compound to provide watertight seal between concrete and conduit, between cable and conduit.

b. Pour-type for horizontal and gun-grade for vertical or overhead application. c. When cured, sealant to have rubber-like flexibility allowing minimum

movement of conduit and cable in temperature range of minus 40ºF to plus 150ºF without loss of watertight seal.

d. Pot life: 15 minutes. e. Minimum ambient temperature for application: 35ºF. f. Initial cure: 15 minutes. g. Final cure: Seven days. h. Hardness, Durometer A: 20-35. i. Seal between conduit and concrete to withstand pressure from 50-foot head

of water without leakage. j. Seal between conduit and single-conductor or multiple-conductor cable to

withstand water pressure of 70 psi without leakage. k. Fox Industries, Type FX-571G or approved equal.

H. Conduit and Cable Supports:

1. Retaining straps and fasteners: FS FF-S-760, with the following additional requirements: a. Type, style and size: As necessary. b. Material and finish: Stainless steel, Type 304, or approved equal.



c. For separating conduit from masonry surface: Hot-dip galvanized malleable-iron spacer assembled with Style A strap.

d. For vertical run of metallic-sheath cable: Basket-weave cable support. e. For fastening conduit or cable to channel inserts: Stainless steel, Type 304.

2. Multiple pipe hangers (trapeze-type): Consisting of two or more hanger rods, horizontal member, U-bolt clamp and other attachment necessary for securing hanger rods and conduit, with the following additional requirements: a. Material and finish: Stainless steel, Type 304. b. Hanger rod: Not smaller than 3/8-inch diameter, threaded for sufficient

distance at each end to permit at least 1-1/2 inches of adjustment. c. Horizontal member: Channel, 1-1/2 inches square or 1-5/8 inches square by

12 gauge or heavier. Weld two or more channels together for greater strength if necessary.

d. Design: Capable of supporting load equal to sum of weights of conduit, cable and hanger plus 200 pounds. At design load, stress at root of thread on hanger rod 9,500-psi maximum; stress in horizontal member 12,500-psi maximum.

3. Channel inserts: a. Size and shape as shown 12 gauge or heavier stainless steel, Type 304, or

approved equal, with 7/8-inch wide slot. b. For surface mounting: Channel inserts with 9/16-inch base slot, eight inches

on center with minimum pullout-load rating of 1,000 pounds per linear foot. 4. Spot inserts: Rated 800 pounds with safety factor of five, fabricated from steel

galvanized after fabrication, covered to prevent entrance of concrete during installation.

I. Surface Raceways and Fittings: UL 5, fabricated from galvanized steel for A.C. Switchboard

room except stainless steel in electrical rooms.

J. Boxes and Cabinets:

1. Outlet boxes: a. UL 514A, capable of accommodating conduit as shown. b. Material and finish:

1) Steel, malleable iron, cast iron or ductile iron. 2) Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

c. For above ground indoor locations and electrical rooms: Punched or formed knockouts.

d. For wall receptacles and switches, single or double devices: Outlet boxes 4-11/16 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep.

e. For floor receptacles: Watertight cast-iron outlet boxes, four inches diameter, of suitable depth and complete with the following: 1) Adjustment screws for final leveling. 2) Bronze floor plate with flush-mounted screw plug, without exposed

fastener, M32 finish. 3) Screw plug attached to outlet-box assembly by chain or other

means, M32 finish. 4) Bronze floor plate flange, five inches in diameter, extending beyond

box 1/2-inch above finished floor, M32 finish. 5) One special screw-plug removal tool with every 10 receptacles.



f. For recessed wall-mounted receptacles: Watertight cast-iron outlet box, three-inch diameter, of suitable depth and complete with the following: 1) Bronze faceplate with flush-mounted screw plug, without exposed

fasteners, M32 finish. 2) Screw plug attached to outlet-box assembly by chain or other

approved means, M32 finish. 3) Bronze faceplate flange, five inches in diameter, extending beyond

box, M32 finish. 4) One special screw-plug removal tool with every 10 receptacles.

2. Junction and pull boxes: a. Internal volume up to 100 cubic inches, metallic boxes: UL 514A, non-

metallic boxes: UL514C; internal volume above 100 cubic inches, UL 50. b. Flush-mounted or surface-mounted as shown. c. Size: Suitable to accommodate conduit, raceways, ducts, number of cables

and splices shown. d. Material and finish:

1) Metallic boxes: a) Steel, malleable iron, cast iron or ductile iron. b) Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

3. Cabinets: a. UL 50, fabricated from galvanized steel. b. Surface-mounted, unless otherwise shown. c. Backplate of reinforced steel for mounting interior components and to ensure

rigid support and accurate alignment. d. Provision for cabinet grounding. e. Provide latch and handle in accordance with UL 50; screw fastenings will

not be accepted in lieu of latch. f. Finish: Metallic surface thoroughly cleaned, degreased, primed with zinc

primer and coated after fabrication with light-gray enamel, ANSI Z55.1, Color 61; minimum dry-film thickness, two mils.

K. Expansion Bolt Anchors: FS FF-S-325C Group II, stainless steel, Type 304.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Use size, type, general routing, location of conduit, raceways, boxes and cabinets as

shown and specified. 2. Install metallic raceway, fittings, boxes and cabinets free from contact with

reinforcing steel. 3. Where aluminum is placed in contact with dissimilar metal or with concrete, separate

contact surfaces by means of gasket, nonabsorptive tape or coating to prevent corrosion.

4. Make metallic conduit, raceways, ducts and cable trays, electrically and mechanically continuous and ground them in accordance with Section 16420.

B. Conduit:

1. Run exposed conduit parallel to building lines.



2. Install exposed conduit to avoid interference with other work. 3. Electrical, mechanical rooms, and communication rooms: Where shown or where

necessary to prevent seepage of subsoil or water into such areas, seal where conduits are in contact with concrete, seal cable inside conduit using cable seal or sealing compound in accordance with the following requirements: a. Where shown and as necessary, install cable seal and conduit seal in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Use sealing compound where approved and in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations, with the following additional requirements: 1) Before applying sealing compound, prime concrete, conduit and

cable surface using primer recommended by manufacturer. 2) Pour or inject compound to prevent voids inside seal and to keep

cable centered in conduit. 3) Use FRE sleeve for conduit seal installed on communication

conduit. c. In empty conduit installed for future use, install blank cable seal inside

conduit to prevent seepage of water. d. All conduits shall be free of water before conduit seals are installed.

4. Apply lead-free conductive anti-seize compound to threaded-conduit joints. 5. In aboveground indoor locations and electrical rooms, use locknut and nylon-

insulated bushing to attach conduit to enclosure. 6. Install suitable caps or plugs in empty conduit for future extension. Leave approved

nylon or polyester pull line in each conduit. 7. Thread and ream ends of field-cut conduit to remove rough edges. Use bushing at

conduit entrance to boxes, cabinets and equipment enclosures. 8. Bends:

a. Unless otherwise shown or specified, install conduit bends in accordance with reference codes.

b. Bend conduit so that field-made bend is free from cuts, dents and other surface damage.

9. Support conduit during construction to prevent distortion and to ensure independent support.

10. Support horizontal conduit with one-hole pipe straps or individual pipe hangers. 11. Secure conduit supported on multiple-hangers (trapeze) or channel inserts by

fasteners suitable for such purpose. 12. Where conduit is attached to masonry surface, use malleable-iron spacers with Style

A pipe straps. 13. Support and secure vertical conduit spanning open areas at intervals not exceeding 10

feet. 14. Support conduit above suspended ceiling using applicable specified methods. 15. Install conduit so as to drain moisture to nearest outlet or pull box. 16. Use minimum of 18-inch long liquid-tight flexible-conduit connection for equipment

enclosure subject to vibration. 17. Do not use wire for support of conduit and cable. 18. Install expansion fitting in exposed conduit runs longer than 300 feet and where

shown. Install expansion/deflection fittings where embedded conduits cross structural expansion joints. Where embedded conduits cross a structural contraction joint, paint the external surface of conduit with linseed oil or other compatible bond breaker for two feet on each side of contraction joint.



19. Use metallic conduit or above ground FRE conduit in exposed locations. 20. In addition to conduit installation requirements herein perform work at facilities and

where shown as follows: a. In outdoor and underground locations, except electrical rooms, use threaded-

conduit hub to attach conduit to equipment enclosure. Use watertight conduit fitting with gasket, nylon-insulated throat and sealing locknuts for attachment of conduit to enclosure having punched or formed knockout.

b. Install suitable caps or plugs in empty conduit for future extension. Leave approved nylon or polyester pull line in each conduit.

c. Conduit installed in outdoor location: Waterproof conduit connection.

C. Channel Inserts and Spot Inserts: 1. Surface-mount channel inserts as shown.

D. Surface Raceways:

1. Install as shown. E. Underfloor Raceways:

1. Install underfloor raceways as specified in Section 03100. Align and level raceways accurately. Hold raceways in place during placing of concrete.

G. Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Mount outlet boxes as shown. 2. Arrange front of box or attached plaster cover flush with finished wall or ceiling. 3. Keep number of knock-outs to minimum. 4. Clean boxes thoroughly after installation and correct damage to boxes and to finish. 5. Install covers on boxes mounted on walls and ceilings. 6. Measure height of wall-mounted outlet box from finished floor to horizontal

centerline of cover plate. 7. Fasten floor boxes securely in place. 8. Install junction and pull boxes so that covers are readily accessible. 9. Do not install boxes above suspended ceilings except where ceilings are removable

or definite provision is made for access to boxes. 10. Use non-metallic boxes as follows:

a. Buried with cover flush-mounted with finish grade: Precast concrete or composite material junction and pull boxes within AASHTO load designations as specified.

b. For indoor and outdoor locations not subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic: Molded fiberglass-reinforced polyester junction and pull boxes.

c. For outdoor locations but not for burial: Molded polyvinyl chloride junction and pull boxes.

G. Cabinets:

1. Fasten cabinet securely using expansion bolts, toggle bolts or mounting ears. 2. Touch-up damaged painted finish.

H. Use expansion-bolt anchors to secure equipment to concrete surfaces.

I. Attachments to Prestressed-Concrete Girders:



1. Attach pipes, conduits, boxes or similar items to prestressed girders by welding to embedded plates or bolting to embedded fittings. Drilling into prestressed girders is prohibited, except for track fasteners and appurtenances as shown.

3.02 FILLING OF OPENINGS

A. Where conduit and raceway pass through fire-rated walls, ceilings or floors, provide UL rated sealing system to prevent passage of fire and fumes and to maintain integrity of fire-rated structure.

B. Where openings are provided for passage of conduit and raceways in walls, ceilings or floors,

use UL rated fire-resistant fibrous-glass safing or similar material to seal unused openings to prevent passage of fire and fumes.

C. Close unused openings or spaces in floors, walls and ceilings. Plug or cap unused conduit

and sleeves. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. At end of each run, use stainless steel or aluminum tags, minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter, with stamped markings, minimum 1/4-inch high lettering, and tag holders attached to conduit using a stainless steel band with worm screw clamping device to establish identification of conduits and raceways in accordance with designations shown. Where conduits are terminated flush with concrete structure, install three-ply laminated phenolic plate, engraved through black face to white core and attached adjacent to conduits' entrance by means of non-metallic screws. Engrave conduits' designations within circles arranged in pattern similar to that of conduits.

B. Identify by red painted color code and by marking EMERGENCY SYSTEM on all boxes and

enclosures for emergency circuits to identify them as part of an emergency system in accordance with the NEC.


A. Arrange with the Contractor for inspection and approval of embedded conduit and boxes prior

to concrete placement.

B. Arrange for inspection by electrical utility company representative of incoming-service conduit prior to placing concrete in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Test metallic conduit and boxes for electrical continuity. Conduct tests in accordance with the

contract requirements.

D. Arrange for inspection and approval of direct-buried conduits for future train control circuits prior to backfilling.




SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Cables rated 600 V.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

B. Related Section


1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 and NESC (ANSI C2).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Okonite

2. Southwire

3. Pirelli

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1


C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.03 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

2.04 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. Calpico, Inc.

3. Metraflex Co.

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM, NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Stranded Copper

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN, single conductors in raceway.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

B. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.



C. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

E. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

3.04 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Concrete Slabs: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

B. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete.

3.05 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal handholes and manholes.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

a. Continuity – Perform continuity and polarization index testing using a 1000 volt insulation resistance tester.

b. Dielectric Absorption using 1000 volt megger for 480 volt cable.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.



c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

4. Prepare report in accordance with NETA standard.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




SECTION 16130 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies work pertaining to switches, cover plates, occupancy sensors, and receptacles.


C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

Not Used

D. Related Documents Not Used

E. Definitions 1. NO: Normally Open 2. NC: Normally Closed


A. Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications: 1. Comply with Codes and regulations of Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2002. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):WD1, General Color

Requirements for Wiring Devices; KS1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; ICS 12, Profiles of Networked Industrial Devices--Part 1: General Rules; NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment.

5. UL: 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; 198D, Class K Fuses; 198E, Class R Fuses; 508, Industrial Control Equipment; 773, Plug-In Locking-Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting; 1008, Transfer Switch Equipment.

6. American Standards of Testing and Materials (ASTM): A47/A47M-99, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; A276-00a, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; and A507-00, Standard Specification for Drawing Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.

WIRING DEVICES 16130 - 1


7. ITS: Directory of ITS Listed Products. 8. The equipment manufacturer shall maintain ISO 9001 of 9002 certification. 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 130, 2003 Edition. 10. Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (2003).

B. Source Quality Control: 1. Following items listed per referenced UL or ITS directory:

a. Snap switches. b. Disconnect switches. c. Receptacles and plugs. d. Occupancy sensor.

C. Qualifications: Select a manufacturer who is experienced in the production of similar

products. D. NFPA 130 Version 2003 Requirements:

1. Materials manufactured for use as conduits, raceways, ducts, boxes, cabinets, equipment enclosures, and their surface finish materials shall be capable of being subjected to temperatures up to 932°F 500°C for one hour and shall not support combustion under the same temperature condition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Subcontract Documents, and with the additional requirements as specified for each: 1. Shop Drawings for items indicated in 1.02.B.1.


A. Mark each item in accordance with applicable reference standard. B. Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and to avoid damage C. Store products in secure and dry storage facility.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. Snap Switches: 1. NEMA WD1, specification grade. 2. Rating:

a. Twenty amperes at 120-277 volts AC. b. Horsepower-rated when used as disconnecting device for motor circuit.

3. Body and base: Fully enclosed, brown, fire-resistant, non-absorptive thermosetting urea or nylon.

4. Contacts: Silver alloy. 5. Mounting yoke: Corrosion-resistant metal with plaster ears. 6. Poles: Single-pole, double-pole, three-way or four-way as shown.

B. Disconnect (Safety) Switches:



1. UL 98, NEMA KS1, heavy-duty, fusible or non-fusible as shown. 2. Voltage rating: 240 volts AC, 480 volts AC or 250 volts DC as shown and as

necessary. 3. Number of poles and current rating: As shown and as necessary. 4. Fuses:

a. UL 198D. b. For fused disconnect switch associated with motor load: UL Class RK5 with

time delay or as shown. c. For fused disconnect switch associated with other loads: UL Class RK1 or

as shown. d. Current rating: As shown.

5. Enclosure: (NEMA 250) a. Type:

1) For aboveground indoor locations and electrical rooms: Type 1. 2) For tunnel and underground locations, except electrical rooms:

Type 4. 3) For outdoor locations: Type 3R.

b. Materials: 1) Steel sheet: ASTM A507-00. 2) Malleable iron: ASTM A47/A47M-99.

c. Finish: Metallic surface cleaned, degreased, primed with zinc primer and finished with light-gray enamel, ANSI Z55.1, Color 61; minimum dry-film thickness, two mils.

6. Quick-make/quick-break switching mechanism with operating handle external to enclosure with positions labeled ON/OFF and capable of being padlocked in OFF position, defeatable interlock to prevent opening of enclosure door when switch is closed.

C. Receptacles and Plugs:

1. NEMA WD1, specification grade. 2. Rating: 20 amperes at 125 or 250 volts as shown. 3. Base and body: Ivory, fire-resistant, non-absorptive thermosetting urea or nylon. 4. Receptacles:

a. Outlet: Single or duplex as shown. b. Mounting yoke: Corrosion-resistant metal with plaster ears. c. Configuration:

Rating NEMA Configuration

Two-pole, three-wire, 20 amps, 125 volts

5-20 R


6-20 R

d. For use in locations labeled GFCI on the drawings, including but not limited

to restroom; water service room; locker room; wash rooms; elevator machine room, pit and hoistway; and outdoor locations: Equipped with solid-state ground-fault circuit interrupter with five-milliampere trip level.



5. Plugs: a. Configuration and design: As follows unless otherwise shown:

D. Cover Plates:

1. Wall plates: a. NEMA WD1, suitable for specified receptacles and switches, size suitable

for recess-mounted or surface-mounted associated outlet box, stainless steel, ASTM A276-00a, Type 304, or approved equal.

b. For above ground indoor service areas and electrical rooms: Steel, stainless steel or aluminum plate, as standard with the manufacturer.

E. Occupancy Sensor:

1. UL 508, passive infra-red motion detector designed for wall mounting over single-gang outlet box, minimum radio frequency interference and use with incandescent and fluorescent lighting fixtures and electronic ballasts.

2. Voltage rating: 120-277 volts AC. 3. Switching capacity:

a. 120-volt operation: 800 watts minimum. b. 277-volt operation: 1,500 watts minimum.

4. Coverage area: 1,000 square feet. 5. Detection zone:

a. Horizontal: 180 degrees. b. Vertical: 5 degrees.

6. Ambient light sensing: Photocell for preventing operation of lights at ambient light levels above an adjustable setting.

7. Adjustments: Adjustable settings for time delay, sensitivity and light level concealed by tamper proof cover. Time delay adjustable from 10 seconds to 15 minutes after motion stops.

8. Operating mode: OFF/AUTO. 9. Detection indicator: LED.

Rating NEMA

Configuration


Urea or neoprene with cord grip

5-20 P

Two-pole, three-wire, 20amps, 250 volts

Armored cap with cord grip 6-20 P



PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install switches, limit switches, occupancy sensors and receptacles as shown and in accordance with referenced codes and standards in Article 1.02, and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cover plate on switch and receptacle. C. Ground disconnect switch, receptacles and snap switches in accordance with Section 16420. D. Make power cable connections to snap switches and receptacles by means of integral

mechanical connectors. If such items are not furnished with integral mechanical connectors, make connections using compression connectors in accordance with Section 16140.

E. Make power cable connections to snap switches and receptacles using their side screw wiring

connection terminals. F. Apply matching touch-up paint as necessary.


A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to ensure the work is in conformance with applicable specifications and perform tests required by these specifications.

B. Submit test procedures in accordance with the Subcontract documents for approval and

perform approved tests. Do not perform tests without approved tests procedure. Furnish the equipment, personnel to perform the following tests: 1. Test receptacles for connection in accordance with wiring diagram. 2. Test equipment enclosure for continuity to grounding system. 3. Check tightness of cable connections of snap switches, receptacles, occupancy

sensors and disconnect switches. 4. Test operations of circuits and controls of switches, occupancy sensors and

receptacles.

C. Submit certified test reports for compliance with field quality control requirements.




SECTION 16140 - WIRE CONNECTION ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies work pertaining to wire-connection accessories, such as connectors, terminal lugs and fittings, bundling straps, insulating tape and resin.


C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

Not Used

D. Related Documents Not Used

E. Definitions Not Used


A. Qualifications: Select a manufacturer who is engaged in production of similar wire connection accessories.

B. Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications:

1. Comply with codes and regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. The work will follow the procedures set forth including related items in the technical specification.

2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2002. 3. UL: 486A, Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper

Conductors. 4. American Standards of Testing and Materials (ASTM): D149-97a, Standard Test

Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies; D257-99, Standard Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials; D412-98a, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension; D570-98, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; D638-00, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastic; D696-98, Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30C and 30C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; D792-00, Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement; D1000-99, Standard Test Method for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications; D1518-85(1998)e1, Standard Test Method for Thermal Transmittance of Textile Materials; D5034-95, Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test); D5035-95, Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method); D2240-00, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness; and G21-96, Standard Practice for Determining

WIRE CONNECTION ACCESSORIES 16140 - 1


Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C119.1, Sealed Insulated

Underground Connector System 600V 6. ITS: Directory of ITS Listed Products. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 130, 2003 Edition. 8. Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (2003).

C. Source Quality Control:

1. Connectors, terminal lugs and fittings listed, per referenced UL or ITS directory. 2. Factory testing: Submit certified copies of test report for cable splice and tap-

insulation/sealing kits as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with the Subcontract Documents and with the additional requirements as specified for each: 1. Shop Drawing for wire connection accessories and fittings, insulating tape, and

resin. 2. Certifications.


A. Mark each item in accordance with applicable reference standard.

B. Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling in shipment and to avoid damage.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. Connectors, Terminal Lugs and Fittings: 1. In accordance with UL 486A. 2. For 10AWG and smaller conductor cable: Tin-plated copper pressure connectors

with nonflammable, self-extinguishing insulation grip with temperature rating equal to that of conductor insulation.

3. For 8AWG to 4/0 AWG conductor cable: Tin-plated copper compression connectors and terminal lugs with nylon insulating sleeve for insulation grip.

4. For 250 Kcmil and larger conductor cable: Long-barrel, double-compression tin-plated copper connectors and terminal lugs with two-hole pad.

5. For multiple-conductor cable: Watertight aluminum fittings with stainless-steel pressure ring and set screws or compression cone for grounding of aluminum sheath of MC cable.

B. Bundling Straps:

1. Self-locking steel barb on one end, with tapered strap of self-extinguishing nylon, temperature rating minus 40F to plus 185F.

2. For outdoor use: Ultraviolet-resistant.



C. Insulating Tape:

1. Plastic tape: Vinyl plastic tape with rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, pliable at zero degree F with the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D1000-99: a. Thickness: 8.5 mils. b. Breaking strength: 20 pounds per inch width. c. Elongation: 200 percent. d. Dielectric breakdown: 10,000 volts. e. Insulation resistance, indirect method of electrolytic corrosion:

1,000,000 megohms. 2. Rubber tape: Silicone-rubber tape with silicone pressure-sensitive adhesive, with

the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D1000-99: a. Thickness: 12 mils. b. Breaking strength: 13 pounds per inch width. c. Elongation: 525 percent. d. Dielectric breakdown: 13,000 volts. e. Insulation resistance, indirect method of electrolytic corrosion:

1,000,000 megohms. 3. Arcproof tape: Flexible, coated one side with flame-retardant flexible elastomer,

self-extinguishing, non-combustible, with the following minimum properties: a. Thickness, ASTM D1000: 30 mils. b. Breaking strength, ASTM D5034-95 and D5035-95: 50 pounds per inch

width. c. Thermal conductivity, ASTM D1518-85: 0.0478 BTU per hour per

square foot per degree F. d. Electrical arc resistance: Withstand 200 amperes arc for 30 seconds.

4. Glass tape: Woven-glass fabric tape with pressure-sensitive thermosetting adhesive, with the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D1000-99: a. Nominal width: 3/4 inch. b. Thickness: Seven mils. c. Breaking strength: 170 pounds per inch width. d. Elongation: Five percent. e. Dielectric breakdown: 2,500 volts. f. Insulation resistance, indirect method of electrolytic corrosion: 5,000

megohms.

D. Epoxy Resin: Suitable for insulating and moisture sealing cable splices, with the following minimum properties: 1. Dielectric strength, ASTM D149-97a: 400 volts per mil. 2. Volume resistance, ASTM D257-99: 2.8 x 1015 ohm per centimeter cube at 30C. 3. Water absorption, ASTM D570-98:

a. 0.193 percent in 24 hours at 23C. b. 0.62 percent in 24 hours at 53C.

4. Tensile strength, ASTM D638-00: 8,000 psi. 5. Elongation, ASTM D638-00: 2.4 percent. 6. Coefficient of expansion, ASTM D696-98: 6.8 X 10-5 inch per inch per degree

C.



E. Cable splice and tap-insulation/sealing kit: Suitable for use on 600-volt, 90C cables, material compatible with cable insulation and jacket, meeting the seal test requirements of ANSI C119.1. 1. Heat-shrinkable tubing or wraparound heat-shrinkable sleeve: approved per

referenced UL or ITS directory, flame-retardant, corrosion-resistant thick-wall tubing with factory-applied sealant for field insulation on in-line splices and taps or wraparound-type sleeve for retrofit installation on existing splices and taps to provide a watertight seal and insulating encapsulation, with the following additional requirements: a. Material: Cross-linked polyolefin. b. Shrink ratio: 3 to 1 minimum. c. Physical properties:

1) Ultimate tensile strength: 2,350 psi, ASTM D412-98a. 2) Ultimate elongation: 350 percent, ASTM D412-98a. 3) Hardness, Shore D: 42, ASTM D2240-00. 4) Water absorption: 0.050 percent, ASTM D570-98, Method 6.1. 5) Specific gravity: 1.28, ASTM D792-00.

d. Electrical properties: 1) Dielectric strength: 450 volts per mil, ASTM D412-98a. 2) Volume resistivity: 1 x 1014 ohm cm, ASTM D257-99.

e. Thermal properties: 1) Continuous operating temp.: -55C to +135C. 2) Air oven aging (14 days at 175C):

Tensile strength: 2,680 psi. Elongation: 375 percent.

3) Low temp. flexibility (4 hours at -55C): No cracking when flexed.

4) Heat shock (4 hours at 250C): No cracking, flowing or dripping. f. Chemical properties:

1) Corrosivity: Non-corrosive. 2) Fungus resistance: Non-nutrient, ASTM G21-96. 3) Flammability: Self-extinguishing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Make wire and cable splices in outlet, junction or pull boxes, in cable troughs or in equipment cabinets. Splices in conduit are prohibited.

B. Secure connectors or terminal lugs to conductor so as to engage all strands equally.

C. Do not rupture insulation nor expose bare conductors.

D. Install compression connectors and terminal lugs using tools and pressure recommended

by manufacturer. Indent mark connectors and terminal lugs with number of die used for installation.

E. Apply anti-corrosion joint compound to connectors, terminal lugs and bolting pads before

installation.



F. Wrap ½-lapped layer of arcproof tape, glass tape overall on cable splices installed in air tunnels, ducts and shafts.

G. Install terminal fittings on multiple-conductor cable in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation. Completely seal cable from moisture.




SECTION 16410 - CIRCUIT BREAKERS, PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS


A. This section specifies furnishing, installing, connecting and testing of circuit breakers, panelboards and load centers.

B. Related Section 1. Division 1 - General Requirements


A. Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications including those in General Requirements Division 1. 1. Comply with codes and regulations of the Authority having jurisdiction. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. NEMA: AB1, PB1, ST20, 250. 4. ANSI: Z55.1. 5. UL: 50, 67, 198C, 489, 891, Electrical Construction Materials Directory. 6. ASTM: A276-06, B187/B187M-06. 7. ITS: Directory of ITS Listed Products.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Each item listed per referenced UL or ITS directory. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with the General Requirements Division 1 and with the additional requirements as specified for each: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Certification.


A. Mark each circuit breaker, panelboard and transformer in accordance with applicable reference standard.

B. Ship each unit securely packaged and labeled for safe handling and to avoid damage or distortion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

A. General Requirements: 1. Interchangeability: Components of the same type, size, rating, functional

characteristics and make are to be interchangeable.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS, PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS 16410 - 1


2. Finish for enclosures for enclosed circuit breakers, panelboards, emergency-service panelboards and load centers: a. Clean and degrease metallic surfaces. b. Prime with zinc primer. c. Finish with one coat of light-gray enamel, ANSI Z55.1, Color 61.

Minimum dry-film thickness: Two mils.

B. Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB1, UL 489, molded-case, bolt-on, quick-make/quick-break, mechanically trip-free switching mechanism, with thermal trip for inverse time-delay overcurrent protection and magnetic trip for instantaneous short-circuit protection. Shunt-trip device for tripping by ground-fault relay as shown. Frame size 225 amperes and above equipped with interchangeable thermal trip and adjustable magnetic-trip unit. Designed to carry continuous rating in ambient temperature of 40C with the following parameters as shown: 1. Number of poles. 2. Rated voltage. 3. Rated interrupting current. 4. Trip setting. 5. Frame size.

C. Enclosed Circuit Breaker: 1. NEMA AB1. 2. Circuit breaker: As shown and as specified. Overcurrent trip device coordinated

to provide selective tripping under overload conditions. 3. Enclosure:

a. Galvanized steel, surface-mounted, unless otherwise shown. b. Type:

1) Above-ground indoor locations and electrical rooms: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2) Tunnel areas and underground locations, except electrical rooms: NEMA 250, Type 12.

3) Outdoor locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards at locations shown, with bottom not less than 12 inches above floor. Use multiple-section panelboards to meet such spacings if necessary.

B. Mount panelboards and load centers with front straight and plumb.

C. When feeder serves more than one panelboard or panelboard section, install separate

junction box or provide adequate gutter area for termination of feeders and bus taps.

D. Install single and/or multiple-conductor cable in accordance with Section 16120. Connect branch circuit wires as shown. Connect neutral wire of branch circuit to neutral bar in panelboard.



E. Install load centers where shown.

F. Make conduit connections in accordance with Section 16130.

G. Make power cable connections to circuit breakers, integrally fused circuit breakers, fused switch units, neutral and ground bus bars in panelboard and load centers and enclosed circuit breakers by means of integral mechanical connectors. If such items are not furnished with integral mechanical connectors, make connections using compression connectors in accordance with Section 16140.

H. Ground panelboards, load centers and enclosed circuit-breaker enclosures in accordance

with Section 16420 and the NEC.

I. Apply matching touch-up paint where necessary. 3.02 DIRECTORY OF CIRCUITS

A. Furnish each panelboard and load center with legibly printed circuit directory located on inside of enclosure.


A. Furnish necessary equipment and perform the following tests per requirements of General Requirements Section: 1. Molded-case circuit breakers: Perform pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground

insulation resistance tests with 1,000V dc megger. Insulation resistance to be 50 megohms minimum.

2. Panel boards and load centers: Perform insulation-resistance tests of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one minute using 1,000V megger. Insulation resistance to be not less than manufacturer's recommended minimum or two megohms minimum.

3. Test circuit connections in accordance with wiring diagram. 4. Test panelboard and load-center enclosures for continuity to grounding system. 5. Check cable connections to circuit breakers and fused switch unit for tightness. 6. Check setting of adjustable magnetic trips for compliance with approved

coordination study.

B. Submit certified test reports.




SECTION 16420 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

B. Related Section


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Submit a comprehensive grounding and bonding plan for the approval of the SEPTA PM.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

2. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

4. Bonding Jumper: Copper standard conductors, terminated with copper ferrules.

5. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16420 - 1


2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 1 inch by10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install stranded copper conductors for all grounding applications.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Exothermic welded connectors.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermic welded connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors, minimum size #12 AWG, with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70 section 250-122, for copper conductors:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.



5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

B. Heat-Tracing: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

D. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to



main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Notify the SEPTA PM at least 48 hours in advance of any testing. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

B. Report all measured ground resistances and note those that exceed the following values:

1. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 5 ohm(s).

2. Maximum ground resistance value shall not exceed 5 ohms.




SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section covers lighting, including furnishing and installing lighting fixtures, mounting brackets between the limits stated herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.

B. The specified lighting fixtures are required for SEPTA Concourses, Stage 2 Phase 1 scope of work.

C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lighting fixtures and lamps. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports.

B. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 16050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. Contract Drawings

1.3 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

B. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”, (NEC)

C. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):

1. IES Approved Method for Life Performance Testing of General Lighting Incandescent Filament Lamps, LM-49.

2. IES Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric Measurements of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps, LM-45.

3. IES Approved Method for Life Performance Testing of Fluorescent Lamps, LM-40. 4. IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Fluorescent

Lamps, LM-9. 5. IES Approved Method for Life Testing of High Intensity Discharge Lamps, LM-47. 6. IES Approved Method for Photometric Measurements of High Intensity Discharge

Lamps, LM-51.

LIGHTING 16500 - 1


7. IES Approved Method for Photometric Testing of Indoor Fluorescent Luminaires, LM-41.

8. IES Approved Method for Photometric Testing of Indoor Luminaires Using High Intensity Discharge Lamps, LM-46.

9. IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products, LM-79.

10. IES Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources, LM-80.

11. IES Approved Method for Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature, LM-82.

12. IES Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Products, TM-21-11

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI C78.1, “Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics of Fluorescent Lamps - Rapid Start Types”.

2. ANSI C82.1, “Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts”. 3. ANSI C82.4, “Specifications for High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple

Supply Type)”. 4. ANSI C78 Series, Physical and Electrical Characteristics of High-Intensity Discharge

Lamps. 5. ANSI C78.377, Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. 6. ANSI C81 Series, Electric Lamp Bases and Holders.

E. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA LE1, “Fluorescent Luminaires”. 2. NEMA LE2, “HID Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS-NC) Ratings”. 3. NEMA FA1, “Outdoor Flood Lighting Equipment”. 4. NEMA SH5, “Tubular Steel, Aluminum and Prestressed Concrete Roadway Lighting

Poles”. 5. NEMA LSD 23-2002, “Lamp Seasoning for Fluorescent Dimming Systems.”

F. Underwriter’s Laboratories (U.L.) Standards.

G. Codes: Materials and installations shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code and any applicable Federal, State and local codes and regulations.

H. Listing: All luminaires shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the appropriate and current requirements of the National Electrical Code as verified by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), or tested to UL standards by other nationally recognized testing agency as acceptable to Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCAI); the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO); or other relevant code authority recognized by the jurisdiction within which the project is being constructed. Such a listing shall be provided for each luminaire type, and the appropriate label or labels shall be affixed to each luminaire in a location as required by code or law.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

LIGHTING 16500 - 2


B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. LED: Light-emitting Diode

E. HID: High-intensity discharge.

F. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

G. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

H. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast/driver and lamp.

I. LED Light Engine: a combination of an LED module and the associated control gear (driver).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Installation instructions.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

LIGHTING 16500 - 3


1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Active wall details (coordinate with installer of active wall). 3. Low-voltage power supplies. 4. Suspended ceiling components. 5. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires. 6. Jack arches. 7. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 8. Architectural coves. 9. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels.

10. Perimeter moldings.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures and/or LED light engine from manufacturer.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

LIGHTING 16500 - 4


E. LED Luminaires shall be photometrical tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 Standard

F. Life and operation of LED modules shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-80 Standard

G. White LEDs shall be binned to a minimum chromaticity in accordance with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2011 Standard

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. Also coordinate tape lighting layout(s) with the active wall and with architectural details such as coves.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Luminaire and lamp vendors shall provide warranty and level of support consistent with industry practice and expectations regardless of point of actual sale and/or chain of sale. Vendor shall provide warranty against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for the period as indicated in the following sections. All warranties shall commence on the date the installation is turned over to the project owner.

1. Warranty for LED Luminaires: Entire LED luminaire shall be provided with a minimum 5-Year Manufacturer’s warranty unless otherwise noted in the lighting fixture schedule. The Warranty shall commence on the date the LED luminaire installation is turned over to the project owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule in the drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

LIGHTING 16500 - 5


F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

H. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

K. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

2.3 LED LUMINAIRES AND DRIVERS

A. LED luminaire shall be constructed and heat-sinked to maintain LED performance as reported by LED manufacturer and exhibited in IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 test reports.

B. LEDs shall be of the color temperature and Color Rendering Index (CRI) as specified on the drawings. Minimum LED performance shall be 70% lumen maintenance at 50,000 hours operation at a forward current up to 700mA with junction temperature maintained at or below 135° C.

C. LED drivers shall be integral or remote type as specified on the drawings and shall provide continuous current matched to LED array requirements. Driver shall be High Power Factor (HPF) with <20% total harmonic distortion (THD) full load, Driver performance shall comply with the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR Part 15.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

LIGHTING 16500 - 6


A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

a. Exit signs specified on this project shall be connected to an unswitched hot leg of the area emergency lighting circuit.

2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge.

D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Drivers/Power Supplies: Distance between the driver/power supply and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by power supply manufacturer. Verify, with driver/power supply manufacturers, maximum distance between driver/power supply and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

LIGHTING 16500 - 7


3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Tape Lighting Installation and Support:

1. Affix tape lighting to metal surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Use specially-manufactured double-sided tape or other medium as directed by manufacturer.

2. Provide interconnecting wiring between low-voltage power supplies and tape lights. Wiring shall be as specified by manufacturer and shall be #12 gauge at a minimum. Wiring shall be installed in 3/4” rigid conduit if possible, but in the event that tape light cannot accept conduit, wiring shall be bundled together and be neat and workmanlike in appearance. Wiring and/or conduit shall be concealed.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes.


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to generator and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

C. Testing:

1. Verify installation is per the Contract Plans and manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Test lighting circuits for continuity and operation.

3. Test fixtures and equipment enclosures for continuity of grounding system.

4. Aim and adjust fixtures to provide required distribution pattern.

5. Contractor shall employ an independent testing agency to provide a report on the as-built

LIGHTING 16500 - 8


lighting levels within the tunnels.

D. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.

E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section “Conductors and Cables”.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent, compact fluorescent, and LED lamps/luminaires intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.


LIGHTING 16500 - 9



LIGHTING 16500 - 10